Yamaha DM1000_E DM1000 Owner's Manual DM1000E1

Yamaha DM1000 Yamaha DM1000

User Manual: Yamaha DM1000 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 382

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Owner’s Manual

Keep This Manual For Future Reference.

E

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may
cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all
installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on
different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in
is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer
authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service
Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED

IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW :

EARTH

BLUE :

NEUTRAL

BROWN :

LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E
or by the safety earth symbol
or coloured GREEN and YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig
håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte
batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd
samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som
rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti
asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä
käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE
MUSIC (U.K.) LTD.

NEDERLAND

THE NETHERLANDS

● Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen
back-up.

● This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory
back-up.

● Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de
batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde
van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service
Afdeiing:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing
Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
Tel. 030-2828425

● For the removal of the battery at the moment of the
disposal at the end of the service life please consult your
retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center
Address: Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL
UTRECHT
Tel: 030-2828425

● Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.

● Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small
chemical waste.

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the product.

The above warning is located on the side
of the unit

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8

9

Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug
has two blades with one wider than the other. A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete
outlet.

WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by
the manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms
or when unused for long periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus
has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.

4

Important Information

Important Information
Warnings
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

•

Connect this unit’s power cord only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this Owner’s Manual or as marked on the unit. Failure to do so is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
Do not allow water to enter this unit or allow the unit to become wet. Fire or electrical shock
may result.
Do not place heavy objects, including this unit, on top of the power cord. A damaged power
cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. In particular, be careful not to place heavy objects
on a power cord covered by a carpet.
Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit. Liquid or
metal objects inside this unit are a fire and electrical shock hazard.
Do not scratch, bend, twist, pull, or heat the power cord. A damaged power cord is a fire
and electrical shock hazard.
Do not remove the unit’s cover. You could receive an electrical shock. If you think internal
inspection, maintenance, or repair is necessary, contact your dealer.
Do not modify the unit. Doing so is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
If lightning begins to occur, turn off the power switch of the unit as soon as possible, and
unplug the power cable plug from the electrical outlet.
If there is a possibility of lightning, do not touch the power cable plug if it is still connected.
Doing so may be an electrical shock hazard.
Use only the included power cord for this unit. Using other types may be a fire and electrical
shock hazard.
This unit has rear-panel slots for installing mini-YGDAI cards. For technical reasons, certain card combinations are not supported. Before installing any cards, check the Yamaha
web site (see page 6) to see whether your card is compatible. Also check the total number of
cards that can be installed in the unit. Installing cards that are not endorsed by Yamaha may
cause electrical shock, fire, or damage to the unit.
If the power cord is damaged (i.e., cut or a bare wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a
replacement. Using the unit with a damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
If you notice any abnormality, such as smoke, odor, or noise, or if a foreign object or liquid
gets inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
Consult your dealer for repair. Using the unit in this condition is a fire and electrical shock
hazard.
Should this unit be dropped or the cabinet be damaged, turn the power switch off, remove
the power plug from the AC outlet, and contact your dealer. If you continue using the unit
without heeding this instruction, fire or electrical shock may result.

Cautions
•

•
•

Keep this unit away from the following locations:
— Locations exposed to oil splashes or steam, such as near cooking stoves, humidifiers, etc.
— Unstable surfaces, such as a wobbly table or slope.
— Locations exposed to excessive heat, such as inside a car with all the windows closed, or
places that receive direct sunlight.
— Locations subject to excessive humidity or dust accumulation.
Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting it from an AC outlet. Never pull the cord. A
damaged power cord is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard.
Do not touch the power plug with wet hands. Doing so is a potential electrical shock hazard.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Operating Notes

•

•

•
•

•
•
•

5

This unit has ventilation holes along the front, rear, top, and sides to prevent the internal
temperature from rising too high. Do not block them. Blocked ventilation holes are a fire
hazard. In particular, do not operate the unit while it’s on its side, is upside down, or while
it’s covered with a cloth or dust sheet.
If you are using the optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge, do not hold only the MB1000
when moving this unit. Otherwise, the meter brackets may be damaged, the main unit may
malfunction, or you may be injured if the unit falls.
This unit is heavy. Use two or more people to carry it.
When you transport or move this unit with the MB1000 attached, do not permit impact or
stress on the cable connector that connects the MB1000 to this unit. Otherwise, malfunction may occur.
This unit is equipped with a dedicated ground connection to prevent electrical shock.
Before connecting the power plug to an AC outlet, be sure to ground the unit.
To relocate the unit, turn the power switch off, remove the power plug from the AC outlet,
and remove all connecting cables. Damaged cables may cause fire or electrical shock.
If you know you will not use this unit for a long period of time, such as when going on vacation, remove the power plug from the AC outlet. Leaving it connected is a potential fire hazard.

Operating Notes
•
•

•
•

•
•
•

•

XLR-type connectors are wired as follows: pin 1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–).
The performance of components with moving contacts, such switches, rotary controls, faders, and connectors, deteriorates over time. The rate of deterioration depends on the operating environment and is unavoidable. Consult your dealer about replacing defective
components.
Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise. If noise occurs, use the telephone
away from the unit.
If the message “WARNING Low Battery!” appears when you turn on this unit, contact your
dealer as soon as possible about replacing the internal data backup battery. The unit will still
operate correctly, but data other than the presets will be lost.
Before replacing the batteries, back up your data to a memory card, or another unit by using
MIDI Bulk Dump.
The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight noise into nearby radios and TVs. If noise
occurs, relocate the affected equipment.
When connecting D-sub cables, be sure to tighten the screws on both sides of the connector
securely. To disconnect the cable, loosen the screws completely, then remove the cable by
holding the connector part. Do not remove the plug by pulling the cable while the screws
are still attached. Otherwise, the connector may be damaged, leading to malfunction.
When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some
devices may output noise, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise your
speakers may be damaged.

Interference
This unit uses high-frequency digital circuits that may cause interference on radio and television equipment located nearby. If interference is a problem, relocate the affected equipment. Using a mobile telephone near the unit may induce noise. In this case use the
telephone away from the unit.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

6

Important Information

Exclusion of Certain Responsibility
Manufacturer, importer, or dealer shall not be liable for any incidental damages including
personal injury or any other damages caused by improper use or operation of this unit.

Trademarks
ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation. Apogee is a trademark of Apogee Electronics, Inc.
Apple, Mac, and Power Macintosh are registered trademarks and Mac OS is a trademark of
Apple Corporation, Inc. HUI is a trademark of Mackie Designs, Inc. Intel and Pentium are
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Nuendo is a registered trademark of Steinberg
Media Technologies AG. Pro Tools is a trademark or registered trademark of Digidesign
and/or Avid Technology, Inc. Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and Teac
are registered trademarks of Teac Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc. Waves is a trademark of Waves, Inc. Yamaha is a
trademark of Yamaha Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
holders and are hereby acknowledged.

Copyright
No part of this unit, its software, or this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or distributed
in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Corporation.
© 2003 Yamaha Corporation. All rights reserved.

Yamaha Web Site
Further information about this unit, related products, and other Yamaha professional audio
equipment is available on the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at:
.

Package Contents
•
•
•
•
•

DM1000 Digital Production Console
CD-ROM
Power cord
This manual
Studio Manager Installation Guide

Optional Extras
•
•
•
•

MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge
SP1000 Wooden Side Panels
RK1 Rack Mount Kit
mini YGDAI I/O cards

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

About this Owner’s Manual

7

About this Owner’s Manual
This Owner’s Manual explains how to operate the DM1000 Digital Production Console.
The table of contents can help you familiarize yourself with the manual’s organization and
to locate tasks and topics The index can help you locate specific information.
Before diving in, it’s recommend that you read the “Operating Basics” chapter, starting on
page 27.
Each chapter in this manual discusses a specific section or function of the DM1000. The
Input and Output Channels are explained in the following chapters: “Input Channels,” “Bus
Outs,” and “Aux Sends.” Where possible, these chapters have been organized in order of signal flow, from input to output.

Conventions Used in this Manual
The DM1000 features two types of buttons: physical buttons that you can press (e.g.,
ENTER and DISPLAY) and buttons that appear on the display pages. References to physical
buttons are enclosed in square brackets, for example, “press the [ENTER] button.” References to display page buttons are not emphasized, for example, “move the cursor to the ON
button.”
You can select display pages by using the [DISPLAY] buttons or the Left Tab Scroll, Right
Tab Scroll, and F1–4 buttons below the display. In order to simplify explanations, the procedures reference only the [DISPLAY] button method. See “Selecting Display Pages” on
page 28 for details on all the ways in which pages can be selected.

Installing the DM1000
The DM1000 should be placed on a strong and stable surface, in a location that complies
with the warnings and cautions listed in the previous sections.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional
purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
Copying of commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is
strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

8

Contents

Contents
1

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2

Control Surface & Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installing an Optional Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3

4

5

6

7

Operating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Display Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Fader Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Encoder Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

Connections and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wordclock Connections and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input and Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41

Analog I/O & Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR Digital Inputs . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dithering Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51

Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Input Channels from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pairing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using MS Stereo Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59

41
44
47
51
52
53
55
56
57
59
60
71
73
76
77

Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

About Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Out 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pairing Buses or Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuating Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8

27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
37

79
80
81
86
87
88
89

Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Aux Out 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setting Aux Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Panning Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Contents

9

Input & Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Input Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Patching Direct Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Insert Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

10

Control Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Control Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Control Room Monitor and Solo Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using the Control Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Using the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Using the Talkback Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

11

Surround Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Using Surround Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Surround Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

12

Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Grouping & Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

13

Internal Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
About the Internal Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
About Surround Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
About Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

14

Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
About Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Storing and Recalling Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Auto Scene Memory Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fading Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Recalling Scenes Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Sorting Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

15

Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
About the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
General Library Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Using Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

16

Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
About Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Setting Up for Automix Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Recording an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Punching In & Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
[SEL] Button Functions While the [AUTO] Button Indicator Is On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Playing Back an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Automix Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Automix Memory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fader1 &2 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Editing Events Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

17

Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
About Remote Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Pro Tools Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Nuendo Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Other DAW Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
MIDI Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Machine Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

9

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

10

Contents

18

MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
MIDI & the DM1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
MIDI Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

19

Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Changing the Input and Output Connector Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer) . . . . . . . 255
Using the Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Using the User Defined Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Using Operation Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Cascading Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Using the AD824 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Checking the Battery and the System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Initializing the DM1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Calibrating the Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Appendix A: Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

USER DEFINED KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Input Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Initial Input Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Output Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Initial Output Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
GPI Trigger Source List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Preset EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

General Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Analog Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Analog Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Digital Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Digital Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
I/O Slot Spec (1–2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Control I/O Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
REMOTE Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
CONTROL Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Appendix C: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Scene Memory to Program Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Appendix D: About Optional Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Installing the SP1000 Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Rack Mounting the DM1000 Using the RK1 Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Welcome

11

1 Welcome

1

■ Hardware Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

17 touch-sensitive 100-mm motorized faders (for touch-sensitive selection of channels,
or for punching in and out during Automix recording)
Faders can set levels for Input Channels, Aux Sends, and Bus Outs.
Rotary Encoders enable you to control panning for each channel, AUX send levels, and
various parameters.
Six selectable software layers determine the function of channel faders and Encoders.
320 x 240 dot LCD display with fluorescent backlighting
Buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section enable direct editing of
channel mix parameters.
12 USER-DEFINED KEYS enable you to assign functions to control DM1000 internal
parameters.
Two expansion slots for optional digital I/O, AD, and DA cards.

■ Sonic Specifications
•
•
•
•
•

Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling A/D converters
Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling D/A converters
20 Hz through 40 kHz frequency response at 96 kHz sampling rate.
106 dB typical dynamic range
32-bit internal signal processing (58-bit accumulator)

■ Inputs and Outputs
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

16 mic/line inputs with switchable +48 V phantom power and 4 line inputs
12 Omni Outs assignable to Stereo Out, Bus Out, Monitor Out, and Input Channel
Direct Outs.
Two optional slots allow a maximum of 32 inputs.
Two 2-track digital inputs, with sampling rate converters capable of converting sampling rates of 44.1 kHz through 96 kHz.
Double Channel support for recording and playing at 88.2/96 kHz on 44.1/48 kHz legacy multi-track digital recorders.
You can cascade two DM1000s while remaining in the digital domain.
Input patches enable assignment of input signals to desired signal paths.
Output patches enable assignment of Bus Out signals and Input Channel Direct Outs to
desired output jacks.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Welcome

Thank you for choosing the Yamaha DM1000 Digital Production Console.
The compact DM1000 Digital Console features 24-bit/96 kHz digital audio processing
without compromise, as well as 48-channel simultaneous mixing. The DM1000 covers a
broad range of needs and applications, including multi-track recording, 2-channel mixdown, and cutting-edge surround sound production. This integrated, comprehensive
audio system features remote control function for DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations) as
popularized by the DM2000 and 02R96 Digital Mixing Consoles.
The DM1000 offers the following features:

12

Chapter 1—Welcome

■ Channel Configuration
•
•
•
•

Simultaneous mixing of up to 48 Input Channels. Group multiple channels and pair
channels for stereo.
8 Bus Outs and 8 AUX Sends. Buses 1-8 can be routed to Stereo Buses for use as Group
Buses.
Channel library for storing and recalling the channel settings for each Input Channel
and Output Channel.
4-band EQ and dynamics processor equip all channels. Dynamics processor and EQ settings can be stored in libraries and recalled.

■ Effects
•
•

Four high-quality multi-channel effects (Apply effects via AUX Sends or Channel
Inserts).
Effect library for storing and recalling effect settings.

■ Scene Memory
•
•

Scene memories for storing and recalling the mix settings as Scenes.
Snapshot style automation with Scene memories recallable via Automix.

■ Surround Sound
•
•

Supports 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 channel surround sound production.
Joystick for adjusting each channel's surround pan.

■ Automix
•
•

Automated controls of channel faders and parameters via Automix. (Even more powerful when combined with an MTR, DAW, and MIDI sequence system.)
Control parameters of connected MIDI devices via Automix.

■ Remote Control
•
•
•

Control and manage your DM1000 from your Mac or PC using bundled Studio Manager software
Remote Layers for controlling popular DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations), including
Pro Tools, Nuendo, etc.
Control an external recorder via MMC commands and P2 commands.

■ MIDI
•
•

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Equipped with MIDI ports and a USB port for computer connection.
Scene recall and mix parameter changes via MIDI

Control Surface & Rear Panel

13

2 Control Surface & Rear Panel
2

Control Surface
SELECTED CHANNEL Section (p. 19)

2

1
+48V

OFF

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

6

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

7

+48V

ON

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

9

+48V

ON

OFF

10

+48V

ON

OFF

11

+48V

ON

OFF

12

+48V

ON

OFF

13

+48V

ON

OFF

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

16

15

14

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

PAD

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

-60

-16

0

0

-60

-16

10

TALKBACK LEVEL

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

10

PHONES

PHONES
LEVEL

Headphones
& Talkback
Section
(p. 21)

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX

MIDI

AUX SELECT
Section (p. 16)

DIO

SETUP

REMOTE

UTILITY

METER

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

-4

-6

VIEW

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

OVER
0

EFFECT

Display Section
(p. 18)

OUTPUT
PATCH

SCENE

AUX SELECT
DISPLAY

AUX5

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

AUX6

AUX7

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

ENCODER
MODE Section
(p. 16)

1

2

3

4

-8
-10

-12

-12
5

6

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

7

8

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

MONITOR
Section (p. 22)

DISPLAY

HIGH

SOLO

CLEAR

HIGH MID

2TR D1

2TR D2

LOW MID

SLOT

BUS

Q

-6

-8
-10

MONITOR

EQUALIZER
DISPLAY

DISPLAY

FREQUENCY

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

GAIN
STEREO

DIRECT
INC

DEC

GRAB

Data Entry
Section (p. 21)

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

DISPLAY
FADER

STORE

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

ENTER

FADER MODE
Section (p. 16)

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SEL

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

SCENE MEMORY
Section (p. 20)

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

0

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

0

10

5

15

5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5
0

10

5

15

10

15

10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20

20

15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30

30

20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40

40

30

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50

50

60
70

60

40
50

1
17

2
33

AUX 1

18

3
34

AUX 2

19

4
35

AUX 3

20

5
36

AUX 4

21

6
37

AUX 5

22

7
38

AUX 6

23

8
39

AUX 7

24

9
40

AUX 8

25

10
41

BUS 1

Channel Strip Section (p. 15)

26

11
42

BUS 2

27

12
43

BUS 3

28

13
44

BUS 4

29

14
45

BUS 5

30

70

15
46

BUS 6

31

LAYER Section
(p. 20)

16
47

BUS 7

32

48

BUS 8

STEREO

STEREO Section (p. 15)

USER DEFINED KEYS
Section (p. 21)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface & Rear Panel

AD Input Section (p. 14)
DISPLAY ACCESS Section
(p. 17)

14

Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

AD Input Section
1
2

1
+48V

OFF

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

OFF

6

+48V

ON

OFF

7

+48V

ON

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

9

+48V

ON

OFF

10

+48V

ON

OFF

11

+48V

ON

OFF

12

+48V

ON

OFF

13

+48V

ON

OFF

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

-60
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16
GAIN

-60

-16

+48V

ON

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

2

PAD

-16

16

15

14

+48V

ON

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

3
4
5

A +48V ON/OFF switches 1–16
These switches turn on or off the +48 V phantom power feed to each INPUT.
B PAD switches 1–16
These switches turn on or off the 20 dB pad (attenuator) for each AD Input.
C GAIN controls 1–16
These controls adjust input sensitivity for each AD Input. Input sensitivity is +4 dB to
–40 dB when the Pad is on, and –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off.
D PEAK indicators 1–16
These indicators light up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping. Adjust the Pad
switch and GAIN control so that the indicator rarely lights up at signal peak.
E SIGNAL indicators
These indicators light up when the input signal level is 20 dB below nominal.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface

15

Channel Strip Section

2

SEL

3

SOLO

4

ON

1

+10

0

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

20

15

30

20

40

30

50

40

60
70

50

5
1
17

33

AUX 1

B [SEL] buttons 1–16
These buttons enable you to select desired channels. The [SEL] button indicator for the currently-selected channel lights up. The channel selected by each [SEL] button depends on the
currently-selected button in the LAYER section (see page 20).
These buttons also allow you to select channels for Automix recording and playback, create
or cancel channel pairs, and add channels to (or remove them from) Fader, Mute, EQ, and
Compressor groups.
C [SOLO] buttons 1–16
These buttons solo the selected channels. The [SOLO] button indicator of the currently-soloed channel lights up.
D [ON] buttons 1–16
These buttons turn the selected channels on or off. The [ON] button indicators for On
channels light up.
E Channel faders 1–16
These are touch-sensitive 100 mm motorized faders. Depending on the button selected in
the FADER MODE Section (see page 16), the faders will adjust the input or output level of
the selected channels or buses, or adjust the AUX Send level.

STEREO Section
1
AUTO

2

A [AUTO] button
When this button is turned on, you can use the [SEL] buttons 1–16 to turn the Automix
function on or off.

SEL

3
ON

B [SEL] button
Selects the Stereo Bus.
C [ON] button
Turns the selected bus on or off.

0
5

10

15

D [STEREO] fader
This touch-sensitive 100 mm motorized fader adjusts the final output level of the Stereo
Bus.

20

30

40

50
60
70

4
STEREO

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

2
Control Surface & Rear Panel

A Encoders 1–16
These rotary Encoders adjust the channel parameter settings. Depending on the button
selected in the ENCODER MODE section (see page 16), the Encoders will adjust the channel pan setting (when the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button indicator is lit), the AUX Send
level (when the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button indicator is lit), or any parameter (when
the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button indicator is lit).
These Encoders also feature push switches that are used to view the value of the parameter
currently assigned to the Encoder, or to punch in or out during Automix recording.

1

16

Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

AUX SELECT Section
1

AUX SELECT
DISPLAY

2

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

AUX5

AUX6

AUX7

AUX8

A [DISPLAY] button
This button displays an Aux-related page (see page 97).
B [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons
These buttons select an Aux Send. When you press a button to select an AUX Send, the corresponding button indicator lights up.

ENCODER MODE Section
1

ENCODER MODE
DISPLAY

PAN

AUX

ASSIGN

2 3 4
A [DISPLAY] button
This button displays an Encoder page, enabling you to assign functions to Encoders 1–16
(see page 35). To use a function assigned to an Encoder, press the [ASSIGN] button to turn
on the button indicator.
B [PAN] button
If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as channel panpots.
C [AUX] button
If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as channel Aux Send. The Send destination is selected in the AUX SELECT Section.
D [ASSIGN] button
If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as
assignable controls for the parameters assigned on the Encoder pages. (By default, Input
Patches of the corresponding Input Channels are assigned.)

FADER MODE Section
FADER MODE

1

FADER
AUX

2
3

A [FADER/AUX] button
Toggles between the desired parameter to be adjusted by channel faders 1–16. The faders
adjust the Channel or Bus level when the FADER indicator is lit, and adjust the Aux Send
level when the AUX indicator is lit.
B FADER indicator
C AUX indicator
An indicator lights up to indicate the parameter selected via the [FADER/AUX] button.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface

17

DISPLAY ACCESS Section
1 2 3 4

2

DISPLAY ACCESS

DIO

SETUP

UTILITY

MIDI

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

INPUT
PATCH

EFFECT

OUTPUT
PATCH

7
8
L
K

SCENE

M N O P
A [AUTOMIX] button
This button displays an Automix page, enabling you to make Automix settings (see
page 181).
B [DIO] button
This button displays a DIO page, enabling you to make digital I/O settings (see page 53).
C [SETUP] button
This button displays a Setup page, enabling you to make the DM1000 internal settings.
D [UTILITY] button
This button displays a Utility page, enabling you to use the internal oscillators and view
information about installed optional cards.
E [MIDI] button
This button displays a MIDI page, enabling you to make MIDI settings (see page 238).
F [REMOTE] button
This button displays a Remote page, enabling you to control a DAW remotely and make
machine control settings (see page 205).
G [METER] button
This button displays a Meter page, which displays Input Channel levels, or Bus Out or Aux
Send Out levels (see page 37).
H [VIEW] button
This button displays a View page, enabling you to view and set mix parameters for a specific
channel (see page 69).
I [PAIR/GROUP] button
This button displays a Pair/Group page, enabling you to pair channels, group multiple faders, or mute channels (see page 74 and 141).
J [ /INSERT/DELAY] button
This button displays a /INS/DLY page, enabling you to switch the signal phase, set the
signal to be inserted, or set the delay parameters (see page 60 and 150).
K [INPUT PATCH] button
This button displays an In Patch page, enabling you to patch input signals and Bus Out signals to the desired Input Channels (see page 105).
L [OUTPUT PATCH] button
This button displays an Out Patch page, enabling you to patch Bus Out and Insert Out signals to the desired destination (see page 108).
M [PAN/SURROUND] button
This button displays a Pan/Surr page, enabling you to adjust stereo or surround pan settings
(see page 67 and 121).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface & Rear Panel

6
5
9
J

AUTOMIX

18

Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

N [DYNAMICS] button
This button displays a Dynamics page, enabling you to control channel gates and compressors (see page 62).
O [EFFECT] button
This button displays an Effect page, enabling you to edit the internal effects processors and
use optional plug-in cards (see page 151).
P [SCENE] button
This button displays a Scene page, enabling you to store and recall Scenes (see page 155).

Display Section
OVER
0

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

-4

-6

-6

-8

1

F1

5

F2

F3

-8

-10

-10

-12

-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

2

3

F4

4

6

A Display
This is a 320 x 240 dot LCD display with a fluorescent backlight.
B Stereo meters
These 32-segment level meters display the final output level of the Stereo Bus.
C Contrast control
This control adjusts the display contrast.
D [F1]–[F4] buttons
These buttons select a page from a multi-page screen. Selecting a tab at the bottom of the
screen using one of these buttons displays the corresponding page. (See page 28 for more
information on displaying a page.)
E Left Tab Scroll [ ] button
F Right Tab Scroll [ ] button
If there are more pages available than the four whose tabs are currently displayed, use these
buttons to display the additional tabs. These buttons are available only when the left or right
Tab Scroll arrow appears.

Tab Scroll arrow

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface

19

SELECTED CHANNEL Section
1

5

2

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING

J
6

2

HIGH
Q

2

3
4
N

3

4

5

6

7

8

STEREO

DIRECT

Control Surface & Rear Panel

1

EQUALIZER
DISPLAY

DISPLAY

HIGH MID

FREQUENCY

7
8

LOW MID

LOW
GAIN

9
K
L

M
GRAB

A ROUTING [DISPLAY] button
This button displays a Routing page, enabling you to route selected channels to the desired
Bus, and adjust the level of the signals routed from Buses 1–8 to the Stereo Bus (see page 68
and 83).
B ROUTING [1]–[8] buttons
C ROUTING [STEREO] button
D ROUTING [DIRECT] button
These buttons select the desired Bus for routing the selected Input Channel signals. The corresponding button indicator for the currently-selected Bus lights up.
E EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button
This button displays an EQ page, enabling you to set the selected channel equalizer (see
page 64 and 65).
F EQUALIZER [HIGH] button
G EQUALIZER [HIGH-MID] button
H EQUALIZER [LOW-MID] button
I EQUALIZER [LOW] button
These buttons select the EQ band (HIGH, HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, LOW). The corresponding button indicator of the currently-selected band lights up.
J EQUALIZER [Q] control
This control adjusts the currently-selected band Q.
K EQUALIZER [FREQUENCY] control
This control adjusts the currently-selected band frequency.
L EQUALIZER [GAIN] control
This control adjusts the currently-selected band gain.
M [GRAB] button
This button enables Joystick control of the surround pan setting for the currently-selected
Input Channel. This button can be turned on only when the surround pan setting is available.
N Joystick
The Joystick is used to set the surround pan position (see page 126).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

20

Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

LAYER Section
2

1

3

A [1-16]/[17-32]/[33-48] buttons
These buttons select an Input Channel Layer. The channel strips control Channels 1–16,
17–32, or 33–48, depending on the button selected here. (See page 31 for more information
on Layers.)
B [REMOTE 1]/[REMOTE 2] buttons
These buttons select the Remote Layer, which can be used to control external devices,
including DAWs. (See page 205 for more information on the Remote Layer.)
C [MASTER] button
This button selects the Master Layer, which can be used to control Bus and Aux Send. (See
page 31 for more information on the Master Layer.)

SCENE MEMORY Section
SCENE MEMORY

STORE

RECALL

12 3 4 5
A Scene memory display
The number of the currently-selected Scene memory is displayed here.
B Edit indicator
If you adjust a mix parameter after a Scene has been recalled or stored, a dot flashes here.
C [STORE] button
This button enables you to store the current mix settings (See page 155 for more information on Scene Memories).
D Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons
These buttons select a Scene to store or recall. Pressing the Scene Up [ ] button increments
the selection; pressing the Scene Down [ ] button decrements the selection. Holding down
either key increments or decrements the selection continuously.
E [RECALL] button
This button recalls the Scene memory selected by the Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface

21

USER DEFINED KEYS Section
1

A [DISPLAY] button
This button displays a User Def page, enabling you to assign functions to buttons 1–12 (see page 257).

USER DEFINED
KEYS
DISPLAY

2

Data Entry Section
3

DEC

INC

A Parameter wheel
This control adjusts the parameter values shown on the display. Turning it
clockwise increases the value; turning it counterclockwise decreases the value.
This wheel also enables you to scroll a displayed list and select a character for
entry (see page 30).

4

B [ENTER] button
This button activates a selected (highlighted) button on the display, and confirms the edited parameter values.

1

C [DEC] & [INC] buttons
These buttons increment or decrement a parameter value by one. Pressing the
[INC] button increments the value; pressing the [DEC] button decrements
the value. Holding down either key increments or decrements the value continuously.

2
ENTER

D Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons
These buttons move the cursor around the display pages, or select parameters
and options. Holding down a cursor button moves the cursor continuously
in the respective direction.

Headphones & Talkback Section
1

2
0

10

TALKBACK LEVEL

3

4
0

10

PHONES
LEVEL

PHONES

A TALKBACK LEVEL control
This control sets the level of the built-in talkback microphone. (See page 119 for more
information on the Talkback function.)
B Talkback mic
This built-in microphone is used for talkback.
C PHONES LEVEL control
This control sets the level of the PHONES. (See page 115 for more information on monitoring through the headphones.)
D PHONES jack
You can connect a set of stereo headphones to this stereo phone jack.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

2
Control Surface & Rear Panel

B [1]–[12] buttons
These buttons perform the functions assigned in the User Def pages.

22

Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

MONITOR Section
1

MONITOR
DISPLAY

2
SOLO

CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

SLOT

BUS

4
STEREO

7
DIMMER TALKBACK

3
5
6
8

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

9 J K
A [DISPLAY] button
This button displays a Monitor page, enabling you to adjust monitor settings (see page 115
and 131).
B [SOLO] indicator
This indicator flashes when a single or multiple channels are soloed.
C [CLEAR] button
This button “unsolos” all soloed Channels.
D [2TR D1] button
E [2TR D2] button
F [STEREO] button
These buttons select the Control Room Monitor output signal. When the [2TR D1] button
indicator is lit, the signal at the 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 jack is selected. When the [2TR D2]
button indicator is lit, the signal at the 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 jack is selected. When the
[STEREO] button indicator is lit, the Stereo Bus signal is selected.
If you change the parameter setting on the Monitor | Solo/C-R page (see page 116), you can
monitor the OMNI IN signal, instead of the 2TR IN DIGITAL signal, when you press the
[2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.
G [SLOT] button
H [BUS] button
These buttons select the Surround Monitor signal source. When the [BUS] button indicator
is lit, the Bus 1–8 signals are selected. When the [SLOT] button indicator is lit, the signals
from Slots 1/2 are selected. (See page 131 for more information on the Surround Monitor.)
I [DIMMER] button
This button activates the Dimmer function, which lowers the Monitor and Surround Monitor signals. This function is convenient when you wish to talk in the control room during
mixdown. The [TALKBACK] button indicator flashes while the Talkback function is active
(see page 116).
J [TALKBACK] button
This button turns on the Talkback function. While the button indicator is lit, the Talkback
mic signal is sent to any desired Bus or Slot (see page 119).
K MONITOR LEVEL control
This control adjusts the monitor level.
Note:
• The DM1000 allows you to patch source signals to any output jack (other than the PHONES
jack). Therefore, the console does not feature a dedicated monitor output jack. Instead, you
can route monitoring signals to any desired output jack (typically to OMNI OUT jacks
1–12).
• By default, monitoring signals are assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 11 and 12.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

23

Rear Panel

Rear Panel
AD Input and Output Section (p. 23)

2
15
3

OMNI
IN

14
2

13
1

12

11

10

9

12

11

10

9

INPUT

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

SLOT

Control Surface & Rear Panel

16
4

SLOT

POWER
ON
OFF

AC IN

SMPTE IN

METER

REMOTE

MIDI
OUT

IN

TO HOST
USB

CONTROL

WORD CLOCK
OUT

Digital I/O & Control Section (p. 24)

1

2

2

AES/EBU

Power Section (p. 25)

2TR IN
DIGITAL

1
IN

COAXIAL COAXIAL

AES/EBU

SLOT Section (p. 24)

AD Input and Output Section
1

16
4

15
3

OMNI
IN

14
2

13
1

12

11

10

9

12

11

10

9

INPUT

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

2
A INPUT connectors 1–16
These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level and microphone signals. The nominal signal level
ranges from –60 dB through +4 dB.

3
Male XLR plug

1 (ground)
3 (cold)

2 (hot)

B OMNI IN connectors 1–4
These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level signals. The nominal signal
level is +4 dB.
C OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors output any Bus signals and
channel Direct Out signals. The nominal signal level is +4 dB.

Female XLR plug

2 (hot)
3 (cold)

1 (ground)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

24

Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

SLOT Section
SLOT

SLOT

1
A SLOT 1 & 2
You can insert optional mini-YGDAI cards into these slots. (See page 26 for more information on installing these cards.)

Digital I/O & Control Section
1
METER

SMPTE IN

REMOTE

MIDI
OUT

CONTROL

2

IN

TO HOST
USB

WORD CLOCK
OUT

3

4

5

6 7

2TR IN
DIGITAL

1
IN

8

2

1

2

AES/EBU

COAXIAL COAXIAL

AES/EBU

9

JL

K

A METER connector
This connector enables you to connect an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge.
B CONTROL connector
This 25-pin D-sub connector provides access to the GPI (General Purpose Interface).
Through this connector, the Talkback function can be turned on and off from external
equipment, or external equipment can be started or stopped from the DM1000 (see
page 259).
C SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT connector
This balanced XLR-3-31-type connector is used to input SMPTE timecode to synchronize
the Automix function.
D REMOTE connector
This 9-pin D-Sub connector is used to remotely control external equipment that supports
the Yamaha AD824 and Sony P2 Protocol (remote control commands that are used on TASCAM DA-98HR and other professional video recorders). Use a reverse cable to connect an
AD824, and use a straight cable to connect a P2 Protocol device. Use a reverse cable to connect two DM1000s to each other. Connecting two DM1000s to each other enables communication via MIDI Protocol and SOLO Logic synchronization.
E MIDI IN & OUT ports
These standard MIDI IN and OUT ports enable you to connect the DM1000 to other MIDI
equipment.
F TO HOST USB port
This USB port enables you to connect a computer equipped with a USB port.
G WORD CLOCK OUT connector
This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal from the DM1000 to a connected external
device.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Rear Panel

25

H WORD CLOCK IN connector
This BNC connector inputs a wordclock signal from a connected external device to the
DM1000.

J 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2
This phono connector outputs consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. The connector
is typically used to connect the digital stereo input (consumer format) of a DAT recorder,
MD recorder, or CD recorder.
K 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1
This XLR-3-32-type connector accepts AES/EBU format digital audio. The connector is
typically used to connect the digital stereo output (AES/EBU format) of a DAT recorder,
MD recorder, or CD recorder.
L 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2
This phono connector accepts consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. The connector
is typically used to connect the digital stereo output (consumer format) of a DAT recorder,
MD recorder, or CD recorder.

Power Section
1
POWER
ON
OFF

2

AC IN

3

A Grounding screw
Be sure to use this screw to ground the DM1000 to protect yourself against electrical shock.
The supplied power cord features a three-pin plug. If the ground terminal of the AC outlet
is grounded, then the unit will be grounded sufficiently via the power cord. If the AC outlet
does not provide a suitable ground, this screw must be connected to a suitable ground
point. Grounding is also an effective method for eliminating hum, interference, and other
noise.
B POWER ON/OFF switch
This switch turns the power to the DM1000 on or off.
Note: To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers, turn on your audio equipment in
the following order (reverse this order when turning off)—sound sources, multitrack and master recorders, DM1000, monitoring power amplifiers.

C AC IN connector
This connector enables you to connect the DM1000 to an AC outlet via the supplied power
cord.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

2
Control Surface & Rear Panel

I 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1
This XLR-3-31-type connector outputs AES/EBU format digital audio. The connector is
typically used to connect the digital stereo input (AES/EBU format) of a DAT recorder, MD
recorder, or CD recorder.

26

Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

Installing an Optional Card
Visit the following Yamaha Pro Audio web site to ensure that the card you are installing is
supported by the DM1000. Also, verify the number of cards (including other Yamaha or
third-party cards) that can be installed in the unit.
.
Follow the steps below to install an optional mini-YGDAI card.
1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off.
2 Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below.
Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use.
5
3

OM
N
IN I

14
2

13
1

12
12

11
10

11
PO
W
ON ER
OF
F

9

10

DIG
MO ITAL
DE MIX
L D IN
M1 G C
000 ON
SO
LE

9

INP
UT

8
7

8

6

7

AC
IN

6
ME
TE
R
CO

5
4

5

SL
OT

4

NT

RO
L

SM

3
2

3

PT

E IN

2

1
1

RE

MO
TE
SL
OT

MID

I

OU
T

IN

TO
H
USOST
B

WO
RD
OU
T

CL
OC
K
IN
1

2

AE
S/E
BU

CO
AX
IAL

2T
DIGR IN
ITA
L
2
1
CO
AX
IAL

AE
S/E
BU

3 Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot,
as shown below.
You may have to push firmly to fully insert the card into the internal connector.
5
3

OM
N
IN I

14
2

13
1

12
12

11
10

11
PO
W
ON ER
OF
F

9

10

DIG
MO ITAL
DE MIX
L D IN
M1 G C
000 ON
SO
LE

9

INP
UT

8
7

8

6

7

AC
IN

6

CO

NT

RO
L

5
4

5

SL
OT

ME
TE
R

4
SM

3
2

3

PT

E IN

2

1
1

RE

MO
TE
SL
OT

MID

OU
T

I
IN

TO
H
USOST
B

WO
RD
OU
T

CL
OC
K
IN
1

AE
S/E
BU

2

CO
AX
IAL

2T
DIGR IN
ITA
L
2
1
CO
AX
IAL

AE
S/E
BU

4 Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews.
Tighten the screws firmly, or else the card may not be grounded correctly, which may cause
the DM1000 to malfunction.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

27

3 Operating Basics
This chapter describes basic operations on the DM1000, including how to use the display
and operate the controls on the top panel.

3

About the Display

3Current Scene

4EDIT indicator
5MIDI indicator
6Surround mode indicator
7Sampling rate indicator

1Selected DISPLAY
2Selected channel
9Page title

8Timecode counter
JChannel name

KPage area

LPage tabs

MTab Scroll arrows

A Selected DISPLAY
This section indicates the currently-selected display page group.

B Selected channel
This section indicates the Input or Output Channel currently selected by its corresponding [SEL] button or fader. The first four characters are the Channel ID (e.g.,
CH1–CH48, BUS1–BUS8, AUX1–AUX8, ST-L, ST-R). The second four characters are
the channel’s Short name. You can edit the channel’s Short name if you desire (see
page 76 and 89).

C Current Scene
This section indicates the number and title of the currently-selected Scene memory (see
page 156). If the selected Scene is write-protected, a padlock icon ( ) appears.

D EDIT indicator
This indicator appears when the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene
that was most-currently recalled. It works in unison with the Edit indicator dot on the
Scene Memory display.

E MIDI indicator
This indicator appears when the DM1000 is receiving MIDI data via the MIDI IN port,
USB port, REMOTE connector, or an installed MY8-mLAN card.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

The top panel display indicates various parameters that you must set before you can operate
the DM1000. The display indicates the following items:

28

Chapter 3—Operating Basics

F Surround mode indicator
This indicator identifies the currently-selected Surround mode (ST=stereo, 3-1, 5.1, or
6.1) (see page 121).

G Sampling rate indicator
This indicator identifies the DM1000’s current sampling rate: 44.1 kHz (44k), 48 kHz
(48k), 88.2 kHz (88k), or 96 kHz (96k).

H Timecode counter
This counter displays the current position in the MIDI timecode being received via the
MIDI IN port, USB port, REMOTE connector, or an installed MY8-mLAN card. It
works in unison with the timecode counter on an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge.
If MIDI clock is selected as the timecode source on the Setup | Time Ref page, this
counter indicates the current MIDI clock position in bars:beats:clocks.

I Page title
This section indicates the title of the current page.

J Channel name
Depending on which page is currently selected, the channel name is the Long name of
the channel currently selected by its corresponding [SEL] button or the cursor buttons.

K Page area
This page area displays various page contents.

L Page tabs
These tabs enable you to select a display page.

M Tab Scroll arrows
These arrows indicate that more pages are available.

Selecting Display Pages
To select a display page:
1 Press the corresponding button on the top panel to select the desired page
group.
Display pages are grouped by function. To select a page group, press the [DISPLAY] button
in the following sections: AUX SELECT, ENCODER MODE, ROUTING, EQUALIZER,
MONITOR, USER DEFINED KEY. You can select additional page groups by pressing the
desired button in the DISPLAY ACCESS section.
2 You can select pages that have currently-displayed tabs by pressing the
[F1]–[F4] buttons.
If the selected display page group contains multiple pages, press the [F1]–[F4] buttons
below the corresponding tab to select a specific page.
3 To select a page for which a tab is not currently displayed, press either the
Left or Right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button (depending on where the page is
located) to display the page tab, then press the corresponding [F1]–[F4] button.
If display page groups contain more than four pages, either the left or right arrow appears.
To display the currently-hidden tabs, press the Right or Left [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button.
You can also select a page from a page group as follows:
• Selecting the next page in a page group:
Press the button you selected in Step 1 repeatedly. This enables you to select a page that has
a hidden tab.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Display Interface

29

• To select the previous page in a page group:
Press and hold down the button you selected in Step 1. The screen steps back through the
pages one by one. Release the button when the desired page is displayed. This enables you
to select a page that has a hidden tab.
• To select the first page in the group:
Double-click the button you selected in Step 1.

Tip: The DM1000 remembers the current page and parameter when you select a new page
group. If you return to the previous page group, the DM1000 displays the correct page, with
the same parameter selected. You can also select a page by using the controls or buttons on the
top panel (see page 250).

Display Interface
This section describes how to use the display interface.

Rotary Controls & Faders
The rotary controls and faders enable you to adjust the continuously variable parameter values, including Input Channel levels and effects parameters. Press the cursor buttons to move the
cursor to a rotary control or fader you want to adjust, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons
to modify the value.

Buttons
The buttons enable you to turn certain functions on (enabled)
or off (disabled). Move the cursor to the appropriate button,
then press the [ENTER] button to turn the function on (highlighted) or off. The buttons also enable you to select one of two
options or to execute certain functions.

Parameter Boxes
The parameter boxes enable you to select one of multiple
options. Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a
parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the setting.
You may need to press the [ENTER] button to confirm the
change of certain parameter box. If you edit a value in this type
of parameter boxes, the value flashes. Press the [ENTER] button to confirm the change, and the flashing stops. If you move
the cursor to other parameters while the edited value is flashing, the edit is cancelled.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

3
Operating Basics

4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor (a bold frame) to a button,
parameter box, rotary control, or fader so that you can change the value.

30

Chapter 3—Operating Basics

Confirmation Messages
For certain functions, the DM1000 prompts you for confirmation before executing the
functions, as shown here.

Move the cursor to YES and press [ENTER] to execute the function, or move the cursor to
NO and press [ENTER] to cancel.
If you take no action for awhile, the confirmation window closes automatically and the
function is not executed.

Title Edit Window
The Title Edit window enables you to enter titles for Scene and library memories, Automixes, and so on. You can enter 4, 12, or 16 characters, depending on the item.
The figure on the left shows uppercase characters and various punctuation marks. The figure on the right shows lowercase characters and numbers.

Use the cursor buttons to select characters, and press the [ENTER] button to enter them
into the title. The cursor moves to the right automatically as each character is entered. Use
the Parameter wheel or the Left and Right cursor buttons to move the cursor within the title.
Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase or lowercase characters, and use the SPC
button to enter a space.
To insert a space at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the right, move
the cursor to the INS button and press [ENTER].
To delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the left,
move the cursor to the DEL button and press [ENTER].
When you have finished, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to confirm
the title. To cancel the title entry, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press
[ENTER].

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Selecting Layers

31

Selecting Layers
Input Channels and Output Channels (Bus Outs & Aux Outs) are arranged into layers, as
illustrated below. There are six layers altogether.

3
1

33

AUX 1

2

34

35

36

17

1

33

AUX 1

18

2

34

19

AUX 2

3

35

20

AUX 3

4

36

Input Channel Layer 33–48
17

1

33

AUX 1

18

2

34

50 30
60
70 40
50

19

AUX 2

3

35

4

36

Master Layer

17

1

33

AUX 1

18

2

34

3

35

4

36

Remote Layer 1

17

1

33

AUX 1

18

2

34

3

35

20

AUX 3

4

36

Remote Layer 2

17

1

AUX 1

33

20

18

2

AUX 2

34

19

3

AUX 3

35

5

37

20

20

AUX 4

36

22

6

38

37

7

39

20

22

6

AUX 6

24

38

8

40

23

7

AUX 7

25

39

24

9

41

40

26

10

42

27

41

26

11

43

28

BUS 3

12

44

29

13

45

28

BUS 4

30

44

14

46

29

BUS 5

31

45

47

30

14

BUS 6

32

46

48

15

BUS 7

47

0 +10

15

20

32

10

0

0
5

5
10

10
15

15
20

20

30

30
40

50
60
70

0

5

15
20 10
15

20

5

5

0

5

30
40

50 30
60
70 40
50

0 +10

5

5
10
15

20 10

30

50 30
60
70 40
50

31

STEREO

0 +10
5

5
0

5

40

15
20

30
40

40
50
60
70

16

10
15

5
10

10
15
20

0

0
5

0

5

30

20

50
60
70

BUS 8

0 +10

15

20

0 +10

10
15
20 10
15

30

5

5

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

20 10

30

0 +10
5

5
10
15

20

5

5
0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

STEREO

0 +10
5

20 10
15

30

15

10

15

20

48

5
0

5

BUS 7

15
20 10

30

15
20

30
40

40
50
60
70

16

10

0 +10

5

5
10

10
15
20

0

0
5

0

5

30

20

50
60
70

BUS 8

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

5

5
0

10

40

32

15
20 10
15

20

0 +10

10
15
20 10
15

30

5

5

0

5

40

0 +10
5

5

BUS 6

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

13

47

0 +10
5

5
10
15

20

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

30

STEREO

0 +10
5

20 10
15

30

15

10

40

20 10
15

20

48

5
0

5

BUS 7

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

0 +10

5

30

31

0 +10
5

20 10

15
20

30
40

40
50
60
70

16

10

40

5
10

10
15
20

0

0
5

0

5

30

20

50
60
70

BUS 8

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

15

20

5

5
0

10

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

12

46

5

5

30

32

0 +10
5

15

20

0 +10

10
15
20 10
15

30

5

5

0

5

40

20 10

0

10

40

BUS 5

15

15

20

14

BUS 6

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

20 10

30

30

0 +10
5

0 +10

5

47

5

30

0 +10
5

5
10
15

20

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

40

STEREO

0 +10
5

20 10
15

30

15

10

40

20 10

48

5
0

5

BUS 7

15

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

15

20

5

5
0

10

40

43

45

5

30

31

0 +10
5

20 10

0

5

40

BUS 4

15

11

13

10
15

50 30
60
70 40
50

46

5

20

15
20

30

30

50
60
70

16

10

40

5
10

10
15
20

0

0
5

0

5

40
50
60
70

BUS 8

15

20

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

30

BUS 5

5

50 30
60
70 40
50

15

20

27

29

0 +10

20 10

30

14

10

40

32

0 +10
5

20 10
15

30

BUS 6

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

15

0 +10

5

30

0 +10
5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

40

42

BUS 2

44

5

20

47

5

5

0 +10
5

5
10
15

20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

0

10

40

20 10

0

5

30

BUS 3

15
20 10

50 30
60
70 40
50

10

12

10

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

15

20

45

5

20

15

BUS 7

15

20

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

30

BUS 4

15

15

0 +10

5

30

28

0 +10
5

20 10

5

5
0

10

40

BUS 1

43

5

20

13

10

40

31

0 +10
5

20 10
15

30

BUS 5

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

30

BUS 2

15

9

11

10

40

29

0 +10
5

20

46

5

5

0 +10

0

5

30

20

5

5
10
15

20 10
15

30

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

10

40

20 10
15

30

BUS 3

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

25

27

5

50 30
60
70 40
50

20 10

20

44

5

5

14

BUS 6

15

20

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

10

40

0 +10

15

30

12

BUS 4

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

15

0 +10

0

5

28

0 +10
5

30

0 +10
5

20 10
15

30

50 30
60
70 40
50

15

20 10

5

5
10

40

AUX 8

42

5

20

45

5

5

40

0 +10
5

5

5

40

15
20

30

50
60
70

STEREO

0

10
15
20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

0

10

15

20

20 10

0

5

30

BUS 1

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

8

10

10

40

20 10

20

43

5

20

13

BUS 5

15
20 10

0

5

30

BUS 2

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

15

30

26

0 +10
5

20 10

0 +10

0

5

11

10

40

29

0 +10
5

5

30

BUS 3

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

15

20

5

5
10

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

27

0 +10
5

15

20

44

5
0

10

40

20 10

0

5

30

AUX 8

15

20

41

5
10

40

20 10
15

30

9

BUS 1

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

0 +10

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

25

0 +10
5

20 10

5

5
10
15

20 10
15

30

40

42

5

30

12

BUS 4

15

20

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

15

20

10

10
15

28

0 +10
5

20 10
15

30

BUS 2

0 +10
5

20 10

0

5

30

AUX 7

0 +10

0

5

8

5
10

40

26

41

15

20

43

5

5

40

48

0 +10

5

30

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

0
5

10

10
15
20

40

40
50
60
70

5

0

5

30

20

0

5

5
10
15

20 10
15

30

16

5

5
0

10
15
20 10
15

30

20

0 +10

5

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

32

BUS 8

0 +10

5

15
20 10
15

30

5

5
0

10

5

40

47

5
10
15

20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

15

0 +10

5

5

5

30

20

31

BUS 7

0 +10
5

5
0

10
15

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

10

20

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

30

AUX 8

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

5

5
10

40

24

0 +10
5

20 10

20

23

AUX 6

15

AUX 5

39

15

30

9

5
10

40

11

BUS 3

15
20 10
15

30

BUS 1

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

50 30
60
70 40
50

5

7

5
10
15

25

0 +10
5

27

0 +10
5

5

40

20 10
15

20

42

5
0

10

20

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

30

AUX 7

5

20 10

20

21

23

0 +10

15

30

40

5
10

40

20 10

0 +10

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

4

38

8

AUX 8

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

15

20

5

5
10
15

20 10
15

30

24

0 +10

10

BUS 2

15
20 10
15

30

50 30
60
70 40
50

5

26

0 +10
5

0

5

40

20 10

0

5

30

AUX 5

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

6

5
10

40

0 +10
5

5
10
15

20 10
15

30
40

50 30
60
70 40
50

39

41

5
10

15

20

15

20

9

BUS 1

15
20 10

0

5

30

AUX 6

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

21

AUX 4

+10
5
0
5
10
15
20

22

5

20

7

5
10

40

25

0 +10
5

0

5

30

AUX 7

15

20 10
15

30

23

0 +10
5

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

40

5
10

40

20 10

20

0 +10

10
15
20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

19

AUX 2

30
40
50

37

5

0

5

30

20

5

AUX 5

0 +10
5

5
10
15

20 10
15

30

38

15

30

8

AUX 8

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

50 30
60
70 40
50

21

AUX 4

+10
5
0
5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

6

5
10

40

24

0 +10
5

20 10
15

20

0 +10

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

46

0

10
15
20 10
15

30

14

0 +10

5

5

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

30

BUS 6

20 10
15

30

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

5

5

5

15
20 10
15

30

20

0

10

5

15
20 10
15

30

45

0

10
15
20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

13

0 +10

5

5

5

30

20

29

BUS 5

0 +10

0

10

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

5

5

0

10
15
20 10
15

20

40

5

5

0

5

30

20

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

30

AUX 6

15

50 30
60
70 40
50

20

AUX 3

10
15
20

22

0 +10
5

20

39

5
10

40

20 10
15

30

7

AUX 7

15

20

50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

40

50 30
60
70 40
50

19

AUX 2

30
40
50

37

5
10
15

20 10
15

20

40

50 30
60
70 40
50

30
40
50

5

AUX 5

0 +10

0

5

30

20

23

0 +10
5

20 10
15

30

10
15
20 10
15

30

44

0

10
15
20 10
15

30

12

0 +10

5

5

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

28

BUS 4

0 +10

5

5

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

5

5
10
15

20 10
15

30

38

5
10

20

21

AUX 4

+10
5
0
5

40

6

AUX 6

15
20 10
15

30

50 30
60
70 40
50

20

AUX 3

10
15
20

22

5

0

5

40

10
15
20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

43

0

10
15
20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

11

0 +10

5

5

5

30

20

27

BUS 3

0 +10

5

5

0

5

30

20

0 +10

10
15
20 10
15

20

40

50 30
60
70 40
50

30
40
50

37

5

0

5

30

20

5

AUX 5

0 +10
5

5
10
15

20 10
15

30
40

21

AUX 4

+10
5
0
5
10
15
20

10
15
20 10
15

30

42

0

10
15
20 10
15

30

10

0 +10

5

5

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

26

BUS 2

0 +10

5

5

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

41

0

10
15
20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

9

0 +10

5

5

5

30

20

25

BUS 1

0 +10

5

5
10
15

20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

40

0

10
15
20 10
15

30

8

0 +10

5

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

24

AUX 8

0 +10

5

0

5

30

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

39

5
10
15

20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

7

0 +10

5

0

5

30

20

23

AUX 7

0 +10

10
15
20 10
15

30

20

5

0

5

15

30
40

50 30
60
70 40
50

38

5
10
15

20 10
15

30

6

0 +10

5

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

22

AUX 6

0 +10
5

5
10
15

20 10

15
20
30
40
50

37

5
10
15

20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

5

0 +10

5

0

5

30

20

21

AUX 5

+10
5
0
5
10

Input Channel Layer 17–32

10
15
20 10
15

30

4

AUX 4

5

0

5

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

20

0 +10

5

5
10
15

20 10
15

20

40
50 30
60
70 40
50

3

AUX 3

0 +10

0 +10

0

30

20

19

AUX 2

5

15

30
40

50 30
60
70 40
50

18

5

5
10
15

20 10

15
20
30
40
50

17

Operating Basics

+10
5
0
5
10

Input Channel Layer 1–16

40

50
60
70

16

BUS 8

48

STEREO

The currently-selected layer determines the function of the channel
strip Encoders, [SEL] buttons, [SOLO] buttons, [ON] buttons, and faders. Use the LAYER buttons to select a layer you wish to edit using the
channel strip controls.

The following table shows the layers that you can access using the LAYER buttons, and the
parameters you can control using the channel strips on each layer.
LAYER buttons

Layers

Channel Strips
1–8

9–16

[1-16] button

Input Channel Layer 1–16

Input Channels 1–16

[17-32] button

Input Channel Layer 17–32

Input Channels 17–32

[33-48] button

Input Channel Layer 33–48

Input Channels 33–48

[REMOTE 1] button

Remote Layer 1

[REMOTE 2] button

Remote Layer 2

Operation depends on the selected
target (see page 205).

[MASTER] button

Master Layer

Aux Send masters
1–8

Bus Out masters
1–8

Tip: The function of each channel strip fader and Encoder depends on the currently-selected
Fader mode (see page 33) and Encoder mode (see page 34) respectively.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

32

Chapter 3—Operating Basics

Selecting Channels
The SELECTED CHANNEL controls enable you to edit
main mix parameters for a channel selected from the Input
Channels and Output Channels (Aux Outs, Bus Outs, and
Stereo Out).
To select a channel for editing using the SELECTED
CHANNEL controls, follow the steps below:
1 Press the corresponding LAYER button to select a
layer that includes the desired channel (see
page 31).

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY

DISPLAY

1

EQUALIZER

2

HIGH
Q

3

4

5

6

7

8

HIGH MID

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

LOW
GAIN

STEREO

DIRECT

2 Use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to
select the desired Input or Output Channel.
The channel is selected and the [SEL] button indicator
lights up.
If the Fader Touch Sense parameter is enabled on the Setup | Prefer2 page (see page 252),
operating a fader selects the corresponding channel.
The Channel’s ID and Short name appear in the upper-left corner of the display. If the currently-displayed page contains a relevant channel parameter, the cursor moves to that
parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed page contains no such parameter, a page
that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically.
GRAB

Tip: For paired Input or Output Channels, the channel for which you pressed the [SEL] button
is selected, and its indicator lights up. The [SEL] button indicator of the paired partner flashes.
3 To select the Stereo Out, press the STEREO [SEL] button or touch the [STEREO] fader.
Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles between the Stereo Out left and Stereo Out right channels.
If the currently-displayed page contains a relevant Stereo Out parameter, the cursor moves
to that parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed page contains no such parameter, a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically.
Tip: If the Auto Channel Select parameter is enabled on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see
page 250), operating a fader or Encoder, or turning on a [SOLO] or [ON] button selects the
corresponding channel.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Selecting Fader Modes

33

Selecting Fader Modes
The function of channel faders (1–16) depends on the selected Layer and Fader mode.
1 Select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 31).

FADER

The following table shows the channel fader functions for each Layer and Fader mode.
LAYER buttons
[1-16] button
[17-32] button
[33-48] button

[REMOTE 1] button

[REMOTE 2] button

[MASTER] button

Fader Mode
Fader

Channel Strip Fader
1–8

9–16

Input Channels 1–16 level

Aux

Input Channels 1–16 Aux Send level

Fader

Input Channels 17–32 level

3

AUX

Aux

Input Channels 17–32 Aux Send level

Fader

Input Channels 33–48 level

Aux

Input Channels 33–48 Aux Send level

Fader

Operation depends on the selected target (see
page 205).

Aux

No operation

Fader

Operation depends on the selected target (see
page 205).

Aux

No operation

No operation

Fader

Aux Send master 1–8
output level

Bus Out master1–8 output level

Aux

No operation

No operation

No operation

Note: You cannot select Aux mode while the Master layer is selected. If you switch to the Master
layer while the FADER MODE [AUX] indicator is lit, the indicator automatically turns off
and the [FADER] indicator lights up.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

FADER MODE
2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER/AUX] button to select a Fader
mode.
• When the [FADER]indicator
lights up: .............................................. You can use channel faders to
control Input Channel levels or
Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8,
Bus Out 1–8) master levels.
• When the [AUX] indicator
lights up: .............................................. You can use channel faders to control Input
Channel Aux Send levels.

34

Chapter 3—Operating Basics

Selecting Encoder Modes
The function of Encoders (1–16) depends on the selected Layer and Encoder mode.
1 Select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 31).
2 Press the corresponding ENCODER MODE button to
ENCODER MODE
select an Encoder mode.
• When the [PAN] button indicator
lights up: ...............................................Encoders 1–16 function as
Pan controls for the
selected layer.
• When the [AUX] button indicator
lights up: ...............................................Encoders 1–16 function as Aux Send level controls for the selected layer.
• When the [ASSIGN] button indicator
lights up: ...............................................Encoders control the parameters assigned to the
[ASSIGN] button for the selected layer. (See the
next section for more information on how to
assign parameters to the [ASSIGN] button.)
DISPLAY

PAN

AUX

The following table shows the Encoder functions for each Layer and Encoder mode.
LAYER buttons

Encoder Mode
Pan

[1-16] button

[17-32] button

[33-48] button

Channel Strip Encoder
1–8

9–16

Input Channels 1–16 pan

Aux

Input Channels 1–16 Aux Send level

Assign

Assigned parameter

Pan

Input Channels 17–32 pan

Aux

Input Channels 17–32 Aux Send level

Assign

Assigned parameter

Pan

Input Channels 33–48 pan

Aux

Input Channels 33–48 Aux Send level

Assign

Assigned parameter

Pan
[REMOTE 1] button

Aux
Assign
Pan

[REMOTE 2] button

Operation depends on the selected target (see
page 205).

Aux
Assign
Pan

[MASTER] button

Aux
Assign

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

No operation
Assigned parameter

ASSIGN

Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button

35

Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN]
button
While the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button indicator is lit, you can use Encoders 1–16
to control a parameter assigned to the [ASSIGN] button. Follow the steps below to assign a
parameter to the [ASSIGN] button.

2 Use the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a parameter in the right-hand box.
A parameter is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. Refer to the next page for a
complete list of assignable parameters.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the assignment.
Once assigned, press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button to turn on the button indicator. You can now use Encoders 1–16 to control the assigned parameter.
Note: When channels that do not feature the currently-assigned parameter are selected, the
Encoders are inactive. For example, if the assigned Encoder parameter is “Phase,” and the Master layer is selected, Encoders are inactive, because the Aux Sends and Bus Outs do not feature
Phase parameters.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

3
Operating Basics

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [DISPLAY] button.
The Encoder | Encoder page appears. The name of the parameter currently assigned to the
[ASSIGN] button is displayed in the left-hand box. All assignable parameters are displayed
in the right-hand box. (The parameter currently-assigned to the button is highlighted in the
right-hand box.)

36

Chapter 3—Operating Basics

• Assignable Encoder Mode Parameter List
#

Parameters

Encoder Operation

Push Switch Operation

—

—

1

No Assign

2

Attenuator

Attenuator

3

Input Patch

Input Channel patch

4

Insert In Patch

Insert In patch

5

Insert Out Patch

Insert Out patch

6

Direct Out

Direct Out patch

7

Phase:

Phase: normal/reverse

8

Insert On

Insert on/off

9

Aux pre/post

Aux pre/post

10

Delay On

Delay on/off

11

Delay Time

Delay Time

12

Delay FB.Gain

Delay FB.Gain

13

Delay Mix

Delay Mix

14

EQ On

EQ on/off

15

EQ Type

EQ Type

16

EQ Low Q

EQ Low Q

17

EQ Low F

EQ Low Frequency

18

EQ Low G

EQ Low Gain

19

EQ Low-Mid Q

EQ Low-Mid Q

20

EQ Low-Mid F

EQ Low-Mid Frequency

21

EQ Low-Mid G

EQ Low-Mid Gain

22

EQ High-Mid Q

EQ High-Mid Q

23

EQ High-Mid F

EQ High-Mid Frequency

24

EQ High-Mid G

EQ High-Mid Gain

25

EQ High Q

EQ High Q

26

EQ High F

EQ High Frequency

27

EQ High G

EQ High Gain

28

Gate On

Gate on/off

29

Gate Threshold

Gate Threshold

30

Gate Range

Gate Range

31

Gate Attack

Gate Attack

32

Gate Decay

Gate Decay

33

Gate Hold

Gate Hold

34

Comp On

Comp on/off

35

Comp Threshold

Comp Threshold

36

Comp Ratio

Comp Ratio

37

Comp Attack

Comp Attack

38

Comp Release

Comp Release

39

Comp Out Gain

Comp Out Gain

40

Comp Knee/Width

Comp Knee/Width

41

Surr L/R Pan

Surr L/R Pan

42

Surr F/R Pan

Surr F/R Pan

43

Surr Front DIV

Surr Front DIV

44

Surr Rear DIV

Surr Rear DIV

45

Surr LFE Level

Surr LFE Level

46

Surr Pan Wheel

Surr Pan Wheel

47

Scene Fade Time

Scene Fade Time

48

AD824 Gain

AD824 Gain

49

Ins AD824 Gain

Ins AD824 Gain

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Display the settings.

Confirm patch selection.

Display the settings.

Metering

37

Metering
This section describes how to check Input and Output Channel levels using the Meter pages
or an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [METER] button repeatedly until the Meter | Position page appears.
This page enables you to set the metering position for Input and Output Channels.

3
Operating Basics

1

2

A INPUT section
This section enables you to select the metering position for Input Channel signals.

B OUTPUT section
This section enables you to select the metering position for Output Channel (Aux Out
1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) signals.
2 Move the cursor to the desired parameter button in the INPUT or OUTPUT
section, then press [ENTER].
You can select one of the following three positions in each section.
• PRE EQ ..........................Immediately before EQ.
• PRE FADER ..................Immediately before the fader.
• POST FADER ...............Immediately after the fader.
Tip: If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, changes on this page will be
reflected on the Input & Output Metering Position parameters on the Peak Meter Bridge.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [METER] button repeatedly until the page listed
below that contains the desired channels appears.
- CH1-32 page
- CH33-48 page
These pages display the Input Channel 1–32 levels and Input Channel 33–48 levels
respectively.
- CH1-48 page
This page displays the Input Channel 1–48 levels altogether.
- Master page
This page displays the Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) levels
altogether.
- Effect page
This page displays the internal effects processor 1–4 input and output levels altogether.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

38

Chapter 3—Operating Basics

- Stereo page
This page displays the Stereo Out or Control Room Monitor output level.
Tip: You can also select the CH1-32 page, the CH33-48 page, or the Master page using the
LAYER buttons. In this case, if an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, the Peak
Meter Bridge displays the same signal meters in unison with the DM1000 meters.
4 If you selected the CH1-32 page, the CH33-48 page, or the Master page, use
the MASTER MODE parameter to select one of the following three metering
signal types:
• GATE GR....................... The amount of gain reduction for the gate (except for the Master page)
• COMP GR..................... The amount of gain reduction for the compressor
• LEVEL ........................... Input Channel input level, or Output Channel output level
• CH1-32 page

• CH33-48 page

• CH1-48 page

• Master page

Tip: These pages also allow you to change the metering position using the POSITION parameter. This parameter setting operates in unison with the Meter | Position page setting.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Metering

39

5 If you selected the Stereo page, use the METER MODE parameter to select
one of the following two metering signal types:
• C-R .................................Control Room Monitor output signal
• STEREO.........................Stereo Out signal

3
Operating Basics

This parameter setting affects the meters on the Meter | Master page, the ST meter on the
Stereo page, and the stereo meter on the right side of the display.
6 To activate the Peak Hold function, move the cursor to the PEAK HOLD button, then press [ENTER].
The PEAK HOLD button turns on, and the peak level is held on the meters on the page and
on the Peak Meter Bridge. To cancel the Peak Hold function, turn the PEAK HOLD button
off. If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, its Peak Hold function switches
in unison with the DM1000 meters.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

40

Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Connections and Setup

41

4 Connections and Setup
This chapter explains how to connect and set up your DM1000.

Connections
The following section explains three typical ways to connect the DM1000 to external equipment, although there are numerous others.

Synthesizer

Synthesizer
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Surface
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System

Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Sur face
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System

SONG SCENE

SONG SCENE

REC

REC

MY8-AD96
etc.

MY8-AD96
etc.
Effects processor

Connections and Setup

■ Configuring an analog 32-channel mixing system

SLOT 1

Master recorder

SLOT 2

88

2TR IN DIGITAL
connector

OMNI IN connector
2

1
+48V

OFF

OMNI OUT connector

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

6

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

7

+48V

ON

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

9

+48V

ON

OFF

10

+48V

ON

OFF

11

+48V

ON

OFF

12

+48V

ON

OFF

13

+48V

ON

OFF

14

+48V

ON

OFF

OFF

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

16

15

+48V

ON

1

+48V

ON

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

2TR OUT DIGITAL connector

PAD

-60

-16

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

0

-60

-16

GAIN

0

10

TALKBACK LEVEL

PEAK
SIGNAL

10

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

PHONES

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING

DISPLAY ACCESS

DIO

SETUP

UTILITY

MIDI

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

EFFECT

OVER
0

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

-4

-6

-6

-8

-8

OUTPUT
PATCH

SCENE

AUXSELECT
DISPLAY

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

AUX5

AUX6

AUX7

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

-10

-10

-12

-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

MONITOR

EQUALIZER
DISPLAY

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

AUTOMIX

HIGH

SOLO

CLEAR

HIGH MID

2TR D1

2TR D2

LOW MID

SLOT

BUS

Q

FREQUENCY

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

GAIN
STEREO

DIRECT
INC

DEC

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

OMNI OUT
connectors 11–12

DISPLAY
FADER

INPUT connector

STORE

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

VOL

Guitar

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SEL

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

INPUT connector

VOL

Monitoring system

ENTER

ON

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

5

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

5
0

10

5

15

10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20

20

15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30

30

40

20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40

30

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50

50

60
70

60

40
50

1
17

2
33

AUX 1

18

3
34

AUX 2

19

4
35

AUX 3

20

5
36

AUX 4

21

6
37

AUX 5

22

7
38

AUX 6

23

8
39

AUX 7

24

9
40

AUX 8

25

10
41

BUS 1

26

11
42

BUS 2

27

12
43

BUS 3

28

13
44

BUS 4

29

14
45

BUS 5

30

70

15
46

BUS 6

31

PHONES jack

15

10

16
47

BUS 7

32

48

BUS 8

4

STEREO

In this system, the DM1000, with optional AD cards (MY8-AD, MY8-AD96, etc.) installed
in Slots 1 and 2, is used as a keyboard mixer or sound re-enforcement mixer. Up to 32 analog channels, including Inputs 1–16 and line inputs on the AD cards, are available for mixing.
Tip: You can adjust the gain of the AD card channels by setting the DIP switches on the cards.
For more information, see your AD card documentation.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

42

Chapter 4—Connections and Setup

■ Configuring a recording system with a hard disk recorder
Computer

HDR (Hard Disk Recorder)
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT

MY8-AT
etc.
Effects processor

OUT

MY8-AT
etc.

SLOT 1

SLOT 2

TO HOST USB port

IN

MIDI OUT

OUT

MIDI IN

IN

WORD CLOCK IN connector

WORD CLOCK OUT connector

Master recorder

88

2TR IN DIGITAL
connector

OMNI IN connector
2

1
+48V

OFF

OMNI OUT connector

Synthesizer

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

6

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

7

+48V

ON

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

9

+48V

ON

OFF

10

+48V

ON

OFF

11

+48V

ON

OFF

12

+48V

ON

OFF

13

+48V

ON

OFF

14

+48V

ON

OFF

OFF

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

16

15

+48V

ON

1

+48V

ON

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

2TR OUT DIGITAL connector

PAD

-60

-16

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

0

-60

-16

GAIN

0

10

TALKBACK LEVEL

PEAK
SIGNAL

10

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

PHONES

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX

DIO

SETUP

UTILITY

MIDI

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

OVER
0

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

-4

-6

-6

-8

-8

Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Surface
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System

-10

-10

-12

-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

MONITOR

EQUALIZER
DISPLAY

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

HIGH

SOLO

CLEAR

HIGH MID

2TR D1

2TR D2

LOW MID

SLOT

BUS

Q
STEREO

SONG SCENE

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

OUTPUT
PATCH

REC

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

EFFECT

SCENE

AUXSELECT
DISPLAY

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

AUX5

AUX6

AUX7

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

FREQUENCY

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

GAIN
STEREO

DIRECT
INC

DEC

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

OMNI OUT
connectors 11–12

DISPLAY
FADER

INPUT connector

STORE

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

VOL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SEL

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

INPUT connector

VOL

Monitoring system

ENTER

ON

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

20 10

10

5

5
0

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

10

5

15

20 10

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

10

5

15

20 10

5

5

5
0

0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

10

5

15

20 10

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

10

20

30

30

20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40

40

30

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50

50

60
70

60

15

30 15

40
50

30 15

1
17

30 15

2
33

AUX 1

18

30 15

3
34

AUX 2

19

30 15

4
35

AUX 3

20

30 15

5
36

AUX 4

21

30 15

6
37

AUX 5

22

7
38

AUX 6

23

30 15

30 15

8
39

AUX 7

24

30 15

9
40

AUX 8

25

10
41

BUS 1

26

30 15

30 15

11
42

BUS 2

27

30 15

12
43

BUS 3

28

30 15

13
44

BUS 4

29

30 15

14
45

BUS 5

30

70

15
46

BUS 6

31

PHONES jack

15

20

16
47

BUS 7

32

48

BUS 8

STEREO

In this system, the DM1000, with optional I/O cards (MY8-AT, MY16-AT, MY8-TD, etc.)
installed in Slots 1 and 2, is one component in a system that includes a digital MTR, such as
a hard disk recorder. This system will support track recording, overdubbing, track bouncing, and mixdown. You can also control the hard disk recorder’s transport section by sending MMC commands from the DM1000 to the recorder.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Connections

43

■ Configuring a recording system that uses a DAW (Digital Audio
Workstation)
Computer

4
Connections and Setup

MIDI interface
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT

Audio interface

MY-16AT
etc.
Effects processor

OUT

MY-16AT
etc.

SLOT 1

SLOT 2

TO HOST USB port

IN

MIDI OUT

OUT

MIDI IN

IN

WORD CLOCK IN connector

WORD CLOCK OUT
connector

Master recorder

88

2TR IN DIGITAL
connector

OMNI IN connector
2

1
+48V

OFF

OMNI OUT connector

Synthesizer

+48V

ON

OFF

1

+48V

ON

OFF

2

5

4

3

+48V

ON

3

6

+48V

OFF

ON

4

OFF

+48V

ON

5

7
+48V

OFF

6

8

ON

OFF

7

9

+48V

ON

OFF

8

10

+48V

ON

9

OFF

+48V

ON

10

11

OFF

+48V

ON

11

12

OFF

12

13

+48V

ON

OFF

13

14

+48V

ON

OFF

14

+48V

ON

OFF

15

16

15
+48V

ON

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

16

2TR OUT DIGITAL connector

PAD
20dB

20dB

-60

-16

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

0

TALKBACK LEVEL

0

-60

-16

GAIN

10

PEAK
SIGNAL

10

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

PHONES

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX

DIO

SETUP

UTILITY

MIDI

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

OVER
0

Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Surface
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System

MONITOR

EQUALIZER

DISPLAY

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

HIGH

SOLO

CLEAR

HIGH MID

2TR D1

2TR D2

SLOT

BUS

-4

-6

Q

-6

-8

-8

-10

-10

-12

-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

STEREO

SONG SCENE

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

OUTPUT
PATCH

REC

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

EFFECT

SCENE

AUXSELECT
DISPLAY

AUX1

AUX5

AUX2

AUX3

AUX6

AUX7

AUX4

LOW MID

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

GAIN
STEREO

DIRECT
INC

DEC

GRAB

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

FREQUENCY

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

OMNI OUT
connectors 11–12

DISPLAY
FADER

INPUT connector

STORE

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

VOL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SEL

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

INPUT connector

VOL

Monitoring system

ENTER

SEL

ON

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

20 10

10

5

5
0

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

10

5

15

20 10

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

10

5

15

20 10

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

10

20

20

30

30

20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40

40

30

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50

50

60
70

60

15

30 15

40
50

30 15

1
17

30 15

2
33

AUX 1

18

30 15

3
34

AUX 2

19

30 15

4
35

AUX 3

20

30 15

5
36

AUX 4

21

30 15

6
37

AUX 5

22

30 15

7
38

AUX 6

23

30 15

8
39

AUX 7

24

30 15

9
40

AUX 8

25

10
41

BUS 1

26

30 15

30 15

11
42

BUS 2

27

30 15

12
43

BUS 3

28

30 15

13
44

BUS 4

29

30 15

14
45

BUS 5

30

70

15
46

BUS 6

31

PHONES jack

15

16
47

BUS 7

32

48

BUS 8

STEREO

In this system, the DM1000, with optional I/O cards (MY8-AT, MY16-AT, MY8-AE, etc.)
installed in Slots 1 and 2, is connected to a computer-based DAW (Digital Audio Workstation). The DM1000 can provide audio input and output for the DAW. If you connect the
DM1000 and the computer via USB, the DM1000’s Remote function enables you to control
the DAW’s locate and transport functions and change the parameters.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

44

Chapter 4—Connections and Setup

Wordclock Connections and Settings
About wordclock
Digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred
from one device to another. Even if both devices use identical sampling rates, digital signals
may not transfer correctly, or audible noise or unwanted clicks may occur if the digital
audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device are not synchronized with each
other.
Wordclocks are signals that enable digital audio processing circuits to synchronize with each
other. In a typical digital audio system, one device operates as the wordclock master, transmitting wordclock signals, and the other devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchronizing
to the wordclock master.
If you are digitally connecting the DM1000 to other equipment, you must decide which
device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves, then set up all the
devices accordingly. The DM1000 can be used as the wordclock master running at either
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz, or slaved to an external wordclock source.

Wordclock connections
To establish wordclock synchronization between the DM1000 and external devices, you can
distribute wordclock signals independently via dedicated cables, or you can use clock information derived from digital audio connections.
The WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors transmit and receive wordclock signals independently on the DM1000. The following examples show two ways in which wordclock signals can be distributed and received via the WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors.
• Daisy Chain Distribution
In this example, the wordclock signal is distributed in a “daisy-chain” fashion, with each
device feeding the wordclock signal from the wordclock out connector on to the wordclock
in connector of the next device. This method of distribution is not recommended for larger
systems.
Wordclock
master
WC OUT (BNC)
WC IN
(BNC)

WC OUT
(BNC)

WC IN
(BNC)

WC OUT
(BNC)

WC IN
(BNC)

Device A

Device B

Device C

Wordclock slave

Wordclock slave

Wordclock slave

• Star Distribution
In this example, a dedicated wordclock distribution box (such as a Yamaha IFU4) is used to
supply wordclock signals from the wordclock master to each wordclock slave individually.
Wordclock
master

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

WC OUT
(BNC)

Wordclock
distribution box

WC IN (BNC)

WC IN (BNC)

WC IN (BNC)

WC IN (BNC)

Device A

Device B

Device C

Device D

Wordclock slave

Wordclock slave

Wordclock slave

Wordclock slave

Wordclock Connections and Settings

45

If the external devices do not have wordclock in and out connectors, you can use the clock
information included in the digital audio signals. In this case, digital audio signals and
wordclock signals are transferred via the 2TR OUT DIGITAL and 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks
or via the digital I/O cards installed in the rear panel slots.
Digital audio signal
+
Wordclock signal
External device

4

Digital I/O
card

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

6

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

7

+48V

ON

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

9

+48V

ON

OFF

10

+48V

ON

OFF

11

+48V

ON

OFF

12

+48V

ON

OFF

13

+48V

ON

OFF

14

+48V

ON

OFF

OFF

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

16

15

+48V

ON

1

+48V

ON

OFF

Connections and Setup

2

1
+48V

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

PAD

-60

-16

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

0

-60

-16

GAIN

0

10

TALKBACK LEVEL

PEAK
SIGNAL

10

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

PHONES

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX

DIO

SETUP

UTILITY

MIDI

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

EFFECT

OUTPUT
PATCH

SCENE

AUXSELECT
DISPLAY

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

AUX5

AUX6

AUX7

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

1

2

HIGH

SOLO

CLEAR

HIGH MID

2TR D1

2TR D2

LOW MID

SLOT

BUS

-4

-6

Q

-6

-8

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

DISPLAY
OVER
0

MONITOR

EQUALIZER

-8

-10

-10

-12

-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

3

4

5

6

7

8

FREQUENCY

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

GAIN
STEREO

DIRECT
INC

DEC

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

DISPLAY
FADER

STORE

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

ENTER

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SEL

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ON

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

5

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

5
0

10

5

15

10

15

10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20

20

15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30

30

20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40

40

50 30
60 40
70
50

30
40
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

1
17

50 30
60 40
70
50

2
33

AUX 1

18

50 30
60 40
70
50

3
34

AUX 2

19

50 30
60 40
70
50

4
35

AUX 3

20

50 30
60 40
70
50

5
36

AUX 4

21

50 30
60 40
70
50

6
37

AUX 5

22

50 30
60 40
70
50

7
38

AUX 6

23

50 30
60 40
70
50

8
39

AUX 7

24

50 30
60 40
70
50

9
40

AUX 8

25

10
41

BUS 1

26

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

11
42

BUS 2

27

50 30
60 40
70
50

12
43

BUS 3

28

50 30
60 40
70
50

13
44

BUS 4

29

50 30
60 40
70
50

14
45

BUS 5

30

31

50

50

60
70

60
70

15
46

BUS 6

16
47

BUS 7

32

48

BUS 8

STEREO

Specifying the Wordclock Source
To digitally connect the DM1000 to external devices, you must specify the wordclock source
for the system. Follow the steps below.
Note: When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system,
some devices may output noise due to being out of synchronization. Be sure to turn down your
monitoring device before changing wordclock settings.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] (WORD CLOCK)
button.
The Word Clock page appears. On this page, you can view the current synchronization status of input signals at each slot and connector.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

46

Chapter 4—Connections and Setup

The source select button indicators are explained below:
A usable wordclock signal is present at this input, and it is in sync with the current
DM1000 internal clock.
No wordclock signal is present at this input.
A usable wordclock signal is present at this input, but it is out of sync with the current
DM1000 internal clock.
This input is the currently-selected wordclock source.
This input was selected as the wordclock source, but no usable signal was received.
This input cannot be selected as the wordclock source because (a) a wordclock signal
cannot be sourced from this input on this type of I/O card, or (b) no I/O card is
installed.
Tip:
• The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the DM1000 is currently operating.
• The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O cards.
• The IN and OUT columns indicate the number of input and output channels available for
each installed I/O card.
2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a source, then press [ENTER].
The following are possible wordclock sources:
• SLOT1/SLOT2.............. These buttons select the inputs from the digital I/O cards
installed in Slots 1 and 2 as the wordclock source. Inputs are
selected in pairs (odd and even numbers in this order). The
SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O
cards. The number of pairs depends on the type of I/O card
installed.
• WC IN............................ This button selects the wordclock signal input at the WORD
CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel.
• 2TRD1 ........................... This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 input as the wordclock source.
• 2TRD2 ........................... This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 input as the wordclock source.
• INT 44.1k, INT 48k,
INT 88.2, INT 96k........ These buttons select the internal clock generator as the wordclock source. The DM1000 will function as the wordclock master.
Note: To transfer data at higher sampling frequencies (88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) between the
DM1000 and connected external devices, you need to set the data transfer format. See page 57
for more information.
Tip: If an external wordclock source fails, the DM1000 automatically switches to its internal
clock generator at the closest frequency (INT 44.1k, INT 48k, INT 88.2k, INT 96k).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Input and Output Patching

47

Input and Output Patching
The DM1000 is designed to enable you to patch (assign) signals to Inputs and Outputs.
This section explains how to view the signals patched to Inputs and Outputs and change the
assignment.
Tip: If the data from a connected instrument fails to be input, or if you are unable to monitor
an OMNI OUT, check the I/O patching, as explained below:

4

Patching Input Channels

Connections and Setup

By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows:
• INPUT connectors 1–16 .................... Input Channels 1–16
• Channels 1–8 of Slot 1 ....................... Input Channels 17–24
• Channels 1–8 of Slot 2 ....................... Input Channels 25–32
• Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects
Processor 1–4 ...................................... Input Channels 33–40
• L&R of 2TR IN DIGITAL
connectors 1–2 .................................... Input Channels 41–44
• OMNI IN connectors 1–4.................. Input Channels 45–48
Follow the steps below to view or change the patching.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the following page appears.

1

Inputs and Slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the
parameter boxes (1) beneath the channel numbers. The parameter indicators are
explained below:
• – .....................................No assignment
• AD1–AD16....................INPUT connectors 1–16
• OMN1–OMN4 .............OMNI IN connectors 1–4
• S1-1–S116......................Channels 1–16 of Slot 1
• S2-1–S216......................Channels 1–16 of Slot 2
• FX1-1–FX1-8 ................Outputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1
• FX2-1–FX2-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 2
• FX3-1–FX3-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 3
• FX4-1–FX4-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 4
• 2D1L & 2D1R ...............2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

48

Chapter 4—Connections and Setup

• 2D2L & 2D2R ............... 2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R)
• BUS1–8.......................... Bus 1–8 Outputs
• AUX1–8 ......................... Aux Send 1–8 Outputs
2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter (1) for
which you want to change the assignment, and rotate the Parameter wheel
or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip:
• By default, you can also use the Encoders to select Input Channel sources. Rotate the Encoders
to display the In Patch/In Patch page and select sources. Press the Encoder push switches to
confirm the changes.
• To restore the default patching, recall Input Patch memory #00 (see page 168).

Patching Omni Outs
By default, the Omni Outs are patched as follows:
• OMNI OUT connectors 1–8 ..............Aux Sends 1–8
• OMNI OUT connectors 9–10 ............Stereo Bus L & R
• OMNI OUT connectors 11–12 ..........Control Room Monitor L & R
Follow the steps below to view or change the patching.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the following page appears.

1

Signals that are currently assigned to the OMNI OUT connectors are shown in the parameter boxes (1) underneath the connector numbers. The parameter indicators are
explained below:
• – .............................................................No assignment
• BUS1–BUS8..........................................Bus 1–8 signals
• AUX1–AUX8 ........................................Aux Send 1–8 Signals
• ST L/R....................................................Stereo Bus signals
• INS CH1–INS CH48 ...........................Input Channels 1–48 Insert Outs
• INS BUS1–INS BUS8 ..........................Bus 1–8 Insert Outs
• INS AUX1–INS AUX8 .........................Aux Send 1–8 Insert Outs
• INS ST-L/ST-R......................................Stereo Bus Insert Outs

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Input and Output Patching

49

2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter (1) you
wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC]
buttons to modify the patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip: To restore the default patching, recall Output Patch memory #00 (see page 169).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

4
Connections and Setup

• SURR XXX
(“XXX” is a channel name). .............. Surround Monitor Outs
• CR-L/CR-R........................................... Control Room Monitor signals
• CAS BUS1–BUS8 ................................ Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
• CAS AUX1–AUX8 ............................... Aux Send 1–8 Cascade Outs
• CAS ST-L/ST-R.................................... Stereo Bus Cascade Outs
• CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR ................... Solo Bus Cascade Outs
• SOLO-L/SOLO-R................................ Solo Bus signals
• M.MX XXX
(“XXX” is a channel name.) .............. Surround Monitor Outs

50

Chapter 4—Connections and Setup

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Analog I/O & Digital I/O

51

5 Analog I/O & Digital I/O
This chapter describes the DM1000’s analog and digital input/output connectors as well as
the basic operations involving the digital I/Os.

Analog Inputs & Outputs
AD Input Section

• INPUT connectors 1–16
These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level and
microphone signals. The nominal input range is –60 dB through
+4 dB.
9

8

INPUT

• OMNI IN connectors 1–4
These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level signals.
3 OMNI
2
IN
The nominal signal level is +4 dB.

• Phantom Power

1
+48V

OFF

ON

Inputs 1 through 16 feature switchable +48V phantom powering for
use with condenser-type microphones and direct boxes. Individual
+48V [ON/OFF] switches on each input turn phantom power on
and off.

• PAD switches
Inputs 1 through 16 feature pad switches, which attenuate input signals by 20 dB.

1
PAD
20dB

• GAIN controls

-60

-16
GAIN

Inputs 1 through 16 feature rotary gain controls that adjust input
sensitivity. Input sensitivity ranges from +4 dB to –40 dB when the
Pad is on, and from –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off.

• PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators
The SIGNAL indicator lights up when the input signal level is 20 dB
PEAK
below nominal. The PEAK indicator lights up when the input signal
SIGNAL
level is 3 dB below clipping.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

5
Analog I/O & Digital I/O

The DM1000’s rear panel features Input connectors 1–16, which enable you to connect
microphone and line-level sources, and OMNI IN connectors, which enable you to connect
line-level sources. Signals input at these connectors can be patched to Input Channels. (See
page 105 for more information on patching Input Channels.)

52

Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O

Omni Outs
• OMNI OUT connectors 1–12
INPUT
The DM1000 rear panel features OMNI OUT connectors 1–12 for
9
8
connecting line-level sources, such as a monitoring system, master
recorder, external effects processor. The OMNI OUT connectors use
balanced XLR-3-32-type jacks, with a rated output level of +4 dB.
These outputs can be patched to Bus Outs and Input Channel Direct
Outs. (See page 109 for more information on patching outputs to the
Omni Outs.)

Digital Inputs & Outputs
The DM1000 rear panel features digital input and output connectors that enable you to
connect external digital devices. Any signal path can be patched to these digital inputs and
outputs.
You can also add analog and digital I/Os by installing optional I/O cards in Slots 1 and 2.

Digital I/O Connectors
• 2TR IN DIGITAL connector
These connectors accept signals from a DAT or other 2-track digital recorder or consumer
format digital audio device.
2TR IN DIGITAL 1 uses an XLR-3-31-type connector and accepts
2TR IN
1
DIGITAL
AES/EBU format digital audio.
2
2TR IN DIGITAL 2 is an RCA phono connector and accepts conCOAXIAL AES/EBU
sumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio.

2TR D1

2TR D2

You can patch signals input at these connectors to any Input Channels (see page 110). You can monitor these inputs via the Control
Room monitors by using the MONITOR [2TR D1] and [2TR D2]
buttons.

• 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors
These connectors output signals to a DAT or other 2-track digital recorder or consumer format digital audio device.
2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 uses an XLR-3-32-type connector and outputs
1
AES/EBU format digital audio.
2
2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 is an RCA phono connector and outputs conAES/EBU
COAXIAL
sumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio.
You can patch outputs to Bus Outs and Input Channel Direct Outs
(see page 110).

SLOT 1–2
These slots allow you to install optional mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) I/O cards. These cards offer AD/DA conversion, and various analog I/O options and
digital I/O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including
AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam. You can patch signals input at these card connectors to any
Input Channels or Insert Ins (see page 106).
You can patch the card outputs to Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct Outs (see page 111).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR Digital Inputs

53

The following mini-YGDAI I/O cards are currently available.
Card

Format

In

Out

MY8-AD
MY8-AD241
MY4-AD

Analog in

Phone jack (balanced) x8
—

XLR-3-31 type (balanced) x4

8
Analog out

—

24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz 25-pin D-sub
4

20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

8

24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

MY8-AE2

MY8-TD2

25-pin D-sub

AES/EBU I/O
8

24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
Optical x2

ADAT I/O
16

16

Tascam
IEEE1394

Optical x4
24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

8
MY8-mLAN2

8

8

25-pin D-sub
BNC wordclock output
6-pin 1394 connector x2

1. This card is a substitution for a 20-bit MY8-AD card.
2. These cards support 24-bit/96 kHz in Double Channel mode. (Separate 96 kHz wordclock required.)
3. This card is identical to the MY8-AE96, except that it features a sampling rate converter.

See the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at the following URL for up-to-date news on
I/O cards:
.

Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR
Digital Inputs
The DM1000’s 2TR Digital Inputs and an optional MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card feature
sampling rate converters, so you can easily convert the sampling frequency of digital inputs
to the current DM1000 sampling rate.
1 To convert the sampling rate of the signals input at the 2TR Digital Inputs,
press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] button.
The DIO | Word Clock page appears. Use the following buttons to turn the sampling rate
converter on and off.

• 2TR IN D1.....................This button turns on and off the sampling rate converter for
2TR IN DIGITAL 1.
• 2TR IN D2.....................This button turns on and off the sampling rate converter for
2TR IN DIGITAL 2.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

5
Analog I/O & Digital I/O

MY16-AT

XLR-3-32 type (balanced) x4

24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

MY8-AE96S3
MY8-AT2

24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

4

MY8-AD96

MY8-AE96

Connectors

20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
8

MY4-DA
MY8-DA96

Resolution/Sampling Rate

54

Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O

2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the 2TR IN D1 or 2TR IN D2
button, then press [ENTER].
The sampling rate converter for the selected 2TR Digital Input turns on or off. When on,
the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the DM1000’s current sampling rate.
Tip:
• The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the DM1000 is currently operating.
• The AES/EBU and COAXIAL parameter fields display the converted sampling rate. (If the
current wordclock is not synched, they display “Unlock.”)
3 To convert the sampling rate of the signals input at the installed I/O card
inputs, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button.
The DIO | Format page appears.

1

Use the buttons in the SRC sections (1) to turn the sampling rate converters on and off.
You can turn the sampling rate converters of the digital I/O cards on or off in pairs (odd &
even channels, in this order).
Note: The sampling rate converter is available only on the Yamaha MY8-AE96S Digital I/O
card. If you have installed other types of I/O cards in the slots, or if no cards are installed in
the DM1000, the buttons in the SRC sections are disabled.
4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to any two-channel button in the
SRC sections (1), then press [ENTER].
The sampling rate converter for the selected 2-channel input turns on or off. When on, the
sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the DM1000’s current sampling
rate.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status

55

Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status
You can view and monitor the Channel Status (sampling rate, emphasis, etc.) of digital
audio signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button, then press the [F2] button.
The Utility | CH Status page appears.

1
2

5
Analog I/O & Digital I/O

3
4
5
6

On this page, use the following buttons to select a slot or connector for which you want to
view the channel status.

A SLOT1, SLOT2
These buttons enable you to view the Channel Status of each two adjacent (odd and
even, in this order) channel signals connected to the digital I/O cards installed in Slots 1
and 2.

B 2TR IN
This button enables you to view the Channel Status of input signals connected to the
2TR Digital Inputs.
2 Move the cursor to the desired input or slot button, then press [ENTER].
Channel Status information for the selected input is displayed. Channel Status information
includes the following items:

C FS
Indicates the sampling rate. If no signal is being input, or if the incoming wordclock is
not synching to the internal clock, “Unlock” appears.

D EMPHASIS
Indicates the Emphasis on/off status.

E CATEGORY
Indicates the status of “Category Code Bit” included in the IEC958 Part 2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format. This parameter can display the following values:
Parameter values

Description

General

Temporarily used.

Laser Optical

Laser optical device

D/D Conv

Digital - Digital converter and signal processing device

Magnetic

Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk device

D.Broadcast

Digital broadcast reception

Instruments

Musical instrument, microphone, and sources that generate string
signals

A/D Conv

A/D converter (without copyright information)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

56

Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O

Parameter values

Description

A/D Conv with(C)

A/D converter (with copyright information)

Solid Memory

Solid memory device

Experimental

Experimental device

Unknown

Unknown

Note: “AES/EBU” appears in the Category row when you are monitoring IEC958 Part 3
(AES/EBU-Professional) format signals (that do not include Category Code Bit).

F COPY
Indicates the status of copy protection information included in the IEC958 Part2
(S/PDIF-Consumer) format signals. “OK” appears if copying is allowed. “Prohibit”
appears if copy-protected.

Dithering Digital Outputs
When digital audio is transferred to lower-resolution systems, truncated bits may generate
unpleasant noise. To cancel the audible effect of this noise, a small complement of noise is
intentionally added to the digital outputs. This process is called “dithering.”
On the DM1000, you can dither the 2TR Digital Outputs and Slot Outputs. For example,
you can apply dithering to the DM1000 stereo mix data and record to a 16-bit DAT recorder.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button.
The DIO | Format page appears. The dithering settings are displayed on the bottom of the
page.

2 Move the cursor to the output or channel to which you want to apply dithering, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select the value that matches the resolution of the receiving device.
Note:
• You cannot apply dithering to outputs or channels that are set to “OFF.”
• Dithering is effective only when the resolution of the receiving device is lower than that of
the DM1000.
Tip: To copy the currently-selected setting to all channels, double-click the [ENTER] button.
The copy confirmation window is displayed.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates

57

Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates
To operate the DM1000 at higher sampling frequencies (88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) and transfer
digital audio signals to and from connected external devices, you must set the data transfer
format in accordance with the sampling frequencies supported by the external devices.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] button.
The DIO | Word Clock page appears.
2 Select INT88.2k, INT96k, or an external device running at the higher sampling rates as the wordclock source.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button.
The DIO | Format page appears.

5
Analog I/O & Digital I/O

1

4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to an IN/OUT parameter field
(1), and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
set the data transfer format.
The IN/OUT parameters are used to set one of the following data transfer formats for each
slot input and output.
• DOUBLE CHANNEL
In Double Channel mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted as mono signals at
a sampling rate that is exactly half (44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling rate. Data is
handled by two channels. This is useful when you wish to transfer data between the
DM1000 running at a higher sampling rate and legacy 44.1/48 kHz digital MTRs or HDRs.
Note:
• Double Channel mode reduces the total number of inputs or outputs on the corresponding
slot. The even-numbered channels are disabled.
• You cannot select this mode unless the DM1000 is operating at a higher sampling rate.
• DOUBLE SPEED
In Double Speed mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at the current higher
sampling rate (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz). Select this mode if the devices that support the
higher sampling rates transmit or receive data.
Note: This mode is available only on the slots in which optional Yamaha MY8-AE96 or
MY8-AE96S Digital I/O cards are installed.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

58

Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O

• SINGLE
In Single mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is half
(44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling rate of the DM1000. For example, this is useful
when you wish to send 44.1 kHz digital signals from an external HDR to the DM1000 running at 88.2 kHz.
Note:
• This mode is unavailable for slots in which optional Yamaha MY8-AE96 or MY8-AE96S
Digital I/O cards are installed.
• You cannot select this mode unless the DM1000 is operating at a higher sampling rate.
Tip:
• The parameter fields display “–” if the corresponding slots contain no I/O cards or if AD/DA
cards or other I/O cards that do not allow you to set the transfer format have been installed.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

59

Input Channels

6 Input Channels
This chapter describes how to adjust the DM1000’s Input Channel parameters.

About Input Channels

METER

(Gain Reduction)

INPUT PATCH

GATE

ATT

Keyin
12ch Group(1-12,13-24....)
AUX 1-8

AUX 8

AUX 1

SOLO

METER
INSERT
4BAND
EQ

INSERT
ON LEVEL

INPUT
DELAY

PAN
PAN

(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)

METER

LFE

METER
PRE/POST

ON

AUX

COMP
Keyin
Self or Stereo Link

•

6
Input Channels

METER (Out Meter)
METER

SOLO L
SOLO R

BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8

INPUT 1(...48)

STEREO L
STEREO R

The input Channel section enables you to adjust the level and tone of the signals input to
the DM1000 and route the signals to Bus 1–8, Stereo Bus, and Aux Out 1–8. The following
diagram illustrates the Input Channel signal flow.

DIRECT OUT 1(...48)

(Phase)
This section switches the phase of input signals.

• GATE
This dynamics processor can be used as a gate or for ducking.
• COMP (Compressor)
This dynamics processor can be used as compressor, expander or limiter. The compressor
can be pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• ATT (Attenuator)
This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals that will be input to the
EQ. The attenuator enables you to prevent post-EQ signals from clipping and to correct signal levels that are too low.
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
This parametric EQ features four bands (high, high-mid, low-mid, and low).
• INPUT DELAY (Input delay)
This section enables you to delay input signals. You can use this delay to fine-tune the timing
between channels, or as a delay effect with feedback.
• ON (On/Off)
This section enables you to turn the channel on or off. The channel is muted with the Off
setting.
• LEVEL
This section enables you to adjust the input level of the Input Channel signal.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

60

Chapter 6—Input Channels

• PAN
This section enables you to adjust the pan setting of the signals routed from the Input Channels to the Stereo Bus. You can also apply the pan setting to a pair of Bus channels.
If the internal Surround Sound setting is activated, the Surround Pan settings for 3-1, 5.1,
and 6.1 channels are available (see page 121).
• AUX (Aux Send level)
This section enables you to adjust the level of signals routed to Aux Out 1–8. The signals can
be routed to Aux Sends from either the pre-fader or post-fader position.
• INSERT
This section enables you to patch input signals to external devices via the on-board I/O connectors or I/O cards, or insert the internal effect processors.
• METER
This section enables you to switch the metering position of the signal levels that are displayed in the Meter page or on the optional MB1000 Meter Bridge. (See page 37 for more
information on selecting the metering position.)
Tip: You can store these channel parameter settings in the Channel library. You can also store
the Gate, Compressor, and EQ parameter settings to the corresponding libraries.

Setting the Input Channels from the Display
To set the Input Channel parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top
panel to directly change the setting.
This section explains how to set the parameters via the display.

Switching the Signal Phase
To switch the phase of each Input Channel, press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the following /INS/DLY | Phase page appears.
Move the cursor to the NOR/REV button of the channel for which you want to change the
phase, then press the [ENTER] or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to change the setting.

1

2
A NOR/REV
These buttons switch the corresponding Input Channel phase. NOR buttons indicate
normal phase, and REV buttons indicate reversed phase.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Input Channels from the Display

61

B GLOBAL
The GLOBAL NOR/REV buttons allow you to set the phase for all Input Channels
simultaneously.
Tip:
• The name of the currently-selected channel is indicated in the upper-right corner of the
screen.
• You can set the phase separately for each channel in a channel pair.

Delaying Input Channels
To set the delay for each channel, press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until
the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears.
- DLY 1-16 page
This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 1–16.

6

- DLY 17-32 page
This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 17–32.

Input Channels

- DLY 33-48 page
This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 33–48.
The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.

1

2

3

A DELAY SCALE

•
•
•
•
•

The following buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the msec
value.
meter..............................Units are set to meters.
feet..................................Units are set to feet.
sample ...........................Units are set to samples.
beat.................................Units are set to beats.
frame..............................Units are set to timecode frames.

B GANG button
When this button is turned on (highlighted), the delay time for each channel in a channel pair can be set simultaneously. When this option is turned off, the delay time can be
set for each channel in a channel pair individually.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

62

Chapter 6—Input Channels

C Channel section

•
•

•
•

You can set individual delay parameters here. The delay parameters include the following items:
msec............................... This parameter sets the delay time in milliseconds.
meter/feet/sample/
beat/frame .................... The delay time can be set using units of meters, feet, samples,
beats, or frames, which you select by using the DELAY SCALE
buttons.
MIX................................ This parameter sets the mix balance of dry (Input Channel)
and wet (delayed) signals.
FB.GAIN ....................... This parameter sets the amount of delay feedback.

Tip:
• The delay time range depends on the sampling rate at which the DM1000 is operating. (For
example, at 44.1 kHz, the range is 0 through 984.1 msec.)
• If you select the DELAY SCALE meter or feet button, the distance value can be converted to
the delay time based on sonic speeds (about 340 m/sec at 15 degrees Celsius). This option is
useful if you wish to correct the timing difference between two sound sources that are far
apart.
• If you select the DELAY SCALE beat button, a parameter box for setting a note that represents the beat and a parameter box for a tempo (BPM) setting appear below the DELAY
SCALE parameter. Setting the note and BPM settings in these parameter boxes enables you
to set a delay time that synchronizes to the song tempo.

Gating Input Channels
To set the Input Channel gates, use the [SEL] buttons to select the desired Input Channel,
then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F1] button. The Dynamics | Gate Edit page appears.

2

1

3

4
5

6

7

A KEYIN SOURCE
Select one of the following buttons to determine the trigger source for the currently-selected Input Channel’s gate.
• SELF............................... The selected channel’s own input signal is the trigger source.
• CHANNEL.................... Another Channel’s input signal is the trigger source. Select the
desired channel in the parameter box below the CHANNEL
button.
• AUX ............................... An Aux Send signal is the trigger source. Select the desired bus
in the parameter box below the AUX button.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Input Channels from the Display

63

B STEREO LINK
This parameter’s ON/OFF button enables you to pair gates for stereo operation even
when the Input Channels are not paired.

C CURVE
This area displays the current gate curve.

D TYPE
This area displays the current gate type (GATE or DUCKING).
Note: You cannot change the gate type on this page. To change the gate type, recall a program
that uses the desired gate type from the Gate library.

E Meters
These meters indicate the levels of the post-gate signals and the amount of gain reduction.

F ON/OFF
G PARAMETER
These controls enable you to set the gate parameters. (See page 320 for more information on the parameters.)
Tip: You can store the gate settings in the Gate library, which features preset programs that
can be used for various applications (see page 174).

Compressing Input Channels
To set the Input Channel compressors, use the [SEL] buttons to select the desired Input
Channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button to
display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page.

2

1

3

4
5

6

7

A POSITION
Use the Parameter wheel, or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the position of the compressor within the channel from the following options:
• PRE EQ ..........................Immediately before EQ (default)
• PRE FADER ..................Immediately before the fader
• POST FADER ...............Immediately after the fader

B STEREO LINK
This ON/OFF button enables you to pair compressors for stereo operation even when
channels are not paired.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s gate on or off.

6

64

Chapter 6—Input Channels

C CURVE
This area displays the current compressor curve.

D TYPE
This field indicates the compressor type used by the currently-selected channel’s compressor (COMP/EXPAND/COMP (H)/COMP (S)).
Note: You cannot change the compressor type on this page. To change the compressor type,
recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the compressor library.

E Meters
These meters indicate the levels of the post-compressor signals and the amount of gain
reduction.

F ON/OFF
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s compressor on or off.

G PARAMETER section
These controls enable you to set the compressor parameters. (See page 320 for more
information on the parameters of each compressor type.)
Tip: You can store the compressor settings in the Compressor library, which features preset
programs that can be used for various applications (see page 175).

Attenuating Input Channels
To set the attenuator for each channel, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER
[DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels
appears.
- ATT 1-16 page
This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 1–16.
- ATT 17-32 page
This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 17–32.
- ATT 33-48 page
This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 33–48.
The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.

Move the cursor to the knob for the desired Input Channel, then rotate the Parameter wheel
to set the amount of attenuation in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB. To reset the attenuation
amount to 0 dB, move the cursor to the desired knob, then press the [ENTER] button.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Input Channels from the Display

65

You can also copy the currently-selected Input Channel attenuation setting to all Input
Channels (including those not currently displayed on the screen). To do this, move the cursor to the source knob that you wish to copy, then double-click the [ENTER] button. The
confirmation window appears. Select YES to execute the copy operation.
You can also set the amount of attenuation in bits. To set the amount in bits in the range of
+2 bits to –24 bits, move the cursor to the desired bit shift parameter below the attenuator
knob, then rotate the Parameter wheel. (This function is available only for the Input Channel attenuators. You cannot use this function for the Output Channel attenuators.) You can
copy the currently-selected attenuation setting in bits to all Input Channels. To do this,
move the cursor to the source bit shift parameter box that you wish to copy, then double-click the [ENTER] button. The confirmation window appears.
Select YES to execute the copy operation.

6

EQ’ing Input Channels
The DM1000’s Input Channels feature 4-band (LOW, LOW-MID, HIGH-MID, HIGH)
parametric EQ. The LOW-MID and HIGH-MID bands are a peaking type of EQ. The LOW
and HIGH bands can be set to shelving, peaking, or HPF and LPF respectively.
1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the channel for which you wish
to adjust EQ.
2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to
display the EQ | EQ Edit page.

2

3

4

1
5

6

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

Tip:
• You can also display the desired page by pressing the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button once,
then press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the corresponding channel.
• You can also set the attenuation amount (in dB) for the currently-selected channel on the
EQ | EQ Edit page.

66

Chapter 6—Input Channels

The parameters on this page are described below:

A EQ ON
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s EQ on or off. You can
press the [ENTER] button to turn the EQ on or off as long as the cursor is located on
any parameter other than TYPE.

B TYPE
Selects the type of EQ. TYPE I is the EQ type used on legacy Yamaha 02R series digital
mixing consoles. TYPE II is a newly developed algorithm.

C ATT
Determines the amount of pre-EQ signal attenuation in dB. It is the same Attenuator
parameter that appears on the EQ | ATT 1-16, ATT 17-32, and ATT 33-48 pages.

D CURVE
This area displays the current EQ curve.

E Meters
These meters indicate the post-EQ signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel
and its available pair partner.

F LOW, L-MID, H-MID, HIGH sections
These sections contain the Q, Frequency (F), and Gain (G) parameters for the four
bands. These parameter values range as follows:
Parameter
Q
Frequency
Gain

LOW

LOW-MID

HPF, 10.0 to 0.10
(41 steps), L.SHELF

HIGH-MID

10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps)

HIGH
LPF, 10.0 to 0.10
(41 steps), H.SHELF

21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz (120 steps per 1/12 octave)
–18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.1 dB steps)1

1. The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on/off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF
respectively.

Tip:
• The LOW-band EQ functions as a high-pass filter when the Q parameter in the LOW section
is set to HPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set to L.SHELF.
• The HIGH-band EQ functions as a low-pass filter when the Q parameter in the HIGH section is set to LPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set to H.SHELF.
3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter, then rotate the Parameter wheel
to change the value.
Tip:
• You can also press the buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the desired
band and use the rotary controls to directly edit the Q, F, and G parameters (see page 71).
• You can store the EQ settings in the EQ library, which features preset programs that can be
used for various applications (see page 177).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Input Channels from the Display

67

Panning Input Channels
Input Channels can be panned in the range of L63 through CENTER to R63. To pan each
channel, press the [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until one of the following pages
that contains the desired channels appears.
- Pan1-32 page
This page enables you to set the pan for Input Channels 1–32.
- Pan33-48 page
This page enables you to set the pan for Input Channels 33–48.
The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same. Move
the cursor to the desired Pan control, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the value.

6
Input Channels

2
1

A Pan controls
These knobs adjust the channel pan settings.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected Pan control to center.

B MODE
The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned. There are
three Pan modes as follows:
• INDIVIDUAL...............In Individual mode, paired Input Channel
pan controls operate independently.
• GANG ............................In Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan
controls operate in unison, maintaining the
current pan range.
• INV GANG....................In Inverse Gang mode, paired Input Channel
pan controls operate in unison but move in
opposite directions.
Tip:
• You can use the Encoders to change the Input Channel pan settings (see page 71). This is
useful if you wish to change the pan settings quickly. You can also use the Joystick in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to change the pan settings, unless the DM1000 is in Surround mode.
• Surround Pan is available when the DM1000 is in Surround mode. Refer to Chapter 11
“Surround Functions” on page 121 for more information on Surround Pan.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

68

Chapter 6—Input Channels

Routing Input Channels
You can route each Input Channel to the Stereo Bus, Bus 1–8, or its own Direct Out. With
the default setting, signals are routed only to the Stereo Bus. However, you can patch signals
to a single or multiple destinations, if necessary.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until
the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears.
- CH1-16 page
This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 1–16.
- CH17-32 page
This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 17–32.
- CH33-48 page
This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 33–48.
Tip: You can also display the desired page by pressing the ROUTING [DISPLAY] button once,
then press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the corresponding channel.
The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.

5
6
7

1
2
3
4

8
A PAN buttons
These buttons determine whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is applied to the
paired Bus outs (Follow Pan function).

B Bus buttons 1–8
These buttons route the currently-selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs. If the
DM1000 is in Surround mode, the button indicators change as follows, depending on
the selected Surround mode:
Bus buttons

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Surround mode: 3-1

L

R

C

S

5

6

7

8

Surround mode: 5.1

L

R

Ls

Rs

C

E

7

8

Surround mode: 6.1

L

R

Ls

Rs

C

Bs

E

8

L=Left, R=Right, C=Center, S=Surround, Ls=Left Surround
Rs=Right Surround, E=Low Frequency Effect, Bs=Back Surround

The above table shows the default assignment. The actual assignment may vary, depending on the settings on the Setup | Surround Bus Setup page.

C S button
When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to the
Stereo Bus.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Input Channels from the Display

69

D D button
When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to its
Direct Out. See page 111 for more information on the Direct Out.

E ALL STEREO button
This button turns on the S button for all channels on the page.

F ALL BUS button
This button turns on the Bus buttons 1–8 for all channels on the page.

G ALL CLEAR button
This button clears all routing assignments on the page.

H SURROUND MODE
This field displays the current Surround mode.

6

Viewing Input Channel Settings

■ Viewing the Gate, Compressor, and EQ Settings
To display the View | Parameter page for a specific Input Channel, use the corresponding
[SEL] button or fader to select the desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[VIEW] button, then the [F1] button.
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press
the [INC]/[DEC] buttons or [ENTER] button to modify the setting.

43

1
5

2

6
7

8
A GATE section
This section enables you to turn the gate-type dynamics processor on or off and set the
parameters. (See page 62 for more information.)

B COMP section
This section enables you to turn the compressor-type dynamics processor on or off and
set the parameters. (See page 63 for more information.)

C INSERT section
This section enables you to turn the Insert on or off and patch the Insert In and Out.
(See page 112 for more information.)

D EQ section
This section enables you to set various EQ parameters. (See page 65 for more information.)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Input Channel on the
View | Parameter or Fader pages.

70

Chapter 6—Input Channels

E Meters
These meters indicate the signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel and its
available pair partner.

F

(Phase) section
You can reverse the signal phase of the currently-selected Input Channel. (See page 60
for more information.)

G DELAY section
This section enables you to set the currently-selected channel’s Delay function. (See
page 61 for more information.)

H PAIR section
This section indicates whether or not channels are paired. The heart icon ( ) is in one
piece when channels are paired. The heart icon is broken ( ) when channels are not
paired. (See page 73 for more information.)

■ Viewing the Pan, Fader, and Aux Send Level Settings
To display the View | Fader page of a certain Input Channel, use the corresponding [SEL]
button or fader to select the desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] button.
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or
press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the setting.

1

2

3

4

5

6

A PAN/ON/Fader section
• PAN control.................. This control adjusts the currently-selected Input Channel’s Pan
parameter.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Pan control to Center.
• ON/OFF button ........... This button turns on or off the currently-selected Input Channel.
• Fader.............................. This parameter sets the fader position of the currently-selected
Input Channel. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is
set to 0.0 dB.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Fader to 0.0 dB.

B SURROUND PAN section
• SURROUND PAN ....... The Surround pan parameters for the currently-selected Input
Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode is selected.
See page 121 for more information on Surround pan.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface

71

C BUS ROUTING/FOLLOW PAN section
• BUS ROUTING ............This section enables you to select a destination Bus for the
selected channel. When the D button is turned on, the channel
signal is patched to the Direct Out selected in the parameter
box below the button.
• FOLLOW PAN..............This button determines whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is applied to the paired Bus Outs (Follow Pan function).
When the button is turned off, the Follow Pan function is disabled and an identical signal is sent to the paired Bus Outs.

D AUX section
• AUX................................These controls set the currently-selected Input Channel’s Aux
Send 1–8 levels and positions. (See page 91 for more information on Aux Sends.)

E Meter section

F GROUP section
• FADER/MUTE/EQ/COMP ............... These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ,
or Comp group, if any, the currently-selected
Input Channel is in. If the channel is in a group,
the group number appears. If the channel is not
in a group, “—” appears.

Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface
You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control most parameters for
Input Channels.

Setting Input Channel Levels and Panning the Channels
1 Press the LAYER [1-16], [17-32], or [33-48] button to select a Layer.
2 Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels.
3 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button, then rotate the corresponding
Encoder to pan the desired Input Channel.
When you rotate the Encoder, the current pan setting display pops up.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

• Meters............................These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected Input
Channel.
• PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST FADER ...........The metering position is displayed below
the meters.

6

72

Chapter 6—Input Channels

Routing and EQ’ing Input Channels
1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader for the channel you wish to control.
2 To route each Input Channel, use the following buttons in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section:
• ROUTING [1]–[8] buttons ................These buttons route the currently-selected Input
Channel to a Bus.
• ROUTING [STEREO] button............When this button is turned on, Input Channel
signals are routed to the Stereo Bus.
• ROUTING [DIRECT] button............When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to its
Direct Out. (See page 111 for more information
on Direct Out.)
The corresponding button indicator lights up.
3 To control EQ for the currently-selected channel, press one of the following
buttons to select the band you wish to adjust:
• EQUALIZER [HIGH] button ............HIGH band
• EQUALIZER [H-MID] button ..........HIGH-MID band
• EQUALIZER [L-MID] button ...........LOW-MID band
• EQUALIZER [LOW] button ..............LOW band
4 Use the EQUALIZER [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the Q,
frequency, and gain of the band selected in Step 3.
See page 65 for more information on EQ.
Tip:
• Pressing and holding down the button selected in Step 3 resets the corresponding band
parameter.
• Pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL [HIGH] and [LOW] buttons simultaneously resets all
band parameters for the current EQ.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pairing Input Channels

73

Pairing Input Channels
On the DM1000, you can pair adjacent odd-even Input Channels or counterpart channels
on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader. Faders and most parameters of
paired channels are linked for stereo operation. Paired channels’ linked parameters and
non-linked parameters (that are available for independent control) are listed below:
Linked parameters
[SEL] buttons

Non-linked parameters
Input patches

Faders

Insert patches

Channel on/off

Output patches

Insert on/off

Comp insert position

Solo on/off

Phase

Solo Safe

Delay on/off

Aux on/off

Delay time
Delay feedback

Aux Sends as Pre or Post

Delay mix

Gate

Routing

Comp settings

Pan, Follow Pan

EQ settings

Surround pan

Fader group

Aux Send pan

Mute group

Balance

Fade time

Attenuators

6
Input Channels

Aux Send level

Recall Safe
Routing settings

To pair channels, or to cancel channel pairs, you can use the [SEL] buttons on the top panel
or access the Pair/Group pages.

■ Pairing Channels by Using the [SEL] Buttons
1 While pressing and holding down the [SEL] button for one of the channels
you wish to pair, press the [SEL] button for the adjacent channel. (The paired
channel numbers should be odd and even in this order).
Note: The settings of the first channel are copied to the second channel and the channels are
paired if the Pair Confirmation check box on the Preference1 page is not checked (default).
(If the selected channels have already been paired, this procedure will cancel the pair setting.)
The Channel Pairing window appears.

Note: You can pair only channels that are adjacent, odd-even (in this order) channels. Pressing
the [SEL] button for a non-adjacent channel will be ignored. You cannot pair or cancel a pair
of vertical partners.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

74

Chapter 6—Input Channels

2 Move the cursor to the desired button in the Channel Pairing window, then
press [ENTER].
The following buttons are available in this window:
• CANCEL
Cancels the operation.
• CH x ➔ y
Copies the odd channel parameter values to the even channel.
• CH y ➔ x
Copies the even channel parameter values to the odd channel.
• RESET BOTH
Resets both channel parameters to the default settings (same as when Channel memory #01
is recalled).
Move the cursor to the desired button, then press [ENTER] to confirm the pair.
Tip: Pressing and holding down the first [SEL] button of the paired channels and pressing
the second [SEL] button cancels the pair.

■ Pairing Input Channels Using the Display
1 Press the [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Grup | Input page
appears.

1
2
3

The parameters on this page are described below:

A PAIR MODE
Determines how channels are paired.

B STEREO/MONO x2 buttons
These buttons turn pairs on or off.

C MS buttons
These buttons are available when an MS microphone is connected. MS Decoding can be
used to decode signals from MS microphones arranged as MS pairs. (See page 77 for
more information on MS Decoding.)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pairing Input Channels

75

2 Move the cursor to the PAIR MODE parameter field (1), then select the
HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL button.
The function of each mode is described below:
• HORIZONTAL.............This button pairs adjacent odd-even channels (default).
• VERTICAL ....................This button pairs counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2
that share the same physical fader (e.g., CH1 & CH17, CH16 &
CH32, etc.). This mode is useful when you wish to use one
fader to control both stereo channels.
When you switch the Pair Mode, the combinations of channel numbers displayed on the
page also change.

3 Move the cursor to the desired channel’s MONOx2 button, then press
[ENTER].
The channels are paired.
4 To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the desired channel’s STEREO button,
then press [ENTER].
Tip: You can also pair or cancel a pair of Output Channels in the same way on the Pair/Group
| Output page (see page 87).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

6
Input Channels

Note:
• When Pair mode is switched, only the channel numbers change. The mix parameters of the
paired partners do not change.
• For example, if you change Pair mode from Horizontal to Vertical, the Input Channel “2”
indication changes to Input Channel “17.” However, its parameters do not change. (If Channels 1 and 2 have been paired, switching the mode will pair Channels 1 and 17.)

76

Chapter 6—Input Channels

Naming Input Channels
By default, Input Channels are named CH1, CH2, etc. You can change these names if necessary. For example, it may be helpful for mixdown if you name a particular Input Channel
with the type of musical instrument connected to the corresponding input jack.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In
Patch | CH Name page appears.

1

2

You can specify Short names in the center column (1) and Long (full) names in the right
column (2).
2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a name.

3 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The new name is now effective.
Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using MS Stereo Microphone

77

Using MS Stereo Microphone
The MS system is a type of stereo recording that uses two microphones; mono-directional
M (Middle) and bi-directional S (Side) microphones. An M microphone picks up main signals, and an S microphone picks up directional signals. These two signals are decoded by
calculating a sum (M plus S) and a difference (M minus S), and are recorded to L and R
channels.
An MS microphone is usually a stereo microphone that has both M and S functions. Use an
MS microphone in the following way:

R connector

9
9

INPUT

L connector

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

2 Press the [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Group | Input page
appears.
3 Turn on the MS button for the channels to which the MS microphone is connected.
The two channels are automatically paired and MS Decoding is turned on. With MS Decoding turned on, the faders and Encoders (Pan parameters) function as follows:
• Odd-channel faders.................M level (Controls the volume level.)
• Odd-channel Encoders ...........ML/MR balance
• Even-channel faders ................S level (Controls the left and right directional spread.)
• Even-channel Encoders ..........SL/SR balance
4 Use the faders and Encoders to adjust the MS microphone level and balance.
When the signals are routed to paired Buses or the Stereo Bus, a sum of signals (ML plus
SL) is sent to the odd-numbered Bus, and a difference of signals (ML minus SL) is sent to
the even-numbered Bus.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

6
Input Channels

1 Connect the R connector of an MS microphone to an odd channel input jack,
and the L connector to an even channel input jack.
Signals from the MS microphone are
MS microphone
input from the L and R connectors. To
use an MS microphone with the
DM1000, connect the L connector to
the input jack of an odd Input Channel, and connect the R connector to
the input jack of the partner channel.

78

Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Bus Outs

79

7 Bus Outs
This chapter describes how to adjust the DM1000’s Stereo Out and Bus Out parameters.

About Stereo Out
The Stereo Out section receives Input Channel and Bus Out 1–8 signals, mixes them into
two channels, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to two
channel output connectors. The following diagram illustrates the Stereo Out signal flow.
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)

METER METER

INSERT
ATT

METER

INSERT

METER

INSERT
ON LEVEL
BAL
OUTPUT
DELAY

4BAND
EQ

STEREO R

• INSERT
This section enables you to route the Stereo Out signals to external devices via the on-board
connectors or I/O cards, or insert internal effects processors.
• ATT (Attenuator)
This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals to be input to the EQ.
The attenuator prevents post-EQ signals from clipping or corrects signal levels that are too
low.
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
This parametric EQ features four bands (HIGH, HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, and LOW).
• COMP (Compressor)
This dynamics processor can be used as compressor, expander, or limiter. The processor can
be located pre-EQ, pre-[STEREO] fader, or post-[STEREO] fader.
• ON (On/Off)
This button turns the Stereo Out on or off.
• LEVEL
The [STEREO] fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels.
• Balance
This section enables you to adjust the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out.
• OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
This section delays the output signals. It is mainly used to fine-tune the signal timing.
• METER
This section enables you to switch the metering position of signal levels that are displayed
on the Meter page or by the stereo meter to the right of the screen. (See page 37 for more
information on selecting the metering position.)
Note: By default, the Stereo Out signals are output to OMNI OUT 9–10. However, you can
patch these signals to other output connectors or I/O cards using the Output Patch pages.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

7
Bus Outs

Same as stereo master L

STEREO L

OUTPUT PATCH

STEREO L
STEREO R

BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8

COMP

80

Chapter 7—Bus Outs

Bus Out 1–8
The Bus Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from Input Channels to the specified buses,
processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the specified output connectors or I/O cards.
The following diagram illustrates the Bus Out signal flow.
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)

METER METER

INSERT
ATT

METER

INSERT

ON LEVEL

METER

INSERT

BUS 1(...8)
OUTPUT
DELAY

4BAND
EQ
ON
PAN

LEVEL

BUS to STEREO
TO INPUT PATCH

OUTPUT PATCH

STEREO L
STEREO R

BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8

COMP

BUS 1(...8)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

INSERT
ATT (Attenuator)
4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
COMP (Compressor)
ON (On/Off)
LEVEL
OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
METER
The parameters and sections listed above are identical to those for the Stereo Out. For more
information, refer to the explanation the Stereo Out (see page 79).

• Bus to Stereo
Bus Out 1–8 signals are also routed to the Stereo Bus. In addition to the ON, LEVEL, and
other parameters, you can also set the Send Level, On/Off, Pan, and other parameters.
Tip: You can also pair adjacent odd-even buses (in this order) for stereo operation (see
page 87).
Note: By default, channels 1–8 and 9–16 of Slots 1 and 2 are patched to the Bus Out 1–8
outputs. However, you can change this patching on the Output Patch page.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display

81

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display
To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the
desired parameter on the display and change the value, or operate the desired button or
control on the top panel.
This section explains how to set the parameters on the display.
Tip: Refer to Chapter 9 “Input & Output Patching” on page 105 for more information on
how to set inserts.

Attenuating the Stereo Out and Bus Out
To attenuate the Stereo Out and Bus Out signals, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | Out Att page. On this page, you can
attenuate the Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8, and Stereo Out signals.

7
Bus Outs

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except that this page does not include the bit shift parameters (see page 64).

Delaying the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
To delay the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 signals, press the [
repeatedly until the /INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears.

/INSERT/DELAY] button

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except that this page does not include the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see
page 61).
Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button once,
then press the [SEL] button or move the fader to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

82

Chapter 7—Bus Outs

Compressing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 compressors, press the [DYNAMICS] button, then
the [F3] button to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or
faders to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels (see page 63).

EQ’ing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
To set the EQ for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 EQ, press the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY]
button repeatedly to display the EQ | EQ Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or faders to
select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels (see page 65).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display

83

Routing Bus Out 1–8 Signals to the Stereo Bus
You can patch Bus Out 1–8 signals to Outputs and Slots 1/2, as well as to the Stereo Bus. You
can adjust the level and pan settings of the signals routed to the Stereo Bus for each bus. This
is convenient when you wish to use Bus Outs (1–8) as a Group Bus.
To patch the Bus Out 1–8 signals to the Stereo Bus, press the SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the Routing | Bus To St page.

1
2
3

7
Bus Outs

Move the cursor to the desired parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the setting.

A TO ST PAN
These controls pan the Bus Out 1–8 signals between the left and right Stereo Out buses.

B TO ST ON/OFF
These buttons turn on and off the Bus Out 1–8 to the Stereo Bus routing.

C TO ST Faders
These faders set the Bus Out 1–8 to Stereo Bus levels.
Note:
• The settings on this page do not affect the Bus output levels and on/off settings on the Master
layer.
• However, the Bus output levels and on/off settings on the Master layer affect the settings on
this page.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

84

Chapter 7—Bus Outs

Viewing the Stereo Out and Bus Out Settings
You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Stereo Out or Bus Out
on the View | Parameter and Fader pages.

■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings
To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select
the desired bus, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F1] button.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except for the following items:
• The Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 Parameter pages do not contain the Gate and Phase
parameters.
• The Stereo Out Parameter page does not contain the Pair parameter.

■ Viewing Faders and Other Parameters
To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the
desired bus, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] button.
The Fader page layouts for Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 are slightly different.
• Stereo Out Fader page

1
2

3

A BAL
This control adjusts the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out.

B ON/OFF
This button turns the Stereo Out on or off, and links with the [ON] button in the STEREO section.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display

85

C Fader
This fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels, and links with the [STEREO] fader. The
fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.
• Bus Out (1–8) Fader page

345

1
2

7
Bus Outs

A ON/OFF
This button turns the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) on or off, and links with the
[ON] (9–16) button in the Master layer.

B Fader
This fader sets the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) level, and links with the fader (9–16)
in the Master layer. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.

C TO ST PAN
This control sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan position for the currently-selected Bus
Out (1–8).

D TO ST ON/OFF
This button turns on or off the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal for the currently-selected
Bus Out (1–8).

E TO ST Fader
This fader sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal level for the currently-selected Bus Out
(1–8).
Tip: The TO ST PAN, ON/OFF, and TO ST Fader parameters also appear on the Routing |
Bus to St page.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

86

Chapter 7—Bus Outs

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the
Control Surface
You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for
the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8.

Setting the Levels
Move the [STEREO] fader to adjust the Stereo Out levels. Press the [ON] button in the STEREO section to turn the Stereo Out on or off.
To set Bus Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the LAYER section to select the
Master layer, then move faders 9–16. At this time, you can turn Bus Out 1–8 on or off using
the [ON] 9–16 buttons.

EQ’ing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the bus to which you want to
apply EQ.
2 To control the EQ of the currently-selected bus, select the desired band to
adjust by pressing one of the following buttons:
• EQUALIZER [HIGH] button ............HIGH band
• EQUALIZER [H-MID] button ..........HIGH-MID band
• EQUALIZER [L-MID] button ...........LOW-MID band
• EQUALIZER [LOW] button ..............LOW band
3 Use the EQUALIZER [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the Q,
frequency, and gain of the band selected in Step 2.
See page 65 for more information on EQ.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pairing Buses or Aux Sends

87

Pairing Buses or Aux Sends
You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) buses or Aux Sends for stereo operation.
Paired bus and Aux Send linked parameters and non-linked parameters (that are available
for independent controls) are listed below:
Linked parameters

Non-linked parameters

[SEL] buttons

Output Patching

Fader

Insert Patching

Channel on/off

Delay on/off

Insert on/off

Delay time

Solo on/off

Bus to Stereo Pan (*)

Comp settings
Comp insert position
EQ settings
Fader group
Mute group

7

Fade time
Recall safe

Bus Outs

Attenuators
Bus to Stereo on/off (*)
Bus to Stereo fader (*)

Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) are available only for Bus Outs.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the
Pair/Grup | Output page appears.

1

2

The parameters on this page are described below.

A STEREO/MONOx2
These buttons turn Bus or Aux Send pairs on or off.

B F.S
This button determines whether Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan
when the DM1000 is in a Surround mode. When this button is turned on, Aux Sends
follow the Input Channel Surround Pan. This is useful for feeding Surround signals to
external Surround effects processors.
2 Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button for the desired Bus or Aux Send,
then press [ENTER].
The buses or Aux Sends are paired.
3 To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the STEREO button for the desired Bus
or Aux Send, then press [ENTER].

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

88

Chapter 7—Bus Outs

Attenuating Output Signals
To attenuate the DM1000’s output signals, display the EQ | Out Att page and adjust the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 attenuators individually.
If necessary, you can also select Output and I/O card channels and specify the amount of
attenuation. This technique is convenient when you want to attenuate output signals
quickly, regardless of the source signal patching.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Output Att page appears.

1

2

2 Move the cursor in the left column (1), then scroll the list up or down using
the Parameter wheel to select the desired output or slot channel for which
you want to adjust attenuation.
The following outputs and slot channels can be selected:
• OMNI OUT 1–12.....................OMNI OUT connectors 1–12
• SLOT 1-1 through 1-16...........Channels 1–16 of Slot 1
• SLOT 2-1 through 2-16...........Channels 1–16 of Slot 2
3 Move the cursor to the parameter value in the right column (2), then rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the amount of
attenuation.
The amount of attenuation can be set from 0 dB to –9 dB.
Tip: To reset the attenuation amount of all Output Channels to 0 dB, move the cursor to the
INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER].

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs

89

Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
You can change the default Bus names (BUS1, AUX4, STEREO, etc.). It may be convenient
to name the buses “Monitor Out” or “Effect Send,” for example, so that you can easily identify the signal type.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | CH Name page appears.

1

2

7
Bus Outs

You can specify Short names in the center column (1) and Long (full) names in the right
column (2).
2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit the name.

3 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The new name is now effective.
Tip: The edited name is stored in the Output Patch library.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

90

Chapter 7—Bus Outs

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends

91

8 Aux Sends
This chapter describes how to control Aux Out 1–8.

Aux Out 1–8
The Aux Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from the Input Channels to the corresponding Aux Sends, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to
the specified internal effects processors, output connectors or I/O card connectors.
The DM1000 features eight Aux Sends, which can be used to send signals to the internal and
external effects processors and monitors.
The following diagram illustrates the Aux Out 1–8 signal flow.
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)

METER METER

INSERT

4BAND
EQ

INSERT

METER

INSERT
ON LEVEL

AUX 1(...8)
OUTPUT
DELAY

TO INPUT PATCH

AUX 1(...8)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

INSERT
ATT (Attenuator)
4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
COMP (Compressor)
ON (On/Off)
LEVEL
OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
METER
These parameters are the same as the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 (see page 79).
Tip: You can also pair adjacent odd-even Aux Sends (in this order) for stereo Aux operation.
Note: With the default setting, Aux Out 1–8 are patched to OMNI OUT connectors 1–8 and
Aux Out 1–4 are patched to internal effects processors 1–4. However, you can change this
patching on the Out Patch page.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

8
Aux Sends

ATT

METER

OUTPUT PATCH

AUX 1

AUX 8

COMP

92

Chapter 8—Aux Sends

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface
You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for
Aux Out 1–8.

Setting Levels
To set Aux Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the LAYER section to select the
Master layer, then move faders 1–8. At this time, you can turn Aux Out 1–8 on or off using
the corresponding [ON] 1–8 buttons.

EQ settings
To control Aux Out 1–8 EQ parameters, select the desired Aux Out (1–8) using the corresponding [SEL] button or fader, then use the buttons and controls in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are
the same as for Input Channels (see page 72).

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display
To set Aux Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on
the screen and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top panel.
This section explains how to set the parameters on the screen.
Tip: Refer to Chapter 9 “Input & Output Patching” on page 105 for more information on
how to set inserts.

Attenuating Aux Outs
To attenuate Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | Out Att page.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except that this page does not include the bit shift parameters (see page 64).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display

93

Delaying Aux Outs
To delay Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the [
/INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears.

/INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except that this page does not have the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see page 61).

8

Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button once,
then selecting the desired Aux Out (1–8) by pressing the corresponding [SEL] button or moving
the fader.

Aux Sends

Comp settings
To set the Aux Out 1–8 compressors, press the [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button
to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, and select the desired Aux Out 1–8 by using the
corresponding [SEL] buttons or faders.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels (see page 63).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

94

Chapter 8—Aux Sends

EQ settings
To set the EQ for Aux Out 1–8, press the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | EQ Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or faders to select Aux Out 1–8.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels (see page 65).

Viewing Aux Out settings
You can view and adjust the parameter settings for the currently-selected Aux Out on the
View | Parameter and Fader pages.

■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings
To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select
the desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F1]
button.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except that this page does not include the Gate and Phase parameters (see
page 69).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display

95

■ Viewing Faders and On/Off Parameters
To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the
desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] button.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

8
Aux Sends

• ON/OFF.........................This button turns the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) on or
off. It links with the corresponding [ON] (1–8) button in the
Master layer.
• Fader ..............................This fader sets the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) level. It
links with the corresponding fader (1–8) in the Master layer.
The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0dB.

96

Chapter 8—Aux Sends

Setting Aux Send Levels
You can adjust the level of signals routed from Input Channels to the corresponding Aux
Out (1–8). To do this, you can either use the Encoders on the top panel or set the parameters
on the screen.

Using the Encoders
1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the sends.
2 Press the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button.
When the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button is turned on, you can rotate the Encoders to
set Aux Send levels.
3 Select a layer that contains the source Input Channels, then rotate the corresponding Encoders.
The DM1000 displays the Send level of the currently-selected channel.

Note: If rotating the Encoders seems ineffective, check the Mode and Pre/Post parameters on
the Aux | Send page (see page 97).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Aux Send Levels

97

Setting Send Levels from the Display
You can view multiple channels’ Aux Send levels on the screen and adjust them individually.
1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the Aux Sends.
2 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed
below that contains the desired channels appears.
- Send1-32 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1–32.
- Send33-48 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 33–48.

8
Aux Sends

The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.
• Aux Send rotary controls
These controls adjust the Aux Send level of the Input Channels. The current numeric levels
appear below the rotary controls.
• PRE/POST
These buttons enable you to specify the Aux Sends signal source points. The PRE buttons
send pre-fader signals, and the POST buttons send post-fader signals.
• MODE
Aux Sends have two operating modes that determine how signals are sent: Fixed (Aux Send
levels are fixed); and Variable (Aux Send levels are variable).
• GLOBAL
The GLOBAL PRE and POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels for the selected
Aux Send to pre-fader or post-fader simultaneously.
Note: In Fixed mode, Aux Send ON/OFF buttons appear instead of the Aux Send rotary controls, PRE/POST buttons, and GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons. These ON/OFF buttons turn
on or off each Input Channel for the currently-selected Aux Send.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

98

Chapter 8—Aux Sends

3 Move the cursor to the FIXED or VARIABLE button in the MODE section for
the currently-selected Aux Send to select a mode.
• Fixed Mode
In this mode, Aux Send levels are fixed at nominal (0.0dB). Also, channel ON/OFF buttons
appear instead of the Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons.

• Variable Mode
In this mode, Aux Send levels are variable and the signal source point can be either pre-fader
or post-fader. Channel Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons appear on the
screen.

Tip: You can select Variable or Fixed mode individually for each of the eight Aux Sends.
Note:
• In Fixed mode, all ON/OFF buttons are turned OFF.
• When you switch to Variable mode, the signal source points are set to post-fader (PRE/POST
buttons are set to POST), and Send level rotary controls are reset to –∞.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Aux Send Levels

99

4 If you switched to Fixed mode in Step 3, the ON/OFF buttons turn on or off
each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send.

Note: In Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked
to each other.

You can turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send even in Variable mode. To do this, move the cursor to the desired Send level control, then press
[ENTER]. (The rotary controls for Off channels are grayed out.)
Tip:
• In Variable mode, Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and Pre/Post parameters for paired Input
Channels are linked to each other.
• GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels simultaneously (including those not displayed on the current page) to pre-fader or post-fader.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

8
Aux Sends

5 If you switched to Variable mode in Step 3, the PRE/POST buttons and Send
level rotary controls enable you to adjust the signal source points and Send
levels.

100

Chapter 8—Aux Sends

Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels
You can view and set parameters for all Aux Send 1–8, including setting levels and Pre/Post
parameters.
This is convenient when you wish to visually check all Aux Send settings or simultaneously
adjust the levels of certain channels routed to Aux 1–8.
1 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed
below that contains the desired channels appears.
- View1–16 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1–16.
- View17–32 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 17–32.
- View33–48 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 33–48.
These pages display the source Input channels and the corresponding Aux Sends in a
matrix. The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the
same.

1
2

3
A DISPLAY
Use the following buttons to display the desired parameters.
• LEVEL ........................... Select the LEVEL button to display Send level bar graphs for
Input Channels routed to Aux 1–8.
• PRE/POST .................... Select the PRE/POST button to display signal source points for
Input Channels routed to Aux 1–8.

B FIX/VARI
These buttons indicate the Aux mode (Fixed or Variable) for Aux Out 1–8 and are only
for display purposes.

C LEVEL
This field displays in dB the level of the Aux Send currently-selected by the cursor.
2 Move the cursor to either the DISPLAY LEVEL or PRE/POST button and press
[ENTER] to display the Level or Pre/Post parameters.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels

101

3 If you selected the PRE/POST button in Step 2, move the cursor to the desired
Input Channel and Aux intersection, then press the [ENTER] button to
change the signal source point.

Note: You can switch between Pre and Post only for Aux Sends that are set to Variable mode.
The “FIX” indication appears for Aux Sends that are set to Fixed mode, and you cannot switch
Pre/Post.

• Aux Sends in Variable mode ............. The current Send levels are displayed by the bar
graphs. If the level is set to nominal (0.0 dB), “N”
appears in the bar. The bars for Aux Sends that
are set to off are highlighted.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

8
Aux Sends

4 If you selected the LEVEL button in Step 2, move the cursor to the desired
Input Channel and Aux intersection, then edit the Send level or turn the currently-selected AUX Send on or off.
Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the Send level, and
press the [ENTER] button to turn the currently-selected Aux Send on or off.
One of the following indicators appears, depending on the current Aux mode.
• Aux Sends in Fixed mode .................. A “FIX” indicator appears for On Aux Sends, and
a dot “ . ” appears for Off Aux Sends.

102

Chapter 8—Aux Sends

Panning Aux Sends
You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) Aux Sends for stereo operation. This enables
you to pan signals from Input Channels to paired Aux Sends.
1 Pair the desired two Aux Sends. (See page 87 for more information on pairing channels.)
2 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select one of the paired
Aux Sends.
3 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed
below that contains the desired channels appears.
- Pan1–32 page
This page enables you to pan signals routed from Input Channels 1–32 to Aux Sends.
- Pan33–48 page
This page enables you to pan signals routed from Input Channels 33–48 to Aux Sends.
The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.

2

3

1

A Aux pan controls
These controls adjust the pan setting of signals routed from Input Channels to paired
Aux buses.

B MODE
The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned.

C INPUT PAN LINK
When this parameter is turned on, Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Pan.
4 Move the cursor to the Aux pan control of the desired Input Channel and
rotate the Parameter wheel to set the pan value.
5 If necessary, move the cursor to the MODE parameter box and rotate the
Parameter wheel to select INDIVIDUAL, GANG, or INV GANG, then press
[ENTER].
This Mode setting is independent of the Mode parameter on the Pan page. (See page 67 for
more information on Mode options.)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus)

103

6 To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the Aux Send Pan setting, move
the cursor to the INPUT PAN LINK ON/OFF button, then press [ENTER].
The pan positions on the Pan page are copied to the Aux pan setting, and the pan controls
on both pages are linked.
Tip:
• If paired Aux Sends are in Variable mode, the Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and Pre/Post
parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other.
• If paired Aux Sends are in Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked to each other.

Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus)
You can quickly exclude signals from certain channels from Aux Sends by using the controls
on the top panel. This operation is called “Mix Minus.”
For example, when Aux Sends are being used as monitors for the musicians or a narrator,
you can turn off the audio signals of the musicians or narrator, excluding them from the
monitor sound.

Note: If you release the button in the AUX SELECT section before you proceed to Step 2, you
will be unable to complete the Mix Minus operation.
2 Press the [ON] buttons of the Input Channels you wish to exclude from the
Aux Send. You can select multiple channels.
The selected channels’ [ON] button indicators turn off, and signals routed from those
channels to the corresponding Aux Send are turned off. “MIX MINUS FOR AUX * ”
appears on the bottom of the screen. (The asterisk represents an Aux number.)

Tip: At this time, the Send Level controls on the Aux | Send page are grayed out.
3 To reset the setting, while pressing and holding down the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8]
buttons you pressed in Step 1, press the [ON] buttons you pressed in Step
2.
The corresponding [ON] button indicators light up.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

8
Aux Sends

1 Press and hold down the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons of the desired
Aux Sends.
The [ON] button indicators in the channel strip section remain lit while you hold down the
button. This means that signals routed from channels with a lit [ON] button indicator to
the Aux Send are turned on.

104

Chapter 8—Aux Sends

Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends
While Aux Sends are in Variable mode, you can copy all Input Channel fader positions on
one layer to the corresponding Aux Sends.
This is convenient when you wish to send to the musicians monitor signals that have the
same balance setting as the Stereo Out signals.
1 Press and hold down the copy source layer (LAYER [1-16], [17-32], or [33-48])
button.
Note: If you release the button in the LAYER section before you proceed to Step 2, you will be
unable to complete the Copy operation.
2 Press one of the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the desired
Aux Send copy destination.
The confirmation window for the Copy operation appears.

3 To execute the Copy operation, move the cursor to the YES button, then
press [ENTER].
To cancel the Copy operation, move the cursor to the NO button, then press [ENTER].
Tip: If the copy destination Input Channel has been paired with a vertical partner in another
Layer, the fader position will be copied to the partner’s Aux Send.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Input & Output Patching

105

9 Input & Output Patching
This chapter describes how to patch (assign) signal paths within the DM1000 to its inputs,
outputs, and slot channels

Input Patching
Signals input at INPUT connectors 1–16, 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors 1–2, and Slot I/O
cards are patched to Input Channels for use.
Patch example:
Input Patching
Input Channel 1

INPUT connector 2

Input Channel 2

INPUT connector 3

Input Channel 3

INPUT connector 4

Input Channel 4

INPUT connector 5

Input Channel 5

INPUT connector 6

Input Channel 6

INPUT connector 7

Input Channel 7

INPUT connector 8

Input Channel 8

By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows:
Input Channels

Input connectors and Slot channels

1–16

INPUT connectors 1–16

17–24

Channels 1–8 of Slot 1

25–32

Channels 1–8 of Slot 2

33–40

Internal Effects Processor 1–4 Outputs 1–2

41/42

2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R)

43/44

2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R)

45–48

OMNI IN connectors 1–4

You can change these patches, if you desire. To change input patching, you can either use
the Encoders on the top panel or set the parameters on the display.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

9
Input & Output Patching

INPUT connector 1

106

Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching

Input Patching from the Display
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In
Patch | In Patch page appears.

1

Inputs and slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the
parameter boxes (1) below the channel numbers. The parameter indicators are explained
below:
Parameter values

Description

–

No assignment

AD1–AD16

INPUT connectors 1–16

OMN1–OMN4

OMNI IN connectors 1–4

S1-1–S116

Channels 1–16 of Slot 1

S2-1–S216

Channels 1–16 of Slot 2

FX1-1–FX1-8

Outputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1

FX2-1–FX2-2

Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2

FX3-1–FX3-2

Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3

FX4-1–FX4-2

Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4

2D1L & 2D1R

2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R)

2D2L & 2D2R

2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R)

BUS1–8

Bus 1–8 Outputs

AUX1–8

Aux 1–8 Outputs

2 Move the cursor to an input patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
The long name of the currently-selected channel is
1
indicated in the upper-right corner of the screen (1).
2
Below the channel name is the long name of the
selected input/slot channel (2). (See page 249 for
more information on changing channel names.)
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip:
• You can patch an input signal to multiple Input Channels.
• You can store the Input Patch settings to the Input Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15 “Libraries” on page 165 for more information.
• The number of outputs of internal Effects processor 1 varies depending on the selected effect
program. (See page 147 for more information on effect programs.)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Input Patching

107

Using the Encoders for Input Patching
By default, you can also use the Encoders on the top panel to change the Input Patching.
1 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button. The button indicator lights up.
By default, you can use the Encoders to change Input Patching while the [ASSIGN] button
indicator is lit.
Tip: On the Encoder page, you can specify the Encoder function that works while the
[ASSIGN] button indicator is lit (see page 35).
2 Rotate the Encoder of the Input Channel for which you want to change
patching. (Alternatively, press the corresponding Encoder push switch.)
The In Patch | In Patch page appears, and the cursor moves to the corresponding Input
Channel parameter box.
3 Rotate the Encoder to select the desired input/slot channel number you
want to patch.
4 Press the Encoder push switch to confirm the setting (or press the [ENTER]
button).

9
Input & Output Patching

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

108

Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching

Output Patching
The DM1000’s Stereo Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8 signals can be patched to any outputs
and slot channels.
Patch example:
Output Patching
Stereo Out L

OMNI Out connector 1

Stereo Out R

OMNI Out connector 2

Aux Out 1

OMNI Out connector 3

Aux Out 2

OMNI Out connector 4

Aux Out 3

OMNI Out connector 5

Aux Out 4

OMNI Out connector 6

Aux Out 5

OMNI Out connector 7

Aux Out 6

OMNI Out connector 8

By default, the following signal paths are patched to outputs and slot output channels:
Output connectors and slot
channels

Signal flow

OMNI OUT connectors 1–8

Aux Outs 1–8

OMNI OUT connectors 9–10

Stereo Out L & R

OMNI OUT connectors 11–12

Control Room Monitor L & R

Channels 1–8 of Slot 1

Bus Outs 1–8

Channels 9–16 of Slot 1

Bus Outs 1–8

Channels 1–8 of Slot 2

Bus Outs 1–8

Channels 9–16 of Slot 2

Bus Outs 1–8

2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 (L)

Stereo Out L

2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 (R)

Stereo Out R

2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 (L)

Stereo Out L

2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 (R)

Stereo Out R

Tip:
• You can patch a signal to multiple outputs and slot channels.
• You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15
“Libraries” on page 165 for more information.
You can change these patches, if you desire. The procedure for patching signals to output
varies depending on the output connectors and slots.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Output Patching

109

Patching Omni Outs
You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to OMNI OUT 1–8.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | Omni Out page appears.

1

The OMNI 1–12 parameter boxes (1) indicate the currently-patched signals. The parameter indicators are explained below:
Parameter values

Description
No assignment

BUS1–BUS8

Bus Out 1–8 signal

AUX1–AUX8

Aux Out 1–8 signal

ST L/R

Stereo Out signal

INS CH1–INS CH48

Input Channel 1–48 Insert Out

INS BUS1–INS BUS8

Bus Out 1–8 Insert Out

INS AUX1–INS AUX8

Aux Out 1–8 Insert Out

INS ST-L/ST-R

Stereo Out Insert Out

SURR XXX
(“XXX” represents a channel name.)

Surround Monitor Outs

CR-L/CR-R

Control Room Monitor signals

CAS BUS1–BUS8

Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs

CAS AUX1–AUX8

Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs

CAS ST-L/ST-R

Stereo Bus Cascade Outs

CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR

Solo Bus Cascade Outs

SOLO-L/SOLO-R

Solo Bus signal

M.MX XXX
(“XXX” represents a channel name.)

Surround Monitor Outs

Input & Output Patching

–

9

2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip: You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15
“Libraries” on page 165 for more information.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

110

Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching

Patching the 2TR Digital Outputs
You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors 1–2.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | 2TR Out page appears.

Signals assigned on the Omni Out page can also be assigned to the 2TR digital outputs.
2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.

Patching Slot Outputs
You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to optional mini-YGDAI cards installed in Slot
1 and 2.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | Slot Out page appears.
Signals assigned on the Omni Out page can also be assigned to the slot outputs.

2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Patching Direct Outs

111

Patching Direct Outs
Input Channel 1–48 signals can be directly patched to any outputs or slot outputs, as well
as Bus Out 1–8 and Stereo Out. This patching is convenient when you wish to record each
Input Channel signal to an individual track on a connected recorder.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | Direct Out page appears.

1

2

9

The parameters on this page are described below.
These boxes indicate the Direct Out destination (outputs and slot channels) for Input
Channels 1–48.

B DIRECT OUT
Determines the Direct Out signal source position from the following three options:
• PRE EQ ..........................Immediately before Input Channel EQ
• PRE FADER ..................Immediately before Input Channel fader
• POST FADER ...............Immediately after Input Channel fader
2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter (1–48) you wish to change, and rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the destination.
If necessary, specify the signal source position using the DIRECT OUT parameter.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Note: If you select a destination that has already been used for an output patch, the patch
parameter box indicates “– (no assignment).” If you assign the Direct Out to an unused destination, the parameter box indicates the corresponding output.
4 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the Input Channel that is patched
to the Direct Out assigned in Steps 2 and 3.
5 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DIRECT] button.
The Direct Out patching is now effective, and the signals are routed to the assigned outputs
or slot channels.
Tip: Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display
the Routing page. On this page, you can simultaneously route multiple Input Channels to
Direct Outs.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Input & Output Patching

A 1–48

112

Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching

Insert Patching
The DM1000’s Input Channels and Output Channels (Stereo Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out
1–8) feature independent Insert Ins and Outs. Inputs, outputs, slot channels, and internal
effects processor inputs and outputs can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins and
Outs. In this way, you can send the signals to external effects processors for processing, or
insert internal effects.

Individual Insert Patching
You can patch the DM1000’s inputs, outputs, slot channels, and effects processor inputs and
outputs to the Insert Ins and Outs. The same procedure applies to both Input Channels and
Output Channels.
Effects
Input

Output connector

Insert Out

Output

Input connector

Insert In

Channel

1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of an Input Channel or Output
Channel for Insert patching.
2 Press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the
page appears.

/INS/DLY | Insert

1

2

3

This page contains the following parameters:

A POSITION
This parameter determines the insert position of the Insert patch or compressor. The
insert position is indicated by highlighted COMP or INSERT buttons.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Insert Patching

113

B INSERT section
• ON/OFF.........................This button turns Insert on or off.
• OUT ...............................This parameter enables you to select outputs, slot channels, or
internal effects inputs as the Insert Out destination.
• IN....................................This parameter enables you to select inputs, slot channels, or
internal effects outputs as the Insert In source.

C COMP section
• ON/OFF.........................This button turns the compressor on or off.
• ORDER..........................This parameter determines the order of Insert patch and compressor when they are inserted at the same signal path point.
With the “COMP → INS” setting, signals pass through the
compressor first, then the Insert. With the “INS → COMP” setting, signals pass through the Insert first, then the compressor.
3 Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box, and rotate the Parameter wheel
or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired outputs, slot channels,
or internal effects inputs to be patched to Insert Out. The parameter indicators are explained below:
Parameter values

Description
No assignment

S1-1–S116

Channels 1–16 of Slot 1

S2-1–S216

Channels 1–16 of Slot 2

OMN1–OM12

OMNI OUT connectors 1–12

2D1L & 2D1R

2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (L/R)

2D2L & 2D2R

2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (L/R)

FX1-1–FX1-8

Inputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1

FX2-1 & FX2-2

Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2

FX3-1 & FX3-2

Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3

FX4-1 & FX4-2

Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4

9
Input & Output Patching

–

4 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
If you move the cursor to another parameter box or display another page before you press
the [ENTER] button, all settings on this page will be cancelled.
5 Move the cursor to the desired IN parameter box, and rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the inputs or slot channels
to be patched to the Insert In.
Refer to the explanation regarding the Input Patch for more information on the parameter
values (see page 106).
6 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip: Move the cursor to an empty OUT or IN parameter box and press the [ENTER] button.
The Patch Select window appears. Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the cursor buttons to
select an item to be patched and press [ENTER]. Then, move the cursor to the YES button and
press [ENTER]. The selected item is now patched.
7 To enable the specified Insert patch, move the cursor to the ON/OFF button
in the INSERT section, and press [ENTER] to turn it on or off.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

114

Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching

Viewing and Changing Insert In Patch
You can view and also change the items patched to the Insert Ins of all Input Channels (or
all Output Channels). This is useful when you wish to find out if multiple channels have the
same patch.
1 To view the Input Channels’ Insert Ins, press the [INPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the In Patch | Insert In page appears.
This page displays Input Channels 1–48 Insert In Patches.

2 Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the
patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
4 To view the Output Channels’ Insert Ins, press the [OUTPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Out Patch | Insert In page appears.

5 Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the
patching.
6 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Control Room Monitoring

115

10 Control Room Monitoring
This chapter explains how to set up control room monitoring and use the Solo and Talkback
functions on the DM1000.

Control Room Monitor

SOLO L
SOLO R

The DM1000 features the Control Room stereo signal path to feed the control room’s main
monitors. By default, the Control Room signal source is patched to OMNI OUT connectors
11 & 12, which can feed the Control Room signal to the control room’s monitor.

SOLO TRIM

SOLO L
SOLO R

METER
DA
DA

SOLO LOGIC

PHONES
LEVEL

[PHONES]

OUTPUT SOLO

STEREO
2TR D1
OMNI IN1/2
2TR D2
OMNI IN3/4

8
8
MONITOR SELECT
2

DIMM

MONO

BUS1-8
AUX1-8

CONTROL ROOM

MONITOR
LEVEL

2
2

10

• SOLO bus
This special bus routes soloed Input Channels to the Control Room Monitor output,
bypassing Bus 1–8 and the Stereo Bus.
• OUTPUT SOLO
This section routes soloed Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) to the Control
Room Monitor output.
Note: Input and Output Channels cannot be solo-monitored simultaneously. The solo function for the most-recently soloed channels is enabled.
• MONITOR LEVEL
Use the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control on the top panel to adjust the Control
Room Monitor level.
• DIMM (Dimmer)
The [DIMMER] button lowers the Control Room Monitor signal by the specified amount.
Note: The Dimmer function is activated automatically when the Talkback or Oscillator function is active.
• PHONES
The Control Room Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack. You can set the level
independently.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Control Room Monitoring

• MONITOR SELECT
As a Control Room Monitor signal, you can select one from Stereo Out output, 2TR IN
DIGITAL 1 input, and 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 input.
If you change the parameter setting on the Monitor | Solo/C-R page (see page 116), you can
monitor the OMNI IN signal, instead of the 2TR IN DIGITAL signal, when you press the
[2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.

116

Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring

Control Room Monitor and Solo Setup
For control room monitoring and solo setup, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly until the Monitor | Solo/C-R page appears.

2

3

1

4

5
6

7
8

9

J

This page contains the following parameters:

A SOLO
This parameter turns the Solo function on or off. By default, it is set to Enabled.

B MODE
This parameter determines how the Solo function works. There are two options. The
setting affects only Input Channels.
• RECORDING............... In Recording Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed
to the Solo bus and output via the Control Room Outputs.
Other buses (Stereo bus and Bus 1–8) are unaffected by this
mode.
• MIXDOWN.................. In Mixdown Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed
to the Stereo bus and output via the Control Room Outputs.
Unsoloed Input Channels are not fed to the Stereo bus while
the Solo function is enabled.
Tip:
• Recording Solo mode is convenient when you wish to monitor certain Input Channels while
recording, since the Stereo bus and Bus 1–8 signals are unaffected
• Mixdown Solo mode is useful when you wish to mute unsoloed Input Channels and feed
soloed Input Channel signals to the Stereo bus during mixdown.

C SEL MODE
This parameter determines how the Input Channels will be soloed when you press the
[SOLO] button of each Channel. There are two options.
• MIX SOLO.................... In Mix Solo mode, any number of channels can be soloed
simultaneously.
• LAST SOLO .................. In Last Solo mode, only one channel can be soloed at a time by
pressing the [SOLO] button. The Solo function that was previously enabled for channels is automatically cancelled.

D LISTEN
This parameter determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal: Pre Fader or
Post Pan. This parameter is effective only in Recording Solo mode.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Control Room Monitor and Solo Setup

117

E SOLO TRIM
This parameter enables you to trim the level of the Solo signal in the range of –96 dB to
+12 dB.

F SOLO INTERRUPTION
When this parameter is set to Off, soloed channel signals are not fed to the Control
Room Monitor outputs. To monitor the Control Room Monitor signals and soloed
channel signals separately, change the output patching so that the soloed channel signals
are output independently from the Control Room Monitor outputs, then turn the Solo
Interruption parameter to Off.

G 2TR DIN FLIP
This parameter enables you to specify the signal source that will be monitored when you
press the MONITOR [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.
• 2TR D1 & OMNI 1/2 ...These buttons select the 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 and OMNI IN 1/2
inputs respectively as the signal source that will be monitored
when you press the [2TR D1] button.
• 2TR D2 & OMNI 3/4 ...These buttons select the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 and OMNI IN 3/4
inputs respectively as the signal source that will be monitored
when you press the [2TR D2] button.

H SOLO SAFE CHANNEL

Tip: For example, if you set the internal effects processor’s return signal to Solo Safe, you can
monitor the soloed “processed (or wet)” signals.

I CONTROL ROOM DIMMER LEVEL
This parameter determines the amount of attenuation applied to the Control Room
Monitor signal by the Dimmer function when you press the MONITOR [DIMMER]
button. The amount of attenuation can range from 0 dB to –96 dB.

J MONO
This button switches the Control Room Monitor signal into mono.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

10
Control Room Monitoring

For Mixdown Solo mode, Input Channels can be configured individually so that they
are not muted when other Input Channels are soloed (Solo Safe function). Signals from
Input Channels with the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL button turned on are always fed to the
Stereo bus, regardless of the channels’ Solo function status. You can clear all Solo Safe
settings by turning on the ALL CLEAR button.

118

Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring

Using the Control Room Monitor
1 Connect a monitoring system to the outputs (by default, OMNI OUT 11&12)
to which the Control Room Monitor signal is patched.
To monitor the signal via headphones, connect headphones to the PHONES jack.
2 Press the MONITOR [STEREO], [2TR D1], or [2TR D2] button to select the
monitoring signal source.
Each button selects the following monitoring signal sources:
• [STEREO] button ........ Selects the Stereo Out signal.
• [2TR D1] button .......... Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL1 signal.
• [2TR D2] button .......... Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL2 signal.
Note: In this case, the [2TR D1] and [2TR D2] buttons are effective only when external devices
are connected to the 2TR Digital Outputs respectively and are turned on.
Tip: If you change the 2TR DIN FLIP parameter setting on the MONITOR | SOLO/C-R page
(see page 116), you can monitor the 2TR Digital Input signal, instead of the OMNI IN signal,
by pressing the [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.
3 Adjust the monitoring level using the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control
while playing the sound sources.
To adjust the level of the monitoring signal via headphones, turn the [PHONE LEVEL] control.

Using the Solo Function
You can solo and monitor Input Channels, Aux Out 1–8, and Bus Out 1–8 using the
[SOLO] buttons on the top panel.
1 Press the [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Solo/C-R page
appears.
2 Set the SOLO parameter to On and the SOLO INTERRUPTION parameter to
Off.
Set other parameters on the page, if necessary.
3 To solo and monitor Input Channels, press the corresponding LAYER button
to select a Layer that contains the desired channels, then press the channel
[SOLO] buttons.
The channel [SOLO] button indicators and the MONITOR [SOLO] indicator light up.
Only the soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Control Room Monitor outputs.
Tip: If the SEL MODE parameter is set to Mix Solo on the Monitor | Solo/C-R page, you can
solo multiple Input Channels simultaneously.
4 To solo and monitor Output Channels, press the LAYER [MASTER] button,
then press the channel [SOLO] buttons.
Input and Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) cannot be solo-monitored simultaneously. For example, if you solo an Input Channel, then solo an Output Channel, the
first solo channel is temporarily cancelled.
If you solo an Output Channel first, then solo an Input Channel, canceling the Input Channel’s solo will activate the Output Channel’s solo.
5 You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing all illuminated channel
[SOLO] buttons.
The button indicators turn off. You can also unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the
MONITOR [CLEAR] button.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using the Talkback Function

119

Using the Talkback Function
The DM1000 features a built-in talkback microphone on the control surface. The Talkback
function distributes the Talkback mic signal to the specified outputs or slot channels. The
Talkback function is useful when you wish to communicate with the musicians in the studio
or record your comments to a recorder.
MONITOR
DISPLAY

SOLO

CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

SLOT

BUS

DIMMER TALKBACK

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Talkback page appears.

1

3
4

This page contains the following parameters:

A OUTPUT ASSIGN section
The buttons in this section enable you to assign the Talkback mic signal to the desired
outputs. (You can select multiple destinations.)

B TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL
When the Talkback function is active, this parameter determines the amount of attenuation applied to the Control Room monitor signals. The amount of attenuation can
range from 0 dB to –96 dB.

C USE ..... AS TALKBACK check box
Checking this box enables you to select an AD Input or slot input channel signal specified in the parameter box as the Talkback signal source.

D NEVER LATCH TALKBACK check box
If this check box is checked, the Talkback function is enabled only while you are holding
down the [TALKBACK] button. When you release the button, the Talkback function
turns off. If the check box is unchecked, the Talkback function remains effective after
you press and release the [TALKBACK] button.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Control Room Monitoring

2

10

120

Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring

2 Move the cursor to the number button of an output channel to which you
wish to assign the Talkback signal in the OUTPUT ASSIGN section, then press
the [ENTER] button to highlight the channel number.
3 If you wish to operate the [DIMMER] button during Talkback communication, move the cursor to the TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL control and rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the amount of
attenuation.
4 Press the [TALKBACK] button.
The Talkback function is enabled.
By default, pressing and releasing the [TALKBACK] button once enables the Talkback function. Press the button again to turn off the function. If you press and hold down the [TALKBACK] button for more than 300ms, the Talkback function is enabled as long as you hold
down the button, and the function is turned off when you release the button.
However, if you have checked the NEVER LATCH TALKBACK check box on the Monitor |
Talkback page, the Talkback function remains effective only while you are pressing and
holding down the button.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

121

Surround Functions

11 Surround Functions
This chapter describes surround panning, which determines how Input Channel signals are
panned within and across the stereo field. It also describes the DM1000’s surround monitoring capabilities, which enable you to monitor, in a surround sound environment,
DM1000 surround mixes or surround sources input via the slots.

Using Surround Pan
About Surround Pan
The Surround Pan function places a sound image within a two-dimensional field using a
multi-channel playback system, and pans the image to the front, rear, left, and right in relation to the listening position. To pan the stereo image, you can use the Parameter wheel,
[INC]/[DEC] buttons, or Joystick.
You can also store the surround pan settings in a Scene, or record the movement of the
sound image to Automixes. In addition to a normal Stereo mode, the DM1000 features the
following three Surround modes:
• 3-1
This mode uses four channels that include front
left, front right, front center, and rear.

Front L

Center

Front R

11
• 5.1
This mode uses six channels that include front left,
front right, rear left, rear right, front center, and
subwoofer.

Subwoofer

Front L

Center

Front R

Rear L

Rear R

• 6.1
This mode uses seven channels that include six
channels of 5.1 mode plus rear center.

Subwoofer

Front L

Rear L

Center

Rear center

Front R

Rear R

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

Surround

122

Chapter 11—Surround Functions

When you select one of these Surround modes, each surround channel is routed to the
Buses specified on the Setup | Surr Bus page (see page 125).
The following table shows the factory-default Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment in
each Surround mode.
Surround
Mode
3-1
5.1
6.1

BUS1

BUS2

BUS3

BUS4

BUS5

BUS6

BUS7

—

—

—

L

R

C

S

Front left

Front right

Center

Surround

L

R

Ls

Rs

C

LFE

Front left

Front right

Rear left

Rear right

Center

Subwoofer

—

L

R

Ls

Rs

C

Bs

LFE

Front left

Front right

Rear left

Rear right

Center

Rear center

Subwoofer

You can record each surround channel to a separate track to record surround panning. The
following diagram is an example in which each channel signal in 5.1 Surround mode is
recorded to digital MTR tracks.

SURROUND
PAN

Input Channel 1

BUS1 (L)
BUS2 (R)
BUS3 (Ls)
BUS4 (Rs)
BUS5 (C)
BUS6 (LFE)

DM1000

LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN

Input Channel 2

LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN

Input Channel 3

LFE LEVEL

Slot
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6

Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
8-TRACK DIGITAL

Track 5

Digital MTR

Track 6

MY8-TD etc.

Tip: You can set the surround pan either independently of normal panpots or in unison with
them.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Surround Pan

123

Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes
To configure the surround environment, select 3-1, 5.1, or 6.1 Surround mode on the
DM1000 and connect a multi-channel monitoring system to the DM1000.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until the
Pan/Surr | Surr Mode page appears.

2
1

3

A SURROUND MODE

B PAN/SURR LINK
When this button is turned on, Input Channel panpots and stereo surround panning are
linked.

C
Press this button to display the Surr Bus page, which enables you to change the Surround
Channel to Bus Out assignment.
2 Move the cursor to the Surround mode button you want to use.
When you move the cursor to one of these buttons, speaker icons appear, indicating a typical listening position and the Surround Channel to Bus Out configuration.
• 3-1 Surround

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

11
Surround Functions

•
•
•
•

This parameter enables you to select a Surround mode by using the following buttons.
The button that is turned on (highlighted) indicates the currently-selected Surround
mode.
STEREO.........................The DM1000 uses normal stereo mode (default).
3-1...................................Selects 3-1 Surround mode.
5.1 ...................................Selects 5.1 Surround mode.
6.1 ...................................Selects 6.1 Surround mode.

124

Chapter 11—Surround Functions

• 5.1 Surround

• 6.1 Surround

3 Press the [ENTER] button.
The confirmation window for changing the Surround mode appears.

4 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
The DM1000 enters the selected Surround mode.
5 To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the stereo surround panning,
move the cursor to the PAN/SURR LINK button, then press [ENTER].
When the PAN/SURR LINK button is turned on, adjusting the Input Channel pan settings
will also change the stereo surround panning accordingly, and vice versa.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Surround Pan

125

6 To change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment, move the cursor
to the SURR/BUS SETUP button, then press [ENTER].
The Setup | Surr Bus page appears.

2

1

A BUS1–BUS8
These parameters select channels to be assigned to the Bus Outs in 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 Surround modes.

B INIT
These buttons reset the channel assignment to the default setting.

Tip:
• Pressing the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly also displays the Surr Bus page.
• Available Bus Outs vary depending on the Surround mode. For example, in 3-1 Surround
mode, Bus Outs 1–4 are available. In 5.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–6 are available, and
in 6.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–7 are available.
8 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | Slot Out page appears, then make sure that each Bus Out is routed
to the desired channel on the digital I/O card.
To monitor signals routed to the digital I/O card in the surround environment, use surround monitoring (see page 131).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

11
Surround Functions

7 To change the assignment, move the cursor to the desired Bus parameter,
rotate the Parameter wheel to select a channel, then press [ENTER].
The channels are swapped between the selected Bus and the Bus to which the channel
assigned to the selected Bus was assigned previously.

126

Chapter 11—Surround Functions

Surround Panning from the Display
You can set the surround pan parameters for each Input Channel from the display.
1 Make sure that the DM1000 is in one of the Surround modes, then press the
[SEL] button of the channel for which you want to set surround pan.
2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until the
Pan/Surr | Ch Edit page appears.
The Ch Edit page displays the selected Input Channel, and its surround pan setting and
available pair partner.
The following display page is an example in 6.1 Surround mode.

1

2
3
4

5

67

98

The following parameters are available on this page:

A Surround pan graph
This graph indicates the pan positions in the two-dimensional field, with the listening
position in the center. A small diamond ( ) indicates the current surround pan position, and a small square ( ) indicates the current position of the Joystick. You can move
the current surround pan position (
) directly to one of the speaker icons by selecting its icon, then pressing [ENTER].

B Trajectory patterns
These buttons represent seven trajectory patterns that determine how the surround pan
moves when you operate the Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.

C FAST
Turning on this button increases the speed of sound images panned via the Parameter
wheel.

D Trajectory pattern parameters
•
•
•
•

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

These parameters fine-tune the surround pan trajectory pattern.
WIDTH ................... This parameter sets the left-to-right width of the selected trajectory pattern.
DEPTH .................... This parameter sets the front-to-rear width of the selected trajectory pattern.
OFFSET ................... This parameter offsets the left-to-right direction of the selected
trajectory pattern.
OFFSET ................... This parameter offsets the front-to-rear direction of the
selected trajectory pattern.

Using Surround Pan

127

E LFE
This parameter control sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel signal
routed to the subwoofer, and appears only in 5.1 and 6.1 Surround modes.

F DIV
This parameter control determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and
Center channels. It is expressed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100%. When you set
the parameter to 100, the Center signal is fed to only the Center channel. When you set
the parameter to 0, the Center signal is fed to only the Left and Right channels. When
you set the parameter to 50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center
channels. This parameter control appears only in 3-1 and 5.1 Surround modes.

6F & R
In 6.1 Surround mode, F and R parameter controls appear, instead of the DIV control.
The F parameter control determines how the Front Center signal is fed to the Left and
Right channels, and the R parameter control determines how the rear surround signal
is fed to the Left and Right surround channels.

G LINK
This button is available only in 6.1 Surround mode. When you turn on this button, the
F and R controls are set to the same value, and linked together.

H ST LINK
Turning on this button links the surround pan parameters of two Input Channels that
are currently displayed on the page (Stereo Link function). You can link the surround
pan parameters of two channels regardless of whether they are paired.

I PATTERN

Tip: In 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 Surround modes, operating the Joystick locates the Pan/Surr | Ch
Edit page.

3 Select one of seven trajectory patterns by turning on the corresponding trajectory pattern button.
The following patterns are available:
•
...................... The sound image moves between left and right.

36

40

40

56

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

11
Surround Functions

When Input Channels are linked by the Stereo Link function, the seven patterns selectable here determine how the linked surround pan moves via the Parameter wheel and
the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.

128

Chapter 11—Surround Functions

•

...................... The sound image moves between front and rear.

36

•

36

36

36

36

40

48

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

56

12

8

8

44

16

20

16

...................... The sound image moves from front left to rear right. With this pattern,
you can also fine-tune the trajectory using the WIDTH, DEPTH,
OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.

36

•

40

...................... The sound image moves from front right to rear left. With this pattern,
you can also fine-tune the trajectory by using the WIDTH, DEPTH,
OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.

36

•

40

12

8

8

44

16

20

16

...................... The sound image moves between left and right while tracing an arc.
With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the
arc using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( )
parameters.

44

44

20

32

28

56

32

24

Using Surround Pan

•

40

48

...................... The sound image moves between front and rear while tracing an arc.
With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the
arc using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( )
parameters.

44

•

129

44

20

32

28

56

32

24

...................... The sound image moves while tracing a circle or oval. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the circle or oval
using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.

11
48

32

24

24

24

60

40

52

40

4 If necessary, fine-tune the trajectory by editing the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET
( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameter values.
5 To set the surround pan position, move the cursor to anywhere outside the
parameter boxes, then rotate the Parameter wheel.
Tip: You can also adjust the pan position using the Encoders if you assign the surround pan
parameters to the Encoders.
6 To adjust the surround pan using the Joystick, press the SELECTED CHANNEL
[GRAB] button (the button indicator lights up), then operate the Joystick.
In this way, you can move the current pan position icons ( ) directly and quickly. Even if
the [GRAB] button is turned off, placing the small square ( ) over the small diamond ( )
will automatically turn on the [GRAB] button.
This Joystick function can be disabled by the Joystick Auto Grab preference (see page 252)
on the Setup | Prefer1 page.
7 To link the surround pan settings of two channels displayed on the page,
turn on the ST LINK button.
Use the PATTERN parameter box below the ST LINK button to specify how you want the
linked surround pan to move.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

44

130

Chapter 11—Surround Functions

The following table shows how the sound images on two linked channels move when different trajectory patterns and stereo link patterns are combined. A solid line indicates the
movement of the selected channel, and a dotted line indicates the movement of the
linked partner.
Trajectory
Pattern

Note: If you record the movement of the linked channels in an Automix, the sound image
moves on both channels when you play the Automix.
8 To list multiple-channel surround pan settings, press the [PAN/SURROUND]
button repeatedly until the Pan/Surr | Surr1–16, Surr17–32, or Surr33–48
page appears.
These pages display and enable you to edit the surround pan settings for 16 channels.

1

2
3

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

131

Surround Monitoring

A Surround pan graphs
These graphs display the trajectory patterns and the current pan positions for the Input
Channels. Move the cursor to the desired channel’s graph, then rotate the Parameter
wheel to adjust the pan settings along the selected trajectory pattern. Turning on the
[GRAB] button enables you to use the Joystick to set the surround pan of the currently-selected Input Channel.
Press [ENTER] while the cursor is on the graph to display the Ch Edit page for the
selected channel.

B

parameter box
This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected channel left and right.

C

parameter box
This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected channel front and rear.

Surround Monitoring
About Surround Monitoring

FROM CONTROL ROOM L/R

TO CONTROL ROOM DIMM

C-R to SURROUND MONITOR

SLOT1 1-8
SLOT2 1-8

8
8

8x8
Patch

8
8

MONITOR
LEVEL

SLOT

SURROUND
MONITOR

PINK NOISE

BUS1-8

8

BUS

1kHz, 50Hz

MONITOR
MATRIX

BASS
MANAGEMENT

MONITOR
ALLIGNMENT

DIMM

500-2kHz
BPF
TO OUTPUT PATCH

8

STEREO

2

MONITOR MATRIX OUT

To monitor the Surround Monitor signal via the surround system, you must connect
the system to the output connectors on the DM1000, then patch the Surround Monitor
signal source to these connectors.
For example, if the surround system is connected to the OMNI OUT connector, press the
[OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | OMNI Out page appears. This
page will enable you to patch the surround channel (indicated as “SURR XXX” where
“XXX” is the channel name) to the corresponding OMNI OUT connector.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

11
Surround Functions

The DM1000 features comprehensive surround monitoring functions that enable you to
monitor, in the optimum environment, the surround sources in the Buses or those input
from Slot 1 or 2. These functions include down mixing (which enables you to monitor signals on fewer channels) and fine-tuning of surround channel signals according to the monitoring environment.
The surround monitoring functions also feature an oscillator for testing speakers, a monitoring matrix for down mixing, Bass Management for optimizing channel signals for the
monitoring environment, and monitor alignment using individual Attenuator and Delay
parameters for each speaker.

132

Chapter 11—Surround Functions

The following diagram shows an example of 5.1 Surround Monitor signals patched to
OMNI OUTs 1–6.

Use the following two buttons in the MONITOR section on the top panel to select the Surround Monitor signal source.
• [BUS] button
This button selects the Bus Outs assigned to the surround channels
as the source. Turn on this button to check the effects of surround
pan and surround effect settings, or to monitor a surround mix currently being recorded to a digital MTR.
• [SLOT] button
This button selects the Inputs of Slot 1 or 2 as the source. Turn on this
button to monitor a surround mix from a connected multi-track
recorder.
Use the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control on the top panel to
adjust the Surround Monitor level.

MONITOR
DISPLAY

SOLO

CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

SLOT

BUS

DIMMER TALKBACK

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

Note: If you turn on the [BUS] button while Surround mode is set to Stereo, the Stereo Bus
signals are patched to Surround Monitor.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Surround Monitoring

133

Configuring Basic Surround Monitoring
You can set basic parameters for Surround Monitor, including monitor matrix, Bass Management, and monitor alignment.
To do so, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr Setup
page appears.

1

This page displays the basic parameter settings in the MONITOR FLOW section (1).
• SURR. MODE
This parameter indicates the current Surround mode. (You cannot change the Surround
mode on this page).

Surround Mode

ST

3-1

5.1

6.1

STEREO

O

—

—

—

3-1

O

O

—

—

5.1

O

O

O

—

6.1

O

O

O

O

When you change the Monitor Matrix mode in the MONITOR MATRIX parameter box,
the area below the MONITOR FLOW section displays the Matrix flow diagram as well as
ATT parameter boxes that enable you to adjust the amount of attenuation for each signal
path. Adjust the attenuation, if necessary.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

11
Surround Functions

• MONITOR MATRIX
This parameter selects a surround mode on the surround monitoring system. By default, it
is set to the same mode as the SURR. MODE parameter, though you can select any mode
that features fewer channels than the current mode. This function is useful when you wish
to monitor, for example, a 5.1 surround source through a stereo monitoring system.
Available modes depend on the current Surround mode.

134

Chapter 11—Surround Functions

The following diagram shows an example in 5.1 Surround mode and 3-1 Monitor Matrix
mode.

Note: You can patch the Surround Monitor Matrix channels to the output connectors.
• BASS MANAGEMENT
You can set the filter and attenuator settings for each Surround Monitor Channel using five
preset Bass Management modes. The following presets are available:
Presets
No.

Parameters

Title

HPF 1, 2, 3

LPF1

LPF2

ATT 1 & 2

AMP

1

DVD Mix w/BS

80–12

80–24

80–24

0

10

2

DVD Author w/BS

80–12

120–42

80–24

0

10

3

Film Mix w/BS

80–12

80–24

80–24

–3

10

4

Film Author w/BS

80–12

120–42

80–24

–3

10

5

Bypass

THRU

THRU

MUTE

0

0

ATT1: Adjusts the level difference between LR and LsRs.
ATT2: Adjusts the level difference between C and Bs.
AMP: Corrects the LFE channel level.
HPF1–3: Cut the low range so that the speakers’ supporting frequency ranges will not interfere with the
subwoofer signals.
HPF1–2: Cut the high range so that the subwoofer’s supporting frequency ranges will not interfere with
other speakers’ signals.

Tip: If you select 3-1 Monitor Matrix mode, use Presets 1 or 2 to establish an appropriate
monitoring environment.
You can set the Bass Management parameters in the following ranges:
Parameters

Range

HPF 1, 2, 3

THRU, 80-12, 80-12L, 80-24, 80-24L

LPF1

THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, 120-42

LPF2

THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, MUTE

ATT 1 & 2

0 to –12 dB (1 dB steps)

AMP

0 to +12 dB (1 dB steps)

The HPF 1, 2, 3, and LPF 1 & 2 values indicate a cut-off frequency and a filter response. For example,
“80-12” means a cutoff frequency of 80 Hz and a filter response of –12 dB/octave.
“L” means Linkwitz filter. Other filters are Butterworth.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Surround Monitoring

135

The following diagrams show the Bass Management configuration for each Monitor Matrix
setting, with Bass Management turned on or off.
6.1 ON

5.1 ON

6.1 OFF

5.1 OFF

3-1 ON

ST ON

11
Surround Functions

3-1 OFF

ST OFF

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

136

Chapter 11—Surround Functions

• MONITOR ALIGNMENT
You can adjust the Attenuator and Delay for each Surround Monitor Channel. This function is primarily used to correct the level difference and delay time among speakers.
Move the cursor to the ATT or DLY parameter in the MONITOR FLOW section. The
MONITOR ALIGNMENT diagram is displayed in the area below the section.

Move the cursor to the ATT or DLY parameter box and edit the Attenuator or Delay value.
The Attenuator parameters can be set to –∞ dB or from –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
The Delay parameters can be set from 0.00 to 30.0 msec in 0.02 msec steps.
Note: These parameter settings are effective only on the monitoring signals, not on normal
Bus Out signals.
Tip: You can store these settings in the Surround Monitor library. See page 179 for more information.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Surround Monitoring

137

Setting the Monitoring Level of the Sound System
1 Adjust the monitoring levels using the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control.
All channel monitoring levels change simultaneously.
2 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surround page appears.
This page enables you to solo or mute monitoring channels, store the [MONITOR LEVEL]
control setting, and select the monitoring source.

1

2
3

A MUTE/SOLO section

B SETTING section
• SLOT 1 & 2 ........................................... These buttons determine which Slot Inputs are
monitored through the Surround Monitor when
you press the [SLOT] button. Turning on both
buttons 1 and 2 mixes the two slot signals.
• C-R TO MONITOR L/R..................... When this button is turned on, the Left and Right
Surround Monitor Channels are fed to the Control Room Monitors.

C STATUS section
This section enables you to set the output levels of the currently-selected Surround
Monitors.
• SURROUND MODE ...This parameter displays the current Surround mode.
• MONITOR LEVEL.......This parameter indicates the current Surround Monitor level.
• SET SPL85.....................This button enables you to calibrate the volume setting of the
[MONITOR LEVEL] control to 85 dB SPL, the cinema standard for setting up Surround Channel Monitor speakers, and
then store the value.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

11
Surround Functions

This section enables you to mute or solo Surround Monitor Channels for each Bus.
• SOLO .............................This button turns the Surround Monitor Solo function on or
off. When this button is turned on, you can select speaker icons
(
) to solo certain Buses.
•
buttons .................These buttons mute or unmute the speakers. The meters connected to the speaker icons indicate the signal level of the corresponding Buses.

138

Chapter 11—Surround Functions

• SNAP TO SPL85........... Turning on this button resets the [MONITOR LEVEL] control
setting to the value stored by the SET SPL85 button.
Note: The Surround Monitor Mute and Solo functions are reset to the default condition when
you change the Surround mode.
3 Move the cursor to the SET SPL button, then press [ENTER] to turn on the
button.
The volume setting of the [MONITOR LEVEL] control is calibrated to 85 dB SPL and
stored.
If you store the cinema standard level in this way, moving the cursor to the SNAP TO SPL85
button and pressing [ENTER] always restores the stored value, even after you adjust the
[MONITOR LEVEL] control.
Tip: When the SET SPL button is turned on, the standard value (85.0 dB ) indicated in the
MONITOR LEVEL box is applied to the stored [MONITOR LEVEL] control setting.

Using the Oscillator for Surround Monitor
The DM1000 features a dedicated Oscillator that enables you to check the output and sound
of the surround sound speakers. You can send the Oscillator signal to certain speakers or to
each speaker in turn. This function is useful when you wish to check the volume balance
and phase of the surround monitor speakers.
Tip: This Oscillator is available only for Surround monitoring.
1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr
Setup page appears.
The SPEAKER SETUP section enables you to turn the Oscillator on or off and specify the
signal destination.

1

A SPEAKER SETUP
You can select the Oscillator waveform and the speakers to which the Oscillator signal is
sent.
• OSC. .............................. This parameter selects the Oscillator waveform.
• ON/OFF ........................ This button turns the Oscillator on or off.
• ROTATE ........................ When the ROTATE button is on, the Oscillator signal is output
by each speaker in turn, with an interval of five seconds (3-second signal and 2-second pause).
•

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

(Speaker) buttons.......................These buttons turn the Oscillator on or off for
each speaker.

Surround Monitoring

•

139

(SW Phase) button ..................... This button reverses the phase of the signal output to the Subwoofer (SW).

2 Make sure that the Speaker button (
) for the speaker to which you want
to output the Oscillator signal is turned on.
If the button is off, move the cursor to the button, then press [ENTER] to turn it on.
3 Move the cursor to the OSC. parameter box, then rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select one of the following Oscillator waveforms.
• PINK NOISE.................Pink noise
• 500–2 kH .......................Pink noise through a 500 Hz to 2 kHz BPF
• 1 kHz..............................1 kHz sinewave
• 50 Hz..............................50 Hz sinewave
4 Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button, then press the [ENTER] or
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to turn the Oscillator on.
The speaker specified in Step 2 outputs the Oscillator signal. If necessary, adjust the speaker
volume balance in the MONITOR ALIGNMENT section on the Surr Setup page (see
page 136).

Patching Slot Inputs to Surround Channels
You can patch individual Slot Inputs to Surround Monitor Channels as follows.
1 Make sure that the DM1000 is in the same Surround mode as the monitoring
source.

3 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr
Patch page appears.
This page enables you to make the Slot Input to Surround Monitor Channel assignment.

4 Move the cursor to a patch parameter for which you want to change the
assignment, and rotate the Parameter wheel to select a slot channel to be
assigned to the Surround Monitor channel.
To assign no channels, select “–.” Set all unnecessary channels to “–.”

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

11
Surround Functions

2 Press the MONITOR [SLOT] button.
Slot 1 or 2 Input is selected as the surround monitor source.

140

Chapter 11—Surround Functions

5 If necessary, move the cursor to the LEVEL parameter box, then use the
Parameter wheel to adjust the Slot Input levels simultaneously.
You can adjust the signal levels in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB .
6 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surround page appears.
In the SETTING section of the Surround page (see page 137), you can select a Slot Input to
be monitored.
7 Move the cursor to the SLOT 1 or 2 button in the SETTING section, then press
[ENTER] to select the desired monitoring Slot Input.
You can now monitor the selected Slot Input source via Surround Monitor.
Tip: You can make a surround source channel assignment for each Surround mode.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

141

12 Grouping Channels & Linking
Parameters
This chapter describes how to group faders or [ON] buttons for multiple channels and link
the EQ or compressor parameters for simultaneous operation.

Grouping & Linking
On the DM1000, you can group faders or [ON] buttons for multiple Input Channels or
multiple Output Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8) and link the EQ or compressor
parameters.
The following elements can be grouped or linked within Input Channels or Output Channels.
• Fader group
Input Channel or Output Channel faders can be grouped. There are eight Input Channel
Fader groups and four Output Channel Fader groups. When channel faders are grouped,
operating one of them enables you to control the level of the other grouped faders while
maintaining the relative level differences.
• Mute group
Input Channel or Output Channel [ON] buttons can be grouped. There are eight Input
Channel mute groups and four Output Channel mute groups. When channel [ON] buttons
are grouped, pressing any one of them turns the [ON] buttons for all the grouped channels
on or off. A mute group can include On channels and Off channels at the same time, which
turn off or on respectively when you press any one of the grouped [ON] buttons.

• Compressor Link
Input or Output Channel compressor parameters can be linked. There are four compressor
links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively.
All channels in a compressor link share the same compressor parameter settings. When you
change a compressor parameter value for one of the linked channels, the change is applied
to all other linked channels.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

12
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

• EQ Link
Input or Output Channel EQ parameters can be linked. There are four EQ links for Input
Channels and Output Channels respectively.
All channels in an EQ link share the same EQ parameter settings. When you change an EQ
parameter value for one of the linked channels, the change is applied to all other linked
channels.

142

Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups
Follow the steps below to group faders or [ON] buttons for Input Channels or Output
Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8).
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until one of the
pages that contains the desired group and channels appears.
- Fader1–32 page
- Fader33–48 page
These pages enable you to set Fader groups (A–H) for Input Channels 1–48.
- Out Fader page
This page enables you to set Fader groups (Q–T) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs
(1–8).
• Fader1–32 page

- Mute1–32 page
- Mute33–48 page
These pages enable you to set Mute groups (I–P) for Input Channels 1–32 and 33–48
respectively.
- Out Mute page
This page enables you to set Mute groups (U–X) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs (1–8).
• Mute1–32 page

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups

143

2 Press the up ( ) or down ( ) button to select a group.
Example: Fader group C is selected.

3 Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish to add to the group.
The selected channel is marked with “ ” and the channel is added to the group.
Example: Input Channels 1–6, and 13–14 have been added to
Fader group C.

4 In the same way, press the [SEL] button for other channels you wish to add
to the group.
The relative level of the faders for the grouped channels is determined by the position of the
faders when the channels were added to the group.
The On/Off status of the grouped channels is determined by the [ON] button status when
the channels were added to the group.
5 To turn a group on or off, move the corresponding button in the ENABLE
column, then press [ENTER].
When the group Enable button is turned off, the corresponding group is temporarily cancelled.
6 To use a fader group, operate one of the faders for the grouped channels.
Note:
• If you wish to change the relative level balance between the grouped channels while this page
is displayed, first turn off the Enable button or remove the channels for which you want to
change the level from the group.
• If other pages are displayed, press and hold down the [SEL] button for the desired channels
to temporarily remove them from the group, then change the level balance.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

12
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

Tip:
• If you add one channel from a pair to a group, the pair partner is automatically added to
the group.
• You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers.

144

Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

7 To use a mute group, press one of the [ON] buttons for the grouped channels.
All channels in the group switch their on/off status.
Note:
• While a mute group is enabled, you cannot turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off.
• If you wish to turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off, first turn off the Enable button,
or remove the channels you wish to turn on or off from the group.

Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters
Follow the steps below to link EQ or compressor parameters for Input Channels or Output
Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8). This function enables you to set EQ or compressor
parameters for multiple channels to the same values simultaneously.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until one of the
following pages appears.
- In EQ page
This page enables you to set EQ links (a–d) for Input Channels.

- Out EQ page
This page enables you to set EQ links (e–h) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs (1–8).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters

145

- In Comp page
This page enables you to set Compressor links (i–l) for Input Channels.

- Out Comp page
This page enables you to set Compressor links (m–p) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs
(1–8).

12

Example: EQ link C for Input Channels is selected.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

2 Press the up ( ) or down ( ) cursor button to select a link to which you want
to add channels.

146

Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

3 Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish to add to the EQ or Compressor
link.
The selected channel is marked with “ ” and the channel is added to the link.
Example: Input Channels 1–4, 6, 9–10 and 14 have been
added to EQ link C.

Tip:
• If you add one channel from a pair to a link, the pair partner is automatically added to the
link.
• You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers.
4 In the same way, press the [SEL] button for other channels you wish to add
to the link.
The EQ or compressor settings for the first channel added to the link are applied to all subsequently-added channels.
5 After all desired channels are added to the link, edit the EQ or compressor
parameters for one of the linked channels.
The edits for the EQ or compressor parameters are applied to the rest of the linked channels.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Internal Effects

147

13 Internal Effects
This chapter describes how to use the DM1000’s internal effects processors.

About the Internal Effects

EFFECT 3

OUTPUT

1
2

EFFECT 4

1
2

INPUT PATCH

OUTPUT
OUTPUT

1
2

OUTPUT

1
2

INPUT

EFFECT4 OUT 1-2

INPUT

EFFECT3 OUT 1-2

EFFECT 2

INPUT

EFFECT2 OUT 1-2

SELECT

EFFECT1 OUT 1-2

INPUT

FX1 SEND
1-8
FX2 SEND
1-2

1
2

INSERT OUT

EFFECT 1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

13

The DM1000 also features the Effects library, which contains 52 preset programs and 76
user programs.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Internal Effects

1
2

FX3 SEND
1-2

AUX1-8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

FX4 SEND
1-2

The DM1000 features four internal multi-effects processors that can be used via Aux Sends
or by inserting them into specific channels.
These effects processors offer numerous types of effects, including reverbs, delays, modulation-based effects, combination effects, and multi-channel effects designed especially
for use with surround sound.
Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources. For example, effects processor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends and output to Input Channels (effects
send/return). Effects processors can also be inserted into Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux
Outs, or the Stereo Out.
Effects processor 1 features eight assignable inputs and outputs, and creates 1-in/2-out,
2-in/2-out, or multi-channel surround effects.
Effects processors 2 through 4 feature two assignable inputs and outputs, and create
1-in/2-out or 2-in/2-out effects.

148

Chapter 13—Internal Effects

Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends
You can use effects processors via Aux Sends by patching effects processor inputs to Aux
Outs, and effects processor outputs to Input Channels.
1 Recall an effect program you wish to use.
See page 169 for more information on recalling effect programs.
2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In
Patch | Effect page appears.
This page enables you to patch all inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4.

1

3 4

2

This page contains the following parameters:

A IN
These parameter boxes select the signals to be fed to the effects processors.

B OUT
These parameter boxes select the destination of the signals output from the effects processors.

C FOLLOW SURROUND
When surround effects (see page 153) are recalled to Effects processor 1, this button
sorts the effect inputs and outputs displayed in the list according to the order specified
on the Setup | Surr Bus page (see page 125).

D

button
This button recalls the FX1 Edit–FX4 Edit pages, which enable you to adjust the effect
parameters.

3 To select a signal to be input to the effects processor, move the cursor to
the desired In parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select a signal
from the following options, then press [ENTER].
• – ..................................... No assignment
• AUX1–8 ......................... Aux Outs 1–8
• INS CH1–48 ................. Input Channel 1–48 Insert Out
• INS BUS1–8.................. Bus Out 1–8 Insert Out
• INS AUX1–8 ................. Aux Out 1–8 Insert Out
• INS ST-L & INS ST-R .. Stereo Out L & R Insert Out

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends

149

• FX1-1–FX4-2 ................Other effects processor outputs
You cannot select outputs FX1–3 to FX1–8. In addition, you
cannot select the output of the effects processor you are currently using.
To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends, select Aux 1–8 (in most cases).
You can patch a different signal to the other input of 2-in/2-out effect programs.
Tip:
• You can patch a signal to multiple effect inputs.
• Move the cursor to an IN parameter box and press the [ENTER] button. The Patch Select
window appears. This window enables you to select the input source quickly.
4 To patch a signal output from the effects processor, move the cursor to the
desired OUT parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select the signal
destination from the following options, then press [ENTER].
• – .....................................No assignment
• CH1–48 .........................Input Channels 1–48
• INS CH1–48..................Input Channel Insert In
• INS BUS1–8 ..................Bus Out 1–8 Insert In
• INS AUX1–8..................Aux Out 1–8 Insert In
• INS ST-L & INS ST-R...Stereo Out Insert In
• FX1-1–FX4-2 ................Other effects processor inputs
You cannot select the input of the effects processor you are currently using.
To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends, select CH 1–48 (in most cases). The
channels you assign here will become the effects return channels.
You can patch a different channel to the other output of a 1-in/2-out or 2-in/2-out effect
program to create stereo effects.

Note: You cannot select a channel as the destination of multiple effect signals. If you select a
channel that is already selected in another OUT parameter box, that OUT parameter box
switches its indicator to “–” (not assigned).
5 Adjust the level of Aux Sends patched to the effects processor.
Refer to chapter 8 “Aux Sends” on page 91 for information on setting the Aux Sends.
Note: Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends (patched to the effects processor) on the effects
return channels. Otherwise, the signal will return to the same channel, causing a signal loop
and possibly damaging your speakers.
Tip: Use the Master layer fader to adjust the final Aux Send output level. At this time, you
can view the level on the Meter | Master page (see page 37).
6 Adjust the level, pan, and EQ of the Input Channels patched to the effect
outputs.
Tip: To mix the effects sound returned via the Aux Sends with the original dry sound, set the
effect’s MIX BALANCE parameter to 100% (only the effects sound will be output).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

13
Internal Effects

Tip:
• You can also use the Patch Select window to set the OUT parameter boxes, as explained in
Step 3.
• The number of inputs and outputs available for each effect varies depending on the type of
effect programs initially recalled.

150

Chapter 13—Internal Effects

Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels
You can insert the internal effects into certain Input Channels or Output Channels (Bus
Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, Stereo Out).
Note: If effects are inserted in channels, you cannot use those effects via Aux Sends or insert
them into other channels.
1 Select an internal Effects processor (1–4), then recall the desired effect programs.
2 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the Input Channel or Output
Channel into which you want to insert the selected effects.
Tip: Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles between the left and right Stereo
Out channels.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the
/Ins/Dly | Insert page appears.

4 Select the effect insertion position using the INSERT button in the POSITION
section.
5 Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box in the INSERT section, then select
the inputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1.
• FX1-1 through FX1-8 . Inputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1
• FX2-1 & FX2-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2
• FX3-1 & FX3-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3
• FX4-1 & FX4-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4
6 Press [ENTER] to confirm the setting.
7 Move the cursor to the IN parameter box in the INSERT section, select the
outputs of the effects processor selected in Step 5 and 6, then press [ENTER]
to confirm the setting.
8 Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button in the INSERT section, then press
[ENTER] to turn on the button.
Effect insertion is now enabled.
Tip:
• After inserting effects to channels, adjust the MIX BALANCE parameter for the effects,
according to the purpose and effects type.
• Move the cursor to an empty IN or OUT parameter box and press the [ENTER] button.
The Patch Select window appears, which enables you to quickly select available signal paths.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Editing Effects

151

Editing Effects
To edit effect programs recalled to the internal Effects processors 1–4, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Edit page for the effects processor you wish
to edit appears.
Effects processors 1–4 correspond to the following pages:
• Effects Processor 1.......FX1 Edit page
• Effects Processor 2.......FX2 Edit page
• Effects Processor 3.......FX3 Edit page
• Effects Processor 4.......FX4 Edit page
These Edit pages contain the following effect parameters.

1
2
3
4
5

7
6

A EFFECT NAME
This parameter displays the name of the effect program currently used by the effects
processor.

B TYPE

C

button
Move the cursor to this parameter, then press [ENTER] to display the Library page for
the selected effects processor.

D

button
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the In Patch | Effect page,
which enables you to assign signals to the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4.

E MIX BALANCE
This parameter knob enables you to set the balance between wet and dry signals. When
the parameter is set to 0%, only the dry signal is heard. When set to 100%, only the wet
signal is heard. Turn on the BYPASS button to bypass the currently-selected effects processor.

F TEMPO
This section displays the parameters that appear only when a delay effect type or a modulation-based effect type is selected. These TEMPO parameters calculate and set the
delay time for delay effects, or the modulation frequency for modulation effects, relative
to the specified tempo and note length. Use these parameters along with the SYNC or
NOTE parameter located at the bottom of the display page.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Internal Effects

This parameter displays the type of effect program currently used by the effects processor. The I/O configuration of the effect program is displayed below this parameter.

13

152

Chapter 13—Internal Effects

When you turn on the SYNC parameter, the DM1000 recalculates the delay time or
modulation frequency based on the TEMPO parameter value (tempo) and the NOTE
parameter value (note). For example, if the TEMPO parameter is set to 120BPM and the
NOTE parameter is set to one eighth note, turning on the SYNC parameter sets the
delay time to 250 msec and the modulation frequency to 0.25 Hz.
Tip:
• If you turn on the SYNC parameter and edit the TEMPO or NOTE parameter, the DM1000
recalculates the delay time or modulation frequency.
• If you turn on the SYNC parameter and edit the delay time or modulation frequency, the
NOTE parameter value changes based on the TEMPO parameter setting.
• TEMPO ......................... This parameter control sets the TEMPO parameter value in
BPM.
• MIDI CLK..................... Turning on the MIDI CLK by moving the cursor to this button
and pressing [ENTER] updates the TEMPO data based on the
MIDI Clock information received at the specified MIDI Rx
port. (The TEMPO data is not updated if the MIDI Clock
tempo is outside the range of 25 to 300 BPM.)
• TAP TEMPO................. You can also specify the tempo by moving the cursor to this
button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. The DM1000
calculates the tempo based on the time interval between your
two taps (clicks) on the [ENTER] button. (The TEMPO data is
not updated if the tap tempo is outside the range of 25 to
300 BPM.)
Tip: If the Freeze effect is selected, the TEMPO section displays the record and playback buttons for using the effect, the recording data condition, and a progress bar that indicates the
current status.

G Meters
These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently-selected effects processor. Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels
respectively. There are eight meters when Effects processor 1 is selected; two when
Effects processors 2–4 are selected.
Tip: You can also view the input and output levels of the effects processors on the Meter | Effect
1–4 pages (see page 37).
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or
press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to adjust the setting. You can store the edited settings as
a new program in the Effects library (see page 169).
Note: You cannot change the effects type on this page. To change the effects type, recall a program that uses the desired effects type from the Effects library.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

About Surround Effects

153

About Surround Effects
The effects types available for Effects processor 1 include surround effects that support
5.1-channel (AUTO PAN 5.1, CHORUS 5.1, etc.). Surround effects are multi-channel
effects that feature up to six inputs and six outputs, and enable you to create the effect of the
sound image moving or circling back and forth and left to right, and to process up to six
channel input signals simultaneously.
Note:
• Only Effects processor 1 enables you to recall Surround effects settings.
• Recalling certain surround effects into Effects processor 1 will disable Effects processors 2–4.
The DM1000 Surround mode setting does not affect the surround effects. For example,
even if the DM1000 is in Stereo Surround mode, you can recall a surround effect program
and use its 6-channel inputs and outputs. However, to monitor the effect signals correctly,
you must patch the effect outputs to Input Channels and monitor the signals using the Surround Monitor function (see page 131).

About Plug-Ins
If you installed a mini-YGDAI card that supports the Effects function into Slot 1 or 2, you
can use plug-in effects in addition to the internal effects processors.
You can patch Bus signals or channel insert outs to the plug-in input. The plug-in output
can be patched to Input Channels or channel insert ins.
To use the plug-in effects, press the [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Effect | P-IN Edit1
or P-IN Edit 2 page appears. If you installed a mini-YGDAI card in Slot 1, use the P-IN Edit1
page to set the plug-in. If you installed the card in Slot 2, use the P-IN Edit2 page.
For details on using plug-ins, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the plug-in card.

13
Internal Effects

As of February 2003, the DM1000 supports the following plug-in cards. Visit the Yamaha
web site for the latest information on compatible plug-in cards.
• Waves .............................Y56K

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

154

Chapter 13—Internal Effects

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Scene Memories

155

14 Scene Memories
This chapter describes Scene memories, which store DM1000 mix and effects settings.

About Scene Memories
Scene memories enable you to store a snapshot of DM1000 channel mix settings and internal effects processor settings as a “Scene” in a special memory area.
There are 99 Scene memories, and you can recall any Scene using the display pages or the
controls on the top panel.
Tip:
• You can also recall Scenes by replaying Automixes (see page 181) or by transmitting Program
Changes from external MIDI devices (see page 239).
• You can back up Scene memories to external MIDI devices by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see
page 246).

What is Stored in a Scene?
The following parameter settings are stored in a Scene:
Scene

Parameters
All channel faders
Channel to Aux Out 1–8 Send levels
Aux Out 1–8 & Bus Out 1–8 levels
All channel [ON] button settings
All channel Phase & Delay settings
All channel Attenuator settings

Mix parameters

All channel Compressor settings
Input Channel Gate settings
All channel EQ settings
All channel Pan settings
All channel routings
Fader groups, Mute groups, EQ links, and Compressor links
All channel pair settings
Effect programs recalled for Effects processors 1–4 and their
parameter settings

Remote Layer

Fader, Encoder and [ON] button status (only when Remote
Control Target is set to USER DEFINED)

Scene settings

Scene titles and Fade Time settings

Input Patching

Input Patch library numbers

Output Patching

Output Patch library numbers

Note:
• Scenes take a snapshot of Input and Output Patch library numbers that are in use at the
time the Scene is stored, but exclude current (edited) Input and Output patching.
• If you do not store the edited Input and Output patching to the libraries, recalling a Scene
may change the current patching.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Scene Memories

Effects parameters

14

156

Chapter 14—Scene Memories

About Scene Numbers
Scene memories are numbered with #U or from #0 through #99. You can store Scenes in
Scene memories #1–99. When you recall a Scene, the Scene memory number (Ud, 00–99)
appears on the Scene memory display and at the top of the display page.
Scene memory #0 (#00 on the Scene memory display) is a special read-only memory
that contains the default settings of all mix parameters. To reset all mix parameters on
the DM1000 to their initial or default values, recall Scene memory #0.
Also, the Initial Data Nominal check box on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 250) enables
you to specify whether Input Channel faders are set to either 0 dB or –∞ dB when Scene
memory #0 is recalled.
Scene memory #U (“Ud” on the Scene memory display) is a special read-only memory
that contains the mix settings immediately before you most recently recalled or stored
a Scene. To undo or redo Scene memory recall and store operations, recall Scene memory
#U.
When you adjust parameters after recalling a Scene, the Edit indicators appear (the dot in
the Scene memory display and “EDIT” at the top of the display), indicating that the mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most recently recalled. The contents of
the Edit Buffer (where the current mix settings are stored) are retained while the DM1000
is turned off. This allows the DM1000 to restore the edited mix settings when you turn on
the power.

02

Scene memory display

02

Dot

Display

Edit indicator

The contents of recalled Scene memory
#2 match the current settings on the
DM1000, and the Edit indicator remains
off.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

The parameters of recalled Scene memory #2
were edited. Therefore, the Edit indicators
appear, indicating that the current settings on
the DM1000 do not match Scene memory #2.

Storing and Recalling Scenes

157

Storing and Recalling Scenes
You can store and recall Scenes by pressing the buttons on the top panel or using the dedicated Scene memory page on the display.
Note:
• When you store Scenes, make sure that there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that you do
not want to store. Make sure that no settings, especially faders, have been adjusted unintentionally.
• If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer’s contents, recall the last Scene, make the adjustments
you want, then store the Scene. You may wish to store the current Scene to an unused Scene
memory, just in case.

Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the SCENE MEMORY
Buttons
You can use the SCENE MEMORY buttons to store and recall Scenes.
1 Adjust the mix parameters on the DM1000 to the conditions you wish to
store as a Scene.
2 Press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene
memory number.
If you select a Scene memory other than the currently-recalled Scene, its number flashes on
the Scene memory display.
Scene memories #U (“Ud”) and #0 (“00”) are special read-only memories, to which you
cannot store Scenes. Also, you cannot store Scenes to write-protected Scene memories (see
page 158).
3 Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button.
The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to name the Scene to be stored.
Tip: You can disable this window by turning the Store Confirmation parameter to Off on the
Utility | Prefer1 page (see page 250). In this case, the stored Scene will have the same name as
the one recalled most-recently.

5 To recall a Scene, press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to
select a Scene memory number, then press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL]
button.
Tip: If you turn the Recall Confirmation parameter to On on the Utility | Prefer1 page, a Scene
recall confirmation window for Scene recalls appears before the Scene is recalled (see page 250).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

14
Scene Memories

4 Enter the title, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory.

158

Chapter 14—Scene Memories

Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the Scene Memory Page
On the Scene Memory page, you can store, recall, write-protect, delete, and edit the titles of
Scenes.
1 Adjust the mix parameters on the DM1000 to the conditions you wish to
store as a Scene.
2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Scene
page appears.

1
2
3
4
5

6 7
3 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a
Scene memory, move the cursor to one of the following buttons, then press
[ENTER].
The stored Scene memory titles are displayed. The DM1000 displays the message “No
Data!” for empty Scene memories.

A TITLE EDIT
Select this button to display the Title Edit window, which enables you to edit a selected
Scene title.

B RECALL
This button recalls the contents of the selected Scene memory.

C STORE
This button stores the current Scene to the selected Scene memory. By default, a confirmation window appears before you store the Scene.

D CLEAR
This button deletes the contents of the selected Scene memory.

E PROTECT ON/OFF
This button switches on and off the write-protection of the contents of the selected
Scene memory. A padlock icon ( ) appears next to the title of a Scene memory that is
write-protected.

F PATCH LINK INPUT
These parameters indicate the Input Patch library numbers selected at the time the
Scenes were stored. When you recall a Scene, the linked Input patch is recalled as well.
You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Auto Scene Memory Update

159

G PATCH LINK OUTPUT
These parameters indicate the Output Patch library numbers selected at the time the
Scenes were stored. When you recall a Scene, the linked Output patch is recalled as well.
You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers.

Auto Scene Memory Update
If the Scene MEM Auto Update check box on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 250) is
turned on, parameter edits are stored automatically in a Shadow memory, which is available for each Scene. This is called the Auto Update function.
If the Auto Update function is enabled, parameter edits made after the Scene was recalled
are stored in the Scene’s Shadow memory. When you again recall the Scene, the contents of
the Original and Shadow memories are recalled alternately.
Therefore, even after you recall the Original Scene memory, you can recall the edited
version from Shadow memory to restore the most recent edits.
When recalling Original and Shadow memories, you can easily tell which is currently active
by viewing the Edit indicators.

02

Scene memory display

02

Dot

Display

Edit indicator
Original Scene

Shadow memory

If a Shadow memory is recalled, the edited version is stored when you store the Scene. (The
contents of the Original and Shadow memories then become identical.) When recalling
Scenes in an Automix or via MIDI Program Change messages, the contents of the Original
memory are always recalled, even if the Auto Update function is enabled.

14
Scene Memories

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

160

Chapter 14—Scene Memories

Fading Scenes
You can specify the time it takes the Input and Output Channel faders to move to their new
positions when a Scene is recalled. This is called Fade Time, and it can be set for each channel in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds (in 0.1 second steps). The Fade Time setting
is stored in each Scene.

Fading Input Channels
To set the Fade Time for Input Channels 1–48, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | In Fade page appears. Move the cursor to the desired channel parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
modify the Fade Time setting.

1

2

3

A Global Fade Time
When this check box is checked, a Scene is recalled using the currently-specified Fade
Time. (The Fade Time setting stored in the recalled Scene is temporarily ignored.) This
check box setting works in unison with the Out Fade page.

B ALL CLEAR
This button resets all channel Fade Times on the page to 00.0 second.

C INPUT CH1–48
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Input Channel in the range
of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds. The Fade Time setting for one channel in a pair works in
unison with its partner.
Tip:
• After you set the Fade Time, if you operate a certain fader while recalling a Scene, the fader’s
Fade Time setting is ignored.
• You can copy the currently-selected Input Channel Fade Time setting to all Input Channels
by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. This is convenient when you wish to set the Fade
Time for all channels simultaneously.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Fading Scenes

161

Fading Output Channels
To set the Fade Time for the Output Channels (Stereo Out, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8),
press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Out Fade page
appears.
The basic operation is the same as on the In Fade page.

1
2
3

A BUS1–8
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Bus Out (1–8) in the range
of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds.

B AUX1–8
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Aux Outs 1–8.

C STEREO
This parameter enables you to set the Fade Time for the Stereo Out.
Tip: You can copy the currently-selected Output Channel Fade Time setting to all Output
Channels by double-clicking the [ENTER] button.

14
Scene Memories

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

162

Chapter 14—Scene Memories

Recalling Scenes Safely
When a Scene is recalled, all mix parameters are set accordingly. However, in some situations, you can retain the current settings of certain parameters on certain channels by
using the Recall Safe function. Recall Safe settings are stored in Scene memories.
To set the Recall Safe function, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly
until the Scene | Rcl Safe page appears.

1

2

4
3

A Global Recall Safe
When this check box is checked, Recall Safe settings stored in Scene memories are
ignored and the current settings are retained.

B SAFE
This parameter enables or disables the Recall Safe function.

C MODE

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The following MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters will remain
unaffected by Scene recalls. The MODE buttons correspond to the following parameters:
ALL ................................ All parameters
FADER........................... Channel faders
ON.................................. Channel On/Off parameters
PAN................................ Channel Pan parameters
EQ .................................. Channel EQ parameters
COMP............................ Channel Comp parameters
GATE ............................. Channel Gate parameters
AUX ............................... Channel Aux Send levels
AUX ON ........................ Aux Send On/Off parameters

Tip: The ALL button is mutually exclusive of the other buttons.

D RECALL SAFE CHANNEL section
This section enables you to select which channels will remain unaffected by Scene
recalls, including Input Channels 1–48, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, Stereo Out, internal effects processors. The Recall Safe function is effective on channels and effects for
which the buttons are turned on.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Sorting Scenes

163

Sorting Scenes
You can sort Scenes in Scene memories.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Sort
page appears.

1

2

2 Move the cursor to the SOURCE list (1) in the left column, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Scene memory you wish to move.
3 Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list (2) in the right column, and rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the position
to which you want to move the source Scene memory.
4 Press [ENTER] to move the source Scene memory to the specified destination.
The Scene memory numbers are updated accordingly.

14
Scene Memories

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

164

Chapter 14—Scene Memories

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

165

15 Libraries
This chapter describes the DM1000’s various libraries.

About the Libraries
The DM1000 features nine libraries that enable you to store Channel, Input Patch, Output
Patch, Effects, and other data. You can also quickly recall this data from the libraries to
restore previous parameter values.
The DM1000 offers the following libraries:
• Channel Library
• Input Patch Library
• Output Patch Library
• Effects Library
• Bus to Stereo Library
• Gate Library
• Compressor Library
• EQ Library
• Surround Monitor Library
Tip:
• You can store library data to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager software. Be sure to back up your important data.
• You can also store library data to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by
using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 246).

General Library Operation
Most library functions are the same for each library.
1 Use the buttons on the top panel to locate the desired library pages.
The procedure for locating library pages varies depending on the library. Refer to the latter
part of this chapter for more information on how to display the desired library page.
The example below assumes you have located the Input Patch library page.

15
Libraries

1
2
3
4

The library memory title list is displayed in the middle of the page. The message “No Data!”
appears in the title column of empty library memories.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

166

Chapter 15—Libraries

An “ ” icon is displayed next to the name of read-only preset memories. You cannot store,
clear, or edit the titles of these memories.
Memories #0 and #U are special read-only memories. Recall memory #0 to reset the parameter settings to their initial values. Recall #U to undo memory recall and store operations.
2 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the
desired memory.
The selected memory appears inside the dotted box.
3 Move the cursor to one of the following function buttons, then press
[ENTER].

A TITLE EDIT
This button displays the Title Edit window, which enables you to edit the title of the
selected memory. Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to confirm
the edited title. See page 30 for more information on entering characters.

B RECALL
This button recalls the contents of the selected library memory. If you turn on the Recall
Confirmation parameter on the Setup | Prefer1 page, the DM1000 displays a memory
recall confirmation window.

C STORE
This button stores the settings to the selected memory. Before you store the settings, you
can enter or edit the title using the Title Edit window. See page 30 for more information
on entering characters.
You can disable the Title Edit window by turning off the Store Confirmation parameter
on the Setup | Prefer1 page. If you bypass the Edit Title window, the name “New Data”
will be used as a title for the Scene memory.

D CLEAR
This button deletes the contents of the selected memory. After you press [ENTER], the
DM1000 displays a confirmation window. To execute the delete operation, move the
cursor to the OK button in the confirmation window, then press [ENTER].
Note: If you select a memory that already contains settings and execute the delete operation,
the settings will be lost. Make sure that you do not accidentally delete important settings.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Libraries

167

Using Libraries
Channel Library
Channel library enables you to store and recall Input Channel and Output Channel parameter settings. The library contains two preset memories and 127 user (readable & writable)
memories.
You can recall only the settings for the currently-selected channels from the Channel library.
For example, you can recall Input Channel settings to Input Channels, but not to Bus Outs,
Aux Sends, or Stereo Out, with the exception that memories #0 and #1 can be recalled to
any channels.
Follow the steps below to use the Channel library.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F3] button.
The View | Library page appears.

1
2

3

4

A SEL CH
This parameter indicates the currently-selected channel.

B CURRENT CONFIGURATION section
If the currently-selected channel is an Input Channel, its Surround mode and Aux configuration information is displayed here.

C Level meters

D STORED FROM
This parameter indicates the channel for which the settings were originally stored in the
selected library memory. If the currently-selected library memory contains Input Channel settings, its Surround mode and Aux pairing information are also displayed below
this parameter.
2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
For details on the Store and Recall functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 165.
If the selected memory’s channel type does not match the type of the destination channel,
an alarm mark ( ) and the word “CONFLICT” appear next to the STORED FROM
parameter. These alarms indicate that you tried to recall unrecallable channel settings to the
currently-selected channel.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected channel and the available partner.

15

168

Chapter 15—Libraries

The alarm indicators also appear when the Surround mode, Aux pair, and other non-channel parameter settings originally stored in the memory do not match those for the destination channel. However, if the channel type of the memory and that of the destination
channel match, you can recall the settings even with the alarm indicators displayed. (For
unmatched parameter settings, the DM1000 will use the settings in the memory that is to
be recalled.)
The following preset memories are available for the Channel library.
No.

Preset Name

Description

0

Reset (–∞ dB)

This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently-selected channel
to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to (–∞ dB).

1

Reset (0 dB)

This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently-selected channel
to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to 0 dB (i.e., nominal).

Input Patch Library
The Input Patch library enables you to store and recall all Input Patch settings. The library
contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.
To access the Input Patch library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the In Patch | Library page appears. For details on storing and recalling
memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 165.

Input Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings:
Input Channels 1–16

INPUT connectors 1–16

Input Channels 17–24

Channels 1–8 of Slot 1

Input Channels 25–32

Channels 1–8 of Slot 2

Input Channels 33–40

Internal Effects Processor 1–4 Outputs 1 & 2

Input Channels 41–44

2TRD1 & D2

Input Channels 45–48

OMNI IN connectors 1–4

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Libraries

169

Output Patch Library
The Output Patch library enables you to store and recall all Output Patch settings. The
library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.
To access the Output Patch library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Out Patch | Library page appears.
For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on
page 165.

The Output Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings:
OMNI OUT connectors 1–8

Aux Outs 1–8

OMNI OUT connectors 9–10

Stereo Out L & R

OMNI OUT connectors 11–12

Control Room Monitor L & R

Channels 1–8 of Slot 1

BUS1–BUS8

Channels 9–16 of Slot 1

BUS1–BUS8

Channels 1–8 of Slot 2

BUS1–BUS8

Channels 9–16 of Slot 2

BUS1–BUS8

2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (L)

Stereo Out L

2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (R)

Stereo Out R

2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (L)

Stereo Out L

2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (R)

Stereo Out R

15

The Effects library enables you to store and recall Effects processor 1–4 programs. The
library contains 52 preset programs and 76 user (readable & writable) programs.
Note:
• The Effects library is shared by Effects processors 1–4. However, only Effects processor 1
enables storing and recalling Surround effects settings.
• Certain effects type settings recalled to Effects processor 1 disable Effects processors 2–4.
To store and recall settings to and from the library, you must locate the corresponding
Effects processor’s page.
To access the Effects library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EFFECT] button repeatedly until
the library page for the desired Effects processor appears.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

Effects Library

170

Chapter 15—Libraries

Each Effects processor features the library pages listed below:
• Internal Effects Processor 1 Library ........... FX1 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 2 Library ........... FX2 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 3 Library ........... FX3 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 4 Library ........... FX4 Lib page

1
2

5

3
4

A EFFECT NAME
This parameter displays the name of the Effects program currently used by the Effects
processor.

B TYPE
This parameter displays the effects type currently used by the Effects processor. The
number of input and output channels for the currently-used effects appears below the
TYPE parameter.

C
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the Effect | FX1 Edit, FX2
Edit, FX3 Edit, or FX4 Edit page to adjust the Effects parameters.

D
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the In Patch | Effect page
to assign the input and output signals of Effects processors 1–4.

E Level meters
These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently-selected Effects processor. Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels
respectively.
For details on storing and recalling programs, see “General Library Operation” on
page 165.
The following tables list the preset effects programs in the Effects library:
• Reverbs
No.

Preset Name

Type

Description

Reverb Hall

REVERB HALL

Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate

2

Reverb Room

REVERB ROOM

Room reverberation simulation with gate

3

Reverb Stage

REVERB STAGE

Reverb designed for vocals, with gate

4

Reverb Plate

REVERB PLATE

Plate reverb simulation with gate

5

Early Ref.

EARLY REF.

Early reflections without the subsequent reverb

6

Gate Reverb

GATE REVERB

Gated early reflections

7

Reverse Gate

REVERSE GATE

Gated reverse early reflections

1

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Libraries

171

• Delays
No.

Preset Name

Type

Description

8

Mono Delay

MONO DELAY

Simple mono delay

9

Stereo Delay

STEREO DELAY

Simple stereo delay

10

Mod.delay

MOD.DELAY

Simple repeat delay with modulation

11

Delay LCR

DELAY LCR

3-tap (left, center, right) delay

12

Echo

ECHO

Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback

• Modulation-based Effects
No.

Preset Name

Type

Description

13

Chorus

CHORUS

Chorus

14

Flange

FLANGE

Flanger

15

Symphonic

SYMPHONIC

Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and
more complex modulation than normal chorus

16

Phaser

PHASER

16-stage stereo phase shifter

17

Auto Pan

AUTO PAN

Auto-panner

18

TREMOLO

TREMOLO

Tremolo

19

HQ.Pitch

HQ.PITCH

Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results

20

Dual Pitch

DUAL PITCH

Stereo pitch shifter

21

Rotary

ROTARY

Rotary speaker simulation

22

Ring Mod.

RING MOD.

Ring modulator

23

Mod.Filter

MOD.FILTER

Modulated filter

• Guitar Effects
No.

Preset Name

Type

Description

24

Distortion

DISTORTION

Distortion

25

Amp Simulate

AMP SIMULATE

Guitar amp simulation

• Dynamic Effects
No.

Preset Name

Type

Description

26

Dyna.Filter

DYNA.FILTER

Dynamically controlled filter

27

Dyna.Flange

DYNA.FLANGE

Dynamically controlled flanger

28

Dyna.Phaser

DYNA.PHASER

Dynamically controlled phase shifter

Libraries

• Combination Effects
No.

Preset Name

15

Type

Description

29

Rev+Chorus

REV+CHORUS

Reverb and chorus in parallel

30

Rev->Chorus

REV->CHORUS

Reverb and chorus in series

31

Rev+Flange

REV+FLANGE

Reverb and flanger in parallel

32

Rev->Flange

REV->FLANGE

Reverb and flanger in series

33

Rev+Sympho.

REV+SYMPHO.

Reverb and symphonic in parallel

34

Rev->Sympho.

REV->SYMPHO.

Reverb and symphonic in series

35

Rev->Pan

REV->PAN

Reverb and auto-pan in series

36

Delay+ER.

DELAY+ER.

Delay and early reflections in parallel

37

Delay->ER.

DELAY->ER.

Delay and early reflections in series

38

Delay+Rev

DELAY+REV

Delay and reverb in parallel

39

Delay->Rev

DELAY->REV

Delay and reverb in series

40

Dist->Delay

DIST->DELAY

Distortion and delay in series

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

172

Chapter 15—Libraries

• Others
No.

Preset Name

Type

Description

41

Multi.Filter

MULTI.FILTER

3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)

42

Freeze

FREEZE

Simple sampler

43

Stereo Reverb

ST REVERB

Stereo reverb

44

Reverb 5.1

REVERB 5.1

6-channel reverb for 5.1 surround

451

Octa Reverb

OCTA

461

Auto Pan 5.1

AUTO PAN 5.1

6-channel auto pan for 5.1 surround

471

Chorus 5.1

CHORUS 5.1

6-channel chorus for 5.1 surround

481

Flange 5.1

FLANGE 5.1

6-channel flanger for 5.1 surround

491

Sympho. 5.1

SYMPHO. 5.1

6-channel symphonic effect for 5.1 surround

50

M. Band Dyna.

M. BAND DYNA.

Multi-band dynamics processor

511

Comp 5.1

521

Compand 5.1

REVERB2

COMP

5.12

COMPAND

8-channel reverb

Multi-band compressor for 5.1 surround
5.12

Multi-band compander for 5.1 surround

1. These effects can be recalled only to Effects processor #1.
2. If these effects types are recalled to Effects processor #1, Effects processors #2 through #4 are disabled.

Note:
• Effects that include “5.1” in the names are multi-channel Surround effects that support 5.1
channels. These effects types are most effective when 6-channel outputs are connected to a
5.1-channel system.
• If REVERB 5.1, OCTA REVERB, COMP 5.1, or COMPAND 5.1 are recalled to Effects processor #1, Effects processors #2 through #4 are disabled.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Libraries

173

Bus to Stereo Library
You can store Bus to Stereo settings (levels and panpots of signals routed from Bus Outs 1–8
to the Stereo Bus). The library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.
To access the Bus to Stereo library, press the SELECTED CHANNEL [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly until the Routing | Library page appears.

1

2

A CURRENT CONFIGURATION section
Bus Out (1–8) pairing information for the current configuration is displayed here.
Note: You can recall only Bus to Stereo library memories that have the same Bus Out (1–8)
pairing configuration as the current configuration.

B LIBRARY CONFIGURATION box
Bus Out pairing information for the configuration stored in the currently-selected
memory is displayed here. When the current configuration and the configuration in the
selected memory do not match, the word “CONFLICT” appears in the LIBRARY CONFIGURATION box, although you can still recall the memory.
For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on
page 165.

15
Libraries

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

174

Chapter 15—Libraries

Gate Library
The Gate library enables you to store and recall Input Channel gate settings. The library
contains four preset memories and 124 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the Gate library.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F2] button.
The Dynamics | Gate Lib page appears.

1
2

3

4

A CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel gate type (Gate or Ducking).

B CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current channel gate curve.

C GR meters
These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the gate, and the
post-gate levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.

D Type & Curve section
The type (Gate or Ducking) and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed
here.
Tip: If you selected an Aux Out (1–8), Bus Out (1–8), or Stereo Out that does not feature a
gate, the DM1000 indicates “XXX HAS NO GATE!” (in which XXX represents a signal name).
2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
You can now store the selected channel gate settings or recall the gate library memories to
channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation”
on page 165.
The following table lists the preset memories in the Gate library:
No.

Preset Name

Type

Description

1

Gate

GATE

Gate template

2

Ducking

DUCKING

Ducking template

3

A. Dr. BD

GATE

Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums

4

A. Dr. SN

GATE

Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Libraries

175

Compressor Library
This library enables you to store and recall settings for the compressors on Input Channels,
Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out. The library contains 36 preset memories and
92 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the Compressor library.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F4] button.
The Dynamics | Comp Lib page appears.

1
2

3

4

A CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel comp type (Compressor,
Expander, Compander Soft, Compander Hard).

B CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current compressor curve.

C GR meters
These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the compressor,
and the post-comp levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.

D Type & Curve section
The type and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed here.

The following table lists the preset memories in the Compressor library:
No.

Preset Name

Type

Description

1

Comp

COMP

Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use
it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired
Input or Output Channels.

2

Expand

EXPAND

Expander template.

3

Compander (H)

COMPAND-H

Hard-kneed compressor template.

4

Compander (S)

COMPAND-S

Soft-kneed compressor template.

5

A. Dr. BD

COMP

Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum.

6

A. Dr. BD

COMPAND-H

Hard-kneed compander for use with acoustic bass
drum.

7

A. Dr. SN

COMP

Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

15
Libraries

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
You can now store the selected channel comp settings and recall the compressor library
memories to channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library
Operation” on page 165.

176

Chapter 15—Libraries

No.

Preset Name

Type

Description

8

A. Dr. SN

EXPAND

Expander for use with acoustic snare drum.

9

A. Dr. SN

COMPAND-S

Soft-kneed compander for use with acoustic snare
drum.

10

A. Dr. Tom

EXPAND

Expander for use with acoustic tom toms, which automatically reduces the volume when the tom toms are
not played, improving mic separation.

11

A. Dr. OverTop

COMPAND-S

Soft-kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and
ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics. It
automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals
are not played, improving mic separation.

12

E. B. Finger

COMP

Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a finger-picked electric bass guitar.

13

E. B. Slap

COMP

Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a
slapped electric bass guitar.

14

Syn. Bass

COMP

Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of
a synth bass.

15

Piano1

COMP

Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano.

16

Piano2

COMP

A variation on preset 15, using a deep threshold to
change the overall attack and level.

17

E. Guitar

COMP

Compressor for electric guitar “cutting” or arpeggio-style backing. The sound color can be varied by
playing different styles.

18

A. Guitar

COMP

Compressor for acoustic guitar “stroke” or arpeggio-style backing.

19

Strings1

COMP

Compressor for use with strings.

20

Strings2

COMP

A variation on preset 19, intended for violas or cellos.

21

Strings3

COMP

A variation on preset 20, intended for string instruments with a very low range, such as cellos or contrabass.

22

BrassSection

COMP

Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong
attack.

23

Syn. Pad

COMP

Compressor for musical instruments that feature gentle
sounds which, depending on the tones, could diffuse,
such as synth pad. Intended to prevent diffusion of the
sound.

24

SamplingPerc

COMPAND-S

Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like
real acoustic percussion.

25

Sampling BD

COMP

A variation on preset 24, intended for sampled bass
drum sounds.

26

Sampling SN

COMP

A variation on preset 25, intended for sampled snare
drum sounds.

27

Hip Comp

COMPAND-S

A variation on preset 26, intended for sampled loops
and phrases.

28

Solo Vocal1

COMP

Compressor for use with main vocals.

29

Solo Vocal2

COMP

A variation on preset 28.

30

Chorus

COMP

A variation on preset 28, intended for choruses.

31

Click Erase

EXPAND

Expander for removing a click track that may bleed
through from a musicians headphones.

32

Announcer

COMPAND-H

Hard-kneed compander for reducing the level of the
music when an announcer speaks.

33

Limiter1

COMPAND-S

A soft-kneed compander with a slow release.

34

Limiter2

COMP

A “peak-stop” compressor.

35

Total Comp1

COMP

Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use
it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired
Input or Output Channels.

36

Total Comp2

COMP

A variation on preset 35, but with more compression.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Libraries

177

EQ Library
This library enables you to store and recall EQ settings for Input Channels, Bus Outs 1–8,
Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out. The library contains 40 preset memories and 160 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the EQ library.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to
display the EQ | EQ Library page.

1
2

3

4

A CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel EQ type (TYPE I or II).

B CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current EQ curve.

C Level meters
These meters indicate the post-EQ levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.

D Type & Curve section
The type and curve of the currently-selected EQ program are displayed here.

The following table lists the preset memories in the EQ library:
No.

Preset Name

Description

1

Bass Drum 1

Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the
beater.

2

Bass Drum 2

Creates a peak around 80 Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound.

3

Snare Drum 1

Emphasizes “snappy” and rimshot sounds.

4

Snare Drum 2

Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound.

5

Tom-tom 1

Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms, and creates a long, “leathery” decay.

6

Cymbal

Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals, extending the “sparkling” decay.

7

High Hat

Use on a tight high-hat, emphasizing the mid to high range.

8

Percussion

Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high-range of instruments, such
as shakers, cabasas, and congas.

9

E. Bass 1

Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

15
Libraries

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
You can now store the selected channel EQ settings or recall the EQ library memories to
channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation”
on page 165.

178

Chapter 15—Libraries

No.

Preset Name

Description

10

E. Bass 2

Unlike preset 9, this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass.

11

Syn. Bass 1

Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range.

12

Syn. Bass 2

Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass.

13

Piano 1

Makes pianos sound brighter.

14

Piano 2

Used in conjunction with a compressor, this preset emphasizes the attack
and low range of pianos.

15

E. G. Clean

Use for line-level recording of an electric or semi-acoustic guitar to get a
slightly harder sound.

16

E. G. Crunch 1

Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound.

17

E. G. Crunch 2

A variation on preset 16.

18

E. G. Dist. 1

Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer.

19

E. G. Dist. 2

A variation on preset 18.

20

A. G. Stroke 1

Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars.

21

A. G. Stroke 2

A variation on preset 20. You can also use it with an acoustic-electric nylon
string guitar.

22

A. G. Arpeg. 1

Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars.

23

A. G. Arpeg. 2

A variation on preset 22.

24

Brass Sec.

Use with trumpets, trombones, or saxes. When used with a single instrument, try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID frequency.

25

Male Vocal 1

An EQ template for male vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID
parameters according to the voice quality.

26

Male Vocal 2

A variation on preset 25.

Female Vo. 1

An EQ template for female vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID
parameters according to the voice quality.

28

Female Vo. 2

A variation on preset 27.

29

Chorus&Harmo

An EQ template for brightening choruses.

30

Total EQ 1

Use on a stereo mix during mixdown. Sounds even better when used with a
compressor.

31

Total EQ 2

A variation on preset 30.

32

Total EQ 3

A variation on preset 30. Can also be used with paired Input or Output
Channels.

33

Bass Drum 3

A variation on preset 1, with low and mid range reduced.

34

Snare Drum 3

A variation on preset 3, creating a thicker sound.

35

Tom-tom 2

A variation on preset 5, emphasizing the mid and high ranges.

36

Piano 3

A variation on preset 13.

37

Piano Low

Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo.

38

Piano High

Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in stereo.

39

Fine-EQ Cass

Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape.

40

Narrator

Ideal for recording narration.

27

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Libraries

179

Surround Monitor Library
This library enables you to store and recall Surround Monitor settings. The library contains
one preset memory that initializes the Surround Monitor settings, and 32 user (readable &
writable) memories.
To access the Surround Monitor library, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr Lib page appears. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 165.

15
Libraries

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

180

Chapter 15—Libraries

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

181

Automix

16 Automix
This chapter describes the Automix function, which automates real-time mix operation,
and explains how to use it.

About Automix
The DM1000 features an Automix function, which allows dynamic automation of virtually
all mix parameters, including Levels, Mutes, Pan, Surround Pan, Aux Sends, Aux Send
Mutes, EQ, and effects.
Various mixing events can be recorded in Automix. You can also punch channels or parameters in and out of recording on-the-fly, and edit most parameters off-line with 1/4 frame
accuracy. Remote layer operations, and Scene and library recall operations can also be automated, which enables you to create mix automation that combines snap shots and dynamic
mix parameter changes.
You can store up to 16 Automixes in the Automix library. You can also store an Automix or
the entire Automix library to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using
MIDI Bulk Dump.
The following parameter events can be recorded in an Automix:
Input
Channels

Bus Out
Master

Aux Send
Master

Stereo Out

Channel levels (faders)

O

O

O

O

Channel mutes (ON/OFF)

O

O

O

O

Pan

O

—

—

—

Surround pan, LFE level, and DIV

O

—

—

—

EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off)

O

O

O

O

Aux Send 1–8 levels

O

—

—

—

Aux Send 1–8 mutes

O

—

—

—

Parameters

Scene recalls
EQ, Gate, Comp, Effects, Channel
library recalls
Effects parameters
(certain parameters)
User Defined Remote Layers
(faders, [ON], Encoders)

16
Automix

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

182

Chapter 16—Automix

Setting Up for Automix Recording
This section describes the procedure you must perform before you start Automix recording.

Selecting the Timecode Source
Follow the steps below to select the timecode source and frame rate that the DM1000 uses
for the Automix function.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Time
Ref page appears.
This page enables you to select the timecode source for the Automix operation, and the port
that receives the timecode.

3
1

2

A TIME REFERENCE section
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Select one of the following timecode sources for the Automix operation.
INTERNAL ................... Internally generated timecode
SMPTE .......................... SMPTE timecode received via the TIME CODE INPUT
SMPTE connector
MIDI CLOCK............... MIDI Clock received via the Rx PORT (specified on the Setup
| MIDI/Host page)
MTC-MIDI ................... MTC received via the MIDI IN port
MTC-USB ..................... MTC received via the USB port
MTC-REMOTE ............ MTC received via the REMOTE connector
MTC-SLOT1................. MTC received via Slot 1 (for use with an optional MY8-mLAN
card installed in Slot 1)

B FRAMES
These parameter buttons select the SMPTE/MTC frame rate.

C

button
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER]. The DM1000 quickly locates the
Automix | Main page.

2 Move the cursor to the TIME REFERENCE section and select the desired timecode source.
3 If you selected INTERNAL, SMPTE, or MTC timecode, move the cursor to one
of the FRAMES parameter buttons to select the desired frame rate.
If the DM1000 receives timecode with a frame rate that differs from the specified rate, the
error message “Frame Mismatch!” appears. If you select the SMPTE timecode, the error
message “Frame Jump!” may appear, depending on the selected frame rate.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Up for Automix Recording

183

4 If you select MIDI CLOCK, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears (see page 236). Then, in the
Rx PORT parameter box, specify the port or slot that receives MIDI Clock.
Tip:
• If you select the MIDI CLOCK source, Automix will respond to MIDI Start, Stop, and Continue messages.
• An Automix will play back correctly even if the frame rate differs from that used when the
Automix was originally recorded. However, an Automix recorded using MIDI Clock and
an Automix recorded using other timecode sources are not compatible with one another.

Creating a Time Signature Map
If you selected the MIDI CLOCK source, you must specify the initial time signature and any
time signature changes that follow, according to the song. (If you do not do this, the song
timing and Automix position may not match when playback starts in mid-song.)
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Time
Sig page appears.
This page enables you to specify a measure number in the MEAS column and the time signature in the TIME column. By default, 4/4 is set in the first measure.
2 To change the initial time signature, move the cursor to the TIME value in
the first measure, and use the Parameter wheel or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select the desired time signature.
3 To insert a time signature change, specify the desired measure number in
an empty box in the MEAS column, and specify the corresponding time signature in the TIME column.
To delete a time signature change, select it, then press [ENTER]. You cannot delete the initial time signature entry at measure #1.

16
Automix

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

184

Chapter 16—Automix

Recording an Automix
This section describes a general procedure for Automix recording, including creating a new
Automix, as well as recording the fader, [ON] button, and other controller events real-time.

Creating a New Automix
Follow the steps below to create a new Automix and select the parameters you want to
record.
1 Connect a timecode source to the DM1000.
2 Select the timecode source on the Setup | Time Ref page (see page 182).
If you selected MIDI CLOCK timecode, create a time signature map (see page 183).
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix
| Main page appears.
This page enables you to set the basic Automix parameters, and record and play back Automixes.

4 Move the cursor to the NEW button located in the lower-right corner of the
page, then press [ENTER].
A confirmation window for creating a new Automix appears.

5 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
A new Automix is created.
6 Move the cursor to the AUTOMIX DISABLED/ENABLED button, then press
[ENTER] to switch it to ENABLED.
The new Automix is enabled.
7 In the OVERWRITE section, select parameters you want to record.
The seven buttons in the OVERWRITE section enable you to select parameters to be
recorded in the Automix, including the following. See page 187 for more information.
• FADER........................... Fader operation
• ON.................................. [ON] button on/off

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Recording an Automix

•
•
•
•
•

185

PAN ................................Pan operation
SURR .............................Surround pan operation
AUX................................Aux Send level operation
AUX ON ........................Aux Send on/off operation
EQ...................................EQ operation

Recording the First Event
Follow the steps below to select channels and start Automix recording.
1 Move the cursor to the REC button at the bottom of the page, then press
[ENTER].
The REC button flashes, indicating that the Automix is ready to record.
Tip: Alternatively, you could press the AUTO REC button (instead of the REC button), then
press [ENTER] to place the Automix in record ready mode. Whether you press REC or AUTO
REC will affect the way in which you cancel record ready mode.
2 Press the [AUTO] button on the top panel.
The button indicator lights up. If you turn on the [AUTO] button indicator while the REC
button is lit or flashing on the Automix Main page, the [SEL] buttons will allow you to
enable or disable the Automix function for each channel, or arm or disarm each channel.
Depending on the REC button status on the Main page, pressing the channel [SEL] buttons
will place the corresponding channels in the following state:
• When the REC button is flashing or lit:

Green
Ready for
Automix playback

Orange
Ready for Automix
recording

Off
Automix
disabled

Green
Ready for
Automix playback

Orange
Ready for Automix
recording

16

• When the REC button is off:

Automix

Off
Automix
disabled

Green
Ready for
Automix playback

3 Select the layer that contains the channels you wish to record, then press
the corresponding channel [SEL] buttons.
The button indicators light up orange. The corresponding channels are armed.
4 Start the timecode source.
The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and the recording starts. The [SEL] button
indicators (illuminated in Step 3) change from orange to red (indicating that recording is
in progress).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

186

Chapter 16—Automix

5 Adjust the faders, Encoders, [ON] buttons, and other controls of the channels
selected in Step 3.
Tip: To punch channels out of recording, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons to change the
button indicators from red to green.
6 To record EQ events, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings of the currently-selected channel.
To select other channels, press the [AUTO] button to turn off the [AUTO] button indicator,
then use the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
Tip: Scene and library recalls are always recorded, regardless of the selection in the OVERWRITE section and the [SEL] button status.
7 To stop Automix recording, stop the timecode source, or move the cursor
to the STOP button on the page, then press [ENTER].
A confirmation message appears asking whether you want to update the existing Automix
data (i.e., keep the edits just recorded).
Move the cursor to YES and press [ENTER] to update the data, or move the cursor to NO
and press [ENTER] to discard the edits and return to the previous condition. Even after you
update the existing Automix data, unless you proceed to the next recording, you can still
restore the previous data by moving the cursor to the UNDO button on the Main page and
pressing [ENTER].
Tip:
• When you stop Automix recording, all channels are disarmed, and the [SEL] button indicators light up green.
• If you use the AUTO REC button instead of the REC button in Step 1, the AUTO REC button
will continue to flash after you stop Automix recording. In this way, you can resume recording
when you restart the timecode source. To cancel record ready mode, move the cursor to the
AUTO REC button, then press [ENTER].
• If the Mix Update Confirmation preference is off on the Setup | Prefer3 page, the confirmation window for updating the existing Automix data will not appear, and the edits just
recorded will be retained.
Note:
• You can rerecord events as many times as you like. Remember, however, that unlike the first
pass, on subsequent passes existing events for the currently-punched in parameter are overwritten.
• You can reduce the risk of overwriting important data by punching in and out only necessary
parameters using the buttons in the OVERWRITE section.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Recording an Automix

187

Parameter Recording
The following table summarizes the parameter recording operation for each parameter
available in Automix recording.
Parameters

Channel

OVERWRITE

Set Layer to Input, Fader
mode to Fader, use faders

Input
Channel Levels
(faders)

Channel Mutes
(ON/OFF)

Pan

Bus Out, Aux Send

Set Layer to Master, Fader
mode to Fader, use faders
Use Stereo Out fader

Input

Set Layer to Input, use [ON]
buttons

Bus Out, Aux Send

ON

Set Layer to Master, use [ON]
buttons

Pair/Group
Faders of paired channels and
grouped faders are recorded
together.

[ON] buttons of paired channels and grouped mutes are
recorded together.

Stereo Out

Use Stereo Out [ON] button

Input

PAN

Set Layer to Input, Encoder
mode to Pan, use Encoders.
Use SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN control

If Pan mode is Gang or
Inverse-Gang, paired channels are recorded together.

SURR

Use Joystick. If a surround
parameter assigned to an
Encoder, also use Encoders

If ST LINK button on Surround Edit page is on, adjacent partners are recorded
together.

Use SELECTED CHANNEL
EQUALIZER section. (If EQ
parameter assigned to an
Encoder, also use Encoders.)

EQ of paired channels, and
grouped EQs recorded
together.

If Fader mode is Aux, use faders. If Encoder mode is Aux,
use Encoders (also use Aux
Send or Aux View pages).

Aux send levels of paired
channels recorded together.
(If the selected Aux Send is
paired, the send level to both
Aux Sends is recorded.)

Use Aux Send or Aux View
pages

Aux send mutes of paired
channels recorded together.
(If the selected Aux Send is
paired, mutes for both Aux
Sends recorded.)

Input

EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off)

Input, Bus Out,
Aux Send, Stereo Out

Aux Send 1–8 mutes

FADER

Stereo Out

Surround Pan

Aux Sends 1–8 Level

Operation

Input

AUX

Input

Scene recalls

EQ

AUX ON

—

—

Use SCENE MEMORY section
or Scene Memory page

—

EQ, Gate, Comp,
Effects, Channel

—

Use corresponding library
page

—

Effects parameters
(certain
parameters)

Effects processors 1–4

—

Use corresponding page

—

FADER

Select User Defined Remote
Layer, use faders

—

[ON] buttons

ON

Select User Defined Remote
Layer, use [ON] buttons

—

Encoders

PAN

Select User Defined Remote
Layer, use Encoders

—

Faders
User Defined
Remote Layer

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

16
Automix

Library recalls

188

Chapter 16—Automix

Punching In & Out
You can modify part of a recorded Automix or add events to an Automix (Punch In & Out).
You can punch in and out channels using the [SEL] buttons, or individual parameters using
other controls.

Punch In & Out Using the [SEL] Buttons
Follow the steps below to punch channels in and out using the [SEL] buttons.
1 Select parameters you wish to record in the OVERWRITE section.
2 Move the cursor to the REC or AUTO REC button at the bottom of the page,
then press [ENTER].
3 Press the [AUTO] button.
The button indicator lights up. At this time, make sure that the [SEL] button indicators for
all channels (including the channels you want to punch in) are lit green.
4 Start the timecode source.
The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and parameter event recording is armed. However, no events are yet recorded since no channels are selected.
5 To punch in channels, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons.
The corresponding [SEL] button indicators light up red and the channels are placed in
record mode.
Note: If the punch-in channels already contain the parameter events selected in the OVERWRITE section, punching-in immediately overwrites the existing events. Be careful while
selecting parameters in the OVERWRITE section so that you will not delete events you wish
to retain.
6 Adjust the controls of the selected channels.
7 To punch out the channels, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons again.
8 Stop the Automix.
A confirmation window regarding updating the Automix data appears.
Tip: You can also select the recording channels first using the [SEL] buttons, start the timecode
source, then select the desired parameters in the OVERWRITE section to punch in and out.

Punching In & Out Individual Events
Even if you selected some parameters in the OVERWRITE section, you can punch in an
individual parameter by following the steps below:
1 In the OVERWRITE section, select the parameters you want to record.
2 Move the cursor to the REC or AUTO REC button at the bottom of the page,
then press [ENTER].
3 Press the [AUTO] button on the top panel.
The button indicator lights up. Make sure that the [SEL] button indicators for all channels
are lit green.
4 Start the timecode source.
The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and event recording is armed. However, no
events are yet recorded since no channels are selected.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Punching In & Out

189

5 Perform the following operations to punch in and out individual events.
Parameters

Channel

OVERWRITE

Set Layer to Iinput,
Fader mode to Fader

Input
Channel Levels
(faders)

Bus Out,
Aux Send

FADER

Stereo Out
Pan

Input

Surround Pan

Input

Effects parameters
(certain
parameters)

User Defined
Remote Layer
1.
2.
3.
4.

Input

Effects processors 1–4
Faders
Encoders

Punch Out

Touch fader knob
and adjust1

Release fader knob2

PAN

Set Layer to Input,
Encoder mode to Pan

Press Encoder and
adjust

Press Encoder

SURR

Select Input Layer
and assign Surround
LFE Level or Surround
Pan Wheel to the
Encoders

Press Encoder and
adjust

Press Encoder

Use SELECTED
CHANNEL EQUALIZER section. (If EQ
parameter assigned
to an Encoder, also
use Encoders.)

Adjust SELECTED
CHANNEL control3
Press Encoder and
adjust

Press [SEL] button

Press Encoder and
adjust4

Press Encoder

Set Layer to Input,
Fader mode to Aux

Touch fader knob
and adjust1

Release fader knob2

Set Layer to Input,
Encoder mode to Aux

Press Encoder and
adjust

Press Encoder

Select internal effects
processors

Move the cursor to
the parameter control on the page,
then press [ENTER].

Move the cursor to
the parameter control on the page,
then press [ENTER].

FADER

Select User Defined
Remote Layer

Touch fader knob
and adjust1

Release fader knob2

PAN

Select User Defined
Remote Layer

Press Encoder and
adjust

Press Encoder

EQ

EQ On/Off

Aux Sends 1–8 Level

Set Layer to Master,
Fader mode to fader

Punch In

Stereo Out fader

EQ (F, Q, G)
All channels

Operation

AUX

—

To punch in events by performing this operation, turn on the TOUCH SENSE IN button on the Fader1 or 2 page.
To punch out events by performing this operation, turn on the TOUCH SENSE OUT button on the Fader1 or 2 page.
To punch in events by performing this operation, turn on the Auto EQ Edit preference.
To punch in events by performing this operation, assign EQ parameters to the Encoders.

6 Stop the Automix.
A confirmation window regarding updating the Automix data appears.

16
Automix

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

190

Chapter 16—Automix

[SEL] Button Functions While the [AUTO] Button
Indicator Is On
While the [AUTO] button indicator is lit, you can use the channel [SEL] buttons to turn the
Automix function on and off, arm or disarm channels, or punch channels in and out.
The [SEL] button indicators operate as follows:
• Off .................................. Automix recording or playback disabled.
• Green ............................. Automix stopped or playing
• Orange........................... The channel is armed.
• Red ................................. Automix recording in progress
• Flashing red.................. Edit Out mode set to TAKEOVER, and fader events continue
recording after punch out
• Flashing green.............. Edit Out mode set to TAKEOVER, and faders are disabled after
punch out

Playing Back an Automix
As long as the Automix function is enabled, the Automix function will chase the incoming
timecode and play and stop the current Automix accordingly.
You can stop playback manually by moving the cursor to the STOP or ABORT button on
the Automix | Main/Memory page, then pressing [ENTER].
Playback will stop automatically if the DM1000 receives no timecode for a while, if the
DM1000 receives MIDI Stop commands (only when the MIDI CLOCK source is selected),
or if the end of the Automix data is reached.
While the [AUTO] button indicator is lit, the [SEL] button indicators light up green on the
channel strips available for Automix playback. When Automix playback for an individual
channel is disabled, its [SEL] button indicator turns off.
During playback, faders move in accordance with recorded fader events (as long as the corresponding layer and Fader mode is selected). You can disable fader movement by turning
off the MOTOR button on the Fader 1 or 2 page (see page 196).
You can view fader events on the Fader 1 or 2 page (see page 196), and other events on the
corresponding pages. Recorded events of the currently-selected channel are reflected in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section controls and displays.
Note: If the current effects type is different from that used when the effects parameter edits
were recorded, the parameter edits will not be played back. However, they are not deleted.
When you rerecord effects parameter edits from the beginning, it is recommended that you
delete the existing effects events offline.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Automix Main Page

191

Automix Main Page
This section explains the Automix Main page. This page enables you to set the basic Automix parameters and record and play back Automixes. To locate the Automix | Main page,
press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the page appears.

2
3

1

5
8
9
K
L
M

4
6
7
J

N

O

P

Q

R

A FREE
The amount of free Automix memory remaining is displayed here in kilobytes, as a percentage, and by a bar graph.

B SIZE
The size of the current Automix and the size of any Automix data in the undo buffer are
displayed here in kilobytes.

C TIME REFERENCE
The timecode source and frame rate specified on the Time Ref page (see page 182) are
also displayed here.

D INT START TIME
This parameter sets the start time of the DM1000 internal timecode generator in hours,
minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Move the cursor to a digit you wish to change,
and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the value.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.”

E OFFSET

F UPDATE
This button determines the fate of events that exist beyond the point at which rerecording is stopped.
When the TO END button is on, the DM1000 erases all events (that exist beyond the
point at which rerecording is stopped) for parameters that have been edited during the
current pass. This function is useful when you want parameters to remain the same right
through to the end of the Automix.
When the TO END button is off, existing events are left as they are.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

16
Automix

This parameter specifies an offset relative to the external timecode source in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Specify a “+” value to move events forward relative to the incoming timecode. Specify a “–” value to move events backwards relative to
the incoming timecode. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit
to “00.”

192

Chapter 16—Automix

When the TO END button is on, the way in which fader events are processed depends
on the currently-selected Fader Edit mode and Edit Out mode. The following table
shows how the faders operate when the Fader Edit mode is set to Absolute.
TO END

Return

Takeover or Off

At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader
returns to the position specified by the existing fader
data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter
on the Fader1 or 2 page.

At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader
remains at the same position until the next fader
event in the existing data is encountered.

Existing data

Existing data
Return time

OFF
Fader edit

Fader edit

Punch in

Time
Stop recording

At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader
returns to the position specified by the existing fader
data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter
on the Fader1 or 2 page. All subsequent events are
erased. The fader remains at that position through to
the end of the Automix.
Existing data

Time
Punch in

Stop recording

At the point at which recording is stopped, all subsequent events are erased so that the fader remains at
that position right through to the end of the Automix.

Existing data
Return time

ON

Fader edit

Punch in

Time
Stop recording

Fader edit

Time
Punch in

Stop recording

If the Fader Edit mode is set to Relative, and the Edit Out mode is set to either Takeover
or Off, the fader will remain at a position relative to its position when recording was
stopped right through to the end of the Automix.

G EDIT OUT
This parameter sets the Edit Out mode: TAKEOVER, RETURN, or OFF (both buttons
are off). This mode determines how rerecorded fader moves align with existing fader
data at the punch out point.
Fader data includes Input Channel levels, Bus Out master levels, Aux Send master levels,
the Stereo Out level, and Remote layer faders.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

193

Automix Main Page

The following table shows how faders move in each Edit Out mode. You can set the
Return Time (time required by Input and Output Channel faders to return to the previously-recorded position) on the Fader1 or 2 page (see page 196).
Off

Return

At the punch out point, the fader
remains at the same position until the
next fader event in the existing data
occurs.

Takeover

At the punch out point, the fader
returns to the position specified by the
existing fader data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter on the
Fader1 or 2 page.

At the punch out point, recording continues until the fader position intersects
the existing fader data. If you are still
touching the fader knob at the actual
punch out point, the fader is disabled
until you release it.

Existing data

Existing data

Existing data
Return time

Fader edit

Time
Punch in

Fader edit

Fader edit

Time
Punch out
Actual punch out

Time

Punch out

Punch in

Punch out

Punch in

In this example, punch out was performed by pressing the [AUTO] button,
and the fader was moved manually
between the specified punch out point
and actual punch out point.

H FADER EDIT
This parameter determines how fader moves are rerecorded (it has no effect during the
first recording pass). You can select ABSOLUTE or RELATIVE.
In Absolute mode, fader moves are rerecorded as absolute values (existing fader data is
erased). In Relative mode, fader moves are rerecorded relative to the existing fader data.
Fader data includes Input Channel level, Bus Out master levels, Aux Out master levels,
the Stereo Out level, Remote layer faders.
The following table explains Fader Edit mode operation (TO END: off. Edit Out: off).
Absolute

Relative

Fader edits are recorded as absolute values and
existing fader data between the punch in and out
points is erased.

Fader edits are rerecorded relative to the existing
fader data.

Existing data

Existing data

16

Fader edit
Fader edit

Punch out

Time
Punch in

Punch out

I TOUCH SENSE section
This section enables or disables the Touch Sense function for punching in and out fader
events. The IN button enables the Touch Sense function for punch in. The OUT button
enables the Touch Sense function for punch out. You can set these buttons individually.
If the Fader Touch Sense parameter is set to “Disabled,” on the Setup | Prefer2 page, this
section is grayed out.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Automix

Time
Punch in

194

Chapter 16—Automix

J OVERWRITE section
This section enables you to select parameters to be recorded on the first pass, and rerecorded (i.e., overwritten) on subsequent passes. You can select or deselect these parameters while recording is in progress (see page 184).

K AUTOMIX ENABLED/DISABLED
This parameter enables or disables the Automix. When the parameter is set to DISABLE,
you cannot record or play back an Automix.

L NEW
Move the cursor to the NEW button, then press [ENTER] to create a new Automix.
When you create a new Automix, a Scene recall event to recall the current Scene (i.e., the
last Scene recalled) is automatically inserted at the start of the Automix. (You can edit
this event so that you will be able to recall another Scene.)

M UNDO
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to undo various Automix operations (Undo function). When you record new events in an Automix, or when you perform an offline edit, the current Automix data is copied to the Undo buffer. You can
retrieve the data from the buffer by moving the cursor to the UNDO button and pressing [ENTER] while Automix is stopped. You can also cancel the Undo operation (Redo
function).
Tip:
• The Undo buffer is cleared when you turn off the power to the DM1000. If you want to save
the contents of the Undo buffer, perform the undo operation, then store the Automix.
• However, you cannot undo the operations performed on the Event Edit page.

N AUTO REC
Move the cursor to the AUTO REC button, then press [ENTER] to place the DM1000
in Automix record ready mode. The button becomes highlighted. In this state, when the
DM1000 receives the appropriate timecode, it automatically starts Automix recording.
Record ready mode is not canceled, even if Automix recording is stopped, unless you
move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER].

O REC
Move the cursor to the REC button, then press [ENTER] to place the DM1000 in Automix record ready mode. The button starts to flash. In this state, when the DM1000
receives the appropriate timecode, it automatically starts Automix recording.
Unlike the AUTO REC button, however, record ready mode is canceled when recording
is stopped.
If you move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER] during Automix playback, the
DM1000 engages record ready mode.

P PLAY
If the timecode source is set to internal, move the cursor to the PLAY button and press
[ENTER]. Automix recording or playback starts.
If you selected an external timecode source, as soon as the DM1000 receives the external
timecode, recording or playback starts, and this button turns on automatically. After you
stop Automix by pressing the STOP button or ABORT button, you can restart recording
or playback by pressing this button as long as the DM1000 is still receiving timecode.

Q STOP
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to stop Automix recording or playback. (If you stop recording, a confirmation window appears asking whether you wish
to update the Automix data.) The button remains highlighted while Automix is stopped.

R ABORT
This button aborts the current recording without updating the existing Automix data.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Automix Memory Page

195

Automix Memory Page
The Automix Memory page enables you to store and recall Automixes. The lower half of this
page is identical to the Automix Main page.
To locate the Automix | Memory page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button
repeatedly until the page appears.

5

6

7
8
9

1
2
3
4
K

J

A TITLE EDIT
This button enables you to edit the title of the Automix memory selected in the center
column.

B RECALL
This button recalls the Automix memory selected in the center column.

C STORE
This button enables you to store the current Automix to the memory selected in the center column.

D CLEAR
This button clears the Automix memory selected in the center column.

E TITLE
This parameter displays the title of the current Automix.

F MEMORY TITLE column

G CURRENT
This parameter displays the size of the current Automix.

H UNDO
This parameter displays the size of the current Undo buffer.

I FREE
This parameter displays the amount of free memory available for storing the current
Automix.

J SIZE
This parameter displays the size of the Automix memory selected in the center column.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

16
Automix

This column enables you to select an Automix memory to be recalled or stored. The column lists the titles of Automix memories. An empty Automix memory has a title of “No
Data!”

196

Chapter 16—Automix

K PROTECT ON/OFF
To protect the contents of the Automix memory selected in the MEMORY TITLE column, move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER]. A padlock icon ( ) appears
next to the titles of Automix memories that are write-protected. You cannot store, clear,
or edit the title of write-protected Automix memories.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library
Operation” on page 165.

Fader1 &2 pages
The Fader1 & 2 pages enable you to edit fader positions while viewing the current fader
position and the fader data recorded in the Automix.
To locate the Fader1 or 2 page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly
until the page appears.
During Automix playback, fader positions are displayed graphically as black bars on the
Automix | Fader1 or 2 page. The Fader1 page displays fader positions for Input Channel 1
through 48 and Stereo out. The Fader2 page displays fader positions for Bus Outs 1–8 and
Aux Outs 1–8.

1

2

3

4

5

6

When the Fader mode is set to Fader, each page displays Input and Output Channel levels.
When the Fader mode is set to Aux, each page displays Aux Send levels.
During rerecording, the Fader1 and 2 pages display the existing
fader data in bar graphs. While fader events are being recorded,
arrows appear next to each fader bar. A downward arrow indicates that the current fader position is higher than that specified
by the existing fader data. An upward arrow indicates that the
current fader position is lower than that specified by the existing
fader data.

A ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE
These buttons are the same as those on the Main page (see page 191).

B MOTOR
This button turns the fader motors on or off for Automix playback. The button is highlighted when the motors are on.
Tip: You cannot turn off the motors during Automix recording. Even if this button is turned
off, the motors are automatically turned on when recording starts.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Fader1 &2 pages

197

C Edit Safe buttons
The numbered buttons below each fader bar are Edit Safe buttons, which prohibit Automix recording on certain channels. A channel is set to safe and excluded from Automix
recording when its button is highlighted. However, you can play existing events and use
faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons on safe channels. This is useful for rehearsing mix
moves.
Tip:
• You can make all channels safe simultaneously by selecting a non-highlighted button and
double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears.
• You can cancel all safe channels simultaneously by selecting a highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears.

D TOUCH SENSE
This function is the same as that on the Automix Main page.

E UPDATE
This button is the same as that on the Automix Main page.

F EDIT OUT
The TAKEOVER and RETURN buttons are the same as those on the Automix | Main
page. The EDIT OUT section on this page also contains the TIME parameter. This
parameter determines the time required for faders to return to the levels specified by the
existing Automix data when the RETURN button is turned on.

16
Automix

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

198

Chapter 16—Automix

Editing Events Offline
You can edit recorded Automix events offline on the Event Job and Event Edit pages. You
can perform offline editing only while the Automix function is stopped.

Event Job Page
On the Event Job page, you can erase, copy, move/merge, or trim specified events on specified channels between specified in and out points.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix
| Event Job page appears.

1
3

2

A Channel buttons
These button enable you to select the channels for which you want to edit Automix data.

B TIME SETTING section
This section enables you to specify the region of Automix data to be edited (IN and OUT
points).

C JOB TYPE section
This section enables you to select the job type. If you select “MEM” in the SOURCE section, the MERGE button replaces the MOVE button.
2 Use the Channel buttons to select channels for which you want to edit Automix data.
You can select multiple Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Outs, and the Stereo Out.
Tip:
• You can select all Channel buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a non-highlighted
button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears.
• You can deselect all selected Channel buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears.
3 Specify the region of Automix data you want to edit by setting the IN and
OUT parameters in the TIME SETTING section.
You can also capture the IN and OUT points on-the-fly by moving the cursor to the IN or
OUT button and pressing the [ENTER] button. To modify the captured positions, move the
cursor to the value you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.”
Up to eight IN and OUT timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture
memories. The currently-selected Capture memory number (1–8) appears to the left of the
IN and OUT buttons. Move the cursor to the Capture memory number, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired Capture memory.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Editing Events Offline

199

4 Move the cursor to the desired Job button in the Job Type section, then press
[ENTER].
The following Jobs are available. Certain Jobs feature an extra parameter below the TIME
SETTING section.
■ ERASE
This button erases the specified range of Automix data.
■ COPY
This button copies the specified range of Automix data to another position. When you select
this button, the SOURCE and COPY TO sections appear below the TIME SETTING section.

• SOURCE section
This section enables you to select the copy source Automix.
• COPY TO section
- TIME
This parameter specifies the start point to which the specified data is to be copied. (The
number in parentheses on the right indicates the end point of the destination.) You can
also capture the start point on-the-fly by moving the cursor to the TO button and pressing the [ENTER] button to capture the current position. To modify the captured positions, move the cursor to the value you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel
or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.”
- CH
This parameter specifies the channel to which you want to copy the specified data. If
multiple channels are selected as the copy source, use the CH parameter box to specify
the number of the top channel in the destination. (The number in parentheses on the
right indicates the number of the last channel in the destination.)
For example, if eight channels are selected as the copy source and you specify “17” in the
CH parameter box, the copy destination will be Channels 17 through 24.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

16
Automix

■ MOVE/MERGE
The function of this button changes depending on the SOURCE section setting.
If you select CURRENT (current Automix) in the SOURCE section, this button becomes
the MOVE button, which moves the specified range of Automix data to another position.
If you select MEM (Automix memories 1–16) in the SOURCE section, this button becomes
the MERGE button, which merges the specified range of Automix data with other Automix
data.
When you select this Job, the SOURCE section and MOVE TO (MERGE TO) section
appear below the TIME SETTING section.

200

Chapter 16—Automix

• SOURCE section
These parameters select the source Automix to be moved or merged. If you select CURRENT (the current Automix), you can use the MOVE button. If you select MEM (Automix
memory), you can use the MERGE button. If you select MEM, specify the Automix memory number in the small parameter box on the right.
• MOVE TO (MERGE TO) section
- TIME
This parameter specifies the start point to which the specified data is to be moved or
merged. (The number in parentheses on the right indicates the end point of the destination.) You can also capture the start point on-the-fly by moving the cursor to the TO
button, then pressing the [ENTER] button to capture the current position. To modify
the captured positions, move the cursor to the value you wish to change, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset
the currently-selected digit to “00.”
- CH
This parameter specifies the channel to which the specified data is to be moved or
merged. If multiple channels are selected as the move/merge source, use the CH parameter box to specify the number of the top channel in the destination. (The number in
parentheses on the right indicates the number of the last channel in the destination.)
For example, if eight channels are selected as the move/merge source and you specify
“17” in the CH parameter box, the move/merge destination will be Channels 17 through
24.
■ TRIM
This button enables you to adjust the level of fader
events in the specified range of Automix data. When
you select this Job, the TRIM EDIT section appears
below the TIME SETTING section.
- IN
This parameter determines the time required for the fader to reach the level specified by
the Trim amount parameter.
- OUT
This parameter determines the time required for the fader to return to the previous
level.
- Trim amount
This parameter specifies the trim amount in the range of –96 dB to +96 dB.
Existing data

Trim: –x dB

Trimmed data

TRIM IN
IN

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

TRIM OUT
OUT

Time

Editing Events Offline

201

5 After setting all necessary parameters, move the cursor to the
button
on the right side of the page, then press [ENTER].
The PARAMETERS window appears, which enables you to select parameters to be edited,
and to perform the selected Job.

A parameter is selected when its button is highlighted. (You can specify multiple parameters.) These buttons correspond to the following parameters:
Button

Events

FADER

Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Out masters,
and the Stereo Out)

ON

Channel Mute events

PAN

Input Channel pan events

SURR

Input Channel surround pan, LFE level, and DIV parameter events

EQ

Channel EQ events
CH

Channel library recall events

GATE

Gate library recall events

COMP

Comp library recall events

EQ

EQ library recall events

SCENE

Scene recall events

FX LIB

1–4

Effects library recall events of each internal effects processor

AUX

1–8

Level events of each Aux Send

ON

1–8

Mute events of each Aux Send

REMOTE

1–2

User Defined Remote Layer events

EFFECT

1–4

Parameter events for each internal effects processor

LIB

16

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Automix

Tip:
• You can select all parameter buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a non-highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears.
• You can deselect all selected parameter buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a
highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window
appears.

202

Chapter 16—Automix

6 To execute the selected Job, move the cursor to the EXECUTE button, then
press [ENTER].
A confirmation window appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]
to execute the Job.
Tip:
• Move the cursor to the NO button, then press [ENTER] to abort the Job.
• To return to the previous page without executing the Job, move the cursor to the
button, then press [ENTER].

Event Edit Page
The Event Edit page enables you to edit, duplicate, delete events and insert new events.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix
| Event Edit page appears.

1

53

2

4

6
8
9
J
7 K
A Event list
This list contains the Automix event time, channels, and parameter values. The currently-selected event in the list is indicated by a triangular icon (®). Use the Up and
Down cursor buttons to select an event, and use the Left and Right cursor buttons to
select a parameter value of the selected event.

B SYNC
This button synchronizes the event list to the current timecode position. Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to select events closest to the current timecode
position.

C DUPLICATE
This button duplicates the event selected in the list.

D DELETE
This button deletes the event selected in the list.

E SELECTED CH
When this option is on, only events of the channels currently selected by the channel
[SEL] buttons are displayed in the list.

F Event select buttons
These buttons select the type of events to be displayed in the event list.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Editing Events Offline

203

G INSERT
This button inserts a new event in the position selected in the event list.

H LOCATE
This button locates events at (or closest to) the timecode position indicated on the Capture memory display.

I Capture memory display
This display counter indicates the captured timecode position.

J CAPTURE
This button captures the current timecode position. Up to eight timecode values can be
captured and stored in the eight Capture memories.

K Capture memory
This box indicates the number of the currently-selected Capture memory (1–8).
2 Use the Event select buttons to select the type of events to be displayed in
the event list.
The format of the list varies depending on the selected event. The following table shows the
events that correspond to the Event select buttons, and the list format:
Button

Events Listed

List Format

SCENE/LIB

Library and Scene recall events

TIME CODE, CH, SCENE/LIB

FADER

Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus
Out masters, Aux Out masters, and the Stereo
Out)

TIME CODE, CH, dB, SEC

ON

Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)

TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF

PAN

Pan

TIME CODE, CH, L-C-R

SURR-PAN

Surround Pan

TIME CODE, CH, SURR

SURR-LFE

Surround LFE

TIME CODE, CH, dB

SURR-DIV

Surround DIV

TIME CODE, CH, DIV

SURR-RDIV

Surround RDIV

TIME CODE, CH, RDIV

EQ-ON

EQ On/Off

TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF

EQ-FREQ

EQ Frequency

TIME CODE, CH, BAND/Hz

EQ-Q

EQ Q

TIME CODE, CH, BAND/Q

EQ-GAIN

EQ Gain

TIME CODE, CH, BAND/dB

AUX

Aux Send 1–8 levels

TIME CODE, CH, AUX, dB

AUX ON

Aux Send 1–8 mutes

TIME CODE, CH, AUX, ON/OFF

Note: If the data size of the selected event exceeds 2 MB, the message “Automix Work Memory
Full!” appears, and not all events may be displayed. In this case, check the SELECTED CH
check box to display only events of the selected channel.
3 To duplicate or delete events, select an event by moving the triangular icon
®) to the event in the list, then select the DUPLICATE or DELETE button.
(®
4 To modify the event time, channel or parameter value, move the cursor to
a parameter value you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or
press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

16
Automix

Tip: When the SELECTED CH check box is on, only events of the currently-selected channel
are displayed.

204

Chapter 16—Automix

5 To locate an event, play the Automix and move the cursor to the CAPTURE
button, then press [ENTER].
The current position is captured and indicated in the Capture memory display.
Tip:
• To modify the captured position, move the cursor to the Capture memory display, then rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset
the currently-selected digit to “00.”
• Up to eight timecode values can be captured in the Capture memories. To recall another
Capture memory, move the cursor to the parameter box located to the left of the CAPTURE
button, then select the desired Capture memory number (1–8).
6 To recall the event at the captured position, move the cursor to the LOCATE
button, then press [ENTER].
The event at (or closest to) the captured position is displayed and selected in the event list.
7 To insert a new event, use the Event select buttons to select the type of event
that you want to insert. Use the Capture memory display to specify the point
at which you want to insert the new event. Move the cursor to the INSERT
button, then press [ENTER].
The new event is inserted at the position currently displayed in the Capture memory display.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

205

17 Remote Control
This chapter describes the Remote function, which enables you to control external equipment directly from the DM1000 top panel.

About Remote Function
The DM1000’s Remote function enables you to control external DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) equipment, MIDI devices, recorders, etc.
There are three types of Remote functions (Remote 1 &2, and Machine Control):

■ REMOTE 1 (Remote Layer 1)
■ REMOTE 2 (Remote Layer 2)
To use these Remote functions, you must connect the DM1000 to a target device via USB
and operate the faders, Encoders and [ON] buttons on the top panel to control the external
device remotely.
You can specify a target device and parameter values on the Remote | Remote1 and Remote
2 pages. These layers are enabled when you turn on the LAYER [REMOTE 1] and
[REMOTE 2] buttons respectively. During Remote operation, the controls on the top panel
enable you to control the external device. (You cannot adjust the DM1000’s parameters
unless you select a different layer.)
You can assign functions of a target device to the controls on the top panel of the DM1000
by using Remote Layers 1 and 2. The following targets are available for remote control:
• ProTools ........................You can remotely control Digidesign Pro Tools.
• Nuendo..........................You can remotely control Steinberg Nuendo.
• General DAW................You can remotely control DAW software that supports the protocol used by Pro Tools.
• User Defined.................You can also assign MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons,
or Encoders to remotely control a connected MIDI device, such
as a synthesizer.
• User Assignable Layer.......You can combine the DM1000 channels to create a custom
layer. (See page 255 for more information on this function.)
Tip: ProTools, Nuendo, and General DAW targets can be assigned to only one layer at a time.
If you have already assigned a ProTools, Nuendo, or General DAW target to Remote Layer 1
or 2, you cannot assign other targets to the other Remote Layer.

■ Machine Control

Tip: To control external devices from the DM1000, you can also use the User Defined buttons
or the CONTROL connector as a GPI (General Purpose Interface). Refer to Chapter 19 “Other
Functions” on page 249 for more information.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

17
Remote Control

From the Remote | Machine Control page, you can control an external recording machine
that is connected to the DM1000 MIDI port, REMOTE connector, USB port, or optional
MY8-mLAN card. There are two types of commands used for machine control.
• MMC..............................MMC stands for MIDI Machine Control. MMC commands
can be transferred via the MIDI ports, USB port, and Slot 1 if
an MY8-mLAN card is installed.
• P2....................................P2 protocol is used by the Tascam DA-98HR and other professional video machines. This command can be transferred via
the REMOTE connector.

206

Chapter 17—Remote Control

Pro Tools Remote Layer
The DM1000 features Remote Layer 1 and 2 targets especially designed for controlling Pro
Tools.

Connections and Configuring Pro Tools
Follow the steps below to connect the DM1000 to your computer via the USB port so that
you can control Pro Tools from the DM1000.
Note: You cannot control Pro Tools via MIDI connections. Be sure to connect your computer
via the USB or an optional MY8-mLAN card installed in one of the DM1000 slots.

■ Configuring Windows Computers
1 Connect the DM1000 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your PC using a
USB cable.

TO HOST USB port

2

1
+48V

OFF

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

6

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

USB

7

+48V

ON

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

9

+48V

ON

OFF

10

+48V

ON

OFF

11

+48V

ON

OFF

12

+48V

ON

OFF

13

+48V

ON

OFF

14

+48V

ON

OFF

OFF

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

16

15

+48V

ON

1
20dB

+48V

ON

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

PAD

-60

-16

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

0

-60

-16

GAIN

0

10

TALKBACK LEVEL

PEAK
SIGNAL

10

PHONES

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING

DISPLAY ACCESS

MIDI

DIO

SETUP

REMOTE

UTILITY

METER

OVER
0

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

-4

-6

-6

VIEW

EFFECT

OUTPUT
PATCH

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

AUX5

AUX6

AUX7

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

-10

-10

-12

-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

3

L

R

HIGH

4

5

SCENE

AUXSELECT
DISPLAY

AUX1

2

SOLO

CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

SLOT

BUS

Q

-8

-8

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

1

MONITOR

EQUALIZER

DISPLAY

AUTOMIX

HIGH MID

6

FREQUENCY

7

8

STEREO

DIRECT

LOW MID

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

GAIN

INC

DEC

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

DISPLAY
FADER

STORE

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

ENTER

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Computer

AUTO

SEL

ON

16

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

5
0

10

5

15

10

15

10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20

20

15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30

30

20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40

40

50 30
60 40
70
50

30
40
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

1
17

50 30
60 40
70
50

2
33

AUX 1

18

50 30
60 40
70
50

3
34

AUX 2

19

50 30
60 40
70
50

4
35

AUX 3

20

50 30
60 40
70
50

5
36

AUX 4

21

50 30
60 40
70
50

6
37

AUX 5

22

50 30
60 40
70
50

7
38

AUX 6

23

50 30
60 40
70
50

8
39

AUX 7

24

50 30
60 40
70
50

9
40

AUX 8

25

10
41

BUS 1

26

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

11
42

BUS 2

27

50 30
60 40
70
50

12
43

BUS 3

28

50 30
60 40
70
50

13
44

BUS 4

29

50 30
60 40
70
50

14
45

BUS 5

30

31

50

50

60
70

60
70

15
46

BUS 6

16
47

BUS 7

32

48

BUS 8

STEREO

2 Install the necessary USB drivers included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.
See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the drivers.

■ Configuring Macintosh Computers
1 Connect the DM1000 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your Mac using
a USB cable.
2 Install the required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.
See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the driver.
3 Install OMS.
The DM1000 communicates with Pro Tools via OMS (Open Music System) software.
If you have not installed OMS on your Mac, use the OMS installer included on the DM1000
CD-ROM to install OMS.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pro Tools Remote Layer

207

4 Launch Pro Tools.
5 Choose OMS Studio Setup from the Setups menu, and configure OMS as necessary.
Refer to the documentation that came with
OMS for more information on configuring
the OMS Studio Setup menu. OMS recognizes the DM1000 as a USB MIDI interface
that features eight ports.

6 Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu to open the Peripherals window.
7 Double-click the MIDI Controllers tab.
8 Refer to the screen below to set the Type, Receive From, Send To, and #Ch’s
parameters.
The DM1000 can emulate up to two MIDI controllers.

Tip: To control Pro Tools remotely, you need one port for every eight audio channels.
9 When you finish setting the parameters, close the window.

17
Remote Control

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

208

Chapter 17—Remote Control

Configuring the DM1000
Follow the steps below to set up the DM1000 so that you can remotely control Pro Tools
from the DM1000 Remote Layer 1.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.

1

2 Move the cursor to the first DAW parameter box (1) in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select USB as the port.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the setting.
4 Move the cursor to the adjacent parameter
box (on the right), then rotate the Parameter wheel to specify the port ID.

Note: If you select an incorrect port, you will be unable to use the Remote function. Be sure
to match the port ID with that specified in the Peripherals window in Pro Tools.
5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F1] button.
The Remote | Remote 1 page appears.

2

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pro Tools Remote Layer

209

6 Select ProTools (as the target device) for the Target parameter (2) located
in the upper-right corner of the page.
By default, Remote Layer 1 target is set to ProTools. If another target has been selected,
rotate the Parameter wheel to select ProTools.
7 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] button.
Remote Layer 1 is now available for control, enabling you to remotely control Pro Tools.

Note: When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the DM1000’s top panel faders, Encoders
and other channel buttons control Pro Tools. To control the DM1000, you need to select an
Input Channel layer or the Master layer.
Tip:
• If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, Pro Tools channel levels are displayed
on the MB1000 meters.
• Pressing the [REMOTE 2] button and setting the TARGET parameter to ProTools enables
you to control Pro Tools from the Remote Layer 2. In this case, the Remote Layer 1 Target
parameter is automatically set to No Assign.

17
Remote Control

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

210

Chapter 17—Remote Control

Display
While the Pro Tools layer is selected, you can use the [F2]–[F4] buttons as well as the left
and right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll buttons to select display modes. You can select the following display modes using these buttons:

■ Insert Display mode ( [F2] button)
Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode. In this mode, you can assign and edit
plug-ins.

1
2

3
4
5

A TARGET
This parameter enables you to select the remote control target device.

B COUNTER

•
•
•
•

This counter indicates the current position. This counter works in unison with the timecode counter on Pro Tools. The display format of the counter is specified in Pro Tools.
The following three check boxes in the COUNTER section indicate the currently-selected format.
TIME CODE:................ Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Time Code.”
FEET: ............................. Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Feet:Frames.”
BEATS:........................... Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Bars:Beats.”
If no check boxes are selected:...........Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Minutes:Seconds” or “Samples.”

C SELECT ASSIGN
This parameter indicates the current function of the Encoders. For example, Pan, PanR,
SndA, SndB, SndC, SndD, or SndE (see page 212).

D P.WHEEL MODE
This parameter indicates the function currently assigned to the Parameter wheel (see
page 214).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pro Tools Remote Layer

211

E INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section
This section enables you to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools channels and adjust plug-in
settings. Use the left and right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll buttons to change the parameters
displayed in this section.

• ASSIGN .........................Turn on this button to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools channels.
(If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard
effects processors.)
• COMPARE ....................You can compare your edits with the original settings by turning on this button. This button works in unison with the Compare button in the Pro Tools Inserts and Sends windows.
• BYPASS..........................Turning on this button bypasses the plug-ins (see page 221).
• INSERT/PARAM..........Switching this button to INSERT enables you to assign plug-ins
using four rotary controls on the page. Switching this button to
PARAM enables you to adjust the plug-in parameters using the
four rotary controls (see page 220).
• Information box ..........This box displays plug-in parameter names, values, alarm messages from Pro Tools, etc.
• Rotary controls 1–4.....These controls enable you to select plug-ins or adjust the
selected plug-in parameters.

■ Channel Display mode ( [F3] button)
Press the [F3] button to select this display mode, in which the parameter controls for tracks
1–16 are displayed.

17
Remote Control

• Parameter controls 1–16 ................... Channel parameter controls, such as channel
1–16 panpots, Send A–E send levels, etc. are displayed.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

212

Chapter 17—Remote Control

■ Meter Display mode ( [F4] button)
Press the [F4] button to select this display mode, in which the level meters for tracks 1–16
are displayed.

• Channels 1–16.............. The channel 1–16 levels or Send levels are displayed.

Control Surface Operation
When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the DM1000 controls on the top panel engage
the following functions:

■ Channel Strip section
• Encoders
Encoders adjust the panpots or Aux Send levels. Use the ENCODER MODE [PAN] or
[AUX] button to select a parameter to edit.
• [SEL] buttons
These buttons select Pro Tools channels, inserts, and Automation mode. By default, these
buttons select channels.
• [SOLO] buttons
These buttons solo Pro Tools channels. The button indicators for the soloed channels light
up.
• [ON] buttons
These buttons mute Pro Tools channels.
• Faders
The faders set Pro Tools channel levels, including the audio tracks, MIDI tracks, master
fader, Aux Ins, etc. If 16 or fewer channels are displayed in Pro Tools, faders are assigned
starting from the left-most channel.

■ STEREO section
• [AUTO] button
This button switches Pro Tools Automation mode.

■ AUX SELECT Section
• [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons
These buttons select Sends A–E so that you can adjust the corresponding Pro Tools channel
send level.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pro Tools Remote Layer

213

• [AUX 6] button
Press and hold down this button and press the desired [SEL] button to reset the corresponding channel fader level.
Press and hold down this button and press the desired Encoder push-switch to reset the corresponding channel panpot to center. While you are holding down the [AUX 6] button, the
SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates “DFLT.”
• [AUX 8] button
Use this button along with the desired [SEL] button to assign a plug-in to the corresponding
Pro Tools channel.

■ ENCODER MODE section
• [PAN] button
When you turn on this button, the Encoders function as Pro Tools channel panpots.
• [AUX] button
When you turn on this button, the Encoders function as Send A–E level controls. AUX Send
destination is selected in the AUX SELECT section. When you press this button, Send A is
selected as the destination automatically.
If the Encoders are currently set to control the Send A–E levels, the button indicator lights
up.

■ FADER MODE section
• [FADER/AUX] button
This button selects Flip mode (see page 218) for faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons.

■ DISPLAY ACCESS section
• [AUTOMIX] button
To display channel Automation mode, press this button while a Channel Display mode or
Meter Display mode page is selected.
• [PAIR/GROUP] button
Press this button while a Channel Display mode or Meter Display mode page is selected to
display a Group ID to which each channel belongs.
• [EFFECT] button
Press this button to display or hide the Inserts window in Pro Tools.

17

■ Display section

• [F1] button
Press this button to turn off the Peak Hold indicator on Meter Display mode pages.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

• Tab Scroll buttons
These buttons switch the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT parameter settings on Insert Display
mode pages.

214

Chapter 17—Remote Control

■ Data Entry section
• [ENTER] button
This button switches the on/off status of the buttons on the display.
• Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons
These buttons move the cursor on the display.
• [INC] & [DEC] buttons
The [INC] button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard. The [DEC]
button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard.
• Parameter wheel
The Parameter wheel enables you to adjust the currently-selected parameter, or execute the
shuttle and scrub operation. By default, it adjusts the value of the currently-selected parameter (The P.WHEEL MODE parameter indicates “Prm.”).

■ USER DEFINED KEYS section
• [1]–[12] buttons
You can assign one of 164 parameters to each of these buttons. In particular, if you assign
any of 53 Remote Control parameters to these buttons, you can operate the transport section and select various Pro Tools modes from the DM1000 top panel. See page 257 for more
information on assigning the parameters to the buttons.
Parameter

Function

DAW REC

Places Pro Tools in Record Enabled mode. The button indicator flashes while
the transport section is stopped. The indicator lights up when recording starts.

DAW PLAY

Starts playback from the current cursor position.

DAW STOP

Stops playback and recording.

DAW FF

Fast forwards the cursor position.

DAW REW

Fast rewinds the cursor position.

DAW SHUTTLE

Switches Wheel mode to Shuttle.

DAW SCRUB

Switches Wheel mode to Scrub (Jog).

DAW AUDITION

You can audition the pre-roll, post-roll, in-point area, or out-point area by
holding down the button to which this function is assigned and pressing a
button to which DAW PRE, DAW POST, DAW IN, or DAW OUT is assigned.

DAW PRE

Plays back from the pre-roll point up to the beginning of the selected area.

DAW IN

Plays back from the beginning of the selected area for a duration specified as
the pre-roll.

DAW OUT

Plays back to the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the
post-roll.

DAW POST

Plays back from the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the
post-roll.

DAW RTZ

Moves the playback cursor to the beginning of the session.

DAW END

Moves the playback cursor to the end of the session.

DAW ONLINE

Toggles between on-line and off-line.

DAW LOOP

Toggles between Loop Playback on and off.

DAW QUICKPUNCH

Toggles between QuickPunch on and off.

DAW AUTO FADER
DAW AUTO MUTE
DAW AUTO PAN
DAW AUTO SEND
DAW AUTO PLUGIN
DAW AUTO SENDMUTE

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Correspond to the Automation Overwrite (Auto Enable) functions.

Pro Tools Remote Layer

Parameter

215

Function

DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO TOUCH
DAW AUTO LATCH
DAW AUTO WRITE

Select Automation modes.

DAW AUTO TRIM
DAW AUTO OFF
DAW AUTO SUSPEND

Cancels Automation recording and playback for all channels. When Automation is interrupted, the LED flashes, and channel strip controls maintain the
current settings.

DAW AUTO STATUS

Displays the channel Automation mode (Read, Tch, Ltch, Wrt, or Off). The
mode setting appears at the bottom of each channel on a Channel or Meter
Display page when you press and hold the button to which this function is
assigned.

DAW GROUP STATUS

Displays a Group ID (to which each channel belongs) below each channel
number on a Channel or Meter Display page (in all caps for a main group and
in lowercase letters for a sub-group).

DAW MONI STATUS

Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to view the
current monitoring mode and the channel strip type.

DAW CREATE GROUP

Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to execute
the function specified in the menu of the Pro Tools Group list.

DAW SUSPEND GROUP

Suspends all mix groups temporarily. Press the button again to undo suspension.

DAW WIN TRANSPORT

Shows or hides the Transport window.

DAW WIN INSERT

Shows or hides the Inserts window.

DAW WIN MIX/EDIT

Toggles between the Mix window and Edit window. (Both windows are not
displayed at the same time.)

DAW WIN MEM-LOC

Shows or hides the Memory Locations window.

DAW WIN STATUS

Shows or hides the Status window.

DAW UNDO

Executes the Edit menu’s Undo/Redo command.

DAW SAVE

Executes the Edit menu’s Save command.

DAW EDIT MODE

Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) repeatedly selects
Shuffle, Slip, Spot, or Grid edit mode in this order.

DAW EDIT TOOL

Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) repeatedly selects one
of seven edit tools (Zoomer, Trimmer, Selector, Grabber, Smart Tool, Scrubber,
and Pencil, in this order).

DAW SHIFT/ADD
DAW OPTION/ALL
DAW CTRL/CLUCH
DAW ALT/FINE
DAW BANK +
DAW BANK –
DAW Channel +

Executes the Bank Swap operation. Pressing the button (to which this function
is assigned) switches the entire 16-channel bank.
Executes the Channel Scroll operation. Pressing the buttons (to which these
functions are assigned) enables you to scroll channels horizontally.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

17
Remote Control

DAW Channel –

Functions in the same way as Macintosh keyboard keys (Shift, Option, Control, and Alt). Pressing one of the buttons (to which these functions are
assigned) along with another button enables you to execute various commands.

216

Chapter 17—Remote Control

Parameter

Function

DAW REC/RDY 1
DAW REC/RDY 2
DAW REC/RDY 3
DAW REC/RDY 4
DAW REC/RDY 5
DAW REC/RDY 6
DAW REC/RDY 7
DAW REC/RDY 8
DAW REC/RDY 9

Pressing the buttons (to which these functions are assigned) places the corresponding channel strips in Record Ready mode. At this time, the indicator of
the button you pressed flashes. It lights up when recording starts.

DAW REC/RDY 10
DAW REC/RDY 11
DAW REC/RDY 12
DAW REC/RDY 13
DAW REC/RDY 14
DAW REC/RDY 15
DAW REC/RDY 16

DAW REC/RDY ALL

If no channel strips are in Record Enabled mode, pressing the button (to
which this function is assigned) places all channel strips in Record Enabled
mode. The button indicator flashes if any channel strip in any bank is in
Record Enabled mode. Pressing the button while the button indicator is flashing cancels Record Enabled mode for all channel strips.

Selecting Channels
To select a single Pro Tools channel, press the [SEL] button that corresponds to the desired
channel.
To select multiple Pro Tools channels simultaneously, while holding down one [SEL] button, press the [SEL] buttons of the other channels you wish to add. Press the [SEL] buttons
again to cancel the selection.

Setting Channel Levels
1 Make sure that the FADER MODE [FADER] indicator is lit steadily.
If the FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX] indicators are flashing alternately, press the
[FADER/AUX] button to turn on the [FADER] indicator.
2 Operate the faders to set channel levels.
Press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press the desired [SEL] button to reset the
corresponding channel fader level.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pro Tools Remote Layer

217

Muting Channels
To mute Pro Tools channels, press the [ON] buttons. The [ON] button indicators of muted
channels turn off. Grouped channels are muted together.
Press the [ON] buttons again to unmute channels. The [ON] button indicators of unmuted
channels light up.
There are two mute modes in Pro Tools: Implicit mute and Explicit mute. You can check the
mute mode by viewing the [ON] button indicators.
• Implicit mute................This is a forced mute mode in which the channels are muted
because other channels are soloed. In this mode, the [ON] button indicators flash.
• Explicit mute ................In this mode, the channels are muted or turned off manually.
In this mode, the [ON] button indicators turn off.

Panning Channels
You can adjust the Pro Tools channel pan settings.
1 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button.
2 Press the [F2] button to select Channel Display mode.
On a Channel Display mode page, parameter controls 1–16 indicate the pan settings.
3 For stereo channel pan settings, press the [PAN] button again. The button
indicator flashes.
Pressing the [PAN] button repeatedly toggles between the left and right panpots. When the
left panpot is active, the SELECT ASSIGN parameter of the display indicates “Pan.” When
the right panpot is active, the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates “PanR.”
4 Turn the Encoders to pan the channels.
Press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press the desired Encoder push-switch to reset
the corresponding channel panpot to center.

Soloing Channels
To solo Pro Tools channels, press the [SOLO] buttons of the desired channels. Grouped
channels are soloed together, and other channels are muted.
Press the [SOLO] buttons again to unsolo the channels.

Configuring Sends A–E as Pre or Post
You can set Pro Tools channels for the selected Sends (A–E) to pre or post.

2 Press the Encoder push-switches for the desired channels.
Pressing the Encoder push-switches repeatedly toggles between pre and post.
You can set Sends as pre or post by pressing the Encoder push-switches if faders, Encoders,
and [ON] buttons are in Flip mode. See page 218 for more information.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

17
Remote Control

1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends
(A–E).
The selected button indicators light up. Send pre/post status can be viewed in Channel Display or Meter Display mode by pressing and holding down the [AUX1]–[AUX5] buttons.

218

Chapter 17—Remote Control

Setting Send Levels
You can adjust Pro Tools Send (A–E) send levels as follows.
1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends
(A–E).
2 Rotate the Encoders for the desired channels.
You can set Send levels by rotating the Encoders if faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are
in Flip mode. Refer to “Flip Mode” for more information.

Muting Sends A–E
You can mute Sends by pressing the [ON] buttons if faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons
are in Flip mode. Refer to “Flip Mode” for more information.

Panning Sends A–E
You can pan only Sends assigned to stereo destinations by rotating the Encoders if faders,
Encoders, and [ON] buttons are in Flip mode. Refer to the next section for more information.

Flip Mode
In Flip mode, you can use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control send levels,
pre/post positions, and mute settings as shown in the following table.
Control

Normal mode

Flip Mode

Faders

Channel level

Send level

Encoders

Channel pan/send level

Send pan

Encoder push-switches

Encoder mode is Pan: inactive;
Encoder mode is Send level: Send pre/post

Send pre/post

[ON] buttons

Channel mute

Send mute

1 Press the FADER MODE [FADER/AUX] button.
The FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX] indicators flash alternately, and the SELECT
ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates “FLIP.”
2 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends
(A–E).
The button indicator of the selected send lights up.
3 Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the currently-selected
send.
For stereo Aux input channels, you can set the left and right panpots individually. To do this,
press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button repeatedly. When the button indicator is lit
continuously, you can set the left panpot. When the button indicator is flashing, you can set
the right panpot.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pro Tools Remote Layer

219

Assigning Plug-ins to Pro Tools Channels
You can assign plug-ins to five inserts available for Pro Tools channel strips as follows.
1 Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.
2 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 8] button.
The [AUX 8] button indicator flashes. You can now select a channel to which you want to
insert plug-ins.
3 Press the [SEL] button of each desired channel.
4 Make sure that the INSERT button (1) is selected in the INSERT
ASSIGN/EDIT section.
If the PARAM button is selected instead, move the cursor to the button, then press
[ENTER] to select INSERT.

1

2

5 Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button (2), then press [ENTER] to turn on
the button.
You can now select plug-ins. If you press another channel’s [SEL] button after you turn on
the ASSIGN button, the button turns off. If you wish to assign plug-ins to other channels,
turn on the ASSIGN button again.
6 Move the cursor to one of the four parameter controls, then rotate the
Parameter wheel to select a plug-in.
By default, the parameter controls enable you to select plug-ins to be assigned to channel
inserts #1–#4. To assign a plug-in to insert #5, press the Tab Scroll button [ ] to change
the indication in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section.
If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard effects processors.

17

8 In the same way, assign plug-ins to other channels.
9 When you finish assigning plug-ins, press the [AUX 8] button.
The button indicator turns off.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

7 Press [ENTER] to confirm the assignment.
Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to assign more plug-ins to other insert positions in the channel strip.

220

Chapter 17—Remote Control

Editing Plug-ins
You can edit plug-ins inserted in the channel strips as follows:
1 Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.
2 Press the corresponding [SEL] button to select the channel that was assigned
the plug-in you want to edit.
3 In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, move the cursor to the parameter control (Insert 1–4) that was assigned the parameter you want to edit.
Note: To adjust a plug-in assigned to insert #5, press the Tab Scroll button [ ] to change
the parameter indication in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, then select a parameter control.

4 Press [ENTER] to display the parameters.
In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, the PARAM button is automatically selected and the
Information box indicates the selected plug-in parameters.
You can now use parameter controls 1–4 and the [ENTER] button to adjust the parameters.

5 Use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the parameter value you wish to
change.
Most plug-ins feature five or more parameters. To edit the fifth or subsequent parameters,
use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the desired parameters and their values in the INSERT
ASSIGN/EDIT section. The current page number and the plug-in name appear for a
moment immediately after you press the Tab Scroll buttons.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pro Tools Remote Layer

221

6 Move the cursor to a parameter control, then rotate the Parameter wheel
or press the [ENTER] button to adjust the value.
One or two parameters are assigned to a single parameter control. To turn the parameter
setting on or off, press [ENTER]. To modify the parameter variable, rotate the Parameter
wheel.

7 When you finish adjusting the parameters, move the cursor to the PARAM
button, then press [ENTER] to switch it to INSERT.

Bypassing Plug-ins
You can bypass plug-ins assigned to Pro Tools channels.
Before bypassing plug-ins, you must press the corresponding [SEL] button to select a channel to which the plug-ins have been assigned, then press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.
To bypass plug-ins, display the parameters of the plug-in you wish to bypass in the INSERT
ASSIGN/EDIT section, then turn on the BYPASS button.

17
Remote Control

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

222

Chapter 17—Remote Control

Scrub & Shuttle
By assigning the DAW SCRUB parameter to one of the User Defined buttons [1]–[12], you
can scrub Pro Tools tracks back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel. By assigning the
DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons [1]–[12], you can shuttle
back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel.
1 Assign the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User
Defined buttons [1]–[12].
Before assigning parameters to these buttons, you must switch layers to cancel the Remote
function. See page 257 for more information on assigning the parameters to the User
Defined buttons.
2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to enable remote control
of Pro Tools.
3 Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped.
4 Press the User Defined button to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or
DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1.
You can now use the Scrub or Shuttle function.
5 Rotate the Parameter wheel.
Rotate the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub or shuttle forwards. Turn it counterclockwise to scrub or shuttle backwards.
The minimum scrub playback step varies depending on the zoom setting in the Pro Tools
Edit window.
6 To cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function, press the User Defined button to
which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1.
Alternatively, you can cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function by pressing the User Defined
button to which the DAW STOP parameter is assigned. The Scrub or Shuttle function is
automatically cancelled if you commence playback or fast forward.
Note: The Scrub/Shuttle operation might be stopped unexpectedly by Pro Tools. Therefore,
whenever you use the Scrub or Shuttle function, make sure that the P.WHEEL MODE parameter indicates “SCRUB” or “SHUTTLE.” You can check the Scrub/Shuttle function status by
viewing the corresponding User Defined button indicator.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Pro Tools Remote Layer

223

Automation
You can view the Pro Tools Automation mode as follows:
1 Press the [F3] or [F4] button to display the channels for remote control.
2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button.
The channel’s Automation settings are displayed.
While the STEREO [AUTO] button is on, the channel [SEL] button indicators also display
the channel’s Automation mode.

Pro Tools

Display

Auto write

Wrt

Auto touch

Tch

Auto latch

Ltch

Auto read

Read

Auto off

Off

[SEL] Button Indicators
Flashing red (Record Ready)
Red (Recording)
Green
Off

Tip: If you assign the parameter that controls Automation to one of the User Defined buttons,
you can control the Automation settings by holding down the programmed User Defined button and pressing the [SEL] button of the target channel. See page 257 for more information
on assigning parameters to User Defined buttons.

17
Remote Control

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

224

Chapter 17—Remote Control

Nuendo Remote Layer
You can remotely control Nuendo using Remote Layers 1 and 2.

■ Configuring Computers
1 Connect the DM1000 to your computer using a USB cable, and install the
required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.
Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the
driver.
2 Launch Nuendo, select the Device Setup menu, and set up Nuendo so that
the DM1000 can communicate with the software.
Refer to the Nuendo User’s Manual for more information on setting up the software.

■ Configuring the DM1000
1 Refer to page 208 to configure the Setup | MIDI/HOST page.
2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to set the TARGET parameter to Nuendo.
You can now remotely control Nuendo using the selected Remote Layer.

Other DAW Remote Layers
You can remotely control DAW software that supports the Pro Tools protocol.

■ Configuring Computers
1 Connect the DM1000 to your computer using a USB cable, and install the
required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.
Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the
driver.
2 Launch and set up DAW software so that the DM1000 communicates with
the software.
Refer to the DAW software’s user’s manual for more information on setting up the software.

■ Configuring the DM1000
1 Refer to page 208 to configure the Setup | MIDI/HOST page.
2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to set the TARGET parameter to General DAW.
You can now remotely control DAW software using the selected Remote Layer.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

225

MIDI Remote Layer

MIDI Remote Layer
If you select USER DEFINED as the target for Remote Layer 1 or 2, you can remotely control
the parameters of external MIDI devices (such as synthesizers and tone generators) by operating the channel Encoders, [ON] buttons, and faders to output various MIDI messages.
(This is called MIDI Remote function.)
You can store MIDI messages assigned to the channel controls in four banks. When the
DM1000 is shipped from the factory, it includes main MIDI settings in these banks, which
you can quickly recall to use the MIDI Remote function.
If necessary, you can also assign other MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons, or
Encoders to remotely control the parameters of a connected MIDI device.

Using the MIDI Remote Function
This section describes how to use Remote Layer 2 to recall and use the factory-preset MIDI
Remote settings stored in the banks.
By default, the DM1000’s four MIDI Remote banks (Banks 1–4) contain the following
MIDI messages.
Bank

Control Function

Usage

Encoders

[ON] buttons

Faders

1

Panning and setting GM sound levels

Pan

—

Volume

2

Setting GM sound effect send levels/Adjusting volume levels

Effect Send

—

Volume

3

Panning and setting XG sound levels

Pan

—

Volume

4

Adjusting pan, mute, and levels for Cubase
series mixer

Pan

Mute

Volume

1 Connect the DM1000’s MIDI OUT port to the MIDI IN port of the MIDI
device.

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Sur face
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System

SONG SCENE

2

1
+48V

OFF

OFF

1

+48V

ON

OFF

2

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

3

6

+48V

OFF

ON

4

OFF

5

7

+48V

ON

6

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

7

9

+48V

ON

OFF

8

10

+48V

ON

9

OFF

10

11

+48V

ON

OFF

11

12

+48V

ON

OFF

12

13

+48V

ON

OFF

13

14

+48V

ON

OFF

14

OFF

15

16

15

+48V

ON

REC

+48V

ON

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

16

PAD
20dB

20dB

-60

-16

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

0

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

10

TALKBACK LEVEL

0

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

10

PHONES

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING

DISPLAY ACCESS
DISPLAY

AUTOMIX

DIO

SETUP

UTILITY

MIDI

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

OVER
0

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

-4

-6

-6

-8

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

EFFECT

OUTPUT
PATCH

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

AUX5

AUX6

AUX7

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

-10
-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

HIGH

SOLO

CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

SLOT

BUS

Q
3

-8

-10
-12

2

4

5

SCENE

AUXSELECT
DISPLAY

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

1

MONITOR

EQUALIZER

HIGH MID

6

FREQUENCY

7

8

STEREO

DIRECT

LOW MID

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

Synthesizer

GAIN

INC

DEC

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

DISPLAY
FADER

STORE

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

ENTER

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

AUTO

SEL

17

ON

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

20 10

10

5

5
0

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

10

5

15

20 10

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

10

5

15

20 10

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

5
0

10

5

15

20 10

10

15

20

20

30

30

20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40

40

30

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50

50

60
70

60

15

30 15

40

30 15

1
17

30 15

2
33

AUX 1

18

30 15

3
34

AUX 2

19

30 15

4
35

AUX 3

20

30 15

5
36

AUX 4

21

30 15

6
37

AUX 5

22

30 15

7
38

AUX 6

23

30 15

8
39

AUX 7

24

30 15

9
40

AUX 8

25

10
41

BUS 1

26

30 15

30 15

11
42

BUS 2

27

30 15

12
43

BUS 3

28

30 15

13
44

BUS 4

29

30 15

14
45

BUS 5

30

70

15
46

BUS 6

31

Remote Control

50

16
47

BUS 7

32

48

BUS 8

STEREO

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

226

Chapter 17—Remote Control

2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.

1

3 Move the cursor to the REMOTE 2 parameter box (1) in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section, rotate the Parameter wheel to select MIDI, then press
[ENTER].
If the MIDI port is already in use, a confirmation window for changing the assignment
appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
Tip: If the REMOTE 2 parameter box is grayed out, proceed to Steps 4 and 5 to set the TARGET
parameter, then return to Steps 2 and 3.
4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F2] button.
The Remote | Remote 2 page appears.
5 Move the cursor to the TARGET parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel
to select USER DEFINED, then press [ENTER].
The confirmation window for changing the setting appears. Move the cursor to the YES
button, then press [ENTER]. The display changes as follows:

1
4

3
2

5
6
7

A TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE
This button switches the MIDI Remote function between enable and disable.

B INITIALIZE
This button resets the settings stored in the bank selected by the BANK parameter to the
default setting.

C BANK
This parameter enables you to select one of four banks.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

MIDI Remote Layer

227

D ID, SHORT, LONG
These parameters display the channel names. The ID parameter displays the channel ID
(RM01–RM16) for the currently-controlled MIDI device.

E ON section
This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned
to the [ON] buttons for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).
• LATCH/UNLATCH......This button toggles between Latch and Unlatch for [ON] button operation.
• LEARN...........................When you turn on this button, MIDI messages received at the
MIDI IN port are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes.
• DATA parameter boxes ...................... These boxes display the type of MIDI messages
(in hexadecimal or alphabets) assigned to the
[ON] button).

F ENCODER section
This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned
to the Encoders for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).

G FADER section
This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned
to the faders for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).
6 Move the cursor to the desired bank button (BANK parameter buttons 1–4),
then press [ENTER].
7 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 2] button to select Remote Layer 2.
You can now use the MIDI Remote function.
8 Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the MIDI device.

17
Remote Control

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

228

Chapter 17—Remote Control

Assigning MIDI Messages to Channel Controls
You can quickly use the MIDI Remote function if you use the factory presets in the banks.
However, you can also assign the desired MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons, or
Encoders.
This section describes how to assign MIDI messages to the channel controls, using the
example of assigning Hold On/Off messages (Control Change #64; Values 127 & 0) to the
Channel 1 [ON] button.
1 Connect the DM1000’s MIDI IN port to the MIDI OUT port of a MIDI keyboard to which a Hold On/Off controllable foot switch is connected. Enable
the MIDI Remote function on the DM1000.

MIDI OUT

2

1
+48V

OFF

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

MIDI IN

6

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

7

+48V

ON

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

9

+48V

ON

OFF

10

+48V

ON

OFF

11

+48V

ON

OFF

12

+48V

ON

OFF

13

+48V

ON

OFF

14

+48V

ON

OFF

OFF

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

+48V

ON

OFF

MIDI IN

16

15

+48V

ON

1
20dB

MIDI OUT

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

PAD

-60

-16

-60

-16

GAIN
PEAK

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

0

-60

-16

GAIN

0

10

TALKBACK LEVEL

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

10

PHONES

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING

DISPLAY ACCESS

DIO

SETUP

UTILITY

MIDI

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

OVER
0

-2

-4

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

EFFECT

OUTPUT
PATCH

AUX2

AUX5

AUX3

AUX6

AUX4

AUX7

2

3

4

-8
-10

-12

-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

6

FREQUENCY

7

8

STEREO

DIRECT

SOLO

CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

SLOT

BUS

LOW MID

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

GAIN

INC

DEC

GRAB

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

HIGH

HIGH MID

Q

-6

-8
-10

5

SCENE

AUXSELECT

AUX1

1

-4

-6

DISPLAY

MIDI keyboard

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

OVER
0

-2

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

MONITOR

EQUALIZER

DISPLAY

AUTOMIX

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

DISPLAY
FADER

STORE

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

ENTER

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SEL

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ON

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

0

10

5

15

20 10

10

15

50

33
AUX 1

10

5

15

34
AUX 2

0

10

5

15

35
AUX 3

0

10

5

15

36
AUX 4

0

10

5

15

37
AUX 5

10

5

15

38
AUX 6

0

10

5

15

39
AUX 7

0

10

5

15

40
AUX 8

0

10

5

15

41
BUS 1

0

10

5

15

42
BUS 2

0

10

5

15

43
BUS 3

0

10

5

15

44
BUS 4

10

5

15

45
BUS 5

0

10

5

15

46
BUS 6

0

10

5

15

30 15

40 20

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

14
30

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

13
29

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

12
28

0

5

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

11
27

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

10
26

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

9
25

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

8
24

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

7
23

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

6
22

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

5
21

0

5

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

4
20

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

3
19

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

2
18

5

5

20 10

50 30
60 40
70
50

1
17

0

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

30
40

5

5

20 10

30 15

20

5

5

47
BUS 7

15

20

30

30

40

40

50

50

60
70

60

Foot switch

70

15
31

10

20

16
32

48
BUS 8

STEREO

2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then the [F2] button to display
the Remote | Remote 2 page. Rotate the Parameter wheel to set the TARGET
parameter to USER DEFINED.
You can now use the MIDI Remote function. Refer to the previous section for more information on using the MIDI Remote function.
3 Move the cursor to the desired bank button (BANK parameter buttons 1–4),
then press [ENTER].
4 Press the [SEL] buttons for the desired channels.
Currently-assigned MIDI messages appear in the ON, ENCODER, and FADER sections.
Tip: You can also choose the desired channels using the ID, SHORT, and LONG parameters.
5 Move the cursor to the LEARN button in the ON section, then press [ENTER].
MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port of the DM1000 will be assigned to the DATA
parameter boxes in the ON section.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

MIDI Remote Layer

229

6 Press and hold down the MIDI keyboard foot switch.
The MIDI Hold On message is assigned in the DATA parameter box.

MIDI messages are described below:
• 00–7F .............................MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal.
• END ...............................This message indicates the end of MIDI messages. Subsequent
messages assigned in the DATA parameter boxes will be
ignored.
• – ......................................This message indicates that no messages are assigned to the
DATA parameter boxes.
Tip: When you click the LEARN button to assign MIDI messages, the DM1000 automatically
recognizes the end of the messages and assigns END and “–.”
7 While continuing to hold down the foot switch, turn off the LEARN button.
8 Move the cursor to the third parameter box (“7F” in this example), then
rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value to SW.

Tip: If “SW” is not assigned in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section, the current MIDI
messages are output.
Note: Be sure to set variables in the ENCODER and FADER sections. If no variables are
assigned, operation of the Encoders or faders is ignored.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

17
Remote Control

“SW” is a variable that changes depending on the [ON] button’s on/off status. You can use
the following variables in MIDI messages.
• SW..................................This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of
the ON section. When the [ON] buttons are turned on, “7F”
(127 in decimal) is output. When the [ON] buttons are turned
off, “00” (0 in decimal) is output.
• ENC................................This setting is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of
the ENCODER section. When you operate the Encoders, values
in the range of 00 to 7F (0–127 in decimal) are output.
• FAD ................................This setting is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of
the FADER section. When you operate the faders, values in the
range of 00 to 7F (0–127 in decimal) are output.

230

Chapter 17—Remote Control

9 Move the cursor to the LATCH/UNLATCH button, then press [ENTER] to
select LATCH or UNLATCH depending on how you want the [ON] buttons
to function.
• LATCH .......................... Pressing the [ON] buttons repeatedly transmits alternating On
and Off messages.
• UNLATCH.................... Pressing and holding down the [ON] buttons transmits On
messages, and releasing the [ON] buttons transmits Off messages.
Tip: Refer to the diagrams below for information on how the [ON] buttons behave when Latch
or Unlatch is selected.

■ When “SW” is assigned:
- LATCH
MIDI data transmission
(SW=7F)
Off

MIDI data transmission
(SW=00)

Illuminated

Off

- UNLATCH
MIDI data transmission
(SW=7F)
Off

Illuminated

MIDI data transmission
(SW=00)
Off

■ When “SW” is not assigned:
- UNLATCH
MIDI data transmission

Off

Illuminated

Off

Tip: In most situations, select Unlatch if SW is not assigned.
10 To change the channel name, move the cursor to the ID LONG parameter
box, then press [ENTER] to display the Title Edit window.
See page 30 for more information on editing names.
Tip:
• Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER]. A window is displayed
that enables you to reset the parameter settings in the currently-selected bank.
• You can also assign MIDI messages to the parameter boxes manually without using the
LEARN button.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Machine Control Function

231

Machine Control Function
The DM1000 can control the transport functions and select tracks on external recording
machines that support MMC and the P2 protocol by transmitting commands via the MIDI
OUT port and REMOTE connector respectively.
Tip: P2 protocol is used by Tascam DA-98HR and other professional video machines. The
DM1000 is capable of transmitting P2 protocol commands via the REMOTE connector.
Note: Controllable parameters vary depending on the connected devices. Refer to the User’s
Manual for the external device for more information on controllable parameters.
1 Refer to the diagram below for information on connecting the DM1000 to
an external device.

MIDI OUT

2

1
+48V

OFF

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

6

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

MIDI IN

7

+48V

ON

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

9

+48V

ON

OFF

10

+48V

ON

OFF

11

+48V

ON

OFF

12

+48V

ON

OFF

13

+48V

ON

OFF

14

+48V

ON

OFF

OFF

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

16

15

+48V

ON

1
20dB

MIDI OUT

+48V

ON

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

PAD

-60

-16

-60

-16

GAIN

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK
SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

0

-60

-16

GAIN

0

10

TALKBACK LEVEL

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

10

MMC-supported
machine

PHONES

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

MIDI IN

REMOTE connector

2

1
+48V

OFF

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

6

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

7

+48V

ON

RS422

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

9

+48V

ON

OFF

10

+48V

ON

OFF

11

+48V

ON

OFF

12

+48V

ON

OFF

13

+48V

ON

OFF

OFF

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

20dB

-60

-16

-60

-16

GAIN

SIGNAL

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

-60

-16

GAIN

SIGNAL

ROUTING

SETUP

UTILITY

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

EFFECT

OVER
0

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

-4

-6

-6

-8

-8

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

-60

-16

GAIN

OUTPUT
PATCH

SCENE

AUXSELECT
DISPLAY

AUX1

AUX5

AUX2

AUX3

AUX6

AUX7

AUX4

-10

-10

-12

-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

2

3

4

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

5

6

7

8

CLEAR

2TR D2

0

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

10

PEAK

PEAK
SIGNAL

10

P2 protocolsupported machine

PHONES

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

SIGNAL

ROUTING

DISPLAY ACCESS

LOW MID

SLOT

BUS

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

STEREO

AUTOMIX

DIO

SETUP

UTILITY

MIDI

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

OVER
0

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

-4

-6

-6

-8

-8

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

EFFECT

OUTPUT
PATCH

SCENE

AUXSELECT

DIRECT
INC

DEC

DISPLAY

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX6

AUX7

AUX4

-10

-10

-12

-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

GRAB

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

OFF

0

TALKBACK LEVEL

SELECTED CHANNEL

SOLO

2TR D1

GAIN
STEREO

+48V

ON

-60

-16

GAIN

AUX5

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

DISPLAY

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

HIGH

SOLO

CLEAR

HIGH MID

2TR D1

2TR D2

LOW MID

SLOT

BUS

Q

FREQUENCY

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

GAIN
STEREO

DIRECT
INC

DEC

GRAB

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

1

MONITOR

EQUALIZER

DISPLAY

HIGH

HIGH MID

Q

FREQUENCY

-60

-16

GAIN

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

1

MONITOR

EQUALIZER

DISPLAY

DIO

MIDI

OFF

3
20dB

16

15

+48V

ON

2
20dB

SELECTED CHANNEL
DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX

14

+48V

ON

1
20dB

PAD

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

DISPLAY
FADER

STORE

FADER

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

STORE

RECALL

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

PAN

F4

F3

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

ENTER

ENTER

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

AUTO

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

ON

ON

1

ON

2

ON

3

ON

4

ON

5

ON

6

ON

7

ON

8

ON

9

ON

10

ON

11

ON

12

ON

13

ON

14

ON

ON

15

ON

16

ON

1

ON

2

ON

3

ON

4

ON

5

ON

6

ON

7

ON

8

ON

9

ON

10

ON

11

ON

12

ON

13

ON

14

AUTO

SEL

ON

ON

15

16

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

0

10

5

15

20 10

10

15

50

33
AUX 1

10

5

15

34
AUX 2

0

10

5

15

35
AUX 3

0

10

5

15

36
AUX 4

0

10

5

15

37
AUX 5

10

5

15

38
AUX 6

0

10

5

15

39
AUX 7

0

10

5

15

40
AUX 8

0

10

5

15

41
BUS 1

0

10

5

15

42
BUS 2

0

10

5

15

43
BUS 3

0

10

5

15

44
BUS 4

10

5

15

45
BUS 5

0

10

5

15

46
BUS 6

0

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

47
BUS 7

0

15

5

20

20

10

30

30

15

40

40

20

15

15
31

5

10

15

50

50

30

60
70

60

40

70

50

48
BUS 8

0

10

5

15

30 15

STEREO

0

10

5

15

34
AUX 2

0

10

5

15

35
AUX 3

0

10

5

15

36
AUX 4

0

10

5

15

37
AUX 5

10

5

15

38
AUX 6

0

10

5

15

39
AUX 7

0

10

5

15

40
AUX 8

0

10

5

15

41
BUS 1

0

10

5

15

42
BUS 2

0

10

5

15

43
BUS 3

0

10

5

15

44
BUS 4

10

5

15

45
BUS 5

0

10

5

15

46
BUS 6

0

10

5

15

30 15

40 20

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

14
30

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

13
29

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

12
28

0

5

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

11
27

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

10
26

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

9
25

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

8
24

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

7
23

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

6
22

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

5
21

0

5

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

4
20

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

3
19

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

2
18

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

33
AUX 1

5

5

20 10

1
17

5

5

20 10

16
32

5

5
10

10

5

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

14
30

DISPLAY
5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

13
29

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

12
28

0

5

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

11
27

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

10
26

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

9
25

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

8
24

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

7
23

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

6
22

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

5
21

0

5

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

4
20

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

3
19

5

5

20 10

30 15

40 20

2
18

5

5

20 10

50 30
60 40
70
50

1
17

0

30 15

40 20

50 30
60 40
70
50

30
40

5

5

20 10

30 15

20

5

5

47
BUS 7

15

20

20

30

30

40

40

50

50

60
70

60
70

15
31

10

16
32

48
BUS 8

STEREO

2 To control a device that supports the P2 protocol, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[SETUP] button repeatedly to display the Setup | Remote page, then set the
REMOTE FUNCTION parameter (1) to “P2-DFLT.”
This page enables you to select the type of signals transmitted or received via the REMOTE
connector. See page 270 for more information.

1

17
Remote Control

Tip: For the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter, you can also select P2-VTR1, P2-VTR2, or
P2-VTR3 as a P2 protocol format. These three options are provided to support future P2 protocol supporting devices. Currently, they are identical to P2-DFLT.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

232

Chapter 17—Remote Control

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.

1

4 Move the cursor to either the MMC button or P2 button in the MACHINE
CONTROL section (1) to specify the remote control method, then press the
[ENTER] button.
In the MACHINE CONTROL section, you can also select the type of commands used on
the Remote | Machine Control page. The MMC button selects MMC commands, and the
P2 button select the P2 protocol.
5 If the MMC button is turned on, press the cursor [ ] button to move the
cursor to the PORT parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select
the MMC destination.
The following ports and slots are available as the MMC destination.
• MIDI.............................. MIDI port
• USB ................................ USB port
• SLOT1............................ Slot 1 with an MY8-mLAN (mLAN card) installed
• REMOTE....................... REMOTE connector
If USB or SLOT 1 is selected, move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box (on the right),
and select one of eight ports.
6 Move the cursor to the DEVICE ID parameter box, then rotate the Parameter
wheel to set the DM1000 MMC Device ID to the same ID number as the external device.
MMC commands are effective on devices that use the same Device ID. Therefore, the
DM1000’s MMC Device ID needs to match the ID of the devices you wish to control.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Machine Control Function

233

7 To start remote control, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then
press the [F3] button to display the Remote | Machine page.

2

3

1

4

This page contains the following parameters:

A LOCATE/TIME section
•
•
•
•

This section enables you to set the locate points.
LOCATE 1–8 .................These buttons locate the positions (specified by the TIME values) on external machines.
RTZ ................................This Return To Zero button locates the zero timecode position
on external machines.
TIME..............................Locate points are specified in hour/minute/second/frame format.
CAPTURE .....................These buttons capture the current position on external
machines and import the information into the TIME column.

B TRACK ARMING section
This section controls the tracks on external machines.
• 1–24 buttons.................These buttons turn external tracks 1–24 on or off, and set or
cancel their Record Ready mode.
• ALL CLEAR...................Turning on this button switches all buttons (1–24) simultaneously.

C TRANSPORT section

D FRAMES
This parameter selects the timecode frame rate.
8 To control the transport functions, move the cursor to the desired button in
the TRANSPORT section, then press [ENTER].
9 If you desire, move the cursor to the buttons and parameters in the
LOCATE/TIME section and the TRACK ARMING section, then press the
[ENTER] button or rotate the Parameter wheel to control the transport functions on external machines.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

17
Remote Control

•
•
•
•
•

This section enables you to control the transport functions on external machines.
REW...............................This button starts rewind on external machines.
FF....................................This button starts fast forward on external machines.
STOP..............................This button stops external machines.
PLAY ..............................This button starts playback on external machines.
REC ................................This button is used in conjunction with the PLAY button to
start recording on external machines.

234

Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

MIDI

235

18 MIDI
This chapter describes the DM1000’s MIDI-related functions.

MIDI & the DM1000
Using Control Changes, Program Changes, and other MIDI messages enables you to
recall Scenes and edit parameters on the DM1000, and store DM1000 internal data on
external MIDI devices.
The DM1000 supports the following MIDI messages. Each of these MIDI messages can be
individually turned on or off for transmission and reception.
• Program Changes
If you assign the DM1000’s Scenes to Program Change numbers, the DM1000 transmits
Program Changes when it recalls Scenes. Also, the DM1000 will switch Scenes when it
receives Program Changes.
• Control Changes
If you assign the DM1000’s parameters to Control Change numbers, the DM1000 transmits
the assigned Control Changes when the parameter values change. Also, the DM1000
changes certain parameter values when it receives the corresponding Control Changes.
• System Exclusive Messages
The DM1000 transmits System Exclusive Parameter Changes in real-time when the parameter values change. Also, the DM1000 notifies certain parameter values when it receives
assigned Parameter Changes.
• MTC (MIDI Timecode)
The DM1000 uses MTC to synchronize Automix with a recorder or computer-based
sequencer.
• MIDI Clock
The DM1000 uses MIDI Clock to synchronize Automix with a MIDI device that does not
support MTC.
• MMC (MIDI Machine Control)
MMC is used for external machine control.
• MIDI Note On/Off
These messages are used to adjust the Freeze effect and Auto Pan 5.1.
• Bulk Dump Messages
These messages enable you to store the DM1000’s internal data to a sequencer or MIDI filer.
When the DM1000 receives these messages, they overwrite the DM1000 data
The DM1000 features the following interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

MIDI

• MIDI IN & OUT ports
These ports transmit and receive MIDI data to and from standard MIDI devices. Each port
is a single port interface that transmits and receives single-port data (16 channels x 1 ports).

18

236

Chapter 18—MIDI

• USB port
This port is used to connect a computer and transfer MIDI messages. This is a multiport
interface that transmits and receives up to eight-port data (16 channels x 8 ports). If you
connect a computer to the USB port, you must install the appropriate driver software on
the computer. See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing drivers.
Note: If the computer is turned on but the USB MIDI application has not been launched,
DM1000 performance may be slow. In this case, cancel the assignment of the USB port as the
MIDI message transmission port.
• REMOTE connector
This connector normally enables you to remotely control a Yamaha AD824 or a device that
supports Sony P2 protocol, or to make a cascade connection with another DM1000. It also
enables you to transfer MIDI messages.
To transfer MIDI messages, you need to set the parameters in the GENERAL section on the
Setup | MIDI/Host page to “MIDI” (see “Tx PORT”).
Note that a connection between the REMOTE connector and a computer’s COMM port
does not transfer MIDI messages.
• SLOT 1
If an optional “MY8-mLAN” I/O card is installed in Slot #1, MIDI data transfer to and from
an external MIDI device is available via the MY8-mLAN card. Up to eight-port MIDI data
(16 channels x 8 ports) can be transmitted and received.

MIDI Port Setup
Selecting a Port for MIDI Message Transfer
To configure MIDI ports for MIDI message transfer, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP]
button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears. This page enables you to set
MIDI message input and output.

1

4

2
3

The following parameters are available on this page:

A GENERAL section
This section enables you to select ports that transmit and receive MIDI messages, such
as Program Changes and Control Changes.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

MIDI Port Setup

237

• Rx PORT .......................This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data reception. In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB, or SLOT
(available only with an optional mLAN card installed). If you
select USB, specify the port number in the right parameter box.
• Tx PORT........................This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data transmission. The available ports are the same as for the Rx PORT
parameter.

B MIDI THRU section
These parameters enable you to route incoming MIDI data from one port to another
without changes. Select a port for reception in the first parameter box, and select a port
for transmission in the next parameter box (located to the right of the arrow). If you
select USB, specify the port number in the small parameter box adjacent to the port
parameter box.

C MACHINE CONTROL section
This section enables you to select a remote control method and a remote control port to
control external devices, including hard disk recorders and video equipment.
• TYPE..............................Specify a type (method) of remote control by turning on either
the MMC (MIDI Machine Control) button or the P2 (Sony P2
protocol) button.
• PORT .............................Select MIDI, USB, REMOTE, or SLOT (available only when an
optional mLAN card is installed) for MMC command transfer.
If you select USB, specify the port number in the right parameter box.
• DEVICE ID ...................Specify the DM1000’s MMC Device ID. MMC Device IDs
identify connected devices, enabling recognition during MMC
transmission and reception.

D SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section
•

•

•

•

•

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

18
MIDI

This section enables you to specify ports for various special functions.
Studio Manager............In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB, or REMOTE as the
port used by the included Studio Manager software. In the two
small parameter boxes on the right, specify a port number (if
you selected USB), and an ID number.
DAW...............................Select USB or REMOTE as a port for use with a DAW. If you
select USB, specify in the right parameter box a port number
pair (1–2, 3–4, 5–6, 7–8).
REMOTE 1 ....................This parameter indicates the target currently selected for
Remote Layer 1. If the target is set to “USER DEFINED,” you
can select a MIDI message destination port.
REMOTE 2 ....................This parameter indicates the target currently selected for
Remote Layer 2. If the target is set to “USER DEFINED,” you
can select a MIDI message destination port.
CASCADE LINK ..........Select MIDI or REMOTE as a port for DM1000 cascade connection. Clicking the TRANSMIT button during cascade connection enables you to copy the internal settings of the
DM1000 you are operating to another DM1000. This enables
both DM1000s to share the identical parameter settings. Clicking the REQUEST button during cascade connection enables
you to copy the internal settings of the other DM1000 to the
DM1000 you are operating.

238

Chapter 18—MIDI

Selecting MIDI Messages for Transmission and Reception
You can select MIDI messages to be transmitted or received at a port specified in the GENERAL section on the Setup | MIDI/Host page (see page 236).
To do so, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup page
appears.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Select MIDI channels for transmission and reception in the CHANNEL row, and turn the
transmission and reception of each MIDI message on or off using the buttons in the parameter rows from PROGRAM CHANGE to OTHER COMMANDS.

A CHANNEL
This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission and reception. The following parameters are available in this row:
• Tx ................................... This parameter box specifies a MIDI Transmit Channel.
• Rx ................................... This parameter box specifies a MIDI Receive Channel.

B PROGRAM CHANGE

•
•
•

•

This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Program
Changes.
Tx ON/OFF................... Transmission of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled.
Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled.
OMNI ON/OFF............ When this button is turned on, Program Changes on all MIDI
Channels are received regardless of the CHANNEL row settings.
ECHO ON/OFF ........... This button determines whether Program Change messages
received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI
OUT port.

C CONTROL CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Control Changes.
• Tx ON/OFF................... Transmission of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• ECHO ON/OFF ........... This button determines whether Control Change messages
received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI
OUT port.

D PARAMETER CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Parameter
Changes.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall

239

• Tx ON/OFF...................Transmission of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• ECHO ON/OFF............This button determines whether Parameter Change messages
received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI
OUT port.

E BULK
This parameter row enables or disables reception of Bulk Dump data.
• Rx ON/OFF...................Reception of Bulk Dump data is enabled or disabled.

F OTHER COMMANDS
• ECHO ON/OFF............This button determines whether other MIDI messages received
at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT
port.

G Fader Resolution
This parameter specifies the resolution of the value output when you operate the
DM1000’s faders. To transfer fader value data between two cascaded DM1000s, or to
record the DM1000 operation to or play it back from a sequencer, select the HIGH button. When the LOW button is selected, the fader resolution switches to 256 steps.

Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall
You can assign DM1000 Scenes to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall. When you
recall a Scene on the DM1000, the unit transmits the assigned Program Change to the connected MIDI device. When the DM1000 receives a Program Change, the assigned Scene is
recalled.
Initially, Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through 99,
and Scene #0 is assigned to Program Change #100, although you can change these assignments.
Tip: You can store a Scene to Program Change assignment table to an external device by using
MIDI Bulk Dump or included Studio Manager software.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception
of MIDI messages (see page 236).
2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can
transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F2] button.
The MIDI | Pgm Asgn page appears.

18
MIDI

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

240

Chapter 18—MIDI

4 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the PGM CHG column, and rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Program
Change numbers to which you want to assign Scenes.
5 Press the cursor button [ ] to move the cursor to a parameter box in the
SCENE NO./TITLE column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select Scenes.
Tip:
• If you assign a Scene to multiple Program Changes, the Program Change with the lowest
number becomes effective.
• You can initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by moving the cursor to
the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
6 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup
page appears, then specify the MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels.
7 Turn on the PROGRAM CHANGE Tx ON/OFF and Rx ON/OFF buttons.
Now, when the DM1000 receives the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels,
the corresponding Scenes are recalled. Also, when you switch Scenes on the DM1000, the
DM1000 transmits the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels.

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time
Control
You can assign DM1000 parameters to MIDI Control Changes for real-time control. When
the DM1000 receives a Control Change, the assigned DM1000 parameter is set accordingly.
Also, when you adjust a parameter on the DM1000, the DM1000 transmits the assigned
Control Change message.
Tip: You can store a Parameter to Control Change assignment table to an external device by
using MIDI Bulk Dump or included Studio Manager software.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception
of MIDI messages (see page 236).
2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can
transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F3] button.
The MIDI | Ctl Asgn page appears. This page enables you to assign DM1000 parameters to
Control Changes.

1

Tip: See page 337 for more information on the default Parameter to Control Change assignments.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control

241

4 Move the cursor to the MODE parameter’s TABLE button (1), then press
[ENTER].
The MODE parameter determines which MIDI messages are transmitted when DM1000
parameters are adjusted. The following options are available for the MODE parameter:
• TABLE............................MIDI Control Change messages are transmitted in accordance
with the assignments on this page.
• NRPN.............................The assignments on the Ctl Asgn page are ignored, and predefined NRPNs (Non Registered Parameter Numbers) are
transmitted for remote control.
Tip: NRPNs are special MIDI messages that combine three different Control Changes. They
enable you to control many parameters on a single MIDI Channel.
5 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the No. (CH) column, then rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Control
Changes to which you want to assign parameters.
You can assign parameters to up to 16-channel Control Changes on the Ctl Asgn page,
regardless of the MIDI Channels currently selected for transmission and reception.
Skip Steps 5 and 6 if you turned on the NRPN button in Step 4.
6 Select parameters in the parameter boxes in the three PARAMETER columns.
Select a parameter group in the parameter box in the first PARAMETER column, and specify the desired values in the parameter boxes in the second and third PARAMETER columns.
The following parameters and values are available:
HIGH
NO ASSIGN

MID

LOW

—

—

CHANNEL

INPUT1–48

MASTER

BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
FADER H

AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND

INPUT1–48

AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
BUS TO ST

BUS1–8

CHANNEL

INPUT1–48

MASTER

BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND

18

AUX3 SEND
FADER L

AUX4 SEND

MIDI

AUX5 SEND

INPUT1–48

AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
BUS TO ST

BUS1–8

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

242

Chapter 18—MIDI

HIGH

MID

LOW

CHANNEL

INPUT1–48

MASTER

BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
ON

AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND

INPUT1–48

AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
PHASE
INSERT ON

BUS TO ST

BUS1–8

CHANNEL

INPUT1–48

CHANNEL

INPUT1–48

MASTER

BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
PRE/POST

AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND

INPUT1–48

AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME MID
IN DELAY

TIME LOW
MIX HIGH

INPUT1–48

MIX LOW
FB GAIN H
FB GAIN L
ON
OUT DELAY

TIME HIGH
TIME MID
TIME LOW

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO L, R

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control

HIGH

MID

243

LOW

ON
Q LOW
F LOW
G LOW H
G LOW L
Q LO-MID
F LO-MID
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID L
Q HI-MID
EQ

F HI-MID

INPUT1–48/BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

G HI-MID H
G HI-MID L
Q HIGH
F HIGH
G HIGH H
G HIGH L
ATT H
ATT L
HPF ON
LPF ON
ON
ATTACK
THRESH H
THRESH L
GATE

RANGE

INPUT1–48

HOLD H
HOLD L
DECAY H
DECAY L
ON
ATTACK
THRESH H
THRESH L
COMP

RELEASE H
RELEASE L

INPUT1–48/BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

RATIO
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE
CHANNEL
AUX1–2
PAN

AUX3–4

18

INPUT1–48

AUX5–6

BALANCE

BUS TO ST

BUS1–8

MASTER

STEREO

MIDI

AUX7–8

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

244

Chapter 18—MIDI

HIGH

MID

LOW

LFE H
LFE L
DIV (F)
DIV R
SURROUND

LR
FR

INPUT1–48

WIDTH
DEPTH
OFS LR
OFS FR
BYPASS
MIX
PARAM1 H
EFFECT

PARAM1 L

EFFECT1–4

:
PARAM32 H
PARAM32 L

Parameters that feature a setting range of more than 128 steps (such as Fader and Delay
Time parameters) require two or more Control Change messages to specify the values.
For example, if you wish to control Fader parameters on certain channels using Control
Changes, you must assign the same channel to two Control Change numbers, and select
“FADER H” and “FADER L” for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the first
PARAMETER column.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control

245

If you wish to control Delay Time parameters on certain channels using Control Changes,
you must assign the same channel Delay parameter to three Control Change numbers, and
select “TIME LOW,” “TIME MID,” and “TIME HIGH” for the Control Changes in the
parameter boxes in the second (middle) PARAMETER column.

Note: Parameters that feature a setting range in excess of 128 steps require an appropriate
combination of range parameters for successful MIDI Control Change.
Tip: You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
7 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup
page appears, then specify MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels.
8 Turn on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx ON/OFF and Rx ON/OFF buttons.
DM1000 parameters will now be set accordingly when the DM1000 receives corresponding
Control Changes. Also, when you adjust parameters on the DM1000, the DM1000 will
transmit corresponding Control Changes.
Note: Before controlling parameters using Control Changes, make sure that both Tx and Rx
ON/OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row are turned off.

18
MIDI

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

246

Chapter 18—MIDI

Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes
You can control DM1000 parameters in real time by using Parameter Change messages that
are System Exclusive messages, instead of using MIDI Control Changes.
See “MIDI Data Format” at the end of this Manual for detailed information on available
Parameter Changes.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception
of MIDI messages (see page 236).
2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can
transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup
page appears, then turn off the Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row.
The DM1000 will now set certain parameter values when it receives corresponding Parameter Changes. Also, when you adjust certain parameters on the DM1000, it transmits corresponding Parameter Changes.
Note: You do not have to specify MIDI Channels to control parameters using Parameter
Changes. Make sure that both Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE row
on the MIDI | Setup page are turned off.

Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump)
You can back up data stored in the DM1000, such as libraries and Scenes, to an external
MIDI device by using MIDI Bulk Dump. In this way, you can later restore previous
DM1000 settings by transmitting this MIDI data back to the DM1000.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception
of MIDI messages (see page 236).
2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can
transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F4] button.
Note: Some of the data transmitted from the DM1000 to the sequence software may occasionally drop out during Bulk Dump transmission. To avoid this, we recommend that you use
the included Studio Manager software to store DM1000 data to an external device.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump)

247

The MIDI | Bulk page appears.

2
3

1

4

The page includes the following parameters:

A CATEGORY section
This section enables you to select data for transmission and reception.

B REQUEST
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to transmit messages from the
DM1000 that request a second DM1000 (connected to the first DM1000) to transmit
the data specified in the CATEGORY section. This button is used primarily when two
DM1000s are connected in cascade.

C TRANSMIT
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to transmit data specified in the
CATEGORY section to an external MIDI device.

D INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the interval between data packets during bulk transmission in
50 millisecond steps. If the external device drops part of the bulk data, increase this
parameter value.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

18
MIDI

4 In the CATEGORY section, move the cursor to the button of the data type
you want to transmit, then press [ENTER].
The following options are available:
• ALL.................................This button selects all data available for bulk dump. When this
button is turned on, all other buttons in this section are turned
off.
• SCENEMEM .................This button selects Scene memories. You can select Scenes you
wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the button.
• AUTOMIX ....................This button selects Automix memories. You can select Automixes you wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the
button.
• LIBRARY.......................This button selects libraries. You can select the type of library in
the TYPE parameter box (next to the button), then specify the
library number in the parameter box on the right.
• BANK.............................This parameter enables you to select the User Defined Key
banks (KEYS UDEF), User Defined Remote Layer banks (RMD
UDEF), or User Assignable Layer banks (USR LAYER) for bulk
dump. You can select one of these three types in the parameter
box next to the button, and select the banks in the parameter
box on the right.

248

Chapter 18—MIDI

• SETUPMEM ................. This button selects the DM1000 setup data (i.e., system settings).
• PGM TABLE ................. This button selects the MIDI | Pgm Asgn page settings.
• CTL TABLE................... This button selects the MIDI | Ctl Asgn page settings.
• PLUG-IN....................... This button selects the settings of any optional Y56K cards
installed in Slot #1 or #2. You can select Y56K card programs in
the parameter box next to the button.
Note: Data selected by the SETUPMEM button includes MIDI transmission and reception
port settings and message settings. After you store to an external device bulk dump data that
has its reception disabled, if the DM1000 later starts to receive this particular data, DM1000
bulk dump reception will be turned off immediately, and the DM1000 will be unable to receive
subsequent data. Therefore, before you store the data selected by the SETUPMEM button using
Bulk Dump, be sure to enable bulk data transmission and reception.
5 If necessary, move the cursor to the parameter box next to the selected button, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select the desired bulk dump data.
Tip: If you selected [ALL] in the parameter box, all data selected by the corresponding button
is transmitted as bulk dump data.
6 To start transmitting bulk data, move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button,
then press [ENTER].
Bulk Dump is executed. During the operation, the Bulk Dump window appears, indicating
the current bulk dump status. To abort the bulk dump operation, move the cursor to the
CANCEL button in the window, then press [ENTER].
Tip: To transmit bulk dump request messages, move the cursor to the REQUEST button, then
press [ENTER]. If a second DM1000 is connected, it will transmit bulk data to the first
DM1000 in response to the request.
7 To receive bulk data, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly
until the MIDI | Setup page appears, then turn on the Rx ON/OFF button in
the BULK row.
Now, when the DM1000 receives bulk data, the corresponding internal data is updated.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

249

19 Other Functions
This chapter describes the DM1000’s miscellaneous functions.

Changing the Input and Output Connector Names
You can change the default name of the input and output connectors, if you desire.

Changing the Input Connector Names
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | In
Port page appears.

3

1

2

You can specify Short names in the parameter boxes (1) in the center column, and Long
names in the parameter boxes (2) in the right column.
2 Use the Parameter wheel to select a port for which you want to change the
name.
3 Move the cursor to a name you want to change, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit the name.

Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library.
When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (3) is on, the first four characters of a
newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name.
You can reset all port names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE
button, then pressing [ENTER].

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

19
Other Functions

4 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The new name is now effective.

250

Chapter 19—Other Functions

Changing the Output Connector Names
To change output connector names, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Out Port page appears.

The procedure for editing the names and using the Name Output Auto Copy check box and
the INITIALIZE button is the same as on the In Port page.

Setting Preferences
You can change the default settings and environmental settings of the DM1000 by using the
Setup | Prefer1, Prefer2, and Prefer3 pages. To locate one of the Preferences page, press the
DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly.

Prefer1 page
This page enables you to set the DM1000 so that when you press a button on the top panel,
the DM1000 displays the corresponding display page, and shows or hides confirmation and
alarm messages.

This page contains the following parameters. (These parameters are explained in the order
from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column.)
• Auto ROUTING Display
If this check box is on, the Routing pages appear automatically when you press a routing-related button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Preferences

251

• Auto PAN/SURROUND Display
If this check box is on, the Pan/Surr pages appear automatically when you operate the Joystick in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. If you want to use the Joystick to adjust the pan
setting, turn on this check box. In Stereo Surround mode, operating the Joystick enables
you to adjust the Pan setting. Otherwise, it enables you to adjust the Surround Pan settings.
• Auto EQUALIZER Display
If this check box is on, the EQ | EQ Edit page appears automatically when you press an
EQ-related button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• Auto SOLO Display
If this check box is on, the Monitor | Solo C-R page appears automatically when you solo
an Input Channel.
• Auto WORD CLOCK Display
If this check box is on, the DIO | Word Clock page appears automatically if the currently-selected external wordclock source fails.
• Auto Channel Select
If this check box is on, you can select a channel by moving the corresponding fader or
Encoder, or by turning on the corresponding channel [SOLO], [ON], or [AUTO] button.
• Store Confirmation
If this check box is on, the Title Edit window to input a Scene or library memory name
appears when you store a Scene or library memory.
• Recall Confirmation
If this check box is on, a confirmation window appears when you recall a Scene or library
memory.
• Patch Confirmation
If this check box is on, a confirmation message appears when you edit the Input and Output
Patches.
• Pair Confirmation
If this check box is on, the confirmation message appears when you create or cancel a pair.
• L/R Nominal Pan
If this check box is on, left/odd and right/even signals will be at nominal level (0 dB) when
Input Channels are panned hard left or hard right. If this check box is off, the signal level
rises by +3 dB.
• Fast Meter Fall Time
If this check box is on, the level meters fall more quickly.
• TC Drop Warning
If this check box is on, a warning message appears if a dropout is detected in the incoming
timecode.

• MIDI Warning
If this check box is on, a warning message appears when any errors are detected in the
incoming MIDI messages.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

19
Other Functions

• DIO Warning
If this check box is on, a warning message appears when any errors are detected in digital
audio signals received at the Slot 1 or 2, or 2TR Digital Inputs.

252

Chapter 19—Other Functions

• Initial Data Nominal
If this check box is on, Input Channel faders are set to nominal (0 dB) when you recall Scene
#0.
• Meter Follow Layer
If this check box is on, a connected optional MB1000 Meter Bridge automatically track a
layer selection made in the LAYER section on the DM1000.
• Scene MEM Auto Update
If this check box is on, you can use the Scene Memory Auto Update function (see page 159).
• Joystick Auto Grab
If this check box is on, the [GRAB] button is automatically enabled and the Joystick is
engaged in as the surround pan control when you move the Joystick pointer to the current
surround pan position.
• Cascade COMM Link
If this check box is on, various functions and parameters are linked between cascaded
DM1000s (See page 265 for more information on cascade connection). When the check
box is off, only the Solo function is linked.
• Auto Direct Out On
If this check box is on and you change the channel Direct Out destination from “–” to any
other output, the channel Direct Out is automatically enabled. If you change the channel
Direct Out destination from an output to “–,” the channel Direct Out is automatically disabled.

Prefer2 page
The Prefer2 page enables you to name the channel indicated on the display, and adjust the
display brightness.

1

2

3
4
5

This page contains the following parameters:

A Channel ID/Channel
This parameter selects a style for displayed channel. If the Channel ID check box is
selected, the Channel ID appears (e.g., CH1, BUS1). If the Channel Short Name check
box is on, the Channel Short name appears (see page 249).

B Port ID/PORT
This parameter selects a format for the port name displayed on the pages. When the Port
ID check box is on, the Port ID (such as AD1 or OMN10) appears. When the Port Short
Name check box is on, the Short Port name appears (see page 250).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Preferences

253

C Channel Copy Parameter

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This parameter selects the channel parameters to be copied when you assign the Channel Copy function to one of the User Defined buttons (see page 257). You can select
multiple options.
ALL.................................This button selects all parameters that can be copied. When you
turn on this button, all other options are cancelled.
FADER...........................Copies the fader values.
ON..................................Copies the on/off status of the [ON] buttons.
PAN ................................Copies the pan settings.
SURR .............................Copies the surround pan settings.
AUX................................Copies the Aux Send levels.
AUX ON ........................Copies the on/off status of the Channel to Aux signals.
EQ...................................Copies the EQ parameter values.

D Fader Touch Sense
•
•

•
•

These parameters control the Touch Sense function.
ENABLED/DISABLED ..This button enables or disables the Touch Sense function.
CONTROL ....................If this button is turned on and the touch sensors are not triggered, fader operations is ignored. During Automix recording,
you can perform “cut-in” style operations by touching a fader.
When this button is off, the DM1000 always recognizes fader
movements.
SELECT .........................If this button is on, you can select channels using the Touch
Sense function.
Sensitivity .....................This parameter adjusts the touch sensitivity in the range of 01
to 10.

E Display Brightness
This parameter sets the brightness of the display, Scene Memory display, and the button
indicators in the range of 1 through 4.

Prefer3 page
This page enables you to set various Automix preferences.

19

• Mix Update Confirmation
If this check box is on, when Automix recording stops, a confirmation message appears asking if you want to update the current Automix with the latest edits.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

This page contains the following parameters. (These parameters are explained in the order
from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column).

254

Chapter 19—Other Functions

• Auto EQ Edit in
If this check box is on, EQ settings are automatically punched into the Automix recording
when you adjust an EQ control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• Auto Inc TC Capture
If this check box is on, the Timecode Capture memory is incremented automatically each
time a timecode address is captured on the Automix | Event Edit page (see page 202).
• Link Capture & Locate Memory
If this check box is on, the Capture memories on the Automix | Event Edit page are linked
to the Locate memories.
• Clear Edit Channel after REC
If this check box is on, the previously-recorded channel events are automatically cleared
when Automix recording (with Auto Rec on) stops.
• Timecode Display Relative
If this check box is on, the indicated timecode is offset based on the OFFSET parameter on
the Main page.
• Receive Full Frame Message
If this check box is on, MTC full-frame messages, in addition to the usual quarter-frame
messages, are recognized and Automix follows them. If this check box is off, only the usual
quarter-frame messages are recognized.
• Show Compact Size
Automix data is compressed while recording. If this check box is on, the DM1000 displays
the compressed size of the Automix.
• Automix Store Undo
If this check box is on, you can undo the Automix Store & Clear functions.
• Copy Initial Fader
If this check box is on, the fader value recorded immediately before the specified IN point
is copied to the specified TO point when you copy or move the Fader events. This eliminates
fader position matching problems when no fader event exists at the specified TO point.
• Drop Out Time
This parameter sets an interval (in frames) between the interruption of incoming timecode
and the stoppage of Automix recording or playback.
• Lock Time
This parameter sets the interval (in frames) allowed until the Automix locks to incoming
timecode messages. If the sync operation is unstable, set this value higher.
• Frame Jump Error
This parameter sets the time interval (in frames) required by the DM1000 to recognize an
error after incoming timecode messages jump. If the actual interval is shorter than the value
specified by this parameter, the DM1000 continues the sync operation. If the frame jump
causes the recording or playback to stop during the MTC sync operation, set the parameter
value higher than the number of frames indicated in the error message.
If you set the parameter to a higher value, adjust the Drop Out Time parameter value, if necessary.
• Fader REC Accuracy
This parameter sets the accuracy of recording faders over time to “Little,” “Some,” “More,”
or “Most.” If you set the parameter to lower values, you will save Automix memory space.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer)

255

Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User
Assignable Layer)
If you set the Remote Layer target to “USER ASSIGNABLE,” you can create a custom layer
by combining any DM1000 channels (excluding the Stereo Out). This custom layer is called
“User Assignable layer.” You can use either Remote 1 or Remote 2 for a User Assignable layer.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F1] or [F2] button.
The Remote | Remote1 or Remote2 page appears.
2 Set the TARGET parameter to USER ASSIGNABLE, then press [ENTER].
A confirmation window appears.
3 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
The DM1000 displays the page shown below.

1

4 Select the channels you wish to assign to the User Assignable layer using the
1–16 parameter boxes (1).
You can store up to four 16-channel setups in four banks by switching Banks 1–4 via the
BANK 1–4 buttons.
Tip: You can reset the assignment to default by moving the cursor to the CLEAR button and
pressing [ENTER].
5 Use the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to assign or recall the User
Assignable layer.
You can use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the assigned channels.
Tip: If you connected an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge, its meters indicate the level of the
channels currently-assigned to layer channels 1–16.

19
Other Functions

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

256

Chapter 19—Other Functions

Using the Oscillator
The DM1000 features an Oscillator you can use for sound checks. Follow the steps below to
use the Oscillator:
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button, then press the [F1] button.
The Utility | Oscillator page appears.

1

3
4

2

This page contains the following parameters:

A OSCILLATOR ON
This parameter button turns the Oscillator on or off.

B WAVEFORM
These parameter buttons select the Oscillator waveforms.

C LEVEL section
The parameter control in this section sets the Oscillator output level.

D ASSIGN section
The buttons in this section select the Oscillator output.
2 Move the cursor to the button for the Oscillator output channel in the
ASSIGN section, then press [ENTER] (you can select multiple channels).
3 Move the cursor to one of the WAVEFORM parameter buttons, then press
[ENTER].
You can select the following waveforms:
• SINE 100Hz .................. 100 Hz sinewave
• SINE 1kHz .................... 1 kHz sinewave
• SINE 10kHz .................. 10 kHz sinewave
• 1kHz/400Hz ................. Sinewave with different frequency output to L, R, and
odd/even buses
• PINK NOISE ................ Pink noise
• BURST NOISE ............. Burst noise (200 msec pink noise pulses at four second intervals)
4 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section, then rotate
the Parameter wheel to set the Oscillator level to minimum.
Note: Sinewave and pink noise create unusually high sound pressure. Oscillator levels that
are too high can damage the speakers. When you use the Oscillator, be sure to set the level to
minimum, then raise the level gradually.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using the User Defined Keys

257

5 Move the cursor to the OSCILLATOR ON/OFF button, then press the [ENTER]
or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to turn on the Oscillator.
The Oscillator signal is now routed to the channels selected in the ASSIGN section.
6 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section, then rotate
the Parameter wheel to raise the Oscillator level.
You can view the current Oscillator level on the LEVEL meter.

Using the User Defined Keys
m

USER DEFINED
KEYS
DISPLAY

You can assign any of more than 200 functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[12].
If you assign to one of the buttons (or “keys”) a function that is usually executed on the display pages, you can use the assigned button as a shortcut.
The Function to User Defined Keys assignments are stored in banks. (See page 287 for more
information on the initial bank settings.) The DM1000 provides eight banks (Banks A–H).
Switching banks enables you to change the assignment quickly.
Follow the steps below to assign functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS.
1 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS [DISPLAY] button to locate the User Def | User
Def page.

1
3

2

4

This page contains the following parameters:

A INITIALIZE
This button resets the contents of all banks to their initial settings.

B BANK
These buttons select the desired banks.

C TITILE
This parameter displays the name of the bank selected by the BANK parameter button.
Move the cursor to the TITLE parameter box, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a name.

D 1–12

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

These parameter boxes enable you to assign functions to USER DEFINED KEYS
[1]–[12].

19

258

Chapter 19—Other Functions

2 Move the cursor to the desired BANK parameter button, then press [ENTER].
The corresponding bank is selected, and the functions assigned to the User Defined buttons
in that bank are displayed in the 1–12 parameter boxes.
Tip: When you select a function that is executed based on specified numbers (for example, a
function that recalls a specific Scene or library memory or transmits MIDI messages), an extra
parameter box appears on the right, in which you must specify the number.
3 Move the cursor to one of the 1–12 parameter boxes, then press [ENTER].
The DM1000 displays the User Define Select window, which enables you to assign functions
to the selected buttons.

4 Move the cursor to the left column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press
the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a function you wish to assign.
A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. See page 275 for a complete list
of assignable functions.
5 In the same way, set the center and right column.
The items that appear in the center and right columns vary depending on the function
selected in Step 4.
6 To close the window, move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
When the window closes, the specified function is assigned to the selected User Defined
button.
To cancel the assignment, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press [ENTER].
7 If you assigned functions that require numbers (such as recalling a Scene or
library memory), move the cursor to the extra parameter box shown on the
right and specify the number.
Tip:
• You can store User Defined Keys banks to a computer hard disk using the included Studio
Manager software. Be sure to back up important data.
• You can also store the assignment data to an external device, such as a MIDI data filer, by
using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 246).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)

259

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)
The DM1000’s CONTROL port provides a GPI (General Purpose Interface) for controlling
external equipment. You can configure the GPI so that it will output 8-channel trigger signals when you operate the faders or USER DEFINED KEYS, or so that it will receive 4-channel trigger signals to control the DM1000 parameters.
You can assign functions to these trigger signals. In this way, for example, you can control a
“RECORDING” warning light outside a studio from the DM1000, or you can control the
DM1000’s Talkback function or Dimmer function using an outside switch.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

1
2
3

This is an example of the external circuit that operates GPI.
In this example, a trigger signal causes the LEDs to light up
when the
button is selected as the trigger signal polarity
in the OUTPUT section. A trigger signal causes the LEDs to
turn off when the
button is selected as the trigger signal
polarity.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

GPO0

13
9

GPO1
1

21

GPO4
9

14

9

GPO5
3

21

GPI0

22

GPO2

10

2

21

15

GPO6
16

9

GPO7
4

21

17

GPI2

GPI1

5

GPO3

6

23

GPI3

5

11

6

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | GPI
page appears.

1

2

19
This section enables you to select functions that will be controlled via trigger signals 1–4
input at the CONTROL port. Assignable functions are listed in the area below this section.

B OUTPUT section
This section enables you to select the sources that will output trigger signals 1–8. Selectable sources are listed in the area below this section.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

A INPUT section

260

Chapter 19—Other Functions

2 To assign functions to the incoming trigger signals, move the cursor to one
of four trigger signal parameters 1–4 in the INPUT section.
3 Rotate the Parameter wheel to select the desired function from the list below
the INPUT section, then press [ENTER] to confirm the selection.
4 Select one of two buttons located to the right of trigger signal parameters
1–4 to specify how the incoming trigger signals will be detected.
•

...........When the switch is grounded (Low), the trigger signal is active and the
selected parameter changes.

•

...........When the GPI Input goes High (open), the trigger signal is active and the
selected parameter changes.
Trigger =

Input signals from
the CONTROL port

Executes the function.

Executes the function.

Trigger =
Input signals from
the CONTROL port
Executes the function.

Executes the function.

At this point, when the DM1000 receives the trigger signal at the CONTROL port, the
selected parameter changes.
Tip: Refer to the next page for a complete list of assignable parameters.
5 To select parameters or controls as the trigger signal sources, move the cursor to the OUTPUT section and select the desired trigger signal parameters
1–8 in the same way as for the INPUT section.
6 Use the buttons located to the right of the trigger signal (1–8) parameters
to switch the polarity of the trigger signals that are output when you control
the trigger sources.
•

...........The GPI Output goes High (open) when the trigger signal source is active.

•

...........The GPI Output goes Low (ground) when the trigger signal source is active.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)

261

Trigger signal polarity =

Output signals from
the CONTROL port
Trigger signal polarity =

Output signals from
the CONTROL port

At this time, the trigger signal is output from the CONTROL port when you operate the
assigned parameters or controls.
Tip: Refer to the next page for a complete list of assignable parameters and controls.

■ Parameters available in the INPUT section
No Assign
TALKBACK
DIMMER

AUX1 ON
:
AUX8 ON

BUS

ST ON

SLOT

CH1 ON UNLATCH

STEREO

:

2TRD1

CH48 ON UNLATCH

2TRD2

BUS1 ON UNLATCH

TALKBACK UNLATCH

:

DIMMER UNLATCH

BUS8 ON UNLATCH

BUS UNLATCH

AUX1 ON UNLATCH

SLOT UNLATCH

:

STEREO UNLATCH

AUX8 ON UNLATCH

2TRD1 UNLATCH

ST ON UNLATCH

2TRD2 UNLATCH

UDEF1

CH1 ON

:

:

UDEF12

CH48 ON
BUS1 ON
:

19

BUS8 ON

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

• TALKBACK/DIMMER....................... Same as the MONITOR [TALKBACK] and
[DIMMER] button functions.
• BUS/SLOT............................................ Same as the MONITOR [BUS] and [SLOT] button functions.
• STEREO/2TRD1/2TRD2 ................... Same as the MONITOR [STEREO], [2TRD1],
and [2TRD2] button functions.

262

Chapter 19—Other Functions

• xxx UNLATCH............. The assigned button function is enabled only while the incoming trigger signal is active.
• xxx ON .......................... The corresponding channels are turned on or off each time the
incoming trigger signal becomes active.
• xxx ON UNLATCH...... The corresponding channels are turned on only while the
incoming trigger signal is active.
• UDEFxxx ...................... Same as the corresponding User Defined buttons.

■ Trigger sources available in the OUTPUT section
No Assign

ST FADER OFF

CH1 FADER ON

CH1 FADER TALLY

:

:

CH48 FADER ON

CH48 FADER TALLY

BUS1 FADER ON

BUS1 FADER TALLY

:

:

BUS8 FADER ON

BUS8 FADER TALLY

AUX1 FADER ON

AUX1 FADER TALLY

:
AUX8 FADER ON

:
AUX8 FADER TALLY

ST FADER ON

ST FADER TALLY

CH1 FADER OFF

UDEF1 LATCH

:

:

CH48 FADER OFF

UDEF12 LATCH

BUS1 FADER OFF

UDEF1 UNLATCH

:

:

BUS8 FADER OFF

UDEF12 UNLATCH

AUX1 FADER OFF

REC LAMP

:

POWER ON

AUX8 FADER OFF

• xxx FADER ON ............ The trigger signal is transmitted when you raise a fader from
–∞.
• xxx FADER OFF........... The trigger signal is transmitted when you lower a fader to –∞.
• xxx FADER TALLY ...... The trigger signal is transmitted while a fader remains above
–∞.
• xxx LATCH ................... Pressing the corresponding button toggles the trigger signal on
and off.
• xxx UNLATCH............. The trigger signal is transmitted while you are pressing and
holding down the corresponding button.
• REC LAMP.................... The trigger signal is transmitted while the transport section on
the Remote | Machine Control page is in record mode.
• POWER ON.................. The trigger signal is transmitted while the power to the
DM1000 is on.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using Operation Lock

263

Using Operation Lock
The DM1000 features an Operation Lock function that prevents unintentional edits and
restricts access to panel operation with a password.
To use the Operation Lock function, press the [UTILITY] button, then the [F4] button to
display the Utility | Lock page.

1

2

3

This page contains the following parameters:

A OPERATION LOCK
This button enables or cancels Operation Lock. When you turn on this button, the Password window appears.

Enter a four-letter password using the Channel 1–10 [SEL] buttons (Channel 10 [SEL]
button enters “0”). (The password characters are represented by asterisks.) Move the
cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to enable Operation Lock.
To cancel Operation Lock, turn off the OPERATION LOCK button. The Password window appears again. Enter the password and select the OK button. Operation Lock is cancelled.
Note: If you forget the password, you cannot cancel Operation Lock. Be sure to write down
the password.

B OPERATION LOCK SAFE section
This section enables you to select certain controls on the panel to exclude from Operation Lock. To cancel all “safe” buttons simultaneously, move the cursor to the CLEAR
ALL button, then press [ENTER].

19
Other Functions

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

264

Chapter 19—Other Functions

C PASSWORD
This button enables you to change the current password. Move the cursor to the PASSWORD button, then press [ENTER]. The Set Password window appears, enabling you
to change the password.

Enter the current password in the PASSWORD field, and a new password in the NEW
PASSWORD field. Enter the new password again in the REENTRY field located below
the NEW PASSWORD field. Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to
change the password.
Tip: To clear the registered password, move the cursor to the CLEAR button, then press
[ENTER]. If you forget the password, initialize the password setting (see page 273).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Cascading Consoles

265

Cascading Consoles
The DM1000 features a Cascade Bus that enables cascade connection. You can connect two
DM1000s in cascade using the digital inputs and outputs, or the OMNI IN and OMNI
OUT connectors. In this way, two consoles work just like one big console, integrating each
unit’s Buses 1–8, Aux Sends 1–8, Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus.
The following DM1000 functions are linked via the cascade connection. To link functions
and parameters (excluding the Solo function), turn on the Cascade COMM Link check box
on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 250).
• Display page selection
• Aux selection
• Solo function
• Fader Mode
• Encoder Mode
• Metering Position
• Peak Hold On/Off
• Meter Fast Fall on/off
• Scene Store, Recall, and Title Edit
• The following Automix functions:
- Make New Automix
- Store and Recall Automix
- Automix Title Edit of
- Automix Transport (AutoREC, REC, PLAY, STOP,ABORT)
• The following Automix parameters:
- Automix Enable/Disable
- Motor On/Off
- Frame Type
- Return Time
- Int Start Time
- TC Offset
- Write to End
- Fader Return
- Fader Edit Mode
- Touch Sense In
- Touch Sense Out
- Overwrite (FADER/CH ON/PAN/EQ/AUX/AUX ON/SURR)
Tip: The Solo function is always linked regardless of the status of the Cascade COMM Link
check box.

19
Other Functions

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

266

Chapter 19—Other Functions

The following paragraphs explain how to make a cascade connection using two DM1000s
and the inputs and outputs of digital I/O cards installed in the slots of two DM1000s.
1 Install digital I/O cards into Slot 1 or 2 on two DM1000s.
2 Connect two DM1000s as follows:
• If you want to use the REMOTE connector to transfer MIDI messages, connect the
REMOTE connector of each DM1000 using a 9-pin D-sub reverse cable. If you want to
use the MIDI IN and OUT ports, connect MIDI IN on one DM1000 to MIDI out on the
other DM1000 using a MIDI cable.
The following connection example uses the REMOTE connectors.
• Connect the digital I/O card output on the transmitting DM1000 (slave) to the digital
I/O card input on the receiving DM1000 (master).

OUT

OUT

MY8-AT
etc.

MY8-AT
etc.

SLOT 1

REMOTE
connector

SLOT 2

2

1
+48V

OFF

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

2

5

4

3

+48V

ON

1

+48V

ON

3

6

+48V

OFF

ON

4

OFF

7

+48V

ON

5

8

+48V

OFF

6

ON

OFF

7

9

+48V

ON

OFF

8

10

+48V

ON

9

OFF

11

+48V

ON

10

OFF

12

+48V

ON

11

OFF

12

13

+48V

ON

OFF

13

14

+48V

ON

OFF

14

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

IN

MY8-AT
etc.

MY8-AT
etc.

SLOT 1

16

15

+48V

ON

15

IN

OFF

2

1

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

OFF

16

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

2

5

4

3

+48V

ON

1

PAD

REMOTE
connector

SLOT 2

+48V

ON

3

6

+48V

OFF

ON

4

OFF

7

+48V

ON

5

8

+48V

OFF

6

ON

OFF

7

9

+48V

ON

OFF

8

10

+48V

ON

9

OFF

11

+48V

ON

10

OFF

12

+48V

ON

11

OFF

12

13

+48V

ON

OFF

13

14

+48V

ON

OFF

14

OFF

16

15

+48V

ON

15

+48V

ON

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

ON

16

PAD
20dB

20dB

-60

-16

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

0

20dB

TALKBACK LEVEL

0

-60

-16

GAIN

10

PEAK
SIGNAL

10

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

PHONES

20dB

-60

-16

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

ROUTING

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX

DIO

SETUP

UTILITY

MIDI

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

-2

EFFECT

SCENE

AUXSELECT
DISPLAY

AUX1

AUX2

AUX5

AUX3

AUX6

AUX4

AUX7

-10
-12

-14

-14

2

3

4

5

6

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

7

8

STEREO

DIRECT

SOLO

CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

LOW MID

SLOT

BUS

AUTOMIX

DIO

SETUP

UTILITY

MIDI

REMOTE

METER

VIEW

-2

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

EFFECT

OUTPUT
PATCH

SCENE

AUXSELECT
INC

DEC

DISPLAY

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

AUX5

AUX6

AUX7

2

3

4

5

6

-8
-10
-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

FREQUENCY

7

8

STEREO

DIRECT

SOLO

CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

LOW MID

SLOT

BUS

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

GAIN

INC

DEC

GRAB

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

HIGH

HIGH MID

Q

-6

-10
-12

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

1

-4

-6
-8

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

DISPLAY

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

DISPLAY
FADER

STORE

FADER

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

STORE

RECALL

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

PAN

F4

F3

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

ENTER

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SEL

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ENTER

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SEL

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ON

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

5

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5
0

10

5

15

DISPLAY

5

5

10

0

15

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5

10

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

5

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

5
0

10

5

15

5
0

10

5

15

10

15

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20

20

10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20

20

15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30

30

15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30

30

20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40

40

20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40

40

30

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50

50

30
40

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

60

50

50 30
60 40
70
50

60
70

70

50 30
60 40
70
50

50

60

50 30
60 40
70
50

50

60
70

50 30
60 40
70
50

10

PHONES

MONITOR
DISPLAY

DISPLAY

OVER
0

OVER
0
-2

STEREO

GAIN

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

HIGH

HIGH MID

-4

FREQUENCY

10

PHONES
LEVEL

EQUALIZER

DISPLAY

Q

-8

-8

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

1

-6

-6

-10
-12

PEAK
SIGNAL

DISPLAY ACCESS

-4

-4

OUTPUT
PATCH

0

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

ROUTING

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

OVER
0

OVER
0
-2

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

TALKBACK LEVEL

-60

-16

GAIN

10

SELECTED CHANNEL
MONITOR

EQUALIZER

DISPLAY

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK
SIGNAL

SELECTED CHANNEL

0

40
50

1
17

2
33

AUX 1

18

3
34

AUX 2

19

4
35

AUX 3

20

5
36

AUX 4

21

6
37

AUX 5

22

7
38

AUX 6

23

8
39

AUX 7

24

9
40

AUX 8

25

10
41

BUS 1

26

11
42

BUS 2

27

12
43

BUS 3

28

13
44

BUS 4

29

14
45

BUS 5

30

15
46

BUS 6

DM1000 (Slave)

31

16
47

BUS 7

32

1
48

BUS 8

STEREO

17

2
33

AUX 1

18

3
34

AUX 2

19

4
35

AUX 3

20

5
36

AUX 4

21

6
37

AUX 5

22

7
38

AUX 6

23

8
39

AUX 7

24

9
40

AUX 8

25

10
41

BUS 1

26

11
42

BUS 2

27

12
43

BUS 3

28

13
44

BUS 4

29

14
45

BUS 5

30

70

15
46

BUS 6

31

16
47

32

BUS 7

48

BUS 8

STEREO

DM1000 (Master)

Tip: To link Automixes between two DM1000s in a cascade system, configure the units so that
they can receive the same sync signal (SMPTE or MTC). If necessary, connect a distribution
box to distribute the sync signal to each DM1000.
Note: Do not make any MIDI connections between DM1000s that are cascaded via the
REMOTE connectors, or vice versa. Otherwise, a loop will be created, causing both consoles
to execute endless transmission and reception.
3 On the slave unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Out Patch | Slot Out page appears.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Cascading Consoles

267

4 Assign the Bus signals to the slot channels that are used for the cascade connection.
The following signals are available:
Options

Description

CAS BUS1–BUS8

Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs

CAS AUX1–AUX8

Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs

CAS ST-L, CAS ST-R

Stereo Bus L & R Cascade Outs

CASSOLOL, CASSOLOR

Solo Bus L & R Cascade Outs

The following display page is an example of integrating Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4, Stereo Bus,
and Solo Bus signals via two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT).

Tip: Patching may vary depending on the type and number of buses used for the cascade connection.
Note: Since the number of channels available on the digital I/O cards is limited, only Aux
Sends 1–4 are cascaded in this example. Using a 16-channel digital I/O card (such as
MY16-AT) enables you to cascade all buses.
5 On the master unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the In Patch | Cascade In page appears.
6 Select the Input Channels on the master unit to which the Bus signals are
input from the Slave unit.
The following display page is an example of receiving the slave unit’s Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4,
Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus signals via two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT).

19
Other Functions

Note: Be sure to patch the slave Bus signals to the same Buses on the master unit. Incorrect
patching will result in an incorrect cascade connection.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

268

Chapter 19—Other Functions

7 On the master unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button repeatedly until
the DIO | Cascade page appears, then adjust the Attenuators using the
parameter controls.
The DIO | Cascade page enables you to adjust the level of signals input to the Cascade Bus
using the dedicated attenuators. You can also turn the Cascade Buses on or off using the buttons below the parameter controls.

8 On the slave unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly to
display the Setup | Remote page, then set the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter (1) to “MIDI.”

1

9 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly to display the Setup
| MIDI/Host page, then set the Cascade Link parameter to “REMOTE.”
After Steps 8 and 9, the slave unit will be able to transmit and receive MIDI messages via the
REMOTE connector.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Cascading Consoles

269

10 Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for the master unit so that it will be able to transmit
and receive MIDI messages via the REMOTE connector.
11 To match the parameters of both DM1000s, locate the Setup | MIDI/Host
page on the copy source unit.
12 Move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter, then
press [ENTER].
Data, such as libraries and Scene memories, on the copy source unit is copied onto the other
DM1000 via the REMOTE connector. If you select the REQUEST button instead of the
TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter, you can reverse the copy direction.
At this point, Bus 1–8, Aux 1–4, and the Stereo Bus on both DM1000s are integrated, and
the data is output via Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–4, and the Stereo Out on the master unit.
If you solo channels on one of the DM1000s, you can monitor the soloed signals via the
Control Monitor.

Note: You can also link the parameters using the MIDI IN and OUT connection if you set
the CASCADE LINK parameter to “MIDI.”

19
Other Functions

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

270

Chapter 19—Other Functions

Using the AD824
The Yamaha AD824, an 8-channel AD converter, enables you to control its gain and phantom power from a connected DM1000. The DM1000 can control up to four AD824s simultaneously.
If you connect the DM1000 to the AD824 digitally, and connect the DM1000 REMOTE
connector to the AD824 COM PC/RS422 connector using a serial cable, you can use the
AD824 as AD Inputs for which you can preset the gain.
Tip: You cannot store the Phantom power setting as a Scene on the DM1000.
This section describes how to connect and configure the DM1000 and two AD824s.
1 Install digital I/O cards into slots on the DM1000 and AD824.
2 Connect the DM1000 and AD824s as follows.
• Connect the DM1000 REMOTE connector to the COM RS422 connector of the first
AD824 using a 9-pin D-sub reverse cable.
• Connect the COM PC/RS422 connector of the first AD824 to the COM PC/RS422 connector of the second AD824 using a 9-pin D-sub reverse cable.
• Connect the outputs of the digital I/O cards on each AD824 to the inputs of the DM1000
I/O card.
Connection methods and cables vary depending on the specifications of the devices. The
following illustration is an example of a system in which two AD824s are connected via
MY8-AE cards.

IN

IN

OUT

MY8-AE
etc.

MY8-AE
etc.

MY8-AE
etc.
REMOTE
connector

SLOT 2

SLOT 1

COM PC/RS422
connector
WORD CLOCK
INTERNAL
44.1kHz 48kHz

BNC

PEAK
SLOT

PEAK

NOMINAL

NOMINAL

SIGNAL

GAIN
POWER
ON
OFF

dB

SIGNAL

+48V

+48V
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

+48V MASTER
OFF ON

8
SEL

SEL

AD CONVERTER

2

1
+48V

OFF

OFF

1

+48V

ON

OFF

2

5

4

3

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

3

6

+48V

OFF

ON

4

OFF

5

7

+48V

ON

6

8

+48V

OFF

ON

OFF

7

9

+48V

ON

OFF

8

10

+48V

ON

9

OFF

10

11

+48V

ON

OFF

11

12

+48V

ON

OFF

12

13

+48V

ON

OFF

13

14

+48V

ON

OFF

14

OFF

15

16

15

+48V

ON

+48V

ON

OFF

+48V

ON

OFF

AD824

ON

COM RS422
connector

16

PAD
20dB

20dB

-60

-16

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

SIGNAL

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK
SIGNAL

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

0

20dB

-60

-16

GAIN

10

TALKBACK LEVEL

0

-60

-16

GAIN
PEAK

PEAK

SIGNAL

SIGNAL

10

PHONES
LEVEL

GAIN

PHONES

SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING

DISPLAY ACCESS

MIDI

DIO

SETUP

REMOTE

UTILITY

METER

OVER
0

OVER
0

-2

-2

-4

-4

-6

-6

VIEW

-8

INPUT
PATCH

/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY

PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS

EFFECT

OUTPUT
PATCH

SCENE

AUXSELECT
DISPLAY

AUX1

AUX2

AUX5

AUX3

AUX6

AUX4

AUX7

1

-10
-12

-14

-14

-18

-18

-24

-24

-30

-30

-36

-36

-42

-42

-48

-48

-56

-56

-72

-72

L

R

2

3

4

5

6

FREQUENCY

7

8

STEREO

DIRECT

SOLO

CLEAR

HIGH MID

2TR D1

2TR D2

LOW MID

SLOT

BUS

DIMMER TALKBACK

LOW

STEREO

0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL

GAIN

INC

DEC

MY8-AE
etc.

GRAB

AUX8

ENCODER MODE

OUT

DISPLAY

HIGH
Q

-8

-10
-12

MONITOR

EQUALIZER
DISPLAY

DISPLAY

AUTOMIX

COM PC/RS422
connector

SCENE MEMORY

FADER MODE

DISPLAY
FADER

STORE

RECALL

AUX
PAN

AUX

ASSIGN

F1

F2

F4

F3

ENTER

WORD CLOCK

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SOLO

SEL

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

INTERNAL
44.1kHz 48kHz

BNC

PEAK
SLOT

PEAK

NOMINAL

NOMINAL

SIGNAL

GAIN
POWER
ON
OFF

dB

SIGNAL

+48V

+48V
1

2

3

4

5

6

SEL

7

+48V MASTER
OFF ON

8
SEL

AD CONVERTER

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0 +10

0

0

DISPLAY
5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

0

10

5

15

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

5

5
0

10

5

15

0

10

5

15

5

5

5

5
0

10

5

15

5
0

10

5

15

10

15

10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

20

20

15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30 15

30

30

20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40 20

40

40

50 30
60 40
70
50

30
40
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

1
17

50 30
60 40
70
50

2
33

AUX 1

18

50 30
60 40
70
50

3
34

AUX 2

19

50 30
60 40
70
50

4
35

AUX 3

20

50 30
60 40
70
50

5
36

AUX 4

21

50 30
60 40
70
50

6
37

AUX 5

22

50 30
60 40
70
50

7
38

AUX 6

23

50 30
60 40
70
50

8
39

AUX 7

24

50 30
60 40
70
50

9
40

AUX 8

25

10
41

BUS 1

26

50 30
60 40
70
50

50 30
60 40
70
50

11
42

BUS 2

27

50 30
60 40
70
50

12
43

BUS 3

28

50 30
60 40
70
50

13
44

BUS 4

29

50 30
60 40
70
50

14
45

BUS 5

30

46

31

50

50

60
70

60
70

15

BUS 6

AD824

16
47

BUS 7

32

48

BUS 8

STEREO

DM1000 (Master)

Note: Set the AD824 COM PC/RS422 switches to “RS422.” (If these switches are set to “PC,”
the system will not work correctly.)
Tip:
• For information on digital I/O cards that are compatible with the AD824, refer to the AD824
Owner’s Manual or visit the Yamaha Pro Audio web site (http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/)
• Multiple AD824s in a system must have unique IDs.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Using the AD824

271

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
Remote page appears.

2
1

3

This page contains the following parameters:

A REMOTE FUNCTION
This parameter selects a device to be connected to the DM1000 REMOTE connector.

B AD824 section
This section enables you to specify the slot channels that will receive eight channel signals from AD824s that have their ID numbers set to 1 through 4.

C AD824 GAIN/PHANTOM CONTROL section
This section enables you to set the AD824 channel 1–8 gain and the Phantom power on
or off.
• ID #1–#4........................These buttons select the AD824s you want to control.
• 1–8..................................These parameter controls adjust the gain for AD824 channels
1–8.
• +48V ..............................When you turn on these buttons, the phantom power on the
corresponding channels are turned on.
4 Make sure that the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter is set to “AD824,” and
in the AD824 section select the slot channels that receive signals from the
AD824s.
5 Use the parameter controls and buttons in the AD824 GAIN/PHANTOM
CONTROL section to set the channel gain and switch the channel phantom
power on or off.

19
Other Functions

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

272

Chapter 19—Other Functions

Checking the Battery and the System Version
The Utility | Battery page enables you to check the condition of the internal memory-backup battery and the system version number. To locate this page, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [UTILITY] button repeatedly.

1

2
A Status
If the Status is “Okay,” the battery has sufficient voltage for operation. If the Status is
“Voltage low!,” ask your Yamaha dealer to replace the battery as soon as possible. Failure
to replace a low battery may result in data loss.
Note: Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself as a malfunction may occur.

B Ver X.XX (X.XX represents the version number.)
This indicator identifies the system version number. Check the current system version
number before you update the system software.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Initializing the DM1000

273

Initializing the DM1000
You can delete all currently-recorded settings and restore the factory-preset values, and reset
the Operation Lock password to its initial setting. Follow the steps below.
Tip:
• If you want to keep the current internal data, be sure to first back up the data using the
included Studio Manager software.
• You can also store the data to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using
MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 246).
1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off.
2 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button, turn on the
POWER ON/OFF switch.
After a moment, the DM1000 displays the following confirmation window.

3 To reset the DM1000 to factory default settings, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER].
To cancel the initialization operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press
[ENTER].
When the internal data is thoroughly overwritten, the DM1000 restarts using the factory
settings.
4 To reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting, in Step 2, move
the cursor to the PASSWORD button, then press [ENTER].
The password is reset to “1234”.
If you do not take any action after the confirmation window appears, the window automatically closes and the DM1000 restarts without being initialized.

19
Other Functions

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

274

Chapter 19—Other Functions

Calibrating the Faders
The DM1000 motorized fader positions may shift over time depending on the operating
conditions and environment. You can correct the shifted faders using the Calibration function.
1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off.
2 While holding down the [ENTER] button, turn on the POWER ON/OFF
switch.
After a moment, the DM1000 displays a message indicating that the calibration is in
progress. Calibration takes about two minutes. It is important that you do not touch the
faders while this message is displayed.
When calibration is finished, the DM1000 displays a page that enables you to fine-tune the
fader position.
3 Follow the instructions on the display and lower all faders to –∞, then press
[ENTER].
4 Set faders 1–16 to –15 and the Stereo fader to –30, then press [ENTER].
5 Set faders 1–16 to 0, then press [ENTER].
Proceed to the next step without moving the Stereo fader this time.
6 Finally, set faders 1–16 to +10 and the Stereo fader to 0, then press [ENTER].
This is the end of the fader calibration process. The DM1000 restarts in normal mode.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

USER DEFINED KEYS

275

Appendix A: Parameter Lists
USER DEFINED KEYS
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Function
No Assign
Scene MEM. Recall +1
Scene MEM. Recall -1
Scene MEM. Recall No. XX
Effect-1 Lib. Recall +1
Effect-1 Lib. Recall -1
Effect-1 Lib. Recall No.XX
Effect-2 Lib. Recall +1
Effect-2 Lib. Recall -1
Effect-2 Lib. Recall No.XX
Effect-3 Lib. Recall +1
Effect-3 Lib. Recall -1
Effect-3 Lib. Recall No.XX
Effect-4 Lib. Recall +1
Effect-4 Lib. Recall -1
Effect-4 Lib. Recall No.XX
Effect-1 Bypass On/Off
Effect-2 Bypass On/Off
Effect-3 Bypass On/Off
Effect-4 Bypass On/Off
Channel Lib. Recall +1
Channel Lib. Recall -1
Channel Lib. Recall No. XX
GATE Lib. Recall +1
GATE Lib. Recall -1
GATE Lib. Recall No. XX
COMP Lib. Recall +1
COMP Lib. Recall -1
COMP Lib. Recall No. XX
EQ Lib. Recall +1
EQ Lib. Recall -1
EQ Lib. Recall No. XX
Surr Lib. Recall +1
Surr Lib. Recall -1
Surr Lib. Recall No.XX
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute L
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute R
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Ls
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Rs
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute C
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Bs
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute LFE
On/Off
SURR. MONI SLOT1 ON/OFF
SURR. MONI SLOT2 ON/OFF

#
Display

No Assign
Scene +1 Recall
Scene -1 Recall
Scene XX Recall
Fx1 Lib+1 Recall
Fx1 Lib-1 Recall
Fx1 LibXXX RCL.
Fx2 Lib+1 Recall
Fx2 Lib-1 Recall
Fx2 LibXXX RCL.
Fx3 Lib+1 Recall
Fx3 Lib-1 Recall
Fx3 LibXXX RCL.
Fx4 Lib+1 Recall
Fx4 Lib-1 Recall
Fx4 LibXXX RCL.
Fx1 Bypass
Fx2 Bypass
Fx3 Bypass
Fx4 Bypass
CH Lib+1 Recall
CH Lib-1 Recall
CH LibXXX Recall
Gate Lib+1 RCL.
Gate Lib-1 RCL.
Gate LibXXX RCL.
Comp Lib+1 RCL.
Comp Lib-1 RCL.
Comp LibXXX RCL.
EQ Lib+1 Recall
EQ Lib-1 Recall
EQ LibXXX Recall
Surr. Lib+1
Surr. Lib-1
Surr. Libxxx
Surr.Mon L Mute
Surr.Mon R Mute
Surr.Mon Ls Mute
Surr.Mon Rs Mute
Surr.Mon C Mute
Surr.Mon Bs Mute
Surr.Mon LFEMute
Surr.SLOT1 ON
Surr.SLOT2 ON

44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93

Function

Display

SURR. MONI BASS MANAGE
ON/OFF
SURR. MONI SNAP TO 85dB
SPL
Bus to ST Lib. Recall +1
Bus to ST Lib. Recall -1
Bus to ST Lib. Recall No. XX
Input Patch Lib. Recall +1
Input Patch Lib. Recall -1
Input Patch Lib. Recall No. XX
Output Patch Lib. Recall +1
Output Patch Lib. Recall -1
Output Patch Lib. Recall No.
XX
Input Fader Group Enable A
Input Fader Group Enable B
Input Fader Group Enable C
Input Fader Group Enable D
Input Fader Group Enable E
Input Fader Group Enable F
Input Fader Group EnableG
Input Fader Group Enable H
Input MUTE Group Enable I
Input MUTE Group Enable J
Input MUTE Group Enable K
Input MUTE Group Enable L
Input MUTE Group Enable M
Input MUTE Group Enable N
Input MUTE Group Enable O
Input MUTE Group Enable P
Output Fader Group Enable Q
Output Fader Group Enable R
Output Fader Group Enable S
Output Fader Group Enable T
Output MUTE Group Enable U
Output MUTE Group Enable V
Output MUTE Group Enable W
Output MUTE Group Enable X
Automix REC
Automix PLAY
Automix STOP
Automix ABORT
Automix AUTO REC
Automix ENABLE
Automix RETURN
Automix RELATIVE
Automix TOUCH SENSE
Automix UPDATE TO END
Overwrite FADER
Overwrite ON
Overwrite PAN
Overwrite SURROUND
Overwrite EQ

Bass Manage ON
SNAP TO SPL85
BUS to ST Lib+1
BUS to ST Lib-1
BUS to ST LibXX
IN Patch Lib+1
IN Patch Lib-1
IN Patch LibXX
Out Patch Lib+1
Out Patch Lib-1
Out Patch LibXX
IN Fader Group A
IN Fader Group B
IN Fader Group C
IN Fader Group D
IN Fader Group E
IN Fader Group F
IN Fader Group G
IN Fader Group H
IN Mute Group I
IN Mute Group J
IN Mute Group K
IN Mute Group L
IN Mute Group M
IN Mute Group N
IN Mute Group O
IN Mute Group P
OutFader Group Q
OutFader Group R
OutFader Group S
OutFader Group T
Out Mute Group U
Out Mute Group V
Out Mute Group W
Out Mute Group X
Automix REC
Automix PLAY
Automix STOP
Automix ABORT
Automix AUTOREC
Automix ENABLE
Automix RETURN
Automix RELATIVE
Automix T.SENSE
Amx UPDATETO END
Overwrite FADER
Overwrite ON
Overwrite PAN
Overwrite SURR.
Overwrite EQ

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

276

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

#

Function

94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150

Overwrite AUX
Overwrite AUX ON
PEAK HOLD On/Off
OSCILLATOR On/Off
SOLO Enable
Control Room Monitor MONO
Pan / Surround Link
Talkback Assign SLOT1-XX
Talkback Assign SLOT2-XX
Talkback Assign OMNI OUT XX
Channel Name ID/Short
Port Name ID/Short
Channel Copy
Channel Paste
Display Back
Display Forward
UDEF KEYS BANK +1
UDEF KEYS BANK -1
UDEF KEYS BANK X
MIDI NOTE No.XX
MIDI Program change No.XX
MIDI Control Change No.XX
Machine REC
Machine PLAY
Machine STOP
Machine FF
Machine REW
Machine SHUTTLE
Machine SCRUB
Machine LOCATE X
Machine Set LOCATE X
Machine RTZ
Machine Set RTZ
Track Arming 1
Track Arming 2
Track Arming 3
Track Arming 4
Track Arming 5
Track Arming 6
Track Arming 7
Track Arming 8
Track Arming 9
Track Arming 10
Track Arming 11
Track Arming 12
Track Arming 13
Track Arming 14
Track Arming 15
Track Arming 16
Track Arming 17
Track Arming 18
Track Arming 19
Track Arming 20
Track Arming 21
Track Arming 22
Track Arming 23
Track Arming 24

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Display
Overwrite AUX
Overwrite AUX ON
Peak Hold
OSC ON/OFF
SOLO ENABLE
C-R MONO
PAN/SURR LINK
Talkback SLOT1-XX
Talkback SLOT2-XX
Talkback OMNI XX
CH ID/Short
Port D/Short
Channel Copy
Channel Paste
Display Back
Display Forward
UDEF KEYS BANK+1
UDEF KEYS BANK-1
UDEF KEYS BANK x
MIDI NOTE XXX
MIDI PGM XXX
MIDI CC XXX
Machine REC
Machine PLAY
Machine STOP
Machine FF
Machine REW
Machine SHUTTLE
Machine SCRUB
Machine LOCATE X
Machine Capture X
Machine RTZ
Machine Set RTZ
Track Arming 1
Track Arming 2
Track Arming 3
Track Arming 4
Track Arming 5
Track Arming 6
Track Arming 7
Track Arming 8
Track Arming 9
Track Arming 10
Track Arming 11
Track Arming 12
Track Arming 13
Track Arming 14
Track Arming 15
Track Arming 16
Track Arming 17
Track Arming 18
Track Arming 19
Track Arming 20
Track Arming 21
Track Arming 22
Track Arming 23
Track Arming 24

#
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174

Function
Track Arming All Clear
DAW REC
DAW PLAY
DAW STOP
DAW FF
DAW REW
DAW SHUTTLE
DAW SCRUB
DAW AUDITION
DAW PRE
DAW IN
DAW OUT
DAW POST
DAW RTZ
DAW END
DAW ONLINE
DAW LOOP
DAW QUICKPUNCH
DAW GROUP STATUS
DAW AUTO FADER
DAW AUTO MUTE
DAW AUTO PAN
DAW AUTO SEND
DAW AUTO PLUGIN

175 DAW AUTO SEND MUTE
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186

DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO TOUCH
DAW AUTO LATCH
DAW AUTO WRITE
DAW AUTO TRIM
DAW AUTO OFF
DAW AUTO SUSPEND
DAW AUTO STATUS
DAW MONITOR STATUS
DAW CREATE GROUP
DAW SUSPEND GROUP

187 DAW WINDOW TRANSPORT
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205

DAW WINDOW INSERT
DAW WINDOW MIX/EDIT
DAW WINDOW MEM-LOC
DAW WINDOW STATUS
DAW Shortcut UNDO
DAW Shortcut SAVE
DAW Shortcut EDIT MODE
DAW Shortcut EDIT TOOL
DAW Shortcut SHIFT/ADD
DAW Shortcut OPTION/ALL
DAW Shortcut CTRL/CLUCH
DAW Shortcut ALT/FINE
DAW BANK +
DAW BANK DAW Channel +
DAW Channel DAW REC/RDY X
DAW REC/RDY ALL

Display
Track Arming CLR
DAW REC
DAW PLAY
DAW STOP
DAW FF
DAW REW
DAW SHUTTLE
DAW SCRUB
DAW AUDITION
DAW PRE
DAW IN
DAW OUT
DAW POST
DAW RTZ
DAW END
DAW ONLINE
DAW LOOP
DAW QUICKPUNCH
DAW GROUP STATUS
DAW AUTO FADER
DAW AUTO MUTE
DAW AUTO PAN
DAW AUTO SEND
DAW AUTO PLUGIN
DAW AUTO SENDMUTE
DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO TOUCH
DAW AUTO LATCH
DAW AUTO WRITE
DAW AUTO TRIM
DAW AUTO OFF
DAW AUTO SUSPEND
DAW AUTO STATUS
DAW MONI STATUS
DAW CREATE GROUP
DAW SUSPEND GRP
DAW WIN TRANSPORT
DAW WIN INSERT
DAW WIN MIX/EDIT
DAW WIN MEM-LOC
DAW WIN STATUS
DAW UNDO
DAW SAVE
DAW EDIT MODE
DAW EDIT TOOL
DAW SHIFT/ADD
DAW OPTION/ALL
DAW CTRL/CLUCH
DAW ALT/FINE
DAW BANK +
DAW BANK DAW Channel +
DAW Channel DAW REC/RDY X
DAW REC/RDY ALL

USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments

277

USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments
TITLE

BANK A

BANK B

BANK C

BANK D

Surround Monitor

Scene Recall

Group Enable

Automix

1

Snap to SPL85

Scene 1 Recall

IN Fader Group A

Automix ENABLE

2

Bass Manage ON

Scene 2 Recall

IN Mute Group I

Overwrite FADER

3

Surr.Mon L Mute

Scene 3 Recall

IN Fader Group B

Overwrite ON

4

Surr.Mon R Mute

Scene 4 Recall

IN Mute Group J

Overwrite PAN

5

Surr.Mon C Mute

Scene 5 Recall

IN Fader Group C

Overwrite SURR

6

Surr.Mon Bs Mute

Scene 6 Recall

IN Mute Group K

Overwrite AUX

7

Surr.Mon Ls Mute

Scene 7 Recall

IN Fader Group D

Overwrite AUX ON

8

Surr.Mon Rs Mute

Scene 8 Recall

IN Mute Group L

Overwrite EQ

9

Surr.Mon LFEMute

Scene 9 Recall

IN Fader Group E

Automix ABORT

10

No Assign

Scene 10 Recall

IN Mute Group M

Automix AUTOREC

11

Surr Lib-1 Recall

Scene _1 Recall

IN Fader Group F

Automix RETURN

12

Surr Lib+1 Recall

Scene +1 Recall

IN Mute Group N

Amx UPDATE TO END

TITLE

BANK E

BANK F

BANK G

BANK H

DAW 1

DAW 2

Machine Control

Program Change

1

UDEF BANK F

UDEF BANK E

Machine Locate 1

MIDI PGM 1

2

DAW WIN MIX/EDIT

DAW AUTO STATUS

Machine Locate 2

MIDI PGM 2

3

DAW BANK -

DAW BANK -

Machine Locate 3

MIDI PGM 3

4

DAW BANK +

DAW BANK +

Machine Locate 4

MIDI PGM 4

5

DAW CHANNEL -

DAW AUTO READ

Machine SHUTTLE

MIDI PGM 5

6

DAW CHANNEL +

DAW AUTO TOUCH

Machine SCRUB

MIDI PGM 6

7

DAW SHUTTLE

DAW AUTO LATCH

Machine RTZ

MIDI PGM 7

8

DAW SCRUB

DAW AUTO WRITE

Machine REC

MIDI PGM 8

9

DAW STOP

DAW AUTO TRIM

Machine STOP

MIDI PGM 9

10

DAW PLAY

DAW AUTO OFF

Machine PLAY

MIDI PGM 10

11

DAW SHIFT/ADD

DAW AUTO SUSPEND

Machine REW

MIDI PGM 11

12

DAW OPTION/ALL

DAW OPTION/ALL

Machine FF

MIDI PGM 12

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

278

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

Input Patch Parameters
INPUT
Port ID
–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
OMNI1
OMNI2
OMNI3
OMNI4
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
S1-9
S110
S111
S112
S113
S114
S115
S116
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
S2-9
S210
S211
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
FX1-1

Description
NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
OMNI IN 1
OMNI IN 2
OMNI IN 3
OMNI IN 4
Slot1 CH1 IN
Slot1 CH2 IN
Slot1 CH3 IN
Slot1 CH4 IN
Slot1 CH5 IN
Slot1 CH6 IN
Slot1 CH7 IN
Slot1 CH8 IN
Slot1 CH9 IN
Slot1 CH10 IN
Slot1 CH11 IN
Slot1 CH12 IN
Slot1 CH13 IN
Slot1 CH14 IN
Slot1 CH15 IN
Slot1 CH16 IN
Slot2 CH1 IN
Slot2 CH2 IN
Slot2 CH3 IN
Slot2 CH4 IN
Slot2 CH5 IN
Slot2 CH6 IN
Slot2 CH7 IN
Slot2 CH8 IN
Slot2 CH9 IN
Slot2 CH10 IN
Slot2 CH11 IN
Slot2 CH12 IN
Slot2 CH13 IN
Slot2 CH14 IN
Slot2 CH15 IN
Slot2 CH16 IN
Effect1 OUT 1

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

INSERT IN
Port ID
–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
OMNI1
OMNI2
OMNI3
OMNI4
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
S1-9
S110
S111
S112
S113
S114
S115
S116
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
S2-9
S210
S211
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
FX1-1

Description
NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
OMNI IN 1
OMNI IN 2
OMNI IN 3
OMNI IN 4
Slot1 CH1 IN
Slot1 CH2 IN
Slot1 CH3 IN
Slot1 CH4 IN
Slot1 CH5 IN
Slot1 CH6 IN
Slot1 CH7 IN
Slot1 CH8 IN
Slot1 CH9 IN
Slot1 CH10 IN
Slot1 CH11 IN
Slot1 CH12 IN
Slot1 CH13 IN
Slot1 CH14 IN
Slot1 CH15 IN
Slot1 CH16 IN
Slot2 CH1 IN
Slot2 CH2 IN
Slot2 CH3 IN
Slot2 CH4 IN
Slot2 CH5 IN
Slot2 CH6 IN
Slot2 CH7 IN
Slot2 CH8 IN
Slot2 CH9 IN
Slot2 CH10 IN
Slot2 CH11 IN
Slot2 CH12 IN
Slot2 CH13 IN
Slot2 CH14 IN
Slot2 CH15 IN
Slot2 CH16 IN
Effect1 OUT 1

EFFECT IN
Port ID

Description

–
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
INSCH1
INSCH2
INSCH3
INSCH4
INSCH5
INSCH6
INSCH7
INSCH8
INSCH9
INSCH10
INSCH11
INSCH12
INSCH13
INSCH14
INSCH15
INSCH16
INSCH17
INSCH18
INSCH19
INSCH20
INSCH21
INSCH22
INSCH23
INSCH24
INSCH25
INSCH26
INSCH27
INSCH28
INSCH29
INSCH30
INSCH31
INSCH32
INSCH33
INSCH34
INSCH35
INSCH36
INSCH37
INSCH38
INSCH39
INSCH40
INSCH41
INSCH42
INSCH43
INSCH44
INSCH45

NONE
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
InsertOut-CH1
InsertOut-CH2
InsertOut-CH3
InsertOut-CH4
InsertOut-CH5
InsertOut-CH6
InsertOut-CH7
InsertOut-CH8
InsertOut-CH9
InsertOut-CH10
InsertOut-CH11
InsertOut-CH12
InsertOut-CH13
InsertOut-CH14
InsertOut-CH15
InsertOut-CH16
InsertOut-CH17
InsertOut-CH18
InsertOut-CH19
InsertOut-CH20
InsertOut-CH21
InsertOut-CH22
InsertOut-CH23
InsertOut-CH24
InsertOut-CH25
InsertOut-CH26
InsertOut-CH27
InsertOut-CH28
InsertOut-CH29
InsertOut-CH30
InsertOut-CH31
InsertOut-CH32
InsertOut-CH33
InsertOut-CH34
InsertOut-CH35
InsertOut-CH36
InsertOut-CH37
InsertOut-CH38
InsertOut-CH39
InsertOut-CH40
InsertOut-CH41
InsertOut-CH42
InsertOut-CH43
InsertOut-CH44
InsertOut-CH45

CASCADE
Port ID
–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
OMNI1
OMNI2
OMNI3
OMNI4
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
S1-9
S110
S111
S112
S113
S114
S115
S116
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
S2-9
S210
S211
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
2TD1L

Description
NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
OMNI IN 1
OMNI IN 2
OMNI IN 3
OMNI IN 4
Slot1 CH1 IN
Slot1 CH2 IN
Slot1 CH3 IN
Slot1 CH4 IN
Slot1 CH5 IN
Slot1 CH6 IN
Slot1 CH7 IN
Slot1 CH8 IN
Slot1 CH9 IN
Slot1 CH10 IN
Slot1 CH11 IN
Slot1 CH12 IN
Slot1 CH13 IN
Slot1 CH14 IN
Slot1 CH15 IN
Slot1 CH16 IN
Slot2 CH1 IN
Slot2 CH2 IN
Slot2 CH3 IN
Slot2 CH4 IN
Slot2 CH5 IN
Slot2 CH6 IN
Slot2 CH7 IN
Slot2 CH8 IN
Slot2 CH9 IN
Slot2 CH10 IN
Slot2 CH11 IN
Slot2 CH12 IN
Slot2 CH13 IN
Slot2 CH14 IN
Slot2 CH15 IN
Slot2 CH16 IN
2TR IN Dig.1 L

Input Patch Parameters

INPUT
Port ID
FX1-2
FX1-3
FX1-4
FX1-5
FX1-6
FX1-7
FX1-8
FX2-1
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
2D1L
2D1R
2D2L
2D2R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8

Description
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect1 OUT 3
Effect1 OUT 4
Effect1 OUT 5
Effect1 OUT 6
Effect1 OUT 7
Effect1 OUT 8
Effect2 OUT 1
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2
2TR IN Dig.1 L
2TR IN Dig.1 R
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TR IN Dig.2 R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8

INSERT IN
Port ID
FX1-2
FX1-3
FX1-4
FX1-5
FX1-6
FX1-7
FX1-8
FX2-1
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
2D1L
2D1R
2D2L
2D2R

Description
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect1 OUT 3
Effect1 OUT 4
Effect1 OUT 5
Effect1 OUT 6
Effect1 OUT 7
Effect1 OUT 8
Effect2 OUT 1
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2
2TR IN Dig.1 L
2TR IN Dig.1 R
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TR IN Dig.2 R

EFFECT IN
Port ID
INS CH46
INS CH47
INS CH48
INS BUS1
INS BUS2
INS BUS3
INS BUS4
INS BUS5
INS BUS6
INS BUS7
INS BUS8
INS AUX1
INS AUX2
INS AUX3
INS AUX4
INS AUX5
INS AUX6
INS AUX7
INS AUX8
INS ST-L
INS ST-R
FX1-1
FX1-2
FX1-3
FX1-4
FX1-5
FX1-6
FX1-7
FX1-8
FX2-1
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2

Description
InsertOut-CH46
InsertOut-CH47
InsertOut-CH48
InsertOut-BUS1
InsertOut-BUS2
InsertOut-BUS3
InsertOut-BUS4
InsertOut-BUS5
InsertOut-BUS6
InsertOut-BUS7
InsertOut-BUS8
InsertOut-AUX1
InsertOut-AUX2
InsertOut-AUX3
InsertOut-AUX4
InsertOut-AUX5
InsertOut-AUX6
InsertOut-AUX7
InsertOut-AUX8
InsertOut-STL
InsertOut-STR
Effect1 OUT 1
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect1 OUT 3
Effect1 OUT 4
Effect1 OUT 5
Effect1 OUT 6
Effect1 OUT 7
Effect1 OUT 8
Effect2 OUT 1
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2

279

CASCADE
Port ID
2D1R
2D2L
2D2R

Description
2TR IN Dig.1 R
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TR IN Dig.2 R

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

280

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

Initial Input Patch Settings
CHANNEL

EFFECT IN PATCH

1

AD1

1-1

AUX1

2

AD2

1-2

NONE

3

AD3

1-3

NONE

4

AD4

1-4

NONE

5

AD5

1-5

NONE

6

AD6

1-6

NONE

7

AD7

1-7

NONE

8

AD8

1-8

NONE

9

AD9

2-1

AUX2

10

AD10

2-2

NONE

11

AD11

3-1

AUX3

12

AD12

3-2

NONE

13

AD13

4-1

AUX4

14

AD14

4-2

NONE

15

AD15

16

AD16

17

S1-1

18

S1-2

19

S1-3

20

S1-4

21

S1-5

22

S1-6

23

S1-7

24

S1-8

25

S2-1

26

S2-2

27

S2-3

28

S2-4

29

S2-5

30

S2-6

31

S2-7

32

S2-8

33

FX1-1

34

FX1-2

35

FX2-1

36

FX2-2

37

FX3-1

38

FX3-2

39

FX4-1

40

FX4-2

EFFECT1

REVERB HALL

41

2TD1L

EFFECT2

REVERB ROOM

42

2TD1R

EFFECT3

REVERB STAGE

43

2TD2L

EFFECT4

REVERB PLATE

44

2TD2R

45

OMNI1

46

OMNI2

47

OMNI3

48

OMNI4

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

CASCADE IN PATCH
BUS1

NONE

BUS2

NONE

BUS3

NONE

BUS4

NONE

BUS5

NONE

BUS6

NONE

BUS7

NONE

BUS8

NONE

AUX1

NONE

AUX2

NONE

AUX3

NONE

AUX4

NONE

AUX56

NONE

AUX6

NONE

AUX7

NONE

AUX8

NONE

ST L

NONE

ST R

NONE

SOLO L

NONE

SOLO R

NONE

EFFECT TYPE

(mono input)

Initial Input Patch Settings

281

CHANNEL NAME
CHANNEL ID

SHORT

LONG

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH2

CH2

CH2

CH2

CH3

CH3

CH3

CH3

CH4

CH4

CH4

CH4

CH5

CH5

CH5

CH5

CH6

CH6

CH6

CH6

CH7

CH7

CH7

CH7

CH8

CH8

CH8

CH8

CH9

CH9

CH9

CH9

CH10

CH10

CH10

CH10

CH11

CH11

CH11

CH11

CH12

CH12

CH12

CH12

CH13

CH13

CH13

CH13

CH14

CH14

CH14

CH14

CH15

CH15

CH15

CH15

CH16

CH16

CH16

CH16

CH17

CH17

CH17

CH17

CH18

CH18

CH18

CH18

CH19

CH19

CH19

CH19

CH20

CH20

CH20

CH20

CH21

CH21

CH21

CH21

CH22

CH22

CH22

CH22

CH23

CH23

CH23

CH23

CH24

CH24

CH24

CH24

CH25

CH25

CH25

CH25

CH26

CH26

CH26

CH26

CH27

CH27

CH27

CH27

CH28

CH28

CH28

CH28

CH29

CH29

CH29

CH29

CH30

CH30

CH30

CH30

CH31

CH31

CH31

CH31

CH32

CH32

CH32

CH32

CH33

CH33

CH33

CH33

CH34

CH34

CH34

CH34

CH35

CH35

CH35

CH35

CH36

CH36

CH36

CH36

CH37

CH37

CH37

CH37

CH38

CH38

CH38

CH38

CH39

CH39

CH39

CH39

CH40

CH40

CH40

CH40

CH41

CH41

CH41

CH41

CH42

CH42

CH42

CH42

CH43

CH43

CH43

CH43

CH44

CH44

CH44

CH44

CH45

CH45

CH45

CH45

CH46

CH46

CH46

CH46

CH47

CH47

CH47

CH47

CH48

CH48

CH48

CH48

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

282

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

Output Patch Parameters
SLOT, OMNI

INSERT IN

DIRECT OUT

Source

Description

Source

Description

Source

Description

–
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO-L
STEREO-R
INSCH1
INSCH2
INSCH3
INSCH4
INSCH5
INSCH6
INSCH7
INSCH8
INSCH9
INSCH10
INSCH11
INSCH12
INSCH13
INSCH14
INSCH15
INSCH16
INSCH17
INSCH18
INSCH19
INSCH20
INSCH21
INSCH22
INSCH23
INSCH24
INSCH25
INSCH26
INSCH27
INSCH28
INSCH29
INSCH30
INSCH31
INSCH32
INSCH33
INSCH34
INSCH35

NONE
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO L
STEREO R
InsertOut-CH1
InsertOut-CH2
InsertOut-CH3
InsertOut-CH4
InsertOut-CH5
InsertOut-CH6
InsertOut-CH7
InsertOut-CH8
InsertOut-CH9
InsertOut-CH10
InsertOut-CH11
InsertOut-CH12
InsertOut-CH13
InsertOut-CH14
InsertOut-CH15
InsertOut-CH16
InsertOut-CH17
InsertOut-CH18
InsertOut-CH19
InsertOut-CH20
InsertOut-CH21
InsertOut-CH22
InsertOut-CH23
InsertOut-CH24
InsertOut-CH25
InsertOut-CH26
InsertOut-CH27
InsertOut-CH28
InsertOut-CH29
InsertOut-CH30
InsertOut-CH31
InsertOut-CH32
InsertOut-CH33
InsertOut-CH34
InsertOut-CH35

–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
OMNI1
OMNI2
OMNI3
OMNI4
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
S1-9
S110
S111
S112
S113
S114
S115
S116
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
S2-9
S210
S211
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
FX1-1

NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
OMNI IN 1
OMNI IN 2
OMNI IN 3
OMNI IN 4
Slot1 CH1 IN
Slot1 CH2 IN
Slot1 CH3 IN
Slot1 CH4 IN
Slot1 CH5 IN
Slot1 CH6 IN
Slot1 CH7 IN
Slot1 CH8 IN
Slot1 CH9 IN
Slot1 CH10 IN
Slot1 CH11 IN
Slot1 CH12 IN
Slot1 CH13 IN
Slot1 CH14 IN
Slot1 CH15 IN
Slot1 CH16 IN
Slot2 CH1 IN
Slot2 CH2 IN
Slot2 CH3 IN
Slot2 CH4 IN
Slot2 CH5 IN
Slot2 CH6 IN
Slot2 CH7 IN
Slot2 CH8 IN
Slot2 CH9 IN
Slot2 CH10 IN
Slot2 CH11 IN
Slot2 CH12 IN
Slot2 CH13 IN
Slot2 CH14 IN
Slot2 CH15 IN
Slot2 CH16 IN
Effect1 OUT 1

–
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
S1-9
S110
S111
S112
S113
S114
S115
S116
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
S2-9
S210
S211
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
OMNI1
OMNI2
OMNI3
OMNI4
OMNI5
OMNI6
OMNI7
OMNI8
2TD1L
2TD1R
2TD2L
2TD2R
OMNI9
OMNI10
OMNI11
OMNI12
—
—
—
—
—

NONE
Slot1 CH1 OUT
Slot1 CH2 OUT
Slot1 CH3 OUT
Slot1 CH4 OUT
Slot1 CH5 OUT
Slot1 CH6 OUT
Slot1 CH7 OUT
Slot1 CH8 OUT
Slot1 CH9 OUT
Slot1 CH10 OUT
Slot1 CH11 OUT
Slot1 CH12 OUT
Slot1 CH13 OUT
Slot1 CH14 OUT
Slot1 CH15 OUT
Slot1 CH16 OUT
Slot2 CH1 OUT
Slot2 CH2 OUT
Slot2 CH3 OUT
Slot2 CH4 OUT
Slot2 CH5 OUT
Slot2 CH6 OUT
Slot2 CH7 OUT
Slot2 CH8 OUT
Slot2 CH9 OUT
Slot2 CH10 OUT
Slot2 CH11 OUT
Slot2 CH12 OUT
Slot2 CH13 OUT
Slot2 CH14 OUT
Slot2 CH15 OUT
Slot2 CH16 OUT
OMNI OUT 1
OMNI OUT 2
OMNI OUT 3
OMNI OUT 4
OMNI OUT 5
OMNI OUT 6
OMNI OUT 7
OMNI OUT 8
2TR OUT Dig.1 L
2TR OUT Dig.1 R
2TR OUT Dig.2 L
2TR OUT Dig.2 R
OMNI OUT 9
OMNI OUT 10
OMNI OUT 11
OMNI OUT 12
—
—
—
—
—

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

2TR OUT Digital
Source

Description

–
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO-L
STEREO-R
INSCH1
INSCH2
INSCH3
INSCH4
INSCH5
INSCH6
INSCH7
INSCH8
INSCH9
INSCH10
INSCH11
INSCH12
INSCH13
INSCH14
INSCH15
INSCH16
INSCH17
INSCH18
INSCH19
INSCH20
INSCH21
INSCH22
INSCH23
INSCH24
INSCH25
INSCH26
INSCH27
INSCH28
INSCH29
INSCH30
INSCH31
INSCH32
INSCH33
INSCH34
INSCH35

NONE
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO L
STEREO R
InsertOut-CH1
InsertOut-CH2
InsertOut-CH3
InsertOut-CH4
InsertOut-CH5
InsertOut-CH6
InsertOut-CH7
InsertOut-CH8
InsertOut-CH9
InsertOut-CH10
InsertOut-CH11
InsertOut-CH12
InsertOut-CH13
InsertOut-CH14
InsertOut-CH15
InsertOut-CH16
InsertOut-CH17
InsertOut-CH18
InsertOut-CH19
InsertOut-CH20
InsertOut-CH21
InsertOut-CH22
InsertOut-CH23
InsertOut-CH24
InsertOut-CH25
InsertOut-CH26
InsertOut-CH27
InsertOut-CH28
InsertOut-CH29
InsertOut-CH30
InsertOut-CH31
InsertOut-CH32
InsertOut-CH33
InsertOut-CH34
InsertOut-CH35

Output Patch Parameters

SLOT, OMNI
Source

Description

INSCH36
INSCH37
INSCH38
INSCH39
INSCH40
INSCH41
INSCH42
INSCH43
INSCH44
INSCH45
INSCH46
INSCH47
INSCH48
INSBUS1
INSBUS2
INSBUS3
INSBUS4
INSBUS5
INSBUS6
INSBUS7
INSBUS8
INSAUX1
INSAUX2
INSAUX3
INSAUX4
INSAUX5
INSAUX6
INSAUX7
INSAUX8
INSSTL
INSSTR
Surr L
Surr R
Surr Ls
Surr Rs
Surr C
Surr SW
Surr Ls2
Surr Rs2
CR-L
CR-R
CAS BUS1
CAS BUS2
CAS BUS3
CAS BUS4
CAS BUS5
CAS BUS6
CAS BUS7
CAS BUS8
CAS AUX1
CAS AUX2
CAS AUX3
CAS AUX4
CAS AUX5
CAS AUX6
CAS AUX7

InsertOut-CH36
InsertOut-CH37
InsertOut-CH38
InsertOut-CH39
InsertOut-CH40
InsertOut-CH41
InsertOut-CH42
InsertOut-CH43
InsertOut-CH44
InsertOut-CH45
InsertOut-CH46
InsertOut-CH47
InsertOut-CH48
InsertOut-BUS1
InsertOut-BUS2
InsertOut-BUS3
InsertOut-BUS4
InsertOut-BUS5
InsertOut-BUS6
InsertOut-BUS7
InsertOut-BUS8
InsertOut-AUX1
InsertOut-AUX2
InsertOut-AUX3
InsertOut-AUX4
InsertOut-AUX5
InsertOut-AUX6
InsertOut-AUX7
InsertOut-AUX8
InsertOut-STL
InsertOut-STR
Surr Monitor L
Surr Monitor R
Surr Monitor Ls
Surr Monitor Rs
Surr Monitor C
Surr Monitor SW
Surr Monitor Ls2
Surr Monitor Rs2
Control Room L
Control Room R
Cascade Out Bus1
Cascade Out Bus2
Cascade Out Bus3
Cascade Out Bus4
Cascade Out Bus5
Cascade Out Bus6
Cascade Out Bus7
Cascade Out Bus8
Cascade Out Aux1
Cascade Out Aux2
Cascade Out Aux3
Cascade Out Aux4
Cascade Out Aux5
Cascade Out Aux6
Cascade Out Aux7

INSERT IN
Source
FX1-2
FX1-3
FX1-4
FX1-5
FX1-6
FX1-7
FX1-8
FX2-1
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
2TD1L
2TD1R
2TD2L
2TD2R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Description
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect1 OUT 3
Effect1 OUT 4
Effect1 OUT 5
Effect1 OUT 6
Effect1 OUT 7
Effect1 OUT 8
Effect2 OUT 1
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2
2TR IN Dig.1 L
2TR IN Dig.1 R
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TR IN Dig.2 R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

DIRECT OUT

283

2TR OUT Digital

Source

Description

Source

Description

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

INSCH36
INSCH37
INSCH38
INSCH39
INSCH40
INSCH41
INSCH42
INSCH43
INSCH44
INSCH45
INSCH46
INSCH47
INSCH48
INSBUS1
INSBUS2
INSBUS3
INSBUS4
INSBUS5
INSBUS6
INSBUS7
INSBUS8
INSAUX1
INSAUX2
INSAUX3
INSAUX4
INSAUX5
INSAUX6
INSAUX7
INSAUX8
INSSTL
INSSTR
CR-L
CR-R
CAS BUS1
CAS BUS2
CAS BUS3
CAS BUS4
CAS BUS5
CAS BUS6
CAS BUS7
CAS BUS8
CAS AUX1
CAS AUX2
CAS AUX3
CAS AUX4
CAS AUX5
CAS AUX6
CAS AUX7
CAS AUX8
CAS ST_L
CAS ST_R
CAS SO_L
CAS SO_R
SOLO L
SOLO R
—

InsertOut-CH36
InsertOut-CH37
InsertOut-CH38
InsertOut-CH39
InsertOut-CH40
InsertOut-CH41
InsertOut-CH42
InsertOut-CH43
InsertOut-CH44
InsertOut-CH45
InsertOut-CH46
InsertOut-CH47
InsertOut-CH48
InsertOut-BUS1
InsertOut-BUS2
InsertOut-BUS3
InsertOut-BUS4
InsertOut-BUS5
InsertOut-BUS6
InsertOut-BUS7
InsertOut-BUS8
InsertOut-AUX1
InsertOut-AUX2
InsertOut-AUX3
InsertOut-AUX4
InsertOut-AUX5
InsertOut-AUX6
InsertOut-AUX7
InsertOut-AUX8
InsertOut-STL
InsertOut-STR
Control Room L
Control Room R
Cascade Out Bus1
Cascade Out Bus2
Cascade Out Bus3
Cascade Out Bus4
Cascade Out Bus5
Cascade Out Bus6
Cascade Out Bus7
Cascade Out Bus8
Cascade Out Aux1
Cascade Out Aux2
Cascade Out Aux3
Cascade Out Aux4
Cascade Out Aux5
Cascade Out Aux6
Cascade Out Aux7
Cascade Out Aux8
Cascade STEREO_L
Cascade STEREO_R
Cascade SOLO_L
Cascade SOLO_R
SOLO OUT L
SOLO OUT R
—

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

284

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

SLOT, OMNI

INSERT IN

DIRECT OUT

2TR OUT Digital

Source

Description

Source

Description

Source

Description

Source

Description

CAS AUX8
CAS ST_L
CAS ST_R
CAS SO_L
CAS SO_R
SOLO L
SOLO R
Moni L
Moni R
Moni Ls
Moni Rs
Moni C
Moni Bs
Moni LFE

Cascade Out Aux8
Cascade STEREO_L
Cascade STEREO_R
Cascade SOLO_L
Cascade SOLO_R
SOLO OUT L
SOLO OUT R
Moni Matrix L
Moni Matrix R
Moni Matrix Ls
Moni Matrix Rs
Moni Matrix C
Moni Matrix Bs
Moni Matrix LFE

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Initial Output Patch Settings
SLOT

OMNI OUT

SLOT1-1

BUS1

1

AUX1

SLOT1-2

BUS2

2

AUX2

SLOT1-3

BUS3

3

AUX3

SLOT1-4

BUS4

4

AUX4

SLOT1-5

BUS5

5

AUX5

SLOT1-6

BUS6

6

AUX6

SLOT1-7

BUS7

7

AUX7

SLOT1-8

BUS8

8

AUX8

SLOT1-9

BUS1

9

ST L

SLOT1-10

BUS2

10

ST R

SLOT1-11

BUS3

11

C-R L

SLOT1-12

BUS4

12

C-R R

SLOT1-13

BUS5

SLOT1-14

BUS6

SLOT1-15

BUS7

SLOT1-16

BUS8

SLOT2-1

BUS1

SLOT2-2

BUS2

SLOT2-3

BUS3

SLOT2-4

BUS4

SLOT2-5

BUS5

SLOT2-6

BUS6

SLOT2-7

BUS7

SLOT2-8

BUS8

SLOT2-9

BUS1

SLOT2-10

BUS2

SLOT2-11

BUS3

SLOT2-12

BUS4

SLOT2-13

BUS5

SLOT2-14

BUS6

SLOT2-15

BUS7

SLOT2-16

BUS8

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

285

Initial Output Patch Settings

DIRECT OUT

2TR OUT Digital

1

SLOT1-1

1L

ST L

2

SLOT1-2

1R

ST R

3

SLOT1-3

2L

ST L

4

SLOT1-4

2R

ST R

5

SLOT1-5

6

SLOT1-6

7

SLOT1-7

8

SLOT1-8

9

SLOT2-1

10
11
12
13
14

SLOT2-2
SLOT2-3
SLOT2-4
SLOT2-5
SLOT2-6

15

SLOT2-7

16

SLOT2-8

17

NONE

18

NONE

19
20
21
22

NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE

23

NONE

24

NONE

25

NONE

26

NONE

27

NONE

28

NONE

29

NONE

30

NONE

31

NONE

32

NONE

33

NONE

34

NONE

35

NONE

36

NONE

37

NONE

38

NONE

39

NONE

40

NONE

41

NONE

42

NONE

43

NONE

44

NONE

45

NONE

46

NONE

47

NONE

48

CHANNEL NAME
CHANNEL ID

SHORT

LONG

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX6

AUX6

AUX6

AUX6

AUX7

AUX7

AUX7

AUX7

AUX8

AUX8

AUX8

AUX8

BUS1

BUS1

BUS1

BUS1

BUS2

BUS2

BUS2

BUS2

BUS3

BUS3

BUS3

BUS3

BUS4

BUS4

BUS4

BUS4

BUS5

BUS5

BUS5

BUS5

BUS6

BUS6

BUS6

BUS6

BUS7

BUS7

BUS7

BUS7

BUS8

BUS8

BUS8

BUS8

STEREO

ST

ST

STEREO

NONE
ST IN has no DIRECT OUT

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

286

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

GPI Trigger Source List
#

Source

#

Source

#

Source

#

Source

0

NO ASSIGN

53

CH53 FADER ON

106 CH33 FADER OFF

159 UDEF13 LATCH

1

CH1 FADER ON

54

CH54 FADER ON

107 CH34 FADER OFF

160 UDEF14 LATCH

2

CH2 FADER ON

55

CH55 FADER ON

108 CH35 FADER OFF

161 UDEF15 LATCH

3

CH3 FADER ON

56

CH56 FADER ON

109 CH36 FADER OFF

162 UDEF16 LATCH

4

CH4 FADER ON

57

BUS1 FADER ON

110 CH37 FADER OFF

163 UDEF1 UNLATCH

5

CH5 FADER ON

58

BUS2 FADER ON

111 CH38 FADER OFF

164 UDEF2 UNLATCH

6

CH6 FADER ON

59

BUS3 FADER ON

112 CH39 FADER OFF

165 UDEF3 UNLATCH

7

CH7 FADER ON

60

BUS4 FADER ON

113 CH40 FADER OFF

166 UDEF4 UNLATCH

8

CH8 FADER ON

61

BUS5 FADER ON

114 CH41 FADER OFF

167 UDEF5 UNLATCH

9

CH9 FADER ON

62

BUS6 FADER ON

115 CH42 FADER OFF

168 UDEF6 UNLATCH

10

CH10 FADER ON

63

BUS7 FADER ON

116 CH43 FADER OFF

169 UDEF7 UNLATCH

11

CH11 FADER ON

64

BUS8 FADER ON

117 CH44 FADER OFF

170 UDEF8 UNLATCH

12

CH12 FADER ON

65

AUX1 FADER ON

118 CH45 FADER OFF

171 UDEF9 UNLATCH

13

CH13 FADER ON

66

AUX2 FADER ON

119 CH46 FADER OFF

172 UDEF10 UNLATCH

14

CH14 FADER ON

67

AUX3 FADER ON

120 CH47 FADER OFF

173 UDEF11 UNLATCH

15

CH15 FADER ON

68

AUX4 FADER ON

121 CH48 FADER OFF

174 UDEF12 UNLATCH

16

CH16 FADER ON

69

AUX5 FADER ON

122 CH49 FADER OFF

175 UDEF13 UNLATCH

17

CH17 FADER ON

70

AUX6 FADER ON

123 CH50 FADER OFF

176 UDEF14 UNLATCH

18

CH18 FADER ON

71

AUX7 FADER ON

124 CH51 FADER OFF

177 UDEF15 UNLATCH

19

CH19 FADER ON

72

AUX8 FADER ON

125 CH52 FADER OFF

178 UDEF16 UNLATCH

20

CH20 FADER ON

73

STEREO FADER ON

126 CH53 FADER OFF

179 REC LAMP

21

CH21 FADER ON

74

CH1 FADER OFF

127 CH54 FADER OFF

180 POWER ON

22

CH22 FADER ON

75

CH2 FADER OFF

128 CH55 FADER OFF

23

CH23 FADER ON

76

CH3 FADER OFF

129 CH56 FADER OFF

24

CH24 FADER ON

77

CH4 FADER OFF

130 BUS1 FADER OFF

25

CH25 FADER ON

78

CH5 FADER OFF

131 BUS2 FADER OFF

26

CH26 FADER ON

79

CH6 FADER OFF

132 BUS3 FADER OFF

27

CH27 FADER ON

80

CH7 FADER OFF

133 BUS4 FADER OFF

28

CH28 FADER ON

81

CH8 FADER OFF

134 BUS5 FADER OFF

29

CH29 FADER ON

82

CH9 FADER OFF

135 BUS6 FADER OFF

30

CH30 FADER ON

83

CH10 FADER OFF

136 BUS7 FADER OFF

31

CH31 FADER ON

84

CH11 FADER OFF

137 BUS8 FADER OFF

32

CH32 FADER ON

85

CH12 FADER OFF

138 AUX1 FADER OFF

33

CH33 FADER ON

86

CH13 FADER OFF

139 AUX2 FADER OFF

34

CH34 FADER ON

87

CH14 FADER OFF

140 AUX3 FADER OFF

35

CH35 FADER ON

88

CH15 FADER OFF

141 AUX4 FADER OFF

36

CH36 FADER ON

89

CH16 FADER OFF

142 AUX5 FADER OFF

37

CH37 FADER ON

90

CH17 FADER OFF

143 AUX6 FADER OFF

38

CH38 FADER ON

91

CH18 FADER OFF

144 AUX7 FADER OFF

39

CH39 FADER ON

92

CH19 FADER OFF

145 AUX8 FADER OFF

40

CH40 FADER ON

93

CH20 FADER OFF

146 STEREO FADER OFF

41

CH41 FADER ON

94

CH21 FADER OFF

147 UDEF1 LATCH

42

CH42 FADER ON

95

CH22 FADER OFF

148 UDEF2 LATCH

43

CH43 FADER ON

96

CH23 FADER OFF

149 UDEF3 LATCH

44

CH44 FADER ON

97

CH24 FADER OFF

150 UDEF4 LATCH

45

CH45 FADER ON

98

CH25 FADER OFF

151 UDEF5 LATCH

46

CH46 FADER ON

99

CH26 FADER OFF

152 UDEF6 LATCH

47

CH47 FADER ON

100 CH27 FADER OFF

153 UDEF7 LATCH

48

CH48 FADER ON

101 CH28 FADER OFF

154 UDEF8 LATCH

49

CH49 FADER ON

102 CH29 FADER OFF

155 UDEF9 LATCH

50

CH50 FADER ON

103 CH30 FADER OFF

156 UDEF10 LATCH

51

CH51 FADER ON

104 CH31 FADER OFF

157 UDEF11 LATCH

52

CH52 FADER ON

105 CH32 FADER OFF

158 UDEF12 LATCH

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

287

User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings

User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
Bank 1 (GM Vol & Pan)
ID

Name
Short

Long

Controller
ON

RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER

Data Format
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B0

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B0

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B1

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B1

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B2

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B2

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B3

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B3

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B4

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B4

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B5

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B5

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B6

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B6

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B7

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B7

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B8

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B8

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B9

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B9

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BA

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BA

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BB

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BB

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BC

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BC

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BD

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BD

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BE

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BE

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BF

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BF

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

288

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

Bank 2 (GM Vol & Effect 1)
ID

Name
Short

Long

Controller
ON

RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Data Format
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B0

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B0

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B1

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B1

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

FAD END
–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B2

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B2

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B3

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B3

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B4

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B4

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B5

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B5

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B6

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B6

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B7

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B7

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B8

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B8

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B9

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

B9

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BA

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BA

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BB

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BB

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BC

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BC

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BD

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BD

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BE

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BE

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

END

–

–

–

–

–

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BF

0C ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BF

07

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FAD END

289

User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings

Bank 3 (XG Vol & Pan)
ID

Name
Short

Long

Controller

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

00

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

00

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM01 XG01

XG-CH01 VOL&PAN

ON
RM02 XG02

XG-CH02 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

01

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

01

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM03 XG03

XG-CH03 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

02

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

02

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM04 XG04

XG-CH04 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

03

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

03

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM05 XG05

XG-CH05 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

04

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

04

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM06 XG06

XG-CH06 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

05

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

05

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM07 XG07

XG-CH07 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

06

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

06

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM08 XG08

XG-CH08 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

07

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

07

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM09 XG09

XG-CH09 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

08

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

08

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM10 XG10

XG-CH10 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

09

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

09

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM11 XG11

XG-CH11 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0A

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0A

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM12 XG12

XG-CH12 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0B

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0B

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM13 XG13

XG-CH13 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0C

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0C

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM14 XG14

XG-CH14 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0D

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0D

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM15 XG15

XG-CH15 VOL&PAN

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0E

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0E

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON
RM16 XG16

XG-CH16 VOL&PAN

Data Format
1

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0F

0E

ENC

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

F0

43

10

4C

08

0F

0B

FAD

F7

END

–

–

–

–

–

–

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

290

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

Bank 4 (Nuendo VST Mixer)
ID

Name
Short

RM01 CH1

RM02 CH2

RM03 CH3

RM04 CH4

RM05 CH5

RM06 CH6

RM07 CH7

RM08 CH8

RM09 CH9

RM10 CH10

RM11 CH11

RM12 CH12

RM13 CH13

RM14 CH14

RM15 CH15

RM16 CH16

Long
VST MIXER CH1

VST MIXER CH2

VST MIXER CH3

VST MIXER CH4

VST MIXER CH5

VST MIXER CH6

VST MIXER CH7

VST MIXER CH8

VST MIXER CH9

VST MIXER CH10

VST MIXER CH11

VST MIXER CH12

VST MIXER CH13

VST MIXER CH14

VST MIXER CH15

VST MIXER CH16

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Controller

Data Format
1

2

ON

B0

40

ENCODER

B0

FADER

B0

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

B1

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

B1

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

B1

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

B2

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

B2

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

B2

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

B3

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

B3

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

B3

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

B4

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

B4

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

B4

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

B5

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

B5

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

B5

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

B6

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

B6

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

B6

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

B7

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

B7

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

B7

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

B8

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

B8

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

B8

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

B9

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

B9

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

B9

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

BA

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

BA

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

BA

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

BB

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

BB

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

BB

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

BC

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

BC

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

BC

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

BD

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

BD

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

BD

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

BE

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

BE

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

BE

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

ON

BF

40

SW END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

ENCODER

BF

0A

ENC END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

FADER

BF

07

FAD END

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Effects Parameters

291

Effects Parameters
REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO

0.1–2.4

Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

E/R DLY

0.0–100.0 ms

Delay between early reflections and reverb

E/R BAL.

0–100%

Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

GATE LVL

OFF, –60 to 0 dB

Level at which gate kicks in

ATTACK

0–120 ms

Gate opening speed

HOLD

1

Gate open time

DECAY

2

Gate closing speed

1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz), 0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz),
0.01 ms–981 ms (fs=96 kHz)
2. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)

EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter

Range

Description

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reflection simulation

ROOMSIZE

0.1–20.0

Reflection spacing

LIVENESS

0–10

Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF.

0–10

Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)

DENSITY

0–100%

Reflection density

ER NUM.

1–19

Number of early reflections

FB.GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

292

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter

Range

Description

TYPE

Type-A, Type-B

Type of early reflection simulation

ROOMSIZE

0.1–20.0

Reflection spacing

LIVENESS

0–10

Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF.

0–10

Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)

DENSITY

0–100%

Reflection density

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback ratio

ER NUM.

1–19

Number of early reflections

FB.GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

MONO DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay.
Parameter

Range

Description

DELAY

0.0–2730.0 ms

Delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

1.

(Max. value depends on tempo
setting)

STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Range

Parameter

Description

DELAY L

0.0–1350.0 ms

Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1350.0 ms

Right channel delay time

FB. G L

–99 to +99%

Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB. G R

–99 to +99%

Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel
DELAY

NOTE R

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY

1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

293

MOD. DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Parameter

Range

Description

DELAY

0.0–2725.0 ms

Delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY.NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

MOD.NOTE

2

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

1.

(Maximum value depends on the
tempo setting)

2.

DELAY LCR
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
Range

Parameter

Description

DELAY L

0.0–2730.0 ms

Left channel delay time

DELAY C

0.0–2730.0 ms

Center channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–2730.0 ms

Right channel delay time

FB. DLY

0.0–2730.0 ms

Feedback delay time

LEVEL L

–100 to +100%

Left channel delay level

LEVEL C

–100 to +100%

Center channel delay level

LEVEL R

–100 to +100%

Right channel delay level

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L

NOTE C

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C

NOTE R

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R

NOTE FB

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

1.

(Maximum value depends on the
tempo setting)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

294

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

ECHO
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
Parameter

Range

Description

DELAY L

0.0–1350.0 ms

Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1350.0 ms

Right channel delay time

FB.DLY L

0.0–1350.0 ms

Left channel feedback delay time

FB.DLY R

0.0–1350.0 ms

Right channel feedback delay time

FB. G L

–99 to +99%

Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB. G R

–99 to +99%

Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

L->R FBG

–99 to +99%

Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

R->L FBG

–99 to +99%

Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L

NOTE R

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R

NOTE FBL

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB.DLY L

NOTE FBR

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB.DLY R

1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)

CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effect.
Parameter

Range

Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

AM DEPTH

0–100%

Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH

0–100%

Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

Low shelving filter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz

EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10

EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

High shelving filter frequency

HSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

High shelving filter gain

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

295

FLANGE
Two input, two output flange effect.
Parameter

Range

Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

Low shelving filter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz

EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10

EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

High shelving filter frequency

HSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

High shelving filter gain

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
Parameter

Range

Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

Low shelving filter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz

EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10

EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

High shelving filter frequency

HSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

High shelving filter gain

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

296

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

PHASER
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
Parameter

Range

Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

OFFSET

0–100

Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

PHASE

0.00–354.38 degrees

Left and right modulation phase balance

STAGE

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

Low shelving filter gain

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

High shelving filter frequency

HSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

High shelving filter gain

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

AUTO PAN
Two input, two output autopanner.
Parameter
FREQ.

Range

Description

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

DIR.

1

Panning direction

WAVE

Sine, Tri, Square

Modulation waveform

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

Low shelving filter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz

EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10

EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

High shelving filter frequency

HSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

High shelving filter gain

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

2

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R
2.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

297

TREMOLO
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
Parameter

Range

Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

WAVE

Sine, Tri, Square

Modulation waveform

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

Low shelving filter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz

EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10

EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

High shelving filter frequency

HSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

High shelving filter gain

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

HQ. PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
Parameter

Range

Description

PITCH

–12 to +12 semitones

Pitch shift

FINE

–50 to +50 cents

Pitch shift fine

DELAY

0.0–1000.0 ms

Delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

MODE

1–10

Pitch shift precision

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

298

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Parameter

Range

Description

PITCH 1

–24 to +24 semitones

Channel #1 pitch shift

FINE 1

–50 to +50 cents

Channel #1 pitch shift fine

LEVEL 1

–100 to +100%

Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values
for reverse phase)

PAN 1

L63 to R63

Channel #1 pan

DELAY 1

0.0–1000.0 ms

Channel #1 delay time

FB. G 1

–99 to +99%

Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

PITCH 2

–24 to +24 semitones

Channel #2 pitch shift

FINE 2

–50 to +50 cents

Channel #2 pitch shift fine

LEVEL 2

–100 to +100%

Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values
for reverse phase)

PAN 2

L63 to R63

Channel #2 pan

DELAY 2

0.0–1000.0 ms

Channel #2 delay time

FB. G 2

–99 to +99%

Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

MODE

1–10

Pitch shift precision

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE 1

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1
delay

NOTE 2

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2
delay

1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)

ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter

Range

Description

ROTATE

STOP, START

SPEED

SLOW, FAST

Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)

SLOW

0.05–10.00 Hz

SLOW rotation speed

FAST

0.05–10.00 Hz

FAST rotation speed

DRIVE

0–100

Overdrive level

ACCEL

0–10

Acceleration at speed changes

LOW

0–100

Low-frequency filter

HIGH

0–100

High-frequency filter

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Rotation stop, start

Effects Parameters

299

RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter

Range

Description

SOURCE

OSC, SELF

Modulation source: oscillator or input signal

OSC FREQ

0.0–5000.0 Hz

Oscillator frequency

FM FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Oscillator frequency modulation speed

FM DEPTH

0–100%

Oscillator frequency modulation depth

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE FM

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ

1.

MOD. FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
Parameter

Range

Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

PHASE

0.00–354.38 degrees

Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation
phase difference

TYPE

LPF, HPF, BPF

Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass

OFFSET

0–100

Filter frequency offset

RESO.

0–20

Filter resonance

LEVEL

0–100

Output level

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

1.

DISTORTION
One input, two output distortion effect.
Parameter

Range

Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE

0–100

Distortion drive

MASTER

0–100

Master volume

TONE

–10 to +10

Tone

N. GATE

0–20

Noise reduction

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

300

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
Parameter

Range

Description

AMP TYPE

1

Guitar amp simulation type

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE

0–100

Distortion drive

MASTER

0–100

Master volume

BASS

0–100

Bass tone control

MIDDLE

0–100

Middle tone control

TREBLE

0–100

High tone control

CAB DEP

0–100%

Speaker cabinet simulation depth

EQ F

100–8.00 kHz

Parametric equalizer frequency

EQ G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10

Parametric equalizer bandwidth

N. GATE

0–20

Noise reduction

1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT

DYNA. FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter

Range

Description

SOURCE

INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE

0–100

Sensitivity

DIR.

UP, DOWN

Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

1

Filter frequency change decay speed

TYPE

LPF, HPF, BPF

Filter type

OFFSET

0–100

Filter frequency offset

RESO.

0–20

Filter resonance

LEVEL

0–100

Output Level

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

301

DYNA. FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
Parameter

Range

Description

SOURCE

INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE

0–100

Sensitivity

DIR.

UP, DOWN

Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

1

Decay speed

OFFSET

0–100

Delay time offset

FB.GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

Low shelving filter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz

EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10

EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

High shelving filter frequency

HSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

High shelving filter gain

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)

DYNA. PHASER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
Parameter

Range

Description

SOURCE

INPUT, MIDI

SENSE

0–100

Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity

DIR.

UP, DOWN

Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

1

Decay speed

OFFSET

0–100

Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

FB.GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

STAGE

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

Low shelving filter gain

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

High shelving filter frequency

HSH G

–12.0 to +12.0 dB

High shelving filter gain

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

302

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

REV+CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

REV/CHO

0–100%

Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

AM DEPTH

0–100%

Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH

0–100%

Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

REV->CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL

0–100%

Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused
reverb, 100% = all reverb)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

AM DEPTH

0–100%

Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH

0–100%

Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

303

REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

REV/FLG

0–100%

Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all
flange)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

REV->FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL

0–100%

Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb,
100% = all reverb)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

304

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

REV/SYM

0–100%

Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all
symphonic)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

REV->SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL

0–100%

Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic
reverb, 100% = all reverb)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

305

REV->PAN
One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL

0–100%

Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb,
100% = all reverb)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

DIR.

1

Panning direction

WAVE

Sine, Tri, Square

Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

2

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1. L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R
2.

DELAY+ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
Parameter

Range

Description

DELAY L

0.0–1000.0 ms

Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1000.0 ms

Right channel delay time

FB. DLY

0.0–1000.0 ms

Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

DLY/ER

0–100%

Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% =
all early reflections)

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reflection simulation

ROOMSIZE

0.1–20.0

Reflection spacing

LIVENESS

0–10

Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

ER NUM.

1–19

Number of early reflections

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel
DELAY L

NOTE R

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R

NOTE FB

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

306

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DELAY->ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
Parameter

Range

Description

DELAY L

0.0–1000.0 ms

Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1000.0 ms

Right channel delay time

FB. DLY

0.0–1000.0 ms

Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL

0–100%

Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early
reflected delay, 100% = all delay)

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reflection simulation

ROOMSIZE

0.1–20.0

Reflection spacing

LIVENESS

0–10

Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

ER NUM.

1–19

Number of early reflections

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel
DELAY L

NOTE R

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R

NOTE FB

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

307

DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
Parameter

Range

Description

DELAY L

0.0–1000.0 ms

Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1000.0 ms

Right channel delay time

FB. DLY

0.0–1000.0 ms

Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI

0.1–1.0

Delay high-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL

0–100%

Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel
DELAY L

NOTE R

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R

NOTE FB

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)

DELAY->REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Parameter

Range

Description

DELAY L

0.0–1000.0 ms

Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1000.0 ms

Right channel delay time

FB. DLY

0.0–1000.0 ms

Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI

0.1–1.0

Delay high-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL

0–100%

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Spread

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel
DELAY L

NOTE R

*1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R

NOTE FB

*1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

1.

Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb,
100% = all delay)

(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

308

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DIST->DELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
Parameter

Range

Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE

0–100

Distortion drive

MASTER

0–100

Master volume

TONE

–10 to +10

Tone control

N. GATE

0–20

Noise reduction

DELAY

0.0–2725.0 ms

Delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation depth

DLY.BAL

0–100%

Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all
delayed distortion)

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY.NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

MOD.NOTE

2

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

(Maximum value depends on the
tempo setting)

2.

MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
Parameter

Range

Description

TYPE 1

HPF, LPF, BPF

Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

TYPE 2

HPF, LPF, BPF

Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

TYPE 3

HPF, LPF, BPF

Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

FREQ. 1

28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

Filter 1 frequency

FREQ. 2

28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

Filter 2 frequency

FREQ. 3

28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz

Filter 3 frequency

LEVEL 1

0–100

Filter 1 level

LEVEL 2

0–100

Filter 2 level

LEVEL 3

0–100

Filter 3 level

RESO. 1

0–20

Filter 1 resonance

RESO. 2

0–20

Filter 2 resonance

RESO. 3

0–20

Filter 3 resonance

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

309

FREEZE
One input, one output basic sampler.
Parameter

Range

Description

REC MODE

MANUAL, INPUT

In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC
and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is
engaged by pressing the REC button, and actual recording is
triggered by the input signal.

REC DLY

–1000 to +1000 ms

Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the
trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before
the trigger is received.

TRG LVL

–60 to 0 dB

Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger
recording or playback)

TRG MASK

0–1000 ms

Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are
ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time.

PLY MODE

MOMENT, CONTI.,
INPUT

In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the
PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues
once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of
times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.

START

1

Playback start point in milliseconds

END

1

Playback end point in milliseconds

LOOP

1

Loop start point in milliseconds

LOOP NUM

0–100

Number of times the sample plays

START
[SAMPLE]

0–262000

Playback start point in samples

END
[SAMPLE]

0–262000

Playback end point in samples

LOOP
[SAMPLE]

0–262000

Loop start point in samples

PITCH

–12 to +12 semitones

Playback pitch shift

FINE

–50 to +50 cents

Playback pitch shift fine

MIDI TRG

OFF, C1–C6, ALL

PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off
messages.

1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz), 0.0–2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz),
0.0 ms–2729.2 ms (fs=96 kHz)

ST REVERB
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room, Stage, Plate

Reverb type

INI. DLY

0.0–100.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO

0.1–2.4

Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

E/R BAL.

0–100%

Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

310

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

REVERB 5.1
One input, six output reverb for 5.1 surround, with surround panning.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room, Stage, Plate

Reverb type

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

DIV.

0–100%

Divergence determines how the front center signal is fed to
the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 0%, it’s fed
only to the Left and Right channels (i.e., Phantom Center).
When set to 50%, it’s fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 100%, it’s fed to only the Center
channel (i.e., Real Center).

ROOMSIZE

0.1–20.0

Size of simulated room’s reverb

POS L/R

L63–R63

Left/right listening position

POS F/R

F63–R63

Front/rear listening position

POS CTRL

OFF, NOR, INV

1

ER L/R

L63–R63

Left/right early reflections position

ER F/R

F63–R63

Front/rear early reflections position

ER LVL

0–100%

Early reflections level

ER CTRL

OFF, NOR, INV

1

REV L/R

L63–R63

Left/right reverb position

REV F/R

F63–R63

Front/rear reverb position

REV LVL

0–100%

Reverb level

REV CTRL

OFF, NOR, INV

1

POS RAD.

0–63

Radius of the panning track at the listening position

ER RAD.

0–63

Radius of the panning track for early reflections

REV RAD.

0–63

Radius of the panning track for reverb

1. When set to NOR, the position can be set by using the Joystick so long as the SELECTED CHANNEL
PAN/SURROUND [EFFECT] button’s indicator is on. When set to INV, the Joystick will work inversely.
When set to OFF, Joystick control is off.

OCTA REVERB
Eight input, eight output reverb.
Parameter

Range

Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s

Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room, Stage, Plate

Reverb type

INI. DLY

0.0–100.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO

0.1–2.4

Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY

0–100%

Reverb density

E/R BAL.

0–100%

Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

311

AUTO PAN 5.1
Six input, six output autopanner for 5.1 surround.
Parameter

Range

Description

SOURCE

OFF, HOLD, INPUT1,
INPUT2, INPUT3,
INPUT4, INPUT5,
INPUT6, MIDI

Source specifies the trigger that will initiate auto pan. When
you press the TRIGGER button in the screen, auto pan will
begin regardless of the setting of this parameter.
OFF: No trigger is specified. Auto pan will always be off.
HOLD: No trigger is specified. Auto pan will always be on.
INPUT 1-6: The input signal to effect inputs 1-6 will be the
trigger.
MIDI: MIDI note-on messages will be the trigger.

TRG LVL

–60 to 0 dB

If SOURCE is set to INPUT, any signal with a level greater
than the setting of this parameter will be detected as a trigger.

TRG MASK

0–1000 ms

Trigger Mask specifies the time from when a trigger is
received until the next trigger will be accepted.

TIME

0.1 s–10.0 s

The time after which autopan starts once it’s been triggered

SPEED

0.05–40.00 Hz

Autopan speed

DIR.

Turn L, Turn R

Autopan direction

OFFSET

–180 to +180 degrees

Pan offset

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

• When you press the RESET button, the phase will be initialized to the setting of the OFFSET parameter.

CHORUS 5.1
Six input, six output chorus for 5.1 surround.
Parameter

Range

Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

Modulation speed

AM DEPTH

0–100%

Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH

0–100%

Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–400.0 ms

Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

312

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

FLANGE 5.1
Six input, six output flanger for 5.1 surround.
Parameter

Range

Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation speed
Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–400.0 ms

Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

SYMPHO. 5.1
Six input, six output symphonic effect for 5.1 surround.
Parameter

Range

Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz

DEPTH

0–100%

Modulation speed
Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–400.0 ms

Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri

Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF, ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

1.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

313

M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction
metering for each band.
Parameter

Range

Description

LOW GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB

Low band level

MID GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB

Mid band level

HI. GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB

High band level

PRESENCE

–10 to +10

For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered
and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative
values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands
are affected the same.

CMP. THRE

24.0 to 0.0 dB

Compressor threshold

CMP. RAT

1:1 to 20:1

Compressor ratio

CMP. ATK

0–120 ms

Compressor attack

CMP. REL

1

Compressor release time

CMP. KNEE

0–5

Compressor knee

LOOKUP

0.0–100.0 ms

Lookup delay

CMP. BYP

OFF, ON

Compressor bypass

L–M XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE

–6 to –12 dB

Filter slope

CEILING

–6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF

Specifies the maximum output level

EXP. THRE

–54.0 to –24.0 dB

Expander threshold

EXP. RAT

1:1 to ∞:1

Expander ratio

EXP. REL

1

Expander release time

EXP. BYP

OFF, ON

Expander bypass

LIM. THRE

–12.0 to 0.0 dB

Limiter threshold

LIM. ATK

0–120 ms

Limiter attack

LIM. REL

1

Limiter release time

LIM. BYP

OFF, ON

Limiter bypass

LIM. KNEE

0–5

Limiter knee

SOLO LOW

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output.

SOLO MID

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output.

SOLO HIGH

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output.

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

314

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

COMP 5.1
Six input, six output compressor for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and
gain reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS),
center (C), or LFE channels.
Parameter

Range

Description

LOW GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB

Low band level

MID GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB

Mid band level

HI. GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB

High band level

PRESENCE

–10 to +10

For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered
and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative
values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands
are affected the same.

THRE.

–24.0 to 0.0 dB

Compressor threshold

RATIO

1:1 to ∞:1

Compressor ratio

ATTACK

0–120 ms

Compressor attack

RELEASE

1

Compressor release time

KNEE

0–5

Compressor knee

LOOKUP

0.0–100.0 ms

Lookup delay

KEY LINK

2

Key-in linking

L–M XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE

–6 to –12 dB

Filter slope

CEILING

–6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF

Specifies the maximum output level

SOLO LOW

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output.

SOLO MID

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output.

SOLO HIGH

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output.

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)
2. 5.1: Key-in’s of all inputs are linked
5.0: Key-in’s of L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent)
3+2: Key-in’s of L, C, and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (LFE is independent)
2+2: Key-in’s of L and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (C and LFE are independent)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

315

COMPAND 5.1
Six input, six output compander for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and
gain reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS),
center (C), or LFE channels.
Parameter

Range

Description

LOW GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB

Low band level

MID GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB

Mid band level

HI. GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB

High band level

PRESENCE

–10 to +10

For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered
and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative
values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands
are affected the same.

THRE.

–24.0 to 0.0 dB

Compressor threshold

RATIO

1:1 to 20:1

Compressor ratio

ATTACK

0–120 ms

Attack time

RELEASE

1

Release time

WIDTH

1–90 dB

Compressor effect range and expander effect width

TYPE

Soft, Hard

Compander type

LOOKUP

0.0–100.0 ms

Lookup delay

KEY LINK

2

Key-in linking

L–M XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE

–6 to –12 dB

Filter slope

CEILING

–6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF

Specifies the maximum output level

SOLO LOW

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output.

SOLO MID

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output.

SOLO HIGH

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output.

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)
2. 5.1: Key-in’s of all inputs are linked
5.0: Key-in’s of L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent)
3+2: Key-in’s of L, C, and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (LFE is independent)
2+2: Key-in’s of L and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (C and LFE are independent)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

316

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

Preset EQ Parameters
#

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

Parameter

Title

Bass Drum 1

Bass Drum 2

Snare Drum 1

Snare Drum 2

Tom-tom 1

Cymbal

High Hat

Percussion

E. Bass 1

E. Bass 2

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

LOW

L-MID

H-MID

HIGH

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+3.5 dB

–3.5 dB

0.0 dB

+4.0 dB

F

100 Hz

265 Hz

1.06 kHz

5.30 kHz

Q

1.2

10

0.9

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

LPF

G

+8.0 dB

–7.0 dB

+6.0 dB

ON

F

80 Hz

400 Hz

2.50 kHz

12.5 kHz

Q

1.4

4.5

2.2

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–0.5 dB

0.0 dB

+3.0 dB

+4.5 dB

F

132 Hz

1.00 kHz

3.15 kHz

5.00 kHz

Q

1.2

4.5

0.11

—

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

+1.5 dB

–8.5 dB

+2.5 dB

+4.0 dB

F

180 Hz

335 Hz

2.36 kHz

4.00 kHz

Q

—

10

0.7

0.1

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

+2.0 dB

–7.5 dB

+2.0 dB

+1.0 dB

F

212 Hz

670 Hz

4.50 kHz

6.30 kHz

Q

1.4

10

1.2

0.28

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–2.0 dB

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

+3.0 dB

F

106 Hz

425 Hz

1.06 kHz

13.2 kHz

Q

—

8

0.9

—

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–4.0 dB

–2.5 dB

+1.0 dB

+0.5 dB

F

95 Hz

425 Hz

2.80 kHz

7.50 kHz

Q

—

0.5

1

—

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–4.5 dB

0.0 dB

+2.0 dB

0.0 dB

F

100 Hz

400 Hz

2.80 kHz

17.0 kHz

Q

—

4.5

0.56

—

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–7.5 dB

+4.5 dB

+2.5 dB

0.0 dB

F

35.5 Hz

112 Hz

2.00 kHz

4.00 kHz

Q

—

5

4.5

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+3.0 dB

0.0 dB

+2.5 dB

+0.5 dB

F

112 Hz

112 Hz

2.24 kHz

4.00 kHz

Q

0.1

5

6.3

—

317

Preset EQ Parameters

#

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Parameter

Title

Syn. Bass 1

Syn. Bass 2

Piano 1

Piano 2

E. G. Clean

E. G. Crunch 1

E. G. Crunch 2

E. G. Dist. 1

E. G. Dist. 2

A. G. Stroke 1

A. G. Stroke 2

LOW

L-MID

H-MID

HIGH

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+3.5 dB

+8.5 dB

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

F

85 Hz

950 Hz

4.00 kHz

12.5 kHz

Q

0.1

8

4.5

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+2.5 dB

0.0 dB

+1.5 dB

0.0 dB

F

125 Hz

180 Hz

1.12 kHz

12.5 kHz

Q

1.6

8

2.2

—

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–6.0 dB

0.0 dB

+2.0 dB

+4.0 dB

F

95 Hz

950 Hz

3.15 kHz

7.50 kHz

Q

—

8

0.9

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+3.5 dB

–8.5 dB

+1.5 dB

+3.0 dB

F

224 Hz

600 Hz

3.15 kHz

5.30 kHz

Q

5.6

10

0.7

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+2.0 dB

–5.5 dB

+0.5 dB

+2.5 dB

F

265 Hz

400 Hz

1.32 kHz

4.50 kHz

Q

0.18

10

6.3

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

+4.5 dB

0.0 dB

+4.0 dB

+2.0 dB

F

140 Hz

1.00 kHz

1.90 kHz

5.60 kHz

Q

8

4.5

0.63

9

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+2.5 dB

+1.5 dB

+2.5 dB

0.0 dB

F

125 Hz

450 Hz

3.35 kHz

19.0 kHz

Q

8

0.4

0.16

—

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+5.0 dB

0.0 dB

+3.5 dB

0.0 dB

F

355 Hz

950 Hz

3.35 kHz

12.5 kHz

Q

—

9

10

—

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+6.0 dB

–8.5 dB

+4.5 dB

+4.0 dB

F

315 Hz

1.06 kHz

4.25 kHz

12.5 kHz

Q

—

10

4

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–2.0 dB

0.0 dB

+1.0 dB

+4.0 dB

F

106 Hz

1.00 kHz

1.90 kHz

5.30 kHz

Q

0.9

4.5

3.5

—

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–3.5 dB

–2.0 dB

0.0 dB

+2.0 dB

F

300 Hz

750 Hz

2.00 kHz

3.55 kHz

Q

—

9

4.5

—

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

318

#

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

Parameter

Title

A. G. Arpeg. 1

A. G. Arpeg. 2

Brass Sec.

Male Vocal 1

Male Vocal 2

Female Vo. 1

Female Vo. 2

Chorus & Harmo

Total EQ 1

Total EQ 2

Total EQ 3

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

LOW

L-MID

H-MID

HIGH

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

–0.5 dB

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

+2.0 dB

F

224 Hz

1.00 kHz

4.00 kHz

6.70 kHz

Q

—

4.5

4.5

0.12

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

0.0 dB

–5.5 dB

0.0 dB

+4.0 dB

F

180 Hz

355 Hz

4.00 kHz

4.25 kHz

Q

—

7

4.5

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

–2.0 dB

–1.0 dB

+1.5 dB

+3.0 dB

F

90 Hz

850 Hz

2.12 kHz

4.50 kHz

Q

2.8

2

0.7

7

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

–0.5 dB

0.0 dB

+2.0 dB

+3.5 dB

F

190 Hz

1.00 kHz

2.00 kHz

6.70 kHz

Q

0.11

4.5

0.56

0.11

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+2.0 dB

–5.0 dB

–2.5 dB

+4.0 dB

F

170 Hz

236 Hz

2.65 kHz

6.70 kHz

Q

0.11

10

5.6

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

–1.0 dB

+1.0 dB

+1.5 dB

+2.0 dB

F

118 Hz

400 Hz

2.65 kHz

6.00 kHz

Q

0.18

0.45

0.56

0.14

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–7.0 dB

+1.5 dB

+1.5 dB

+2.5 dB

F

112 Hz

335 Hz

2.00 kHz

6.70 kHz

Q

—

0.16

0.2

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

–2.0 dB

–1.0 dB

+1.5 dB

+3.0 dB

F

90 Hz

850 Hz

2.12 kHz

4.50 kHz

Q

2.8

2

0.7

7

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–0.5 dB

0.0 dB

+3.0 dB

+6.5 dB

F

95 Hz

950 Hz

2.12 kHz

16.0 kHz

Q

7

2.2

5.6

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+4.0 dB

+1.5 dB

+2.0 dB

+6.0 dB

F

95 Hz

750 Hz

1.80 kHz

18.0 kHz

Q

7

2.8

5.6

—

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+1.5 dB

+0.5 dB

+2.0 dB

+4.0 dB

F

67 Hz

850 Hz

1.90 kHz

15.0 kHz

Q

—

0.28

0.7

—

319

Preset EQ Parameters

#

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

Parameter

Title

Bass Drum 3

Snare Drum 3

Tom-tom 2

Piano 3

Piano Low

Piano High

Fine-EQ Cass

Narrator

LOW

L-MID

H-MID

HIGH

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

+3.5 dB

–10.0 dB

+3.5 dB

0.0 dB

F

118 Hz

315 Hz

4.25 kHz

20.0 kHz

Q

2

10

0.4

0.4

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

0.0 dB

+2.0 dB

+3.5 dB

0.0 dB

F

224 Hz

560 Hz

4.25 kHz

4.00 kHz

Q

—

4.5

2.8

0.1

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–9.0 dB

+1.5 dB

+2.0 dB

0.0 dB

F

90 Hz

212 Hz

5.30 kHz

17.0 kHz

Q

—

4.5

1.2

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

+4.5 dB

–13.0 dB

+4.5 dB

+2.5 dB

F

100 Hz

475 Hz

2.36 kHz

10.0 kHz

Q

8

10

9

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–5.5 dB

+1.5 dB

+6.0 dB

0.0 dB

F

190 Hz

400 Hz

6.70 kHz

12.5 kHz

Q

10

6.3

2.2

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

G

–5.5 dB

+1.5 dB

+5.0 dB

+3.0 dB

F

190 Hz

400 Hz

6.70 kHz

5.60 kHz

Q

10

6.3

2.2

0.1

L.SHELF

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–1.5 dB

0.0 dB

+1.0 dB

+3.0 dB

F

75 Hz

1.00 kHz

4.00 kHz

12.5 kHz

Q

—

4.5

1.8

—

PEAKING

PEAKING

PEAKING

H.SHELF

G

–4.0 dB

–1.0 dB

+2.0 dB

0.0 dB

F

106 Hz

710 Hz

2.50 kHz

10.0 kHz

Q

4

7

0.63

—

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

320

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

Preset Gate Parameters
#

1

Title

Gate

2

3

GATE

A. Dr. SN

Parameter

–26

Range (dB)

–56
2.56

Decay (ms)

331

Threshold (dB)

–19

Range (dB)

–22

Attack (ms)

1

Title

Comp

1.20 S

Decay (ms)

6.32 S

Threshold (dB)

–11

Range (dB)

–53
1.93

Decay (ms)

400

Threshold (dB)

–8

Range (dB)

–23

Attack (ms)

1

Hold (ms)

0.63

Decay (ms)

238

(fs = 44.1 kHz)

Type

COMP

3

Expand

Compander (H)

EXPAND

COMPAND-H

Parameter

–8

Ratio ( :1)

2.5

Attack (ms)

60

Out gain (dB)

0.0
250

Threshold (dB)

–23

Ratio ( :1)

1.7

Attack (ms)

1

Out gain (dB)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

3.5

Knee

2

Release (ms)

70

Threshold (dB)

–10

Ratio ( :1)

3.5

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)

Threshold (dB)

COMPAND-S

2

Release (ms)

Release (ms)

Compander (S)

Value

Threshold (dB)

Width (dB)

4

0

Hold (ms)

Knee

2

93

Hold (ms)

Preset Compressor Parameters
#

0

Hold (ms)

Attack (ms)

GATE

Value

Threshold (dB)
Attack (ms)

DUCKING

A. Dr. BD

4

Type

GATE

Ducking

(fs = 44.1 kHz)

1
0.0
6
250
–8

Ratio ( :1)

4

Attack (ms)

25

Out gain (dB)

0.0

Width (dB)

24

Release (ms)

180

321

Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)

#

Title

Type

Parameter
Threshold (dB)

5

6

A. Dr. BD

A. Dr. BD

COMP

COMPAND-H

A. Dr. SN

COMP

3

Attack (ms)

9

Out gain (dB)

A. Dr. SN

EXPAND

2

Release (ms)

58

Threshold (dB)

–11

Ratio ( :1)

3.5

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB)

–17

Ratio ( :1)

2.5

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)

A. Dr. Tom

EXPAND

2

Release (ms)

12

Threshold (dB)

–23

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)

A. Dr. OverTop

COMPAND-S

E. B. Finger

COMP

0
0.5
2
151
–8

Ratio ( :1)

1.7

Attack (ms)

11

Out gain (dB)

0.0

Width (dB)

10

Release (ms)

128

Threshold (dB)

–20

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)

2
2
5.0
2

Release (ms)

749

Threshold (dB)

–24

Ratio ( :1)

2

Attack (ms)

38

Out gain (dB)

–3.5

Width (dB)

54

Release (ms)

842

Threshold (dB)

–12

Ratio ( :1)
12

2

Threshold (dB)

Knee

11

8
3.5

Knee

Ratio ( :1)
10

7
192

Release (ms)

A. Dr. SN

1
–1.5

Release (ms)

Knee

9

5.5

Knee

Ratio ( :1)
8

–24

Ratio ( :1)

Width (dB)

7

Value

2

Attack (ms)

15

Out gain (dB)

4.5

Knee
Release (ms)

2
470

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

322

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

#

13

14

15

16

Title

E. B. Slap

Syn. Bass

Piano1

Piano2

Type

COMP

COMP

COMP

COMP

Parameter
Threshold (dB)

–12

Ratio ( :1)

1.7

Attack (ms)

4.0

Knee

hard

Release (ms)

133

Threshold (dB)

–10

Ratio ( :1)

3.5

Attack (ms)

COMP

3.0

Knee

hard

Release (ms)

250

Threshold (dB)

–9

Ratio ( :1)

2.5

Attack (ms)

17

Out gain (dB)

1.0

Knee

hard

Release (ms)

238

Threshold (dB)

–18

Ratio ( :1)

3.5

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)

A. Guitar

COMP

Strings1

COMP

–8
3.5

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)

Strings2

COMP

4
261

Threshold (dB)

–10

Ratio ( :1)

2.5

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)

5
1.5
2

Release (ms)

238

Threshold (dB)

–11

Ratio ( :1)

2

Attack (ms)

33

Out gain (dB)

1.5
2

Release (ms)

749

Threshold (dB)

–12

Ratio ( :1)

1.5

Attack (ms)

93

Out gain (dB)

1.5

Knee
Release (ms)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

7
2.5

Release (ms)

Knee

20

2
174

Ratio ( :1)

Knee

19

7
6.0

Threshold (dB)

Knee

18

9

Out gain (dB)

Release (ms)

E. Guitar

6

Out gain (dB)

Knee

17

Value

4
1.35 S

323

Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)

#

21

Title

Strings3

Type

COMP

Parameter
Threshold (dB)

–17

Ratio ( :1)

1.5

Attack (ms)

76

Out gain (dB)

2.5

Knee

22

BrassSection

COMP

Syn. Pad

COMP

186

Threshold (dB)

–18

Ratio ( :1)

1.7

Attack (ms)

18

Out gain (dB)

4.0

25

SamplingPerc

Sampling BD

COMPAND-S

COMP

226

Threshold (dB)

–13

Ratio ( :1)

2

Attack (ms)

58

Out gain (dB)

2.0

27

28

Sampling SN

Hip Comp

Solo Vocal1

COMP

COMPAND-S

COMP

1

Release (ms)

238

Threshold (dB)

–18

Ratio ( :1)

1.7

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)

8
–2.5

Width (dB)

18

Release (ms)

238

Threshold (dB)

–14

Ratio ( :1)

2

Attack (ms)

2

Out gain (dB)

3.5

Knee

4

Release (ms)

35

Threshold (dB)

–18

Ratio ( :1)
26

1

Release (ms)

Knee

24

2

Release (ms)

Knee

23

Value

Attack (ms)

4
8

Out gain (dB)

8.0

Knee

hard

Release (ms)

354

Threshold (dB)

–23

Ratio ( :1)

20

Attack (ms)

15

Out gain (dB)

0.0

Width (dB)

15

Release (ms)

163

Threshold (dB)

–20

Ratio ( :1)

2.5

Attack (ms)

31

Out gain (dB)

2.0

Knee
Release (ms)

1
342

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

324

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

#

29

Title

Solo Vocal2

Type

COMP

Parameter
Threshold (dB)

–8

Ratio ( :1)

2.5

Attack (ms)

26

Out gain (dB)

1.5

Knee
Release (ms)

30

Chorus

COMP

Click Erase

EXPAND

–9

Ratio ( :1)

1.7

Attack (ms)

39

Out gain (dB)

2.5

Announcer

COMPAND-H

226

Threshold (dB)

–33

Ratio ( :1)

2

Attack (ms)

1

Out gain (dB)

Limiter1

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB)

–14

Ratio ( :1)

2.5

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)

35

Total Comp1

COMP

COMP

18

Release (ms)

180

Total Comp2

COMP

3

Attack (ms)

20

Out gain (dB)

–3.0
90
3.90 s

Threshold (dB)

0

Ratio ( :1)

∞

Attack (ms)

0

Out gain (dB)

0.0

Knee

hard

Release (ms)

319

Threshold (dB)

–18

Ratio ( :1)

3.5

Attack (ms)

94

Out gain (dB)

2.5

Knee

hard

Release (ms)

447

Threshold (dB)

–16
6

Attack (ms)

11

Out gain (dB)

6.0

Knee
Release (ms)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

–9

Ratio ( :1)

Ratio ( :1)
36

1
–2.5

Width (dB)

Release (ms)

Limiter2

2
284

Width (dB)

34

2.0

Release (ms)

Threshold (dB)

33

2

Release (ms)

Knee

32

3
331

Threshold (dB)

Knee

31

Value

1
180

General Spec

325

Appendix B: Specifications
General Spec
Number of scene memories

99
Internal

Sampling Frequency

Signal Delay

External

Double rate: 88.2 kHz–10% to 96 kHz+6%
Less than 1.6 ms CH INPUT to OMNI OUT

fs=96 kHz

Less than 0.8 ms CH INPUT to OMNI OUT
100 mm motorized with touch sense × 17
+10 to –138, –∞ dB input faders

Fader Resolution

Frequency Response
(CH INPUT to OMNI OUT)

Normal rate: 44.1 kHz–10% to 48 kHz+6%

fs=48 kHz

Fader

Total Harmonic Distortion1
(CH INPUT to OMNI OUT)
(Input Gain=Min.)

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz

0 to –138, –∞ dB master faders, stereo fader
fs=48 kHz

Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 20 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω
Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω

fs=96 kHz

Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 40 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω
Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω

fs=48 kHz

20 Hz–20 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω

fs=96 kHz

20 Hz–40 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω
110 dB typ. DA Converter (OMNI OUT)

Dynamic Range
(maximum level to noise level)

106 dB typ. AD+DA (to OMNI OUT) @ fs=48 kHz
106 dB typ. AD+DA (to OMNI OUT) @ fs=96 kHz
–128 dB Equivalent Input Noise
–86 dB residual output noise. OMNI OUT (STEREO OUT off)

Hum & Noise2
(20 Hz–20 kHz)
Rs=150 Ω

Input Gain=Max. –86 dB (90 dB S/N) OMNI OUT
Input Pad =0 dB (STEREO fader at nominal level and all CH INPUT faders at minimum level)
Input Pad =0 dB
Input Sensitivity
=–60 dB

–64 dB (68 dB S/N) OMNI OUT
(STEREO fader at nominal level and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level)

Maximum Voltage Gain

74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–16) to OMNI OUT (STEREO, BUS, AUX)

Crosstalk
(@ 1 kHz)

80 dB adjacent input channels (CH1–16)
80 dB input to output

Input Gain=Min.
Phantom switch

+48 V DC

Pad switch

0/20 dB attenuation

Gain control

44 dB (–60 to –16), detented

Peak indicator

LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at digital domain

Signal indicator

LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at
digital domain

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

Analog Input
(OMNI IN 1–4)

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

Option Input (SLOT 1–2)

Available cards

Optional digital interface cards (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)

Digital Input
(2TR IN DIGITAL 1–2)

SRC

On/off (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio)

AD Input (1–16)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

326

Appendix B: Specifications

Input patch

—

Phase

Normal/reverse

Gate-type3

On/off
Key in: 12 ch Group (1–12, 13–24, 25–36, 37–48)/AUX1–8
On/off

Comp-type4

Key in: self /Stereo Link
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator
EQ

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ (TYPE1)5
On/off

Input Channel CH1–48

Delay

0–43400 samples

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized (INPUT/AUX1–8)

Aux send
Solo

OSCILLATOR

Pre fader/after pan

Surround pan

127 × 127 positions
[(Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)] x [(Front= 1–63, Center, Rear= 1–63)]

LFE level

–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step)

Routing

STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT

Direct out

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
Displayed on LCD
Peak hold on/off

Level control

Analog rotary potentiometer

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

Talkback select

Built-in microphone/AD IN 1–16/OMNI IN 1–4

On/off

—

Level

0 to –96 dB (1 dB step)

On/off

—

Waveform

Sine 100 Hz, sine 1 kHz, sine 10 kHz, 400 Hz/1 kHz, pink noise, burst noise

Routing

BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO L, R

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, SURROUND MONITOR, CONTROL ROOM,
DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT OUT (CH1–48, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO),
MONITOR MATRIX OUT, SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT (BUS1–8, AUX 1–8,
STEREO, SOLO)

DA converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

Dither
2TR OUT DIGITAL 1–2

On/off
Word length 16, 20, 24-bit

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, CONTROL ROOM, DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT
OUT (CH 1–48, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT
(BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO, SOLO)

Available card

Optional digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, SURROUND MONITOR, CONTROL ROOM,
DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT OUT (CH 1–48, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO),
MONITOR MATRIX OUT, SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8,
STEREO, SOLO)

Dither

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

On/off
127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)

OMNI OUT 1–12

Option Output (SLOT 1–2)

AUX1–8; pre fader/post fader

Pan

Metering

TALKBACK

On/off

On/off
Word length 16/20/24-bit

General Spec

Comp-type4
Attenuator
EQ

327

On/off
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ5
On/off

STEREO

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Balance

127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Delay

0–29100 samples
Displayed on LCD

Metering

Peak hold on/off
32-elements x2 LED meters

Comp-type4
Attenuator
EQ

On/off
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ5
On/off

BUS1–8

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Delay

0–29100 samples
Level (–∞, –138 dB to 0 dB)

Bus to stereo

On/off
Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Metering
Comp-type4
Attenuator
EQ
AUX1–8

INTERNAL EFFECTS
(EFFECT 1–4)

Peak hold on/off
On/off
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ5
On/off

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Delay

0–29100 samples

Metering

SURROUND MONITOR

Displayed on LCD

Displayed on LCD
Peak hold on/off

Mute

On/off

Solo

On/off

Source

BUS1–8, SLOT 1–2

Monitor to C-R

On/off

Oscillator

Pink noise/500–2 kHz/1 kHz

Monitor matrix

6.1→6.1, 6.1→5.1, 6.1→3-1, 6.1→ST, 5.1→5.1, 5.1→3-1, 5.1→ST,
3-1→3-1, 3-1→ST

Bass
management

5 presets

Monitor
alignment

ATT (–12.0 dB to 12 dB 0.1 dB step), Delay (0–30.0 msec 0.02 msec step)

Bypass

On/off

In/out
Effect-in from

8-in, 8-out (EFFECT1): depends on effects type
2-in, 2-out (EFFECT2–4): depends on effects type
AUX1–8/INSERT OUT/effect-out (out 1, 2 only)

Effect-out 1, 2 to Input patch/effect-in

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

328

Appendix B: Specifications

Power Requirements

Dimensions

U.S./Canada

120 V, 60 Hz 135 W

Other

220–240 V, 50/60 Hz 135 W

(H x D x W)

200 x 585 x 436 mm (7.8" x 23.0" x 17.1")
With MB1000 and SP1000 installed: 295 x 635 x 486 mm (11.6" x 25.0" x
19.1")

Net weight

20 kg (75 lbs)

Operating free-air temperature range

10–35°C (50–95°F)

Storage temperature range

–20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F)

Supplied Accessories

AC Cable, CD-ROM (Studio Manager), Owner’s Manual, Studio Manager
Installation Guide

Options

Digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)
PEAK METER BRIDGE: MB1000
SIDE PANEL: SP1000
RACK MOUNT KIT: RK1

1. Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 80 kHz.
2. Hum & Noise are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave
attenuation.
3. See “Gate Parameters” on page 328.
4. See “Comp Parameters” on page 329.
5. See “EQ Parameters” on page 328.

EQ Parameters
LOW/HPF

L-MID

H-MID

0.1–10.0
(41 points)
low shelving
HPF

Q

F

0.1–10.0
(41 points)

±18 dB
(0.1 dB step)

Gate Parameters
Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Range

–70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz

Hold

0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz
0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz
0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

Decay

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Range

–70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz

Ducking

0.1–10.0
(41 points)
high shelving
LPF

21.2 Hz–20 kHz (1/12 oct step)
±18 dB
(0.1 dB step)
HPF: on/off

G

Gate

HIGH /LPF

Hold

0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz
0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz
0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

Decay

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

±18 dB
(0.1 dB step)
LPF: on/off

General Spec

329

Comp Parameters

Compressor

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)

Out gain

0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)

Knee

Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

Release

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Threshold

Expander

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)

Out gain

0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)

Knee

Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 points)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

Release

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Compander H

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)

Out gain

–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Width

1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

Release

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Compander S

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)

Out gain

–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Width

1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

Release

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

330

Appendix B: Specifications

Libraries
Effect library (EFFECT 1–4)
Compressor library
Gate library
EQ library
Channel library
Surround Monitor library
Input patch library
Output patch library
Bus to Stereo library

Presets

52 (EFFECT 2–4: 44)

User memories

76

Presets

36

User memories

92

Presets

4

User memories

124

Presets

40

User memories

160

Presets

2

User memories

127

Presets

1

User memories

32

Presets

1

User memories

32

Presets

1

User memories

32

Presets

1

User memories

32

Analog Input Spec
Input

PAD

GAIN

Actual Load
Impedance

For Use With
Nominal
Sensitivity1

–60 dB
0
3k Ω

INPUT 1–16
–16 dB

50–600 Ω
Mics & 600 Ω
Lines

20
OMNI IN 1–4

—

10k Ω

600 Ω Lines

Input level
Nominal

Max.
before clip

–70 dB
(0.245 mV)

–60 dB
(0.775 mV)

–40 dB
(7.75 mV)

–26 dB
(38.8 mV)

–16 dB
(0.123 V)

+4 dB
(1.23 V)

–6 dB
(388 mV)

+4 dB
(1.23 V)

+24 dB
(12.28 V)

+4 dB
(1.23 V)

+4 dB
(1.23 V)

+24 dB
(12.28 V)

Connector

XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced)2

1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dB (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit
is set to maximum gain. (All faders and level controls are maximum position.)
2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.
All input AD converters (INPUT 1–16, OMNI INPUT 1–4, TALKBACK) are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1,
48 kHz)
+48 V DC (phantom power) is supplied to CH INPUT (1–16) XLR type connectors via individual switches.

Analog Output Spec
Actual
Source
Impedance

For Use With
Nominal

OMNI OUT 1–12

150 Ω

600 Ω Lines

PHONES

100 Ω

Output

Output level
Connector

Nominal

Max.
before clip

+4 dB
(1.23 V)

+24 dB
(12.28 V)

8 Ω Phones

4 mW

25 mW

Stereo Phone Jack (TRS)

40 Ω Phones

12 mW

75 mW

(Unbalanced)2

XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)1

1. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
2. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND).
In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.
All output DA converters (OMINI OUT 1–12, PHONES) are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz)

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Digital Input Spec

331

Digital Input Spec
Input
2TR IN DIGITAL

Format

Data length

Level

Connector

1

AES/EBU

24-bit

RS422

2

IEC-60958

24-bit

0.5 Vpp/75 Ω

XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)1
Phono

1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

Digital Output Spec
Output

Format
1

2TR OUT DIGITAL
2

AES/EBU1
Professional use
IEC-609584
Consumer use

Data length
24-bit2
24-bit2

Level
RS422

Connector
XLR-3-32 type
(Balanced)3

0.5V pp/75 Ω Phono

1. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1
Type:
linear PCM
Emphasis:
NO
Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration
2. Dither: word length 16/20/24 bit
3. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
4. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2
Type:
linear PCM
Category code: Digital signal mixer
Copy prohibit: NO
Emphasis:
NO
Clock accuracy: Level II (1000 ppm)
Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

332

Appendix B: Specifications

I/O Slot Spec (1–2)
Each I/O SLOT accepts a digital interface card. SLOT #1 has a serial interface.
Maker

Model

Function

INPUT

OUTPUT
1

Format

Resolution

Frequency

The
number of
Available
cards

Note

MY8-AT

Digital I/O

8

8

ADAT

24 bit

44.1/48 kHz

2

Can handle
24 bit/96 kHz by
double channel mode

MY16-AT

Digital I/O

16

16

ADAT

24 bit

44.1/48 kHz

2

Can handle
24 bit/96 kHz by
double channel mode

MY8-TD

Digital I/O

8

8

TASCAM

24 bit

44.1/48 kHz

2

Can handle
24 bit/96 kHz by
double channel mode

MY8-AE

Digital I/O

8

8

AES/EBU

24 bit

44.1/48 kHz

2

Can handle
24 bit/96 kHz by
double channel mode

MY8-AE96S Digital I/O

8

8

AES/EBU

24 bit

44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

2

Sampling Rate Converter for input

Yamaha

Waves
Apogee

MY8-AE96

Digital I/O

8

8

AES/EBU

24 bit

44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

2

MY4-AD

ANALOG IN

4

—

—

24 bit

44.1/48 kHz

2

MY8-AD

ANALOG IN

8

—

—

20 bit

44.1/48 kHz

2

MY8-AD24

ANALOG IN

8

—

—

24 bit

44.1/48 kHz

2

MY8-AD96

ANALOG IN

8

—

—

24 bit

44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

2

MY4-DA

ANALOG OUT

—

4

—

20 bit

44.1/48 kHz

2

MY8-DA96

ANALOG OUT

2

—

8

—

24 bit

44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

MY8-mLAN mLAN Interface

8

8

IEEE1394

24 bit

44.1/48 kHz

2

Y56K

Effect & I/O

8

8

ADAT

24 bit

44.1/48 kHz

1

AP8AD

ANALOG IN

8

—

—

24 bit

44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

2

4ch @fs=88.2, 96 kHz

AP8DA

ANALOG OUT

—

8

—

24 bit

44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

2

4ch @fs=88.2, 96 kHz

Maximum 5 nodes

1. Selectable from STEREO/BUS/AUX/DIRECT/EXT INSERT/SURROUND MONITOR/CR MONITOR.
Details depend on each interface card.

Control I/O Spec
I/O Port
TO HOST USB
IN1

MIDI

OUT

Level

USB

0 V–3.3 V

Connector in Console

MIDI

—

DIN Connector 5P
DIN Connector 5P

B type USB connector

MIDI

—

SMPTE

Nominal –10 dB/10k Ω

IN

—

TTL/75 Ω

BNC Connector

OUT

—

TTL/75 Ω

BNC Connector

TIME CODE INPUT
WORD CLOCK

Format

C-MOS IN, Open collector OUT
1pin: 150 mA, 8pin total: 500 mA

XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)2

CONTROL

—

REMOTE

—

RS422

D-SUB Connector 9P (Male)

METER

—

RS422

D-SUB Connector 15P (Female)

1. MIDI IN can use as TIME CODE IN MTC.
2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

D-SUB Connector 25P (Female)

REMOTE Port

333

REMOTE Port
Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

GND

6

RX+/GND1

2

RX–/RX–1

7

RTS/RX+1

3

TX–/TX+1

8

CTS/TX–1

4

TX+/GND1

9

GND

5

N.C.
1. RS422 (for AD824)/SONY 9 pin protocol (P2)

CONTROL Port
Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

GPO0

14

GPO1

2

GPO2

15

GPO3

3

GPO4

16

GPO5

4

GPO6

17

GPO7

5

GND

18

GND

6

GND

19

GND

7

GND

20

GND

8

GND

21

+5V

9

+5V

22

GPI0

10

GPI1

23

GPI2

11

GPI3

24

N.C.

12

N.C.

25

N.C.

13

N.C.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

334

Appendix B: Specifications

154
87

355

154

200

112

430(Not included Screw heads)
436(Included Screw heads)

32

Dimensions

156

280
101

374
565
585

Unit: mm

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Dimensions

335

295

486

Dimensions with the MB1000 and SP1000 installed:

635

Unit: mm
Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only.
Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time
without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in
every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
European Models
Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.
Inrush Current: 28 A
Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

336

Appendix C: MIDI

Appendix C: MIDI
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
Program
Change #

Initial
Scene #

1

Program
Change #

Initial
Scene #

Program
Change#

Initial
Scene #

01

44

44

87

87

2

02

3

03

45

45

88

88

46

46

89

4

89

04

47

47

90

90

5

05

48

48

91

91

6

06

49

49

92

92

7

07

50

50

93

93

8

08

51

51

94

94

9

09

52

52

95

95

10

10

53

53

96

96

11

11

54

54

97

97

12

12

55

55

98

98

13

13

56

56

99

99

14

14

57

57

100

00

15

15

58

58

101

—

16

16

59

59

102

—

17

17

60

60

103

—

18

18

61

61

104

—

19

19

62

62

105

—

20

20

63

63

106

—

21

21

64

64

107

—

22

22

65

65

108

—

23

23

66

66

109

—

24

24

67

67

110

—

25

25

68

68

111

—

26

26

69

69

112

—

27

27

70

70

113

—

28

28

71

71

114

—

29

29

72

72

115

—

30

30

73

73

116

—

31

31

74

74

117

—

32

32

75

75

118

—

33

33

76

76

119

—

34

34

77

77

120

—

35

35

78

78

121

—

36

36

79

79

122

—

37

37

80

80

123

—

38

38

81

81

124

—

39

39

82

82

125

—

40

40

83

83

126

—

41

41

84

84

127

—

42

42

85

85

128

—

43

43

86

86

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

User
Scene #

User
Scene #

User
Scene #

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table

337

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
CHANNEL1
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56

High
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L

Mid

Low

CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4

MASTER

STEREO

CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER

BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4

MASTER

STEREO

CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

338

Appendix C: MIDI

CHANNEL2
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L

Mid

Low

CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8

MASTER

STEREO

CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
BUS5
BUS6

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
FADER L
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
BALANCE
NO ASSIGN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

MASTER
MASTER

BUS7
BUS8

MASTER

STEREO

CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table

339

CHANNEL3
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
FADER L
FADER L

Mid
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER

G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
MASTER
MASTER

Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
AUX1
AUX2

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
FADER L
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

MASTER
MASTER

AUX3
AUX4

F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

340

Appendix C: MIDI

CHANNEL4
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
FADER L
FADER L

Mid
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER

G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
MASTER
MASTER

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
AUX5
AUX6

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
FADER L
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

MASTER
MASTER

AUX7
AUX8

F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table

341

CHANNEL5
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
ON
ON

Mid
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER

G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
MASTER
MASTER

Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
BUS5
BUS6

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

MASTER
MASTER

BUS7
BUS8

F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

342

Appendix C: MIDI

CHANNEL6
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
ON
ON

Mid
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER

G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
MASTER
MASTER

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
AUX5
AUX6

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

MASTER
MASTER

AUX7
AUX8

F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table

343

CHANNEL7
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN

Mid
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H

G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L

Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

344

Appendix C: MIDI

CHANNEL8
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN

Mid
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H

G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table

345

CHANNEL9
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN

Mid
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H

G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L

Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

346

Appendix C: MIDI

CHANNEL10
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN

Mid
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H

G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table

347

CHANNEL11
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN

Mid
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H

ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L

Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

348

Appendix C: MIDI

CHANNEL12
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN

Mid
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H

ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table

349

CHANNEL13
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN

Mid
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H

LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L

Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

350

Appendix C: MIDI

CHANNEL14
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN

Mid
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H

LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table

351

CHANNEL15
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN

Mid
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR

FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR

Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH

INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

352

Appendix C: MIDI

CHANNEL16
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN

Mid
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR

FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN

Mid

Low

WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH

INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48

MIDI Data Format

353

MIDI Data Format
1. DATA FORMAT

1.4.2.2 PARAMTER CHANGE

1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
Command
8n NOTE OFF
9n NOTE ON
Bn CONTROL CHANGE
Cn PROGRAM CHANGE

rx/tx
rx
rx
rx/tx
rx/tx

function
Control the internal effects
Control the internal effects
Control parameters
Switch scene memories

rx/tx
rx
rx

function
MTC
Used when TIME REFERENCE is
MIDI CLOCK.

1.3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
Command
F8 TIMING CLOCK
FA START
FB CONTINUE
FC STOP
FE ACTIVE SENSING
FF RESET

rx/tx
rx
rx
rx
rx
rx
rx

function
MIDI clock
Start automix (from the beginning)
Start automix (from the middle)
Stop automix
Check MIDI cable connections
Clear running status

1.4 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
1.4.1 Real Time System Exclusive
Command
rx/tx
F0 7F dd 06 … F7 MMC
tx
COMMAND
F0 7F dd 07 … F7 MMC RESPONSE rx
F0 7F dd 01 … F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx

function
MMC command
MMC response
MTC full message

1.4.2 System Exclusive Message

Data name

rx/tx
rx/tx

function
BULK DUMP DATA

rx/tx

BULK DUMP REQUEST

tx/rx
tx/rx

‘S’
‘a’

tx/rx
tx/rx

‘R’
‘O’
‘H’
‘G’
‘Y’
‘Q’
‘E’
‘J’
‘K’
‘P’
‘C’
‘L’
‘V’
‘U’
‘N’

tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx

rx/tx

DM1000-specific parameter change

rx/tx

General purpose digital mixer
parameter change
General purpose digital mixer
parameter request

rx/tx

1 (01)
2 (02)
3 (03)
4 (04)
15 (0F)
16 (10)
17 (11)
18 (12)
19 (13)
20 (14)
32 (20)
33 (21)

Type (HEX)

tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
rx
rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
rx
tx/rx

function
Edit buffer
Patch data
Setup data
Backup data
Cascade data
Function (recall, store, title, clear)
Function (pair, copy)
Function (effect)
Sort table
Function (attribute, link)
Key remote
Remote meter

34 (22)
35 (23)
80 (50)

tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx

84 (54)
126 (7E)
127 (7F)

tx/rx
tx/rx
tx

Remote time counter
Automix status
Function response (recall, store,
title, clear)
Function response (attribute, link)
System Attribute
Active sense

* ‘tx’ indicates that the data can be transmitted from the DM1000, and
‘rx’ indicates that the data can be received by the DM1000.

2. Format Details

function
Scene Memory & Request
(compressed data)
Setup Memory & Request
Automix data & Request
(compressed data)
Input patch library & Request
Output patch library & Request
Channel library & Request
Gate library & Request
Compressor library & Request
Equalizer library & Request
Effect library & Request
Bus to Stereo library & Request
Surround Monitor library & Request
Program change table & Request
Control change table & Request
User define layer & Request
User define key & Request
User assignable layer & Request
Plug-in Effect Card Data & Request

(8n)

Reception
If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these message are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA

The following data types of bulk dump are used on the DM1000.
‘m’

function
DM1000-specific parameter change

2.1 NOTE OFF

1.4.2.1 Bulk Dump
Command
F0 43 0n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP
DATA
F0 43 2n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP
REQUEST

rx/tx
rx/tx

The following data types of parameter change are used by the DM1000.

1.2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE
Command
F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER
FRAME
F2 SONG POSITION POINTER

Command
F0 43 1n 3E 0C … F7 RARAMETER
CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 0C … F7 PARAMETER
REQUEST
F0 43 1n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER
CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER
REQUEST

1000nnnn 8n Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(ignored)

2.2 NOTE ON

(9n)

Reception
If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA

1001nnnn 9n Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(1-127:on, 0:off)

2.3 CONTROL CHANGE

(Bn)

Reception
If [Control Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If [TABLE] is selected, these message are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON,
and will control parameters according to the [Control assign table] settings.
The parameters that can be set are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List.
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON
and the [Rx CH] matches, and will control the parameter that is specified by the
four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

354

Appendix C: MIDI

Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, operating a parameter specified in the [Control assign table] will cause these messages to be transmitted if [Control Change Tx] is ON.
The parameters that can be specified are defined in the Control Change Assign
Parameter List.
If [NRPN] is selected, operating a specified parameter will cause data to be
transmitted on the [Tx CH] if [Control Change Tx] is ON, using the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h,
26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter
List.
This data cannot be transmitted via control change to Studio Manager since
there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter
Change messages will always be used.)

If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA

1011nnnn Bn Control change
0nnnnnnn nn Control number (0-95, 102-119)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)

If [NRPN] is selected
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA

1011nnnn
01100010
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
01100011
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
00000110
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
00100110
0vvvvvvv

Bn
62
vv
Bn
63
vv
Bn
06
vv
Bn
26
vv

Control change
NRPN LSB
LSB of parameter number
NRPN MSB

11111010 FA Start

2.8 CONTINUE

(FB)

Reception
This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, and will cause automix to start from the current song position. In actuality, automix will start when the next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the CONTINUE message.
STATUS

11111011 FB Continue

2.9 STOP

(FC)

11111100 FC Stop

(FE)

Reception
Once this message has been received, the failure to receive any message for an
interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized, such
as by clearing the Running Status.

Control change *1
MSB of data entry
MSB of parameter data
Control change *1

STATUS

LSB of data entry

11111110 FE Active sensing

LSB of parameter data

(Cn)

Transmission
If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted according to the settings of the [Program Change Table] on the [Tx CH] channel when a scene
memory is recalled.
If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number, the
lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. Transmission to Studio
Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed since there is
no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter Changes will
always be used.)
1100nnnn Cn Program change
0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)

2.5 SONG POSITION POINTER

(F2)

11110010 F2 Song position pointer
0vvvvvvv vv Song position LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Song position MSB

2.6 TIMING CLOCK

(F8)

Reception
If the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, this message is used
to synchronize automix. It is also used to control effects. This message is transmitted 24 times per quarter note.
11111000 F8 Timing clock

2.11 SYSTEM RESET

(FF)

Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communications will be cleared, e.g., by
clearing the Running Status.
STATUS

11111111 FF System reset

2.12 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
2.12.1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL

(F0)

(MMC)

These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the
DM1000 is operated.

2.12.2 BULK DUMP
This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored within
the DM1000.
The basic format is as follows.
For DUMP DATA
F0 43 0n 7E cc cc  tt mm mm [Data …] cs F7
For DUMP REQUEST
F0 43 2n 7E  tt mm mm F7
n
cc cc

Reception
If this is received when the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, the automix will move to the song position that was received.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

STATUS

2.10 ACTIVE SENSING

MSB of parameter number

Reception
If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI
OUT.
If [Program Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches, these messages will
be received. However if [OMNI] is ON, they will be received regardless of the
channel. When a message is received, a Scene Memory will be recalled according
to the settings of the [Program Change Table].

STATUS

Reception
This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, and will start the automix. In actuality, automix will start when the
next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the START message.

STATUS

Control change *1

2.4 PROGRAM CHANGE

STATUS
DATA

(FA)

Reception
This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, and will cause automix to stop.

*1) The second and subsequent STATUS need not be added during
transmission. Reception must be implemented so that reception occurs whether or not STATUS is present.

STATUS
DATA

2.7 START

4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31
tt
mm mm
cs

Device Number
DATA COUNT (the number of bytes that
follow this, ending before the checksum)
Model ID
DATA TYPE
DATA NUMBER
CHECK SUM

A unique header (Model ID) is used to determine whether the device is a
DM1000.
CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT
(LOW) and end before CHECK SUM, taking the binary compliment of this
sum, and then setting bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
Reception
This message is received if [Bulk RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device
number included in the SUB STATUS.
When a bulk dump is received, it is immediately written into the specified
memory.
When a bulk dump request is received, a bulk dump is immediately transmitted.

MIDI Data Format

Transmission
This message is transmitted on the [Tx CH] by key operations in the [MIDI]-[BULK DUMP] screen.
A bulk dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] in response to a bulk dump request.
The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8-bit data into eight
words of 7-bit data.
Conversion from actual data into bulk data
d[0~6]: actual data
b[0~7]: bulk data
b[0] = 0;
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
if( d[I]&0x80){
b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
}
b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
Restoration from bulk data into actual data
d[0~6]: actual data
b[0~7]: bulk data
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
b[0] <<= 1;
d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}

2.12.2.1 Scene memory bulk dump format (compress)
The DM1000 can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed form.
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01101101
0mmmmmmm

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
6D
mh

System exclusive message

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

total block number(minimum number is 0)

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

DATA NAME

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’

355

0mmmmmmm mh m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT
BUFFER, UNDO)

EOX

0mmmmmmm ml
11110111 F7 End of exclusive

2.12.2.3 Setup memory bulk dump format
Of the setup memory of the DM1000, this bulk-dumps data other than the User
define layer, User define plug-in, User define keys, Control change table, and
Program change table.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010011
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
53
02
00
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘S’
No.256 = Current
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Setup data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’

2.12.2.4 Setup memory bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

‘m’

m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT
BUFFER, UNDO)
0mmmmmmm ml Receive is effective 1-99, 256, 8192
current block number(0-total block number)
Scene data of block[bb]

DATA NAME
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

EOX

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010011
00000010
00000000
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
53
02
00
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘S’
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive

2.12.2.2 Scene memory bulk dump request format
(compress)

2.12.2.5 User Defeined MIDI Remote bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the scene number that
is being requested. If this is 256, the data of the Edit Buffer will be bulk-dumped.
If this is 8192, the data of the Undo Buffer will be bulk-dumped.

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

DATA NAME

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01101101

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
6D

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘m’

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

356

Appendix C: MIDI

DATA NAME

01001100
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

4C
00
bb
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

‘L’

2.12.2.8 User Defined Keys bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.

b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
User define layer data of block[bb]

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

2.12.2.6 User Defeined MIDI Remote bulk dump request
format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

DATA NAME

EOX

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001100
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4C
00
bb
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
56
00
bb
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘V’
b=0-7(bank no.A-H)
End of exclusive

2.12.2.9 User Assignable Layer bulk dump format

‘’

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.

‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘L’
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
End of exclusive

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010101
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
55
00
bb
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘U’
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
User assignable layer data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

‘9’
‘1’

2.12.2.10 User Assignable Layer bulk dump request format

‘V’

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.

b=0-7(bank no.A-H)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
User define key data of block[bb]

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

DATA NAME

EOX

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

System exclusive message

‘M’

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010110
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

EOX

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
56
00
bb
F7

‘L’

2.12.2.7 User Defined Keys bulk dump format

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

DATA NAME

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010110
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010101
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
55
00
bb
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘U’
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format

2.12.2.11 Control change table bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01000011
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
43
02
00
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump

‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’

DATA NAME

EOX

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01000011
00000010
00000000
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
43
02
00
F7

‘C’

EOX

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010000
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
50
02
00
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010000
00000010
00000000
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
50
02
00
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘P’
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive

No.256 = Current
total block number(minimum number is 0)

2.12.2.15 Equalizer library bulk dump format

current block number(0-total block number)

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 – 199:Library no.200,
256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (40-199, 256-)

Control change table data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘C’
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive

2.12.2.13 Program change table bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

DATA NAME

‘1’

2.12.2.12 Control change table bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

2.12.2.14 Program change table bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

data count = ch * 128 + cl

‘9’

357

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
51
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘Q’
0-127(EQ Library no.1-128),
256-(Channel current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
EQ Library data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl

2.12.2.16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format

‘L’

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See
above)

‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

‘9’
‘1’
‘P’
No.256 = Current
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Program change table data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

DATA NAME

EOX

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
51
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘Q’
0-127(EQ Library no.1-128),
256-(Channel current data)
End of exclusive

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

358

Appendix C: MIDI

2.12.2.17 Compressor library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128,
256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (36-127, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01011001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
59
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump

00110001
01000111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
DATA NAME

31
47
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

‘1’
‘G’
0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),
256-351(Channel current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
GATE Library data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

data count = ch * 128 + cl

2.12.2.20 Gate library bulk dump request format
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

‘9’
‘1’
‘Y’
0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),
256-(Channel current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
COMP Library data of block[bb]

DATA NAME
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

EOX

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01000111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
47
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘G’
0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),
256-351(Channel current data)
End of exclusive

2.12.2.18 Compressor library bulk dump request format

2.12.2.21 Effect library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:EFFECT1 – 259:EFFECT4, 8192:UNDO
256-263 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer.
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (52-127, 256-259,
8192)

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

DATA NAME

EOX

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01011001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
59
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘Y’
0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),
256-(Channel current data)
End of exclusive

2.12.2.19 Gate library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (4-127, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01000101
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
45
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘E’
0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),
256-259(Effect1-4 current)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Effect Library data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format

2.12.2.22 Effect library bulk dump request format

EOX

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)

2.12.2.25 Input patch library bulk dump format

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

DATA NAME

EOX

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01000101
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
45
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘E’
0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),
256-259(Effect1-4 current)
End of exclusive

2.12.2.23 Channel library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 – 128:Library no.128,
256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are the data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (2-128, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01001000
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
48
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

359

11110111 F7 End of exclusive

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current input patch data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
52
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘R’
0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Input patch Library data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl

2.12.2.26 Input patch library bulk dump request format

‘L’

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)

‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘H’
0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),
256-(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Channel Library data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

DATA NAME

EOX

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
52
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘R’
0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
End of exclusive

End of exclusive

2.12.2.27 Output patch library bulk dump format
2.12.2.24 Channel library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

DATA NAME

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001000
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
48
mh
ml

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current output patch data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘H’
0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),
256-(Current data)

DATA NAME

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4F

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘O’

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

360

Appendix C: MIDI

0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32),

2.12.2.30 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump request format

256(Current data)

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)

total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Output patch Library data of block[bb]

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

2.12.2.28 Output patch library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

DATA NAME

EOX

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4F
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4A
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘J’
0-32(Bus to stereo Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
End of exclusive

2.12.2.31 Surround Monitor library bulk dump format

‘8’

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)

‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘O’
0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
End of exclusive

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01001011
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4B
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘K’
0-32(Surround Monitor Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Surround Monitor Library data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

‘J’
0-32(Bus to stereo Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Bus to stereo Library data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

2.12.2.32 Surround Monitor library bulk dump request
format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

End of exclusive

DATA NAME

EOX

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

System exclusive message

‘’

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01001010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

EOX

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4A
mh
ml
F7

‘’

2.12.2.29 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump format

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

DATA NAME

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001011
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4B
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘K’
0-32(Surround Monitor Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format

2.12.2.33 Automix bulk dump format
The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the library number.
0:Library no.1 – 15:Library no.16, 256:current automix data
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
61
mh
ml
bh
bl
th
tl
ds
:
de
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘a’
0-15(Automix no.1-16), 256(Current data)
current block number(0-total block number)
total block number(minimum number is 0)

DATA NAME

01001110
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0000iiii
0000iiii
0000jjjj
0000jjjj
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111

DATA NAME

EOX

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
61
mh
ml
F7

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘a’
0-15(Automix no.1-16), 256(Current data)
End of exclusive

2.12.2.35 Plug-in effect card bulk dump format
The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number.
0:SLOT 1 – 1:SLOT 2
The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different than
the card that is installed in the slot.
The data is not transmitted if a valid plug-in effect card is not installed.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW

11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001

F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31

DATA NAME

System exclusive message
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump

EOX

current block number(0-total block number)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
Developer id (High)
Developer id (Low)
Product id (High)
Product id (Low)
Plug-in Effect card memory data of block[bb]

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive

11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001110
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4E
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘N’
m=0-1(SLOT 1-2)
End of exclusive

2.12.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
2.12.3.1 Basic behavior
Reception
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device Number
included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. A specific parameter
is controlled when a Parameter Change is received. When a Parameter Request
is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a
Parameter Change with the Device Number set to [Rx CH].
Transmission
If [Parameter change TX] is ON and you operate a parameter for which Control
Change transmission is not enabled, a parameter change will be transmitted
with [Tx CH] as the Device Number.
As a response to a Parameter Request, a parameter change will be transmitted
with [Rx CH] as the Device Number.

2.12.3.1.1 Parameter change basic format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

data count = ch * 128 + cl

System exclusive message

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee

F0
43
1n
3E
0C
tt
ee

0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111

cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Data type

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

‘L’
‘M’
‘’

m=0-1(SLOT 1-2)

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the slot number. (See
above)

2.12.2.34 Automix bulk dump request format

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.

‘N’

2.12.2.36 Plug-in effect card bulk dump request format

Automix memory data of block[bb]

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)

4E
mh
ml
bh
bl
th
tl
0i
0i
0j
0j
ds
:
de
ee
F7

361

DATA *)

‘’
‘8’

EOX

‘C’

*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be
transmitted.

‘9’
‘1’

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

362

Appendix C: MIDI

2.12.3.1.2 Parameter Change basic format (Universal
format)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

System exclusive message

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
tt
ee

0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111

cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal

2.12.3.3 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

Data type

EOX

*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be
transmitted.

2.12.3.1.3 Parameter request basic format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee

F0
43
3n
3E
0C
tt
ee

System exclusive message

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee

F0
43
3n
3E
7F
tt
ee

DATA

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

EOX

2.12.3.2 Parameter change
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
01
ee

(Edit buffer)

EOX

0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

DATA

Universal

cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive

Edit Buffer

0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive

(Patch data)

System exclusive message

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000010
0eeeeeee

F0
43
1n
3E
0C
02
ee

0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111

cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Patch data

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000010
0eeeeeee

F0
43
3n
3E
0C
02
ee

(Patch data)

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Patch data

0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive

(Setup memory)

System exclusive message

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000011
0eeeeeee

F0
43
1n
3E
0C
03
ee

0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111

cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Setup data

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

Edit Buffer

Universal

2.12.3.6 Parameter change

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

DATA

EOX

System exclusive message

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

Data type

Consult your dealer for parameter address details.

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00000001
0eeeeeee

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

Universal

0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

2.12.3.5 Parameter request

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

2.12.3.1.5 Parameter Address

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

EOX

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

DM1000

2.12.3.1.4 Parameter request basic format (Universal
format)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive

(Edit buffer)

System exclusive message

2.12.3.4 Parameter change

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

EOX

EOX

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

Data type

F0
43
3n
3E
7F
01
ee

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

DATA *)

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00000001
0eeeeeee

EOX

2.12.3.7 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000011
0eeeeeee

F0
43
3n
3E
0C
03
ee

(Setup memory)

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Setup data

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

EOX

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format

2.12.3.8 Parameter change
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

(Backup memory)

System exclusive message

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000100
0eeeeeee

F0
43
1n
3E
0C
04
ee

0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111

cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Backup data

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

DATA
EOX

2.12.3.9 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000100
0eeeeeee

F0
43
3n
3E
0C
04
ee

(Backup memory)

System exclusive message

Backup data

0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive

(Cascade data)

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
0F
ss
ee

0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111

cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Cascade data
Set:0, Response:1

2.12.3.11 Parameter request

(Cascade data)

Reception
This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Data received from a port that is assigned to [Cascade Link] and whose Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS matches the [Rx CH] will be received for
processing.
When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted
as a Parameter response.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00001111
0eeeeeee

F0
43
3n
3E
7F
0F
ee

EOX

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Cascade data

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
ff
mh
ml
ch
cl
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
function
number High
number Low
channel High
channel Low
End of exclusive

function
SCENE RECALL
EQ LIB RECALL
GATE LIB RECALL
COMP LIB RECALL
EFF LIB RECALL
CHANNEL LIB RECALL
INPATCH LIB RECALL
OUTPATCH LIB RECALL
Bus to Stereo LIB RECALL
Surround Monitor LIB RECALL
AUTOMIX LIB RECALL

0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B

number
0-99, 8192
1-128, 8192
1-128, 8192
1-128, 8192
1-128, 8192
0-128, 8192
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
1-16

channel*1)
256
0-513
0-95
0-513
0-3
0-513
256
256
256
256
256

tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx

SCENE STORE
EQ LIB STORE
GATE LIB STORE
COMP LIB STORE
EFF LIB STORE
CHANNEL LIB STORE
INPATCH LIB STORE
OUTPATCH LIB STORE
Bus to Stereo LIB STORE
Surround Monitor LIB STORE
AUTOMIX LIB STORE

0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x26
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2A
0x2B

1-99
41-128
5-128
37-128
53-128
1-128
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-16

256, 16383
0-513, 16383
0-47, 16383
0-513, 16383
0-3, 16383
0-513, 16383
256, 16383
256, 16383
256, 16383
256, 16383
256, 16383

tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx

*1) 0:CH1 – 47:CH48, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8,
512:STEREO
Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data item.
Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4
If the store destination is 16383 (0x3FFF), this indicates that the library data has been changed by a external cause (such as bulk reception)
(only transmitted by the DM1000)

2.12.3.12.1 Parameter change (Function call response:
Library store/recall)
Transmission
If store/recall is executed by a parameter change received from Studio Manager,
the result of execution is transmitted as the following parameter change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

0ccccccc cc Channel no.
EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
00ffffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111

System exclusive message

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00001111
0sssssss
0eeeeeee

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

EOX

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

DATA

Reception
This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Data received from a port that is assigned to [Cascade Link] and whose Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS matches the [Rx CH] will be received for
processing.
When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.

DATA

Transmission
If [Parameter change Tx] is ON, and you store or recall a memory/library for
which Program Change transmission is not valid, this message will be transmitted with the Device Number set to the [Tx CH].

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

2.12.3.10 Parameter change

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

Reception
When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled. If
this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a Parameter Response.

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.

EOX

2.12.3.12 Parameter change (Function call: Library store /
recall)

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

DM1000

363

11110111 F7 End of exclusive

DATA

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
01010000
00ffffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
50
ff
mh
ml
ch
cl

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call response
function
number High
number Low
channel High
channel Low

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

364

EOX

Appendix C: MIDI

0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111

ee
ee
ee
ee
F7

result HH
result HL
result LH

DATA

result LL
End of exclusive

2.12.3.13 Parameter change

(Function call: title)

Reception
When this is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be changed.
If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be
executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter response.
Transmission
In response to a request, this is transmitted with the device number set to the
[Tx CH].
When the title is changed on the DM1000, this message will be transmitted with
the device number set to [Tx CH].
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

DATA

EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
0100ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
11110111

function
SCENE LIB TITLE
EQ LIB TITLE
GATE LIB TITLE
COMP LIB TITLE
EFF LIB TITLE
CHANNEL LIB TITLE
INPATCH LIB TITLE
OUTPATCH LIB TITLE
Bus to Stereo LIB TITLE
Surround Monitor LIB TITLE
AUTOMIX LIB TITLE

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
4f
mh
ml
dd
:
dd
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
title

EOX

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

EOX

End of exclusive
number
0-99,256(0:response only)
1-128(1-40:response only)
1-128(1-4:response only)
1-128(1-36:response only)
1-128(1-52:response only)
0-128(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
1-16

size
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16

(Function call: title)

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

result LH
result LL
End of exclusive

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
6f
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
clear function
number High
number Low
End of exclusive

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

number High
number Low

DATA

End of exclusive

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
title

0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x66
0x67
0x68
0x69
0x6A
0x6B

number
1-99
41-128
5-128
37-128
53-128
1-128
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-16

Transmission
When a scene or library is cleared as a result of receiving a parameter change
from Studio Manager, the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter change.

title

11110000 F0 System exclusive message
43
1n
3E
7F
50
4f

result HL

2.12.3.17 Parameter change (Function call response:
Scene/Library Clear)

Function call

Transmission
If the title is modified by a parameter change received from Studio Manager, the
result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter change.
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
01010000
0100ffff

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
0110ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

function
SCENE LIB CLEAR
EQ LIB CLEAR
GATE LIB CLEAR
COMP LIB CLEAR
EFF LIB CLEAR
CHANNEL LIB CLEAR
INPATCH LIB CLEAR
OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR
Bus to Stereo LIB CLEAR
Surround Monitor LIB CLEAR
AUTOMIX LIB CLEAR

2.12.3.15 Parameter change (Function call response: title)

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

result HH

title x(depend on the library)

0x40
0x41
0x42
0x43
0x44
0x46
0x47
0x48
0x49
0x4A
0x4B

F0
43
3n
3E
7F
10
4f
mh
ml
F7

number Low

Transmission
When a memory or library is cleared on the DM1000, this message will be transmitted with the device number set to [Tx CH].

title 1

Reception
When this is received, a parameter change will be transmitted with the device
number set to [Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
0100ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

number High

Reception
When this is received, the specified memory/library will be cleared. If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed,
and then the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter
response.

number Low
:

mh
ml
ee
ee
ee
ee
F7

2.12.3.16 Parameter change (Function call: Scene/Library
Clear)

number High

2.12.3.14 Parameter request

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

EOX

0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111

EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
01010000
0110ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
50
6f
mh
ml
ee
ee
ee
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
clear function
number High
number Low
result HH
result HL
result LH
result LL
End of exclusive

2.12.3.18 Parameter change (Function call: attribute)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the attribute of the specified memory/library will be
changed.

MIDI Data Format

Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

DATA
EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0000ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
11110111

function
SCENE LIB ATTRIBUTE
EQ LIB ATTRIBUTE
GATE LIB ATTRIBUTE
COMP LIB ATTRIBUTE
EFF LIB ATTRIBUTE
CHANNEL LIB ATTRIBUTE
INPATCH LIB ATTRIBUTE
OUTPATCH LIB ATTRIBUTE
Bus to Stereo LIB ATTRIBUTE
Surround Monitor LIB
ATTRIBUTE
AUTOMIX LIB ATTRIBUTE

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
14
0f
mh
ml
th
tl
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
attribute
number High
number Low
attribute(protect:0x2000, normal:0x0000)
End of exclusive

0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A

number
0-99(0:response only)
1-128(1-40:response only)
1-128(1-4:response only)
1-128(1-36:response only)
1-128(1-52:response only)
0-128(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)

0x0B

1-16

2.12.3.19 Parameter request (Function call: attribute)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

EOX

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0000ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
3n
3E
7F
14
0f
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

DATA

EOX

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
54
0f
mh
ml
ee
ee
ee
ee
F7

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

DATA

EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0010ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ooooooo
0ooooooo
11110111

function
SCENE LIB LINK

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
14
2f
mh
ml
ih
il
oh
ol
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
link
number High
number Low
inpatch
outpatch
End of exclusive

0x20

number
0-99(0:response only)

2.12.3.22 Parameter request

(Function call: link)

Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

Function call

EOX

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0010ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111

F0
43
3n
3E
7F
14
2f
mh
ml
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
link
number High
number Low
End of exclusive

number High
number Low
End of exclusive

Transmission
When an attribute is modified as a result of receiving a parameter change from
Studio Manager, the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter change.
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
01010100
0000ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111

Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without
change.

Universal
attribute

(Function call: link)

Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the patch link data of the specified scene will be modified.

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

2.12.3.20 Parameter change (Function call response:
attribute)

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

2.12.3.21 Parameter change

365

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

2.12.3.23 Parameter change (Function call response: link)
Transmission
When link data is modified as a result of receiving a parameter change from Studio Manager, the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call

DATA

attribute
number High
number Low
result HH

EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
01010100
0010ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
54
2f
mh
ml
ee
ee
ee
ee
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
link
number High
number Low
result HH
result HL
result LH
result LL
End of exclusive

result HL
result LH
result LL
End of exclusive

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

366

Appendix C: MIDI

2.12.3.24 Parameter change (Function call: pair, copy)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, pairing will be enabled/disabled for the specified channel.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

DATA
EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010001
0000ffff
0sssssss
0sssssss
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
11
0f
sh
sl
dh
dl
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call Pair
Source channel H

Destination channel L
End of exclusive
channel
*1)
*1)
*1)

Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the corresponding effect’s function activates (depending
on the effect type).

EOX

function
Freeze Play button
Freeze Record button
Auto Pan 5.1 Trigger Button
Auto Pan 5.1 Reset Button

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Library sort table
Library type
End of exclusive

(Key remote)

Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the same processing that is executed when the key specified by Address is pressed (released).
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

DATA
EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100000
0kkkkkkk
0kkkkkkk
0kkkkkkk
0ppppppp
11110111

F0
43
1n
3E
0C
20
kk
kk
kk
pp
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Key remote
Key address H
Key address M
Key address L
Release:0, Press:1
End of exclusive

2.12.3.29 Parameter change

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter, the
specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When
you want to transmit meter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted continuously within every 10 seconds.

MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call Effect Event
function
Release:0, Press:1
Effect number (0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4)
End of exclusive
channel
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
0:Effect1-3:Effect4

(Sort Table)

System exclusive message

Transmission
When transmission has been enabled by a Request, the parameter specified by
Address will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at 50 msec intervals for a
duration of 10 seconds.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the
PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

DATA

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Library sort table
Library type
Data

(Remote Meter)

Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When scene memory sort is executed on the DM1000, the memory sort table
will be transmitted to Studio Manager.
Studio Manager will sort the memories according to this data.
If Studio Manager performs a scene memory sort, it will transmit this data to
the DM1000.

DATA

System exclusive message

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03

F0
43
1n
3E
0C
13
0f
ds
:

F0
43
3n
3E
0C
13
0f
F7

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

2.12.3.26 Parameter change

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00010011
0000ffff
0ddddddd
:

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00010011
0000ffff
11110111

System exclusive message

• This does not activate when the effect type is different.

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

2.12.3.28 Parameter change

Destination channel H

2.12.3.25 Parameter change (Function call Event: Effect )

DATA

(Sort Table)

When the DM1000 receives this data, it will transmit Sort Table Data.

Source channel L

0x00
0x01
0x02

F0
43
1n
3E
7F
12
0f
00
pp
00
ee
F7

2.12.3.27 Parameter request

EOX

*1) 0:CH1 – 47:CH48, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8,
512:STEREO
Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4
• In the case of PAIR, you must specify channels for which pairing is possible.
• In the case of PAIR ON with COPY, you must specify Source Channel
as the copy source, and Destination Channel as the copy destination.

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010010
0000ffff
00000000
0ppppppp
00000000
0eeeeeee
11110111

0ddddddd de Data
11110111 F7 End of exclusive

8-7 conversion is performed on the data area in the same way as for bulk.

function

function
PAIR ON with COPY
PAIR ON with RESET BOTH
PAIR OFF

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

EOX

EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
:
11110111

F0
43
1n
3E
0C
21
mm
mm
mm
dd
dd
:
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Remote meter
ADDRESS UL
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
Data1 H
Data1 L
End of exclusive

* The meter data can be either the unadjusted DECAY value of the DSP,
or the table-converted value. The interpretation of the data will depend on the parameter.

MIDI Data Format

2.12.3.30 Parameter request

(Remote Meter)

Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, data of the specified address is transmitted on the [Rx
CH] at intervals of 50 msec as a rule (although this may not be the case if the
port is being used by other communication), for a period of 10 seconds.
If Address UL= 0x7F is received, transmission of all meter data will be halted
immediately. (disable)
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

EOX

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111

F0
43
3n
3E
0C
21
mm
mm
mm
ch
cl
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Remote meter
ADDRESS UL
ADDRESS LU
Count H
Count L
End of exclusive

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time Counter,
the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you
want to transmit Counter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted within every 10 seconds.
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request, the Time Counter information is transmitted on [RxCH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the
PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.

DATA
EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100010
0000tttt
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111

F0
43
1n
3E
0C
22
0t
dd
dd
dd
dd
F7

Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

EOX

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100010
0ddddddd

F0
43
3n
3E
0C
22
dd

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Remote Time counter

0:Transmission request,
0x7F:Transmission stop request
11110111 F7 End of exclusive

2.12.3.33 Parameter change

(Automix Status)

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Automix status, the Automix Status data is transmitted every second for 10 seconds. When you want
to transmit the Automix Status information continuously, the Request must be
transmitted continuously minimum within 10 seconds interval. The data is
transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when the Automix Status on the DM1000 has been changed.
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

ADDRESS LL

2.12.3.31 Parameter change (Remote Time Counter)

STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

367

Transmission
When the transmission is set to enable by receiving a Request. The Automix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel every second for 10 seconds. The
data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when
the Automix Status on the DM1000 has been changed.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the
PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

EOX

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100011
00000000
0000dddd
0000dddd
11110111

F0
43
1n
3E
0C
23
00
0d
0d
F7

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Automix status
Automix status H
Automix status L
End of exclusive

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Remote Time counter
0:Time code, 1:Measure.Beat.Clock
Hour / Measure H
Minute / Measure L
Second / Beat
Frame / Clock
End of exclusive

2.12.3.32 Parameter request (Remote Time Counter)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the Time Counter information is transmitted on the [Rx
CH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be
halted immediately. (disable)

2.12.3.34 Parameter request

(Automix Status)

Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When the data is received, the Automix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx
CH] every second for 10 seconds.
When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be
halted immediately (disable).
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS

EOX

11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100011
0ddddddd

F0
43
3n
3E
0C
23
dd

System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Automix status

0:Transmission request,
0x7F:Transmission stop request
11110111 F7 End of exclusive

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

368

Appendix D: Options

Appendix D: About Optional Product
MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge
Installing the Meter Bridge
2-1

2-1
16
4

15
3

OMNI
IN

14
2

13
1

12

11

10

9

12

11

10

9

INPUT

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

2-2

2-2
SLOT

SLOT

POWER
ON
OFF

AC IN

METER

SMPTE IN

REMOTE

MIDI
OUT

IN

TO HOST
USB

CONTROL

WORD CLOCK
OUT

2TR IN
DIGITAL

1
IN

2

AES/EBU

1

2

COAXIAL COAXIAL

AES/EBU

1 Attach the brackets to the meter bridge.

Align the holes on the lower part of the meter bridge with the holes on the upper part of the
brackets (as shown in the illustration below), then use four 8 mm screws (1) included in
the MB1000 package to affix the brackets to the meter bridge.
2 Install the meter bridge to the DM1000 following the steps below:

a) Insert two of four 12 mm screws (2-2) included in the MB1000 package into the lower
holes (2-2), then tighten them with your fingers. Leave the screws projecting by about
4 mm.
b) Align these screws with the notches on the included meter angles, then align the holes
on the upper part of the meter angles with the holes on the upper part of the DM1000
(2-1).
c) Insert the other two 12 mm screws (2-1) into the upper holes (2-1), then tighten
them securely.
d) Tighten the screws (2-2) that were finger-tightened in Step a) securely to firmly attach
the meter bridge to the DM1000.
3 Connect the meter bridge cable to the DM1000’s METER connector.

Upper

2-1
2-2
1

2-1

Lower

2-2
1

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Meter angle

MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge

369

BUS 8

OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48

8

BUS 4

S
M

BUS 5

BUS 6

B INPUT METERING POSITION indicators

REMOTE 2

MASTER

17-32

33-48

H

BUS 1

OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
REMOTE 1

E TIME CODE display

BUS 8

F [1-16] / [17-32] / [33-48] / [REMOTE 1] /

BUS 6

BUS 7

[REMOTE 2] / [MASTER] buttons
These buttons select the layers of the channel meters displayed on the meter bridge. The button indicator of the
currently-selected layer lights up.
If you turn on the Meter Follow Layer check box on the
Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 250), the layer selection
on the meter bridge follows the layer selection on the
DM1000.

BUS 5

G Level meters

AUX 8

OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48

BUS 2
BUS 1

This button turns the Peak Hold function on or off.
When the Peak Hold function is turned on, the button
indicator lights up. This button works in unison with
the PEAK HOLD button displayed on the Meter display.
This display indicates the timecode or MIDI clock value
the DM1000 is receiving or generating.

OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48

1 -16

6

BUS 4

16
32
48
15
31
47
14
30
46
13
29
45
12
28
44

C OUTPUT METERING POSITION indicators

D [PEAK HOLD] button

11
27
43
BUS 3
10
26
42
9
25
41

7

These 12-segment LED level meters display the channel
levels of the selected layer.

H Bus meters

AUX 4

AUX 5

AUX 6

AUX 7

These 12-segment LED meters display the signal levels
of Bus Outs 1-8.

OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48

AUX 2
AUX 1

AUX 3

8
24
40
7
23
39
3
19
35
2
18
34
1
17
33

1

4
20
36

5
21
37

6
22
38

INPUT METERING POSITION
PRE FADER
POST FADER
PRE EQ

2

These indicators display the current metering position
specified for the Input Channels.
These indicators display the current metering position
specified for the Output Channels.

BUS 2

MEASURE

TIME CODE

PEAK HOLD
OUTPUT METERING POSITION
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER

3

These indicators display the channels for which the levels are currently displayed (Input Channels 1-16, 17-32,
33-48, Aux Outs 1-8, Bus Outs 1-8).

BUS 3

5

4

A Channel indicators

BUS 7

CLOCK
BEAT

PEAK METER BRIDGE MB1000 FOR

F

Meter Bridge Controls

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

370

Appendix D: Options

Rack Mounting the MB1000 Using Rack Angle Brackets
You can rack mount the MB1000 meter bridge using the rack angle brackets that came with
the meter bridge.
1 Detach the MB1000 from the DM1000. Also, remove the SP1000 side panels

if they are attached.
2 Hold a rack bracket against one side of the meter bridge so that the rack

angle bracket ear projects to the side, and align two holes on the brackets
with the holes on the side of the meter bridge, as shown in the illustration
below.
3 Affix the bracket using the screws included in the meter bridge package.
4 Attach the other bracket to the other side of the MB1000 in the same way.

Side of Meter Bridge

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

Rack angle bracket

Installing the SP1000 Side Panels

371

Installing the SP1000 Side Panels
The figure below illustrates how to attach the left side panel to the DM1000. Attach the right
side panel to the DM1000 in the same way.

Rack Mounting the DM1000 Using the RK1 Rack Mount
Kit
You can rack mount the DM1000 using the optional RK1 Rack Mount Kit.
1 Remove the side panels if they are attached.
2 Hold one of the brackets against one side of the DM1000 so that the bracket

ear projects to the side, and align five holes on the bracket with the holes
on the side of the DM1000, as shown in the illustration below.
3 Affix the bracket using five screws included in the RK1 package.
4 Attach the other bracket to the other side of the DM1000 in the same way.

Caution: Do not rack mount the DM1000 and an MB1000 connected together as a unit. Be
sure to rack mount them separately using the dedicated brackets.

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

372

Index

Index
Symbols
ø/INS/DLY | DLY 1-16 page .............. 61
ø/INS/DLY | DLY 17-32 page ............ 61
ø/INS/DLY | DLY 33-48 page ............ 61
ø/INS/DLY | Insert page ................... 112
ø/Ins/Dly | Insert page ...................... 150
ø/INS/DLY | Out Dly page ........... 81, 93
ø/INS/DLY | Phase page ..................... 60
ø/INSERT/DELAY button ................. 17
+48V ON/OFF switches ..................... 14
Phantom power ............................ 51

Numerics
1–12 buttons ........................................ 21
1-16/17-32/33-48 buttons .................. 20
2TR D1/D2 buttons ............................ 22
2TR IN D1/D2 buttons ....................... 53
2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 ........... 25
2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 .......... 25
2TR IN DIGITAL connectors ............ 52
2TRD1/2 ....................................... 46
2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 ....... 25
2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 ..... 25
2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors ........ 52
2TRD1/2 .............................................. 46

A
ABORT .............................................. 194
About the display ................................ 27
AC IN connector ................................. 25
AD input .............................................. 14
AD input and output section ............. 23
AD Input section ................................. 51
AD824 ................................................ 270
AD824 GAIN/PHANTOM
CONTROL .................... 271
ADAT I/O card .................................... 53
AES/EBU I/O card .............................. 53
AMP SIMULATE .............................. 300
Analog inputs & outputs .................... 51
ASSIGN button ................................... 16
Assignable parameters ........................ 36
Assigne
Control changes ......................... 240
MIDI messages ........................... 228
Parameters to the encoder ........... 35
Program changes ........................ 239
Remote layer ............................... 205
USER DEFINED KEYS .............. 214
Attenuator ...............................64, 81, 92
Output signals .............................. 88
AUTO button ...................................... 15
Auto Channel Select preference ....... 251
Auto Direct Out On preference ....... 252
Auto EQ Edit in preference .............. 254
Auto EQUALIZER Display
preference ............................. 251
Auto Inc TC Capture preference ..... 254
AUTO PAN ....................................... 296

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

AUTO PAN 5.1 ..................................311
Auto PAN/SURROUND Display
preference .............................251
AUTO REC ........................................194
Auto ROUTING Display preference 250
Auto SOLO Display preference ........251
Auto update function ........................159
Auto WORD CLOCK Display
preference .............................251
Automix ..............................................181
ABORT ........................................194
ABSOLUTE .................................193
AUTO button ....................... 15, 190
AUTO REC .................................194
AUTOMIX button ........................17
Automix main page ....................191
Automix memory page ..............195
COPY ...........................................199
EDIT OUT .......................... 192, 197
Edit safe buttons .........................197
Editing events offline ..................198
ERASE ..........................................199
Event edit page ............................202
Event job page .............................198
FADER EDIT ..............................193
Fader Edit mode ..........................192
Fader1 &2 pages ..........................196
FRAMES ......................................182
INT START TIME ......................191
MOTOR ......................................196
MOVE/MERGE ..........................199
NEW ............................................194
OFFSET .......................................191
OVERWRITE ..............................194
Parameter events can be
recorded .........................181
PLAY ............................................194
Playing back .................................190
PROTECT ...................................196
Punching in & out ......................188
REC ..............................................194
Recording ....................................184
Recording the event ....................185
RELATIVE ...................................193
RETURN .....................................192
SEL button ...................................190
Setting up .....................................182
Setup | Time Sig page .................183
STOP ............................................194
TAKEOVER ................................192
TIME REFERENCE ....................191
TIME REFERENCE section .......182
Time signature map ....................183
Timecode source .........................182
TO END button ..........................191
TRIM ...........................................200
UPDATE ......................................191
Automix | Event Edit page ................202
Automix | Event Job page .................198
Automix | Fader1 or 2 page ..............196
Automix | Main page ................ 184, 191
Automix | Memory page ...................195
AUTOMIX button ..............................17

Automix main page ...........................191
Automix memory page .....................195
Automix Store Undo preference ......254
AUX 1–AUX 8 buttons .......................16
AUX button .........................................16
AUX indicator ...............................16, 33
AUX SELECT section .........................16
Aux send mode ..................... 97, 98, 101
Aux sends .......................................91, 96
Attenuating ...................................92
Comp settings ...............................93
Copying channel fader
positions ........................104
Delaying .........................................93
EQ settings ..............................92, 94
Excluding certain channels ........103
Fixed mode ....................................98
Mix minus ...................................103
Panning .......................................102
Setting from the control surface ..92
Setting from the display .........92, 97
Setting levels ..................................92
Variable mode ...............................98
Viewing settings ............................94
Viewing settings for multiple
channels .........................100
Aux1 | Pan1–32 page .........................102
Aux1 | Pan33–48 page .......................102
Aux1 | Send1-32 page ....................71, 97
Aux1 | Send33-48 page ........................97
Aux1 | View1–16 page .......................100
Aux1 | View17–32 page .....................100
Aux1 | View33–48 page .....................100

B
Bass Management ..............................134
Battery ................................................272
Bulk dump .........................................246
Messages ......................................235
BUS button ..................................22, 132
Bus out .................................................79
Attenuating ...................................81
Compressing .................................82
Delaying .........................................81
EQ’ing ......................................82, 86
Naming ..........................................89
Pairing ...........................................87
Routing signals to the stereo bus .83
Setting from the control surface ..86
Setting from the display ...............81
Setting the levels ...........................86
Viewing the settings ......................84
Bus to stereo library ..........................173
BUS1–BUS8 .......................................125
Buttons .................................................29

C
Cascade COMM Link preference ....252
Cascading consoles ............................265
Cascade page ...............................268
Reverse cable .................................24
SYNC parameter .........................269

Index

CATEGORY ........................................55
Changing names ................................249
Channel Copy Parameter
preference .............................253
Channel faders .....................................15
Channel ID/Channel preference ......252
Channel library ..................................167
Channel strip section ..........................15
CHORUS ...........................................294
CHORUS 5.1 .....................................311
CLEAR button .....................................22
Clear Edit Channel after REC
preference .............................254
COMP 5.1 ..........................................314
COMPAND 5.1 .................................315
Compressor library ...........................175
Preset ...........................................175
Compressors ............................63, 82, 93
Compressor link .........................141
DYNAMICS button .....................18
Linking ........................................144
Parameter table ...........................329
Preset parameters .......................320
Confirmation messages ......................30
Connections .........................................41
Configuring a recording system
that uses a DAW .............43
Configuring a recording system
with a hard disk recorder 42
Configuring an analog 32-channel
mixing system .................41
Contrast control ..................................18
Control changes .........................235, 240
CONTROL connector ........................24
CONTROL port pin assignments ....333
CONTROL ROOM DIMMER
LEVEL ...................................117
Control room monitor .....................115
Control surface ....................................13
AD input section ..........................14
AUX SELECT section ...................16
Channel strip section ...................15
Data entry section .........................21
DISPLAY ACCESS section ..........17
Display section ..............................18
ENCODER MODE section .........16
FADER MODE section ................16
Headphones & talkback section ..21
LAYER section ..............................20
MONITOR section .......................22
SCENE MEMORY section ..........20
SELECTED CHANNEL section ..19
STEREO section ...........................15
USER DEFINED KEYS section ...21
COPY ...................................................56
Copy Initial Fader preference ...........254
Cursor buttons ....................................21

D
Daisy chain distribution .....................44
Data entry section ................................21

DAW .................................................. 224
Nuendo ....................................... 224
Other ........................................... 224
Pro tools ...................................... 206
Recording system ......................... 43
Remote ........................................ 205
DEC & INC buttons ........................... 21
DEL button .......................................... 30
Delay ........................................61, 81, 93
DELAY SCALE ............................. 61
FB.GAIN ....................................... 62
DELAY LCR ...................................... 293
DELAY SCALE .................................... 61
DELAY+ER. ...................................... 305
DELAY+REV ..................................... 307
DELAY->ER. ..................................... 306
DELAY->REV ................................... 307
Digital I/O & control section ............. 24
Digital inputs & outputs ..................... 52
Dimensions ........................................ 334
DIMMER button ................................ 22
DIO | Cascade page ........................... 268
DIO | Format page ..................54, 56, 57
DIO | Word Clock page ................ 45, 53
DIO button .......................................... 17
DIO Warning preference ................. 251
Direct outs ......................................... 111
Display ................................................. 18
DISPLAY ACCESS section ................. 17
Display Brightness preference .......... 253
DISPLAY button .....................16, 21, 22
Display section .................................... 18
DIST->DELAY .................................. 308
DISTORTION ................................... 299
Dithering .............................................. 56
DIV ..................................................... 127
DOUBLE CHANNEL ......................... 57
DOUBLE SPEED ................................ 57
Drop Out Time preference .............. 254
DUAL PITCH ................................... 298
DYNA. FILTER ................................. 300
DYNA. FLANGE ............................... 301
DYNA. PHASER ............................... 301
Dynamics | Comp Edit page ..63, 82, 93
Dynamics | Comp Lib page .............. 175
Dynamics | Gate Edit page ................. 62
Dynamics | Gate Lib page ................. 174
DYNAMICS button ............................ 18

E
EARLY REF. ...................................... 291
ECHO ................................................ 294
EDIT indicator .................................... 27
Edit indicator ....................................... 20
Editing events offline ........................ 198
Effect | FX1 Edit page ........................ 151
Effect | FX1 Lib page ......................... 170
Effect | FX2 Edit page ........................ 151
Effect | FX2 Lib page ......................... 170
Effect | FX3 Edit page ........................ 151
Effect | FX3 Lib page ......................... 170
Effect | FX4 Edit page ........................ 151
Effect | FX4 Lib page ......................... 170

373

Effect | P-IN Edit 2 page ....................153
Effect | P-IN Edit1 page .....................153
EFFECT button ....................................18
Effects
Bypass ..........................................151
EFFECT button .............................18
Internal effects .............................147
Parameter tables ..........................291
Plug-ins ........................................153
Effects library .....................................169
Preset ............................................170
programs ......................................170
Effects parameters ..............................291
Effects processor 1 .............................147
EMPHASIS ...........................................55
Encoder | Encoder page .......................35
ENCODER MODE section .................16
Encoders .................................. 15, 34, 36
Assigning parameters ...................35
Encoder mode ...............................34
ENTER button .....................................21
Enter titles
Title edit window ..........................30
EQ ................................65, 82, 86, 92, 94
Preset ............................................316
EQ | ATT 1-16 page .............................64
EQ | ATT 17-32 page ...........................64
EQ | ATT 33-48 page ...........................64
EQ | EQ Edit page ................... 65, 82, 94
EQ | EQ Library page .........................177
EQ | Out Att page ......................... 81, 92
EQ library ...........................................177
Preset ............................................177
EQ link ................................................141
EQUALIZER DISPLAY button ..........19
EQUALIZER FREQUENCY
control .....................................19
EQUALIZER GAIN control ...............19
EQUALIZER HIGH button ................19
EQUALIZER HIGH-MID button ......19
EQUALIZER LOW button .................19
EQUALIZER LOW-MID button .......19
EQUALIZER Q control .......................19
Event edit page ...................................202
Event job page ....................................198

F
F & R ...................................................127
F1–F4 buttons ......................................18
Fader groups ............................. 141, 142
FADER indicator .......................... 16, 33
FADER MODE section .......................16
Fader REC Accuracy preference .......254
Fader Touch Sense preference ..........253
FADER/AUX button ...........................16
Fader1 &2 pages .................................196
Fading .................................................160
ALL CLEAR .................................160
AUX1–8 .......................................161
BUS1–8 ........................................161
Global fade time ..........................160
INPUT CH1–48 ..........................160
STEREO .......................................161

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

374

Index

FAST ................................................... 126
Fast Meter Fall Time preference ...... 251
FB.GAIN .............................................. 62
Features ................................................ 11
Automix ........................................ 12
Channel configuration ................. 12
Effects ............................................ 12
Hardware ...................................... 11
Inputs and Outputs ...................... 11
MIDI ............................................. 12
Remote control ............................. 12
Scene memory .............................. 12
Sonic specifications ...................... 11
Surround sound ........................... 12
Fixed mode .................................. 98, 101
FLANGE ............................................ 295
FLANGE 5.1 ...................................... 312
Follow pan function ............................ 68
FOLLOW SURROUND ................... 148
Frame Jump Error preference .......... 254
FRAMES ............................................ 182
FREEZE .............................................. 309
FS .......................................................... 55

G
GAIN controls ............................... 14, 51
Gain of the AD card ............................ 41
GANG .................................................. 67
Gate library ........................................ 174
GATE REVERB ................................. 292
Gates ..................................................... 62
DYNAMICS button ..................... 18
KEYIN SOURCE .......................... 62
Parameter table ........................... 328
Preset parameters ....................... 320
GPI ..................................................... 259
Parameters .................................. 261
Sources ........................................ 262
Trigger source list ....................... 286
GRAB button ....................................... 19
Grounding screw ................................. 25
Group ................................................. 141
Fader groups ............................... 142
Mute groups ............................... 142

H
Hard disk
Recording system ......................... 42
Headphones & talkback section ......... 21
Higher sampling rates ......................... 57
HORIZONTAL ................................... 75
HQ. PITCH ....................................... 297

I
I/O card ................................................ 53
Installing ....................................... 26
SLOT 1–2 ...................................... 52
IEEE1394 ............................................. 53
In Patch | Cascade In page ................ 267
In Patch | CH Name page ................... 76
In Patch | Effect page ........................ 148
In Patch | In Patch page .............. 47, 106
In Patch | Insert In page ................... 114

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

In Patch | Library page ......................168
INDIVIDUAL ......................................67
INIT ....................................................125
Initial Data Nominal preference .......252
Initializing the DM1000 ....................273
Input channels .....................................59
Attenuating ....................................64
Compressing .................................63
Delaying .........................................61
EQ ..................................................72
EQ’ing ............................................65
Gating ............................................62
Levels ..............................................71
Naming ..........................................76
Pairing ............................................73
Panning ................................... 67, 71
Routing ................................... 68, 72
Setting from the control surface ..71
Setting from the display ...............60
Switching the signal phase ...........60
Viewing the settings ......................69
INPUT connectors ....................... 23, 51
Input patch .........................................105
Initial settings ..............................280
Parameters ...................................278
INPUT PATCH button .............. 17, 106
Input patch library .............................168
Input sensitivity
GAIN controls ...............................14
INS button ............................................30
Insert in ..............................................114
Insert patching ...................................112
Installing a card ....................................26
INT 44.1k, INT 48k, INT 88.2,
INT 96k ...................................46
INT START TIME .............................191
Internal effects
Aux sends .....................................148
Editing ..........................................151
Effects processors 2 through 4 ...147
FOLLOW SURROUND .............148
Inserting into channels ...............150
Meters ..........................................152
MIDI CLK ...................................152
MIX BALANCE ..........................151
TAP TEMPO ...............................152
TEMPO ............................... 151, 152
INV GANG ..........................................67

J
Joystick ..................................................19
Reverb 5.1 effect ..........................310
Joystick Auto Grab preference ..........252

K
KEYIN SOURCE .................................62

L
L/R Nominal Pan preference ............251
LAST SOLO ........................................116
LATCH ...............................................230
LAYER section .....................................20

Layers ....................................................31
Initial bank settings ....................287
LEARN button ...................................228
Levels ..............................................86, 92
LFE ......................................................127
Libraries ..............................................165
Bus to stereo library ....................173
Channel library ...........................167
Compressor library .....................175
Effects library ..............................169
EQ library ....................................177
Gate library ..................................174
General operation .......................165
Input patch library .....................168
Output patch library ..................169
specifications ...............................330
Surround monitor library ..........179
Link .....................................................141
Compressors ...............................144
EQ ................................................144
Link Capture & Locate Memory
preference .............................254
Lock Time preference .......................254

M
M.BAND DYNA. ..............................313
Machine control ................................231
MASTER button ..................................20
MASTER MODE .................................38
MB1000 peak meter bridge ..............368
Meter | CH1-32 page ...........................37
Meter | CH1-48 page ...........................37
Meter | CH33-48 page .........................37
Meter | Effect page ...............................37
Meter | Master page .............................37
Meter | Position page ..........................37
Meter | Stereo page ..............................38
Meter bridge ......................................368
METER button ..............................17, 37
METER connector ..............................24
Meter Follow Layer preference .........252
Metering ...............................................37
Meters
Stereo meters .................................18
MIDI ...........................................207, 235
Bulk dump ..................................246
Bulk dump messages ..................235
Control changes ..........................240
Data format .................................353
FADER H/L .................................244
Initial parameter to control
change table ...................337
MIDI clock ..................................235
MIDI IN & OUT ports .........24, 235
MIDI indicator .............................27
MIDI note on/off ........................235
Parameter changes ......................246
Parameters ...................................241
Program changes ........................239
REMOTE connector ..................236
Scene memory to program
change table ...................336
Setup ............................................236

Index

SLOT 1 ........................................236
System exclusive messages .........235
Transmission and Reception .....238
USB port ......................................236
MIDI | Bulk page ...............................247
MIDI | Ctl Asgn page ........................240
MIDI | Pgm Asgn page ......................239
MIDI | Setup page .............................238
MIDI button ........................................17
MIDI interface ...................................207
MIDI machine control ......................235
MIDI remote .....................................225
Banks ...........................................225
LATCH ........................................230
LEARN button ............................228
MIDI messages ...........................228
TARGET parameter ...................226
UNLATCH ..................................230
MIDI timecode ..................................235
MIDI Warning preference ................251
mini-YGDAI I/O cards .......................53
Mix minus ..........................................103
MIX SOLO .........................................116
Mix Update Confirmation
preference .............................253
MIXDOWN .......................................116
mLAN I/O card ...................................53
MMC ................................. 205, 231, 235
MOD. DELAY ...................................293
MOD. FILTER ...................................299
Monitor | Solo/C-R page ..................116
Monitor | Surr Lib page ....................179
Monitor | Surr Patch page ................139
Monitor | Surr Setup page ........133, 138
Monitor | Surround page ..................137
Monitor | Talkback page ...................119
Monitor alignment ............................136
MONITOR LEVEL control ................22
Monitor matrix ..................................133
MONITOR section .............................22
Monitoring ........................................115
CONTROL ROOM DIMMER
LEVEL ............................117
Digital input channel status .........55
DIMM (Dimmer) .......................115
LAST SOLO ................................116
MIX SOLO ..................................116
MIXDOWN ................................116
MONO ........................................117
MUTE/SOLO section .................137
RECORDING .............................116
SETTING section .......................137
Solo function ...............................118
SOLO SAFE .................................117
Solo safe function .......................117
Solo setup ....................................116
SPEAKER SETUP .......................138
STATUS section .........................137
Talkback function .......................119
MONO ...............................................117
MONO DELAY .................................292
MS buttons ..........................................74
MS microphone .............................74, 77

MTC ................................................... 235
MULTI FILTER ................................ 308
Mute groups ..............................141, 142
MUTE/SOLO section ....................... 137
Muting ............................................... 217

N
Naming .......................................... 76, 89
Nuendo ......................................205, 224

O
OCTA REVERB ................................ 310
OFFSET .............................................. 191
OMNI IN connectors ................... 23, 51
OMNI OUT connectors .........23, 48, 52
Omni outs ............................................ 52
OMS ................................................... 207
ON buttons .......................................... 15
Operating basics .................................. 27
About the display ......................... 27
AUX indicator .............................. 33
Buttons .......................................... 29
Channel name .............................. 28
Confirmation messages ............... 30
FADER indicator .......................... 33
Metering ........................................ 37
Page area ....................................... 28
Page tabs ....................................... 28
Page title ........................................ 28
Parameter boxes ........................... 29
Rotary controls & faders .............. 29
Sampling rate indicator ............... 28
Selecting channels ........................ 32
Selecting display pages ................. 28
Selecting encoder modes ............. 34
Selecting fader modes .................. 33
Selecting layers .............................. 31
Tab scroll arrows .......................... 28
Timecode counter ........................ 28
Title edit window ......................... 30
OPERATION LOCK ........................ 263
Operation lock .................................. 263
Optional card ...................................... 26
Installing ....................................... 26
Options .......................................... 6, 368
I/O card ......................................... 53
MB1000 ....................................... 368
RK1 .............................................. 371
SP1000 ......................................... 371
Oscillator ........................................... 256
Other functions ................................. 249
Preferences .................................. 250
Out Patch | 2TR Out page ................ 110
Out Patch | CH Name page ................ 89
Out Patch | Direct Out page ............. 111
Out Patch | Library page ................... 169
Out Patch | Omni Out page ....... 48, 109
Out Patch | Slot Out page .110, 125, 266
Output patch ..................................... 108
Initial settings ............................. 284
Parameters .................................. 282
OUTPUT PATCH button .................. 17
Output patch library ......................... 169

375

P
P2 ............................................... 205, 231
Straight cable .................................24
Package contents ....................................6
PAD switches ................................ 14, 51
Pair Confirmation preference ...........251
PAIR/GROUP button .........................17
Pair/Grup | Fader1–32 page ..............142
Pair/Grup | Fader33–48 page ............142
Pair/Grup | In Comp page ................145
Pair/Grup | In EQ page .....................144
Pair/Grup | Input page ........................74
Pair/Grup | Mute1–32 page ..............142
Pair/Grup | Mute33–48 page ............142
Pair/Grup | Out Comp page .............145
Pair/Grup | Out EQ page ..................144
Pair/Grup | Out Fader page ..............142
Pair/Grup | Out Mute page ...............142
Pair/Grup | Output page .....................87
Pairing ........................................... 73, 87
HORIZONTAL .............................75
Using the display ...........................74
Using the SEL buttons ..................73
VERTICAL ....................................75
PAN button ..........................................16
Pan/Surr | Ch Edit page .....................126
Pan/Surr | Pan1-32 page .....................67
Pan/Surr | Pan33-48 page ...................67
Pan/Surr | Surr Mode page ...............123
Pan/Surr | Surr1-16 page ...................130
Pan/Surr | Surr17-32 page .................130
Pan/Surr | Surr33-48 page .................130
PAN/SURR LINK ..............................123
PAN/SURROUND button .................17
Panning ....................................... 67, 102
F.S button ......................................87
FOLLOW PAN .............................71
Follow pan function .....................68
GANG ............................................67
INDIVIDUAL ...............................67
INV GANG ....................................67
PAN buttons ..................................68
Parameter boxes ...................................29
Parameter changes .............................246
Parameter lists ....................................275
Parameter wheel ..................................21
Patch Confirmation preference ........251
Patching ..............................................105
2TR digital outputs .....................110
Direct outs ...................................111
Input and Output .........................47
Input channels ..............................47
INPUT PATCH button ......... 17, 47
Input patching .............................105
Input patching from the display 106
Insert in ........................................114
Insert patching ............................112
Omni outs ............................ 48, 109
OUTPUT PATCH button ............17
Output patching .........................108
PAN/SURROUND button ...........17
Slot outputs .................................110
Using the encoders .....................107

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

376

Index

PEAK indicators ............................ 14, 51
Peak level ............................................. 39
Phantom power ................................... 51
+48V ON/OFF switches .............. 14
Phase .................................................... 60
PHASER ............................................. 296
PHONES jack .............................. 21, 115
PHONES LEVEL control ................... 21
PLAY .................................................. 194
PLUG-IN ........................................... 248
Plug-ins .............................................. 219
Y56K ............................................ 153
Port ID/PORT preference ................ 252
POWER ON/OFF switch ................... 25
Power section ...................................... 25
Prefer1 page ....................................... 250
Prefer2 page ....................................... 252
Prefer3 page ....................................... 253
Preferences ......................................... 250
Preset compressor parameters ......... 320
Preset EQ parameters ....................... 316
Preset gate parameters ...................... 320
Pro tools .............................205, 206, 217
Automation ................................ 223
Channel display mode ............... 211
Channel levels ............................. 216
Control surface operation ......... 212
Display ........................................ 210
Explicit mute .............................. 217
Flip mode .................................... 218
Implicit mute .............................. 217
Insert display mode .................... 210
Meter display mode ................... 212
MIDI ........................................... 207
Muting ........................................ 218
OMS ............................................ 207
Panning ...............................217, 218
Plug-ins ....................................... 219
Pre or Post .................................. 217
Scrub & Shuttle .......................... 222
Selecting ...................................... 216
Send levels ................................... 218
Soloing ........................................ 217
Program changes .......................235, 239
PROTECT button ............................. 158
Punching in & out ............................. 188

R
Rear panel ............................................ 23
AD input and output section ...... 23
Digital I/O & control section ....... 24
Power section ............................... 25
SLOT section ................................ 24
REC .................................................... 194
RECALL button .................................. 20
Recall Confirmation preference ....... 251
Recall safe function ........................... 162
Receive Full Frame Message
preference ............................. 254
RECORDING .................................... 116
Remote ............................................... 205
AD824 ......................................... 270
Display ........................................ 210

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

FRAMES ......................................233
Insert display mode ....................210
LOCATE/TIME section .............233
Machine control ................. 205, 231
MACHINE CONTROL section 232
MIDI messages ............................228
MIDI remote ...............................225
MMC ...........................................205
Nuendo ........................................205
P2 ..................................................205
ProTools ......................................205
REMOTE 1/2 ...............................205
Target parameter ........................209
TRACK ARMING section ..........233
TRANSPORT section .................233
Remote | Channel page .....................223
Remote | Insert page ..........................209
Remote | Machine page .....................233
Remote | Meter page ..........................212
Remote | Remote 1 page ....................208
Remote | Remote 2 page ....................226
REMOTE 1/REMOTE 2 buttons .......20
REMOTE button ........................ 17, 205
REMOTE connector ................... 24, 236
Remote layer
Nuendo ........................................224
Pro tools .......................................206
RESET BOTH ......................................74
REV+CHORUS .................................302
REV+FLANGE ..................................303
REV+SYMPHO. ................................304
REV->CHORUS ................................302
REV->FLANGE .................................303
REV->PAN ........................................305
REV->SYMPHO. ..............................304
REVERB 5.1 .......................................310
REVERB HALL ..................................291
REVERB PLATE ................................291
REVERB ROOM ................................291
REVERB STAGE ................................291
Reverse cable ............................. 266, 270
REVERSE GATE ................................292
RING MOD. ......................................299
RK1 rack mount kit ...........................371
ROTARY ............................................298
Rotary controls & faders .....................29
Routing .................................................68
Routing | Bus To St page .....................83
Routing | CH1-16 page .......................68
Routing | CH17-32 page .....................68
Routing | CH33-48 page .....................68
Routing | Library page .......................173
ROUTING 1–8 buttons ......................19
ROUTING DIRECT button ...............19
ROUTING DISPLAY button ..............19
ROUTING STEREO button ...............19

S
Sampling rates ............................... 53, 55
DOUBLE CHANNEL ...................57
DOUBLE SPEED ..........................57
Sampling rate indicator ................28
Setting the higher sampling rates 57

SINGLE .........................................58
SRC sections ..................................54
Scene | In Fade page ..........................160
Scene | Out Fade page .......................161
Scene | Rcl Safe page ..........................162
Scene | Scene page .............................158
Scene | Sort page ................................163
SCENE button .....................................18
Scene MEM Auto Update
preference .............................252
Scene memories .................................155
Auto update function .................159
Edit indicators .............................156
Fading ..........................................160
PROTECT button ......................158
Recall safe function .....................162
Scene numbers ............................156
Shadow memory .........................159
Sorting .........................................163
Storing and Recalling .................157
Using the Scene Memory Page ..158
What is stored .............................155
Scene memory #0 ..............................156
Scene memory #U .............................156
Scene memory display ........................20
SCENE MEMORY section .................20
Scene numbers ...................................156
Scene up/down buttons ......................20
SEL buttons ..........................................15
SELECTED CHANNEL section .........19
Selecting channels ................................32
Selecting display pages ........................28
Selecting fader modes ..........................33
SET SPL85 ..........................................137
Setting levels .........................................96
SETTING section ..............................137
Setup .....................................................41
Setup | GPI page ................................259
Setup | In Port page ...........................249
Setup | MIDI/Host page
....................... 208, 232, 236, 268
Setup | Out Port page ........................250
Setup | Output Att page ......................88
Setup | Prefer1 page ...........................250
Setup | Prefer2 page ...........................250
Setup | Prefer3 page ...........................250
Setup | Remote page ..................268, 271
Setup | Surr Bus page ........................125
Setup | Time Ref page .......................182
Setup | Time Sig page ........................183
SETUP button .....................................17
Shadow memory ...............................159
SHIFT LOCK button ..........................30
Show Compact Size preference ........254
SIGNAL indicators ........................14, 51
SINGLE ................................................58
SLOT 1 ...............................................236
SLOT 1/2 ................................. 24, 46, 52
SLOT button ................................22, 132
SLOT section .......................................24
SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT
connector ................................24
SNAP TO SPL85 ................................138

Index

Solo .....................................................116
2TR DIN FLIP ............................117
LAST SOLO ................................116
LISTEN ........................................116
MIX SOLO ..................................116
MIXDOWN ................................116
RECORDING .............................116
SOLO ...........................................116
Solo function ...............................118
SOLO INTERRUPTION ...........117
SOLO SAFE CHANNEL ............117
Solo safe function .......................117
SOLO TRIM ...............................117
SOLO buttons ......................................15
SOLO indicator ...................................22
SOLO SAFE .......................................117
SP1000 side panels ............................371
SPEAKER SETUP ..............................138
Specifications .....................................325
SRC sections ........................................54
Star distribution ..................................44
STATUS section ................................137
STEREO button ...................................22
STEREO DELAY ...............................292
STEREO fader ......................................15
Stereo meters .......................................18
Stereo out .............................................79
Attenuating ...................................81
Compressing .................................82
Delaying ........................................81
EQ’ing ......................................82, 86
Naming ..........................................89
Pairing ...........................................87
Setting from the control surface ..86
Setting from the display ...............81
Setting the levels ...........................86
Viewing the settings .....................84
STEREO section ..................................15
STOP ..................................................194
STORE button .....................................20
Store Confirmation preference ........251
Storing and Recalling ........................157
SURR. MODE ...................................133
Surround ............................................121
BASS MANAGEMENT .............134
BUS1–BUS8 ................................125
DIV ..............................................127
F & R ............................................127
F.S button ......................................87
FAST ............................................126
GRAB button ................................19
INIT .............................................125
Joystick ..........................................19
LFE ...............................................127
LINK ............................................127
MONITOR ALIGNMENT ........136
Monitoring ..................................131
Monitoring matrix .....................131
Oscillator .....................................138
Pan graph ....................................126
PAN/SURR LINK .......................123
PAN/SURROUND button ..........17
Panning from the display ...........126

PATTERN ................................... 127
Setting up and Selecting ............. 123
Slot ............................................... 139
SPEAKER SETUP ...................... 138
ST LINK ...................................... 127
Surround effects ......................... 153
SURROUND MODE ........... 69, 123
Surround mode indicator ............ 28
Surround pan ............................. 121
Trajectory patterns ..................... 126
SURROUND MODE ........................ 123
Surround mode indicator .................. 28
Surround modes ...............121, 123, 133
Factory-default ........................... 122
Surround monitor ............................ 131
Bass management ....................... 133
Configuring basic ....................... 133
Monitor alignment ..................... 133
Monitor matrix .......................... 133
Monitoring level ......................... 137
Surround monitor library ................ 179
Surround pan .................................... 121
SYMPHO. 5.1 .................................... 312
SYMPHONIC ................................... 295
SYNC parameter ............................... 269
System exclusive messages ............... 235
System version ................................... 272

T
Tab scroll arrows ................................. 28
Tab scroll buttons ............................... 18
TALKBACK button .................... 22, 119
Talkback function ............................. 119
TALKBACK LEVEL control .............. 21
Talkback mic ....................................... 21
Target parameter ............................... 209
Tascam I/O card .................................. 53
TC Drop Warning preference .......... 251
TIME REFERENCE .......................... 191
TIME REFERENCE section ............. 182
Time signature map .......................... 183
Timecode counter ............................... 28
Timecode Display Relative
preference ............................. 254
Timecode source ............................... 182
Title edit window ................................ 30
TO END button ................................ 191
TO HOST USB port ........................... 24
Trajectory patterns ............................ 127
TREMOLO ........................................ 297
Trigger signals ................................... 259

377

Utility | Battery page ..........................272
Utility | CH Status page .......................55
Utility | Lock page ..............................263
Utility | Oscillator page ......................256
UTILITY button ..................................17

V
Variable mode ............................. 98, 101
VERTICAL ...........................................75
View | Fader page .................... 70, 84, 95
View | Library page ............................167
View | Parameter page ............ 69, 84, 94
VIEW button .......................................17

W
WC IN ..................................................46
Web site ........................................... 6, 53
Welcome ...............................................11
Window
Changing the surround mode ...124
Channel Pairing ............................73
Copy operation ...........................104
Password ......................................263
Set Password ................................264
User Define Select .......................258
Wordclock ............................................44
About wordclock ..........................44
Connections ..................................44
Daisy chain distribution ...............44
Source ............................................46
Specifying source ..........................45
Star distribution ............................44
WC IN ...........................................46
WORD CLOCK IN connector ....25
WORD CLOCK OUT connector 24

Y
Y56K ...................................................153
Yamaha web site ............................. 6, 53

U
UNLATCH ........................................ 230
UPDATE ............................................ 191
USB ...................................................... 24
OMS ............................................ 207
USB port ..................................... 236
User assignable layer ......................... 255
User Def | User Def page .................. 257
USER DEFINED KEYS ...................... 21
Initial assignments ..................... 277
User defined keys .............................. 257

DM1000—Owner’s Manual

YAMAHA [Digital Mixing Console-Internal Parameters]
Model: DM1000
Function...

Date: 26 Aug. 2002

MIDI Implementation Chart

Version: 1.0

Transmitted

Recognized

Remarks

Basic
Channel

Default
Changed

1–16
1–16

1–16
1–16

Memorized

Mode

Default
Messages
Altered

X
X
**************

OMNI off/OMNI on
X
X

Memorized

Note
Number

True Voice

X
**************

0–127
X

Velocity

Note On
Note Off

X
X

O
O

After

Key’s
Ch’s

X
X

X
X

X

X

O

O

Assignable

0–127
**************

0–127
0–99

Assignable

O

O

*1

Pitch Bend

Control
Change

Prog
Change

0-95,102-119

:True#

System Exclusive

Effect Control

System
Common

:Song Pos
:Song Sel
:Tune

X
X
X

O
X
X

Automix

System
Real Time

:Clock
:Commands

X
X

O
O

Automix,
Effect Control

Aux
Messages

:Local ON/OFF
:All Notes OFF
:Active Sense
:Reset

X
X
X
X

X
X
O
O

Notes

MTC quarter frame message is recognized.
*1: Bulk Dump/Request, Parameter Change/Request, and MMC.
For MIDI Remote, ALL messages can be transmitted.

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO

O: Yes
X: No

DM1000 Block Diagram
(Gain Reduction)

METER METER

(Out Meter)

[INPUT]
(1-16)

ON

PAD
0
20

AD
GAIN
–60 ~ –16

x4

AD 1-16

METER

(Gain Reduction)

METER

[OMNI IN]
(1-4)

METER

OMNI 1-4

[SLOT]
(1-2)

SLOT1

OUTPUT
DELAY

AUX 8

ATT 4BAND EQ

(Gain Reduction)

LFE

(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)

METER

METER METER

ON

PRE/POST

INSERT

Keyin
Self or Stereo Link

INSERT

METER

OUTPUT
DELAY

66

SINE100Hz
SINE1kHz
SINE10kHz
1kHz/400Hz
PINK NOISE
BURST NOISE

FX1 Return 1-2
FX2 Return 1-2
FX3Return 1-2
FX4 Return 1-2

Surr1

FX3 SEND 1-2

16

LEVEL

ON

BUS to STEREO
TO INPUT PATCH

OSCILLATOR
FX1-4

FX2 SEND 1-2

BUS 1(...8)

EFFECT

8

SELECT

INSERT
OUT

METER

INSERT
ON LEVEL

ATT 4BAND EQ

DIRECT OUT 1(...48)

Surr1 Return 1-8

AUX1-8

(Out Meter)

AUX

PAN
FX1 SEND 1-8

STEREO R

COMP

METER

COMP

SLOT2 1-16

METER

STEREO L

PAN

Keyin
12ch Group(1-12,13-24....)
AUX 1-8

TO SURROUND
MONITOR

16

METER

INSERT
ON LEVEL
BAL

Same as the stereo master L

SLOT1 1-16

16

SLOT2

SOLO

INSERT

METER

PAN

INPUT
DELAY

ATT 4BAND EQ

TO TALKBACK
SELECT
16

INSERT
ON LEVEL

INSERT

TO TALKBACK
SELECT

AD

INSERT

METER

(Out Meter)

GATE

AUX 1

INPUT 1(...48)

SOLO L
SOLO R

x 16

+48V

BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8

PEAK
SIGNAL

OFF

STEREO L
STEREO R

COMP
INPUT PATCH

FX4 SEND 1-2

BUS 1(...8)
LEVEL

same as the above

ON

AUX1(...8)
TO INPUT PATCH

AUX1(...8)

to OUT PATCH for cascade
BUS1 BUS
TRIM

CASCADE SELECT

ON

BUS8 BUS
STEREO L BUS
STEREO R BUS
SOLO L BUS
SOLO R BUS
AUX1 BUS
AUX8 BUS

2

[2TR IN DIGITAL1]

SRC

2TRD1 L/R

SRC

2TRD2 L/R

AES/EBU
2

[2TR IN DIGITAL2]
COAXIAL

4
TO MONITOR SELECT

SOLO TRIM

TALKBACK
[TALKBACK]

USE AD IN (1-16) or OMNI IN (1-4)
AS TALKBACK
8

SOLO OUT

2

STEREO

2

BUS1-8

8

AUX1-8

8

DIRECT OUT 1-48

48

7

INSERT OUT

66

CONTROL ROOM

2

for cascade
STEREO BUS
BUS1-8 BUS
AUX1-8 BUS
SOLO BUS

2
8
8
2

BUS1-8
AUX1-8

OMNI 9
OMNI 10
OMNI 11
OMNI 12

DA

1

[OMNI OUT]
(1-12)
DA

SLOT1
SLOT2

16
16

2TR D1

2

2TR D2

2

DITHER
DITHER

DITHER

SLOT1 1-8
SLOT2 1-8

12

SLOT1
SLOT2

8
8

MONITOR SELECT
STEREO 2
2
2TR D1
OMNI IN1/2
2
2TR D2
OMNI IN3/4

OUTPUT
PORT
ATTNUATOR

8x8Patch SLOT
8
8
8
8

CONTROL ROOM

MONITOR
LEVEL

CR to SURROUND MONITOR

PINK
NOISE

MONITOR
LEVEL

SURROUND
MONITOR

500-2kHz
BPF
1kHz,50Hz

[SLOT]
(1-2)

BUS1-8

8

STEREO

2

BUS
8

MONITOR
MATRIX

BASS
MANAGEMENT

[2TR OUT DIGITAL1]
AES/EBU

DITHER

[PHONES]

DA

OUTPUT SOLO

[2TR OUT DIGITAL2]
COAXIAL

MONITOR MATRIX OUT

MONITOR
ALLIGNMENT

DIMM

SURROUND MONITOR
MONITOR MATRIX OUT

OMNI 1
OMNI 2
OMNI 3
OMNI 4
OMNI 5
OMNI 6
OMNI 7
OMNI 8

PHONES
LEVEL

DIMM

BUS1-8

DA

SOLO LOGIC

MONO

8

METER

TALKBACK DIMM

BUS1-8

SOLO R

AD 1-16
OMNI 1-4

AUX1-8

OUTPUT PATCH

AUX1-8

8

SOLO L

AD

TO OUTPUT PATCH

DM1000 Level Diagram

Analog
Analog

Digital

dBu

dBFS
+24
+20
+10
+4
0
–2

0
–10
–20
–30

–10
–40
–20
–50
–30
–60
–40
–70
–50
–80
–60
–90
–70
–100
–80
–110
–90
–120
–100
–130
–110
–140
–120
–150
–130
–160
–140
–170
–150
–180
–160
–190
–170
–200
–180
–210
–190

PAD

GAIN

INSERT

Digital
AD

INPUT
PATCH

PHASE

Digital
GATE

INSERT

ATT.

EQ

INSERT

COMP

DELAY

ON

LEVEL

INSERT

PAN

BUS
Adder

INSERT

ATT.

EQ

INSERT

COMP

MASTER
ON

MASTER
LEVEL

INSERT

BAL

DELAY

Analog

OUTPUT
PATCH

Analog

DA

dBu

Bit

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

[0dBu = 0.775Vrms]
[0dBFS = Full Scale]

Max.
Input [+24dBu]

CASCADE IN

CASCADE OUT

Max. Output
[+24dBu]

Digital Clipping Level

[+18dBu]

[+4dBu]
Nominal
Input

Nominal Output
[+4dBu]
[–2dBu]

OMNI OUT 1-12

GAIN MIN.,
PAD ON

+24
+20
+10
+4
0
–10
–20
–30

Max.
Input

[–40dBu]

–40
–50

Nominal
[–60dBu]
In
Input

–60

GAIN MAX.,
PAD OFF

–70
–80
–90
–100
–110
–120
–130
–140
–150
–160
DSP Noise Floor

–170
–180
–190

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Belgium
Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,
Belgium
Tel: 02-726 6032

FRANCE

U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011

Yamaha Musique France, S.A.
Division Professionnelle
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311

EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900

ASIA

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888

SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00

KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0661

MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900

SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
Tel: 65-747-4374
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688

YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00

NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030

AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313

MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: +971-4-881-5868

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577

TAIWAN

DENMARK

OTHER COUNTRIES

INDONESIA

THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.
Shanghai Branch
United Plaza 25F 1468 Nan Jing Road West
Jingan Shanghai 200040, China
Tel: 21-6247-2211

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313

OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111

COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313

THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Central Europe,
Branch Nederland
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2441
PA05

Yamaha Manual Library
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
This document is printed on recycled
chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2003 Yamaha Corporation
WA83970 306IPAP121.1-02B0
Printed in Japan



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2003:05:22 01:24:21Z
Modify Date                     : 2003:11:04 12:49:25+09:00
Subject                         : WA83970
Page Count                      : 382
Creation Date                   : 2003:05:22 01:24:21Z
Mod Date                        : 2003:11:04 12:49:25+09:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 for Macintosh
Author                          : YAMAHA
Metadata Date                   : 2003:11:04 12:49:25+09:00
Creator                         : YAMAHA
Title                           : DM1000_E
Description                     : WA83970
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Has XFA                         : No
Page Layout                     : SinglePage

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools